WO2010018674A1 - Molten metal supply pipe, molten metal supply apparatus in which the supply pipe is incorporated, and molten metal supply method - Google Patents

Molten metal supply pipe, molten metal supply apparatus in which the supply pipe is incorporated, and molten metal supply method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2010018674A1
WO2010018674A1 PCT/JP2009/003797 JP2009003797W WO2010018674A1 WO 2010018674 A1 WO2010018674 A1 WO 2010018674A1 JP 2009003797 W JP2009003797 W JP 2009003797W WO 2010018674 A1 WO2010018674 A1 WO 2010018674A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
molten metal
gap
guide portion
metal supply
supply
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2009/003797
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
伊藤元通
久保賢一
Original Assignee
日立金属株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2009009415A external-priority patent/JP5376299B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2009009414A external-priority patent/JP5376298B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2009044076A external-priority patent/JP5327607B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2009086725A external-priority patent/JP5376303B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2009100446A external-priority patent/JP5477688B2/en
Application filed by 日立金属株式会社 filed Critical 日立金属株式会社
Priority to US12/737,727 priority Critical patent/US8622261B2/en
Priority to CN2009801314709A priority patent/CN102123811A/en
Publication of WO2010018674A1 publication Critical patent/WO2010018674A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K1/00Soldering, e.g. brazing, or unsoldering
    • B23K1/0008Soldering, e.g. brazing, or unsoldering specially adapted for particular articles or work
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K1/00Soldering, e.g. brazing, or unsoldering
    • B23K1/008Soldering within a furnace
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K1/00Soldering, e.g. brazing, or unsoldering
    • B23K1/19Soldering, e.g. brazing, or unsoldering taking account of the properties of the materials to be soldered
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K1/00Soldering, e.g. brazing, or unsoldering
    • B23K1/20Preliminary treatment of work or areas to be soldered, e.g. in respect of a galvanic coating
    • B23K1/206Cleaning
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K3/00Tools, devices, or special appurtenances for soldering, e.g. brazing, or unsoldering, not specially adapted for particular methods
    • B23K3/06Solder feeding devices; Solder melting pans
    • B23K3/0607Solder feeding devices
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K3/00Tools, devices, or special appurtenances for soldering, e.g. brazing, or unsoldering, not specially adapted for particular methods
    • B23K3/06Solder feeding devices; Solder melting pans
    • B23K3/0607Solder feeding devices
    • B23K3/063Solder feeding devices for wire feeding
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K3/00Tools, devices, or special appurtenances for soldering, e.g. brazing, or unsoldering, not specially adapted for particular methods
    • B23K3/08Auxiliary devices therefor
    • B23K3/085Cooling, heat sink or heat shielding means
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K3/00Tools, devices, or special appurtenances for soldering, e.g. brazing, or unsoldering, not specially adapted for particular methods
    • B23K3/08Auxiliary devices therefor
    • B23K3/087Soldering or brazing jigs, fixtures or clamping means
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C03GLASS; MINERAL OR SLAG WOOL
    • C03CCHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF GLASSES, GLAZES OR VITREOUS ENAMELS; SURFACE TREATMENT OF GLASS; SURFACE TREATMENT OF FIBRES OR FILAMENTS MADE FROM GLASS, MINERALS OR SLAGS; JOINING GLASS TO GLASS OR OTHER MATERIALS
    • C03C27/00Joining pieces of glass to pieces of other inorganic material; Joining glass to glass other than by fusing
    • C03C27/06Joining glass to glass by processes other than fusing
    • C03C27/08Joining glass to glass by processes other than fusing with the aid of intervening metal
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K2101/00Articles made by soldering, welding or cutting
    • B23K2101/34Coated articles, e.g. plated or painted; Surface treated articles
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K2101/00Articles made by soldering, welding or cutting
    • B23K2101/36Electric or electronic devices
    • B23K2101/40Semiconductor devices
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K2103/00Materials to be soldered, welded or cut
    • B23K2103/08Non-ferrous metals or alloys
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K2103/00Materials to be soldered, welded or cut
    • B23K2103/18Dissimilar materials
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K2103/00Materials to be soldered, welded or cut
    • B23K2103/50Inorganic material, e.g. metals, not provided for in B23K2103/02 – B23K2103/26
    • B23K2103/54Glass

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a molten metal supply tube for melting and supplying a low-melting-point metal material such as solder or indium to a member such as glass, ceramics or metal, a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply tube, and a molten metal This is related to the supply method.
  • the glass panel W has a pair of glass substrates w3 in which the main surfaces S1 and S2 are arranged to face each other through a gap holding member Q (for example, a glass sphere or a resin sphere) so that a gap having a dimension g is formed in the thickness direction. And w4 and the main surfaces S1 and S2 are bonded together at the outer peripheral portion (hereinafter referred to as the outer peripheral gap) k of the gap between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and the joint n that seals the outer peripheral gap k and forms an airtight chamber. And have.
  • a gap holding member Q for example, a glass sphere or a resin sphere
  • the joint n has been conventionally formed of glass frit, but in recent years, it may be formed of a low melting point metal such as indium or solder from the viewpoint of improving sealing quality such as high airtightness and low outgas. Proposed.
  • a low melting point metal such as indium or solder from the viewpoint of improving sealing quality such as high airtightness and low outgas. Proposed.
  • the present invention will be described by taking a glass panel manufacturing technique as an example, but the scope of application of the present invention is not limited.
  • the glass panels constituting the multilayer glass and the vacuum vessel are manufactured through the following steps.
  • Two rectangular glass substrates w3 and w4 are prepared.
  • a molten metal obtained by melting a low melting point metal material such as indium or solder is supplied in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge to the bonding surface of one or both glass substrates to form a bonding portion.
  • the glass substrates w3 and w4 are overlapped, and the two glass substrates w3 and w4 are bonded via the bonding portion.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a metal sealing material (low in this specification) for directly or indirectly joining a front substrate and a rear substrate (both are glass substrates) constituting a vacuum container of an image display device.
  • An apparatus for applying a molten metal sealing material while applying ultrasonic waves to the bonding surface is disclosed in order to form a bonding member composed of a melting point metal material.) On the bonding surface of the front substrate and the rear substrate. ing.
  • Non-Patent Document 1 pays attention to the fact that easily oxidizable elements such as Zn, Al, Si, and Ti improve the bondability between the Pb—Sn solder and the glass substrate, and include one or more of these easily oxidizable elements.
  • An ultrasonic soldering technique that removes existing bubbles and improves the bondability between the solder and the glass substrate is disclosed.
  • molten low melting point metal material When an ultrasonic wave is applied when a low melting point metal material thus melted (hereinafter referred to as “molten low melting point metal material” is referred to as “molten metal” in the present specification unless otherwise specified) is applied to a glass substrate, There is an advantage that bubbles and foreign matters existing on the surface of the substrate are removed by ultrasonic waves, and the bonding property of the bonding interface between the glass substrate and the bonding member is improved.
  • a metal material is easily oxidized in the atmosphere in both the solid phase and the liquid phase, and an oxide is generated on the surface.
  • an oxide is generated on the surface.
  • solid-phase low-melting-point metal materials stored in the atmosphere When this material is melted to form a joint, the oxide produced on the surface remains as it is and the glass substrate. It intervenes in the joint surface with and mixes in the molten metal.
  • the mixed oxide causes interface defects between the glass substrate and the joint and internal defects in the joint, and deteriorates the airtightness of the joint, the interface strength between the glass substrate and the joint, and the strength of the joint itself.
  • Patent Document 2 provides a method for manufacturing a glass panel that suppresses generation of an oxide of a metal material, and can stably perform the bonding between the metal material and plate glass and the hermetic sealing thereby,
  • the plate glass is disposed by facing the upper and lower surfaces through a gap, and supplying and filling the molten metal material into the outer circumferential gap from a storage part in which the atmosphere in contact with the surface of the molten metal material to be stored is in an inert gas atmosphere state.
  • a configuration is disclosed in which the members are joined together and the gap is hermetically sealed.
  • Patent Document 3 although the metal sealing material melted in the atmosphere is filled, the generation of an oxide film on the surface of the metal sealing material is suppressed, and the wettability of the sealing surface of the metal sealing material is reduced.
  • a support base for positioning and supporting an object to be sealed having a sealing surface, and a molten metal seal
  • a sealed reservoir for storing the deposit a nozzle for filling the sealing surface with the molten metal sealing material sent from the reservoir, and supplying a stable gas to and around the tip of the nozzle to create a stable gas atmosphere.
  • the structure which concerns on the sealing material filling apparatus which consists of a filling head which has a gas supply means is disclosed.
  • Patent Document 4 discloses a metal supply including a discharge port that discharges a stored molten metal material (molten solder) and an introduction plate that is installed at the center of the discharge port and introduces molten solder from the discharge port to the outer peripheral gap.
  • molten solder molten metal material
  • a molten solder filling method is disclosed in which the distance between the gaps formed therebetween is set to be 10 times or less the gap dimension of the plate glass. According to the filling method of Patent Document 4, it is described that even when the gap between the plate glasses is small, it is possible to fill the outer peripheral gap with the molten solder while suppressing the spread of the molten solder to an unplanned range. Yes.
  • Patent Document 5 Still another technique relating to the above step (2) is disclosed in Patent Document 5.
  • a spacer is provided between a pair of glass plates to form a gap, and a molten single metal material is filled into the peripheral edge of the gap to directly bond the pair of glass plates and the metal material.
  • the gap is hermetically sealed, at least a part of the plate-shaped or bar-shaped guide for guiding the molten metal material is supplied to the outer periphery to supply the molten metal material to the outer peripheral gap of the pair of glass plates.
  • a method for producing a glass panel to be inserted into the gap is described.
  • Patent Document 5 the introduction of a metal material which is difficult in the case of a narrow outer peripheral gap is facilitated and facilitated by the guide, and the introduction speed is increased. Therefore, direct bonding between the metal material and the glass substrate is possible. It is described that it is easy to form. Further, it is described that the molten metal material can be surely filled into the outer peripheral gap by appropriately setting the size and shape of the guide according to the outer peripheral gap.
  • Patent Document 5 in the method of manufacturing a glass panel in which the size of a pair of glass plates is different and the edge of one glass plate protrudes beyond the edge of the other glass plate, Describes a method of manufacturing a glass panel in which molten solder is infiltrated by capillary action from the protruding portion of the metal to the outer peripheral gap, and the outer peripheral gap is filled with molten solder.
  • Patent Document 5 describes that the capillary phenomenon occurs when vibration is applied to at least one of molten solder or a glass plate to improve the wettability of the molten solder to the glass plate.
  • Example 14 of Patent Document 5 a specific solder supply device is described.
  • This solder supply device is melted from a solder melting tank through a pipe having an inner diameter of 3 mm in an outer peripheral gap between two glass plates arranged so that a 0.2 mm gap is formed between main surfaces to be bonded to a metal material.
  • Solder is fed by its own weight, a metal plate guide with a thickness of 0.15 mm attached to the tip of the pipe is inserted into the outer peripheral gap about 5 mm, and the outer peripheral gap of the glass plate is filled with molten solder.
  • the sealing width of the outer peripheral gap by the molten solder is about 5 mm from the outer peripheral edge of the glass plate, and the leak test, the measurement of the thermal conductivity, the lead elution test, the measurement result of the oxygen content rate It is described that there was no problem.
  • JP 2002-184313 A Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-255591 JP 2005-331673 A JP 2002-167245 A WO00 / 58234
  • Patent Documents 2 and 3 operate the molten metal in a non-oxidizing atmosphere, and suppress the generation of oxides in the melting process of the low melting point metal material and the supply process of the molten metal. Therefore, there is an advantage that generation of defects due to oxides generated in these processes can be suppressed.
  • it is difficult to completely remove the oxide already existing on the surface of the low-melting-point metal material in the solid phase even if it is operated in a non-oxidizing atmosphere as in the techniques of Patent Documents 2 and 3.
  • the problems of Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 1 cannot be solved completely.
  • Non-Patent Document 1 when a bonding material containing an easily oxidizable element is directly bonded to an object to be bonded having an oxidized surface, bondability is ensured between the oxidized surface and the bonding material. Therefore, a predetermined amount of oxygen needs to be present. On the other hand, the oxygen causes the molten bonding material to oxidize, and as a result, an oxide film is generated between the bonding material and the object to be bonded, thereby causing a trade-off relationship. This problem cannot be solved by the techniques of Patent Documents 2 and 3 in which various operations are performed in a non-oxidizing atmosphere.
  • the present invention has a simple configuration compared to the configuration according to the prior art, and a molten metal supply cylinder capable of suppressing the mixing of oxide into the molten metal when the low-melting-point metal material in the solid phase is melted and supplied, It is a first object of the present invention to provide a molten metal supply device and a supply method for supplying a molten metal while suppressing mixing of oxides by using a supply cylinder.
  • the present invention has been made in view of the prior art described in Patent Documents 4 and 5, and the outer surfaces of the plate-like bodies, which are a pair of materials to be joined, are arranged with a gap between the main surfaces.
  • the second object is to provide a molten metal supply cylinder, a molten metal supply apparatus and a molten metal supply method in which the supply cylinder is improved compared to the prior art.
  • This problem can be solved by optimizing the gap formed between the molten solder discharge port and the end face of the plate glass, or by optimizing the amount of molten solder supplied, but it is appropriate for glass panels with various forms. It is very difficult for industrial production to determine the appropriate conditions one by one, resulting in high costs.
  • the present invention provides a molten metal that hardly adheres to the end face of the plate-like body when supplying the molten metal to the outer peripheral gap of the plate-like body, which is a pair of materials to be joined with the principal surfaces of each other being interposed via a gap.
  • a third object of the present invention is to provide a supply tube for molten metal, an apparatus for supplying molten metal in which the supply tube is incorporated, and a method for supplying molten metal.
  • the present invention provides a molten metal that hardly adheres to the end face of the plate-like body when supplying the molten metal to the outer peripheral gap of the plate-like body, which is a pair of materials to be joined with the principal surfaces of each other being interposed via a gap.
  • molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply tube, and molten metal supply method
  • a pair of plate-like bodies have different sizes, and the edge of one plate-like body is the other plate-like body
  • the molten metal does not leak into the protruding portion, and a molten metal supply tube that can stably supply molten metal with a certain width to the outer circumferential gap is incorporated.
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide a molten metal supply apparatus and a molten metal supply method.
  • the bonding strength between the joint and the glass plate is increased. Specifically, it was found that the size was about 0.01 to 0.005 mm. However, when the guide of Patent Document 5 is used and the gap with the glass substrate is about 0.01 to 0.005 mm, there is a problem that the amount of molten solder reaching the tip of the guide is small and the width is not stable. . In addition, due to insufficient supply of molten solder, there is a problem in that the bonding strength is reduced due to the occurrence of vacancy defects in a linear or dotted manner at the bonding interface between the glass substrate and the bonding portion.
  • the molten metal when supplying molten metal to the outer peripheral gap of a plate-like body, which is a pair of materials whose main surfaces are arranged via a gap, the molten metal is stably supplied to the outer peripheral gap with a certain width. It is a fifth object of the present invention to provide a molten metal supply tube, a molten metal supply device incorporating the supply tube, and a molten metal supply method.
  • the molten metal supply tube according to claim 1, which achieves the first object, is a molten metal supply tube that melts and supplies a solid-phase low-melting-point metal material.
  • the supply cylinder (1) has the following effects. That is, the low-melting-point metal material in the solid phase is melted by coming into contact with the melting part to generate molten metal, and the molten metal flows from the first opening, flows through the flow passage, and flows out from the second opening.
  • the molten metal does not come into contact with the atmosphere in the supply process, and the generation of oxide is suppressed, and the mixing of the oxide into the molten metal is prevented. Avoided.
  • the low melting point metal material is melted in the melted portion after the surface oxide is removed in the oxide removing portion, so that the oxides adhering to the surface of the low melting point metal material enter the flow passage. The entry is blocked.
  • the “low melting point metal” in this specification refers to a metal that melts at a relatively low temperature of approximately 400 ° C. or less, exemplified by Sn, In, Zn, Ga, and the like.
  • the oxide removal part and the melting part are close to each other. It is desirable that the oxide removal portion is provided integrally with the melting portion, and is configured to remove oxide on the surface layer of the low melting point metal material when the low melting point metal material is melted. Is desirable.
  • the first opening opens to the oxide removing portion, and the area of the first opening is less than the area where the low melting point metal material contacts the melting portion. It is desirable.
  • the area of the first opening is less than the area where the low-melting-point metal material is in contact with the melting part, and bringing the low-melting-point metal material into contact with the melting part so as to close the first opening, the surface of the low-melting-point metal material The oxide adhering to is removed at the outer peripheral edge of the first opening, and the oxide is prevented from entering the flow passage.
  • the oxide removing section is provided as a separate body, and is configured to remove the oxide on the surface of the low melting point metal material before melting the low melting point metal material. It is desirable.
  • the oxide removal unit can include a blade part for removing the surface layer of the low melting point metal material, (8) plasma irradiation means, or (9) shot blasting means.
  • the guide portion is attached to the second opening of the supply cylinder through which the molten metal flows out, so that a desired amount of molten metal is reliably supplied to the outer peripheral gap and the supply width of the molten metal is stabilized. Desirable in terms. Furthermore, as will be described in detail in the section of the embodiment below, in a predetermined case, mixing of oxide into the molten metal when supplied to the outer peripheral gap from the second opening is suppressed.
  • the guide portion has a substantially columnar shape or a substantially cylindrical shape.
  • the guide part has a tapered shape so that the molten metal can be smoothly guided by the guide part and supplied to the workpiece without interruption.
  • the guide portion is formed with an abutting surface that abuts on a surface to be supplied with molten metal.
  • a guide is provided in the supply cylinder of (12), in which the molten metal is supplied to the outer peripheral gap of the pair of plate-like bodies whose main surfaces are arranged with a gap therebetween, in order to achieve the second object.
  • the portion has a first plane opposing the main surface of one plate-like body via a first gap and a second plane opposing the main surface of the other plate-like body via a second gap.
  • a iron part configured to be insertable into the outer peripheral gap of the pair of plate-like bodies, a first contact part and / or a iron that protrudes from the first plane of the iron part and can contact the main surface of one plate-like body It is desirable to have the 2nd contact part which protrudes from the 2nd plane of a part, and can contact the main surface of the other plate-shaped object.
  • the molten metal supplied to the outer peripheral gap of the pair of plate-like bodies is inserted into the outer peripheral gap and moved along the outer peripheral edge of the pair of plate-like bodies. Is supplied to the outer circumferential gap by the section.
  • the molten metal introduced into the first gap and the second gap set between each main surface of the plate-like body and the first plane and the second plane of the iron portion.
  • the metal is pressed by the iron portion by the movement of the iron portion along the outer peripheral edge of the plate-like body, and is applied to each main surface of the plate-like body.
  • the molten metal to which fluidity is imparted by the operation of applying the coating promotes the activation of the main surface to increase the wettability of the molten metal and the main surface, and removes bubbles and foreign substances existing at the contact interface between the molten metal and the main surface. Since it removes, the joining quality of the plate-shaped body which is a to-be-joined material, and a junction part can be improved.
  • the first contact portion provided in the guide portion protrudes from the first plane of the iron portion and is configured to be able to contact the main surface of one plate-like body
  • the second contact portion is the first portion of the iron portion. It protrudes from two planes and is configured to be able to contact the main surface of the other plate-like body. Therefore, in the above supply operation, for example, even when the iron part moves relatively in the thickness direction of the outer peripheral gap due to the problem of the operation accuracy of the mechanism for positioning the pair of plate-like bodies and the mechanism for moving the guide part, the plate-like body When the contact part comes into contact with the main surface of the steel plate, direct contact between the iron part and the main surface is avoided.
  • the guide unit may be provided with only the first contact unit or the second contact unit, or both of them may be provided, and selection thereof is performed by a peripheral device for operating the guide unit as illustrated above. It is determined by the accuracy of the operation and the dimensional accuracy of the outer peripheral gap due to the combination of the plate-like bodies.
  • the guide groove (16) is preferably formed in the contact portion.
  • the molten metal is supplied to the outer peripheral gap in front of the guide portion in the moving direction of the guide portion moving along the outer peripheral edge of the pair of plate-like bodies and then moved.
  • the soldering iron part can be configured to be immersed in the supplied molten solder.
  • the molten metal flows into the outer peripheral gap before the iron part is immersed, it may be constant due to fluctuations in the supply pressure of the molten metal or unevenness in the wettability between the molten metal and the plate-like body.
  • the width of the formed joint portion may be nonuniform. Further, when the outer peripheral gap becomes narrow, there are cases where the molten solder cannot be supplied sufficiently.
  • the molten metal smoothly flows directly into the iron part through the guide groove formed in the contact part, and further, the wetting and spreading of the molten metal stays in the range of the iron part due to wetting with the iron part.
  • the metal is supplied with a constant width, so that the width of the joint can be made more uniform.
  • the inclusion of oxide generated on the surface of the molten metal supplied to the outer circumferential gap is suppressed, and the bonding quality between the bonded portion and the plate-like body is improved. It is possible to produce an effect of being able to.
  • the first contact portion contacts the main surface of one plate-like body, and the second contact portion is the other plate. It is desirable to be comprised so that the main surface of a shape may be contacted. According to this preferable configuration, since the first contact portion and the second contact portion are always in contact with the main surfaces of the pair of plate-like bodies, the first contact portion and the second contact portion are used.
  • the guide portion is in a state of being fitted into the outer peripheral gap.
  • the amount of the first gap between the first plane of the iron part and the main surface of one plate-like body is regulated by the projection amount of the first contact portion, and the second plane and the other plate-like body
  • the amount of the second gap with the main surface is regulated by the amount of protrusion of the second contact portion.
  • the contact portion is formed with a recess along the direction of insertion into the outer peripheral gap of the guide portion so that the contact area with the plate-like body is reduced.
  • the contact portion is on the tip side in the insertion direction into the outer peripheral gap of the guide portion. It is desirable to be arranged in.
  • the width of the joint portion can be regulated with high accuracy by regulating the flow of the molten metal at the contact portion arranged on the tip side. .
  • the contact portion has elasticity capable of bending in the thickness direction of the outer peripheral gap.
  • the following effects can be achieved. That is, for example, when sufficient assembly accuracy cannot be ensured and the outer peripheral gap of the plate-like body is bent, or the outer peripheral gap is formed in a straight line, the running accuracy of the plate-like body moving mechanism can be sufficiently ensured.
  • the plate-like body When the guide part moves relatively non-horizontal while the position of the outer peripheral gap varies in the thickness direction, the plate-like body is It may be in a state of contacting the guide part.
  • the plate-like body first contacts the first and second contact portions and presses the first and second contact portions with a predetermined force along the thickness direction of the outer circumferential gap.
  • the guide portion moves up and down while following the change in the position of the outer circumferential gap in the thickness direction. As a result, even if it becomes the said state, while being able to prevent a contact with a iron part and a plate-shaped object, a molten metal can be stably filled with an outer periphery clearance gap.
  • a guide is provided in the supply cylinder of (12), in which the molten metal is supplied to the outer peripheral gap of the pair of plate-like bodies whose main surfaces are arranged with a gap.
  • the part is attached so as to cross the second opening, and the amount of molten metal discharged from the lower discharge port is the upper side in the second opening divided into the upper discharge port and the lower discharge port by the guide unit. It is desirable that the amount is less than the amount of molten metal discharged from the discharge port.
  • the guide portion is inserted into the flow channel at a predetermined depth from the second opening, and in the flow channel divided into the upper flow channel and the lower flow channel by the guide portion, It is desirable that the volume of the side channel is smaller than the volume of the upper channel.
  • the guide portion is inserted into the flow passage across the vicinity of the center of the second opening, and the lower discharge is formed on the discharge port forming surface below the flow passage guide portion. It is desirable to install a dam plate that makes the area of the outlet smaller than the area of the upper outlet.
  • the guide is inserted into the flow passage across the vicinity of the center of the second opening, and the weir that makes the volume of the lower flow path smaller than the volume of the upper flow path It is desirable that the member is formed in the lower flow path of the circulation passage.
  • a guide It is desirable that the part is attached below the second opening or below the second opening, and the molten metal discharged from the second opening flows out from the upper surface of the guide part.
  • the molten metal discharged from the second opening is allowed to flow only from the upper surface of the guide portion and not to flow along the lower surface. Therefore, even with a pair of plate-like bodies arranged with the lower side protruding. The molten metal leaks into the protruding portion and hardly adheres to the protruding portion.
  • the guide portion has an inclined portion that is continuous with the tip portion, and the tip portion and the inclined portion have an obtuse angle or a right angle.
  • the guide portion has an inclined portion that is continuous with the distal end portion and a proximal end portion that is continuous with the inclined portion, and the distal end portion and the proximal end portion are parallel or obtuse, and 2 It is desirable that the portion has a bent step shape.
  • the lower part including the flow passage has a notch surface that is notched in the axial direction by a predetermined length from the second opening side, and the guide portion has the notch surface at the upper surface.
  • a member that seals the gap is preferably attached.
  • the supply cylinder of (31) has a flat portion where the flow passage is not exposed in a lower portion within a predetermined length in the axial direction from the second opening side, and the guide portion abuts the upper surface on the flat portion. It is desirable to be attached.
  • the pair of plate-like members may be arranged vertically such that the edge of the lower plate-like member protrudes beyond the edge of the upper plate-like member. desirable.
  • a guide is provided in the supply cylinder of (12), in which the molten metal is supplied to the outer peripheral gap of the pair of plate-like bodies whose main surfaces are arranged with a gap between them. It is preferable that the molten metal supply tube is characterized in that a notch portion is formed at the tip of the side portion facing the moving direction of the guide portion.
  • a part of the molten metal can enter the side surface of the notch portion from the main surface of the guide portion, and can flow to the tip of the guide portion along the side surface. Since the molten metal flowing along the tip reaches the tip of the guide and flows along the tip, the position of the molten metal is regulated by the edge of the tip, and a joint having a predetermined width defined by the length of the guide can be stably obtained. Moreover, since the flow rate of the molten metal at the front end side of the guide portion increases, the bonding strength between the bonding portion and the plate-like body can be increased.
  • the notch has an inclined surface facing backward with respect to the moving direction of the guide.
  • the notch is substantially parallel to the inclined surface facing backward with respect to the moving direction of the guide portion and the moving direction of the guide portion smoothly connected to the inclined surface. It is desirable to have a flat surface.
  • the notch is substantially orthogonal to the inclined surface facing backward with respect to the moving direction of the guide portion and the moving direction of the guide portion smoothly connected to the inclined surface. It is desirable to have the surface to do.
  • the notch is preferably formed by a straight line, a curved line, or a combination thereof.
  • the molten metal supply device which achieves the first object, has the molten metal supply cylinder according to any one of (1) to (43). .
  • the supply device of this aspect is described by taking the case of two rectangular glass substrates as a plate-like body as an example, the following effects are obtained.
  • the two glass substrates are arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed by the plate-like body arranging means.
  • the supply cylinder is positioned by the supply cylinder positioning means so that the second opening is substantially connected to the gap.
  • the molten metal is supplied to the gap between the two glass substrates through the second opening of the supply cylinder.
  • the second opening of the supply cylinder is disposed so as to be substantially connected to the gap between the two glass substrates, so that the molten metal supplied through the second opening fills the gap without being exposed to the atmosphere.
  • the above-mentioned “state in which the second opening is substantially connected to the gap” means not only the state in which the second opening and the gap are in close contact, but also the end face of the second opening and the two glass substrates (a plane perpendicular to the gap). Even if the second opening and the gap are not completely in close contact with each other, the state in which the molten metal flowing out from the second opening does not leak from the gap is It means to be included in the range.
  • the molten metal supply apparatus wherein any one of the second to fifth objects is achieved, wherein the molten metal supply cylinder according to any one of (12) to (43) is incorporated.
  • a molten metal supply device in which a pair of plate-like bodies are arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed, and a guide portion is inserted into the gap formed between the pair of plate-like bodies. And a supply cylinder positioning means. According to this supply device, the molten metal can be smoothly supplied to the gap between the plate-like bodies through the guide portion.
  • the second opening has a diameter exceeding the thickness of the outer peripheral gap.
  • the operation of the supply device of this aspect will be described by taking the case of a glass substrate as an example as described above.
  • the molten metal supplied through the second opening is not only supplied to the gap between the glass substrates, but also the portion other than the gap. That is, it is also applied to the end surfaces (surfaces perpendicular to the gap) of the two glass substrates included in the second opening. For this reason, a surplus portion made of molten metal is further formed outside the molten metal supplied to the gap.
  • this surplus portion serves as a barrier to the atmosphere, and the effect of suppressing the progress of oxidation due to the molten metal already supplied to the gap coming into contact with the atmosphere is produced. Further, according to this configuration, the molten metal can be adhered to the outer peripheral end surfaces of the pair of plate-like bodies, and as a result, a joint portion having a sealing function can be formed so as to cover the outer peripheral end surfaces. Suitable when leak performance is required.
  • the second opening is the outer periphery It is desirable to have a caliber that is less than the thickness of the gap.
  • the guide unit may be supported indirectly or directly by the floating mechanism. desirable.
  • the floating mechanism be configured to restrain movement of the guide portion in a plane parallel to the gap formed by the pair of plate-like bodies.
  • the guide part is supported by the floating mechanism that restrains the movement of the guide part in a plane parallel to the gap formed by the pair of plate-like bodies, in other words, the thickness direction of the outer peripheral gap.
  • the guide unit can move around the insertion axis of the guide unit.
  • the method for supplying molten metal according to claim 53 which achieves the first object, is a method for supplying molten metal by a molten metal supply cylinder according to any one of (1) to (11).
  • the supply method of this aspect is demonstrated as an example in the case of two rectangular glass substrates as a plate-shaped body, the following effect
  • the two glass substrates are arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed in the plate-like body arranging step.
  • the supply cylinder is positioned in the supply cylinder positioning step so that the second opening is substantially connected to the gap.
  • molten metal is supplied to the gap between the two glass substrates through the second opening of the supply cylinder.
  • the second opening of the supply cylinder is disposed so as to be substantially connected to the gap between the two glass substrates, so that the molten metal supplied through the second opening fills the gap without being exposed to the atmosphere.
  • the progress of oxidation in the molten metal supply process is suppressed.
  • the molten metal supply apparatus which achieves any one of the second to fifth objects, by the molten metal supply cylinder according to any one of (12) to (43).
  • the method includes a cylinder positioning step and a molten metal supply step of supplying a molten metal to the gap through the second opening. According to this supply method, the molten metal can be smoothly supplied to the gap between the plate-like bodies through the guide portion.
  • the problems of the present invention can be solved.
  • FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged side view of FIG. 2.
  • FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged view of FIG. 3.
  • FIG. 5 is a modification of the oxide removing unit in FIG. 4.
  • FIG. 8 is a partially enlarged front view of FIG. 7.
  • FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged view of FIG. 9.
  • FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front view of a molten metal supply apparatus of Example 1-3. It is a figure which shows the modification of the supply cylinder of FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the molten metal supply apparatus of the 2-1 example. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the support part of FIG. It is the front view and side view of the molten metal supply apparatus of the 2-1 example. It is a partial expansion perspective view of the supply cylinder of FIG. It is an expanded sectional view of the E section of FIG. 14, and its side view. It is a figure which shows another modification of the supply cylinder shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification of the supply cylinder shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged plan view and a front view of a molten metal supply device of Example 2-2. It is a partial expanded sectional view of FIG. It is a schematic block diagram of the molten metal supply apparatus of the 3-1 example. It is sectional drawing which shows the structure of the supply cylinder of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the supply cylinder of FIG. It is a figure which shows the supply state of the molten solder by the guide part of FIG.
  • FIG. 27 is a partial expanded sectional view of the supply cylinder of the molten metal supply apparatus of the 3-2 example.
  • FIG. 32 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view showing a modified example of the supply cylinder of FIG. 31. It is a partial expanded sectional view which shows another modification of the supply cylinder of FIG. It is a schematic block diagram of the molten metal supply apparatus of the 4-1 example. It is a partial expanded sectional view which shows the structure of the supply cylinder of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the guide part of FIG. 35, and its modification.
  • FIG. 36 is a perspective view showing another modified example of the guide unit of FIG. 35.
  • FIG. 36 is a perspective view showing another modification of the supply tube of FIG. 35. It is a perspective view which shows the supply cylinder of the molten metal supply apparatus of the 4th-2 example. It is a perspective view which shows the supply cylinder of the molten metal supply apparatus of the 4th-3 example.
  • FIG. 37 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a modification of the contact portion in the guide portion of FIG. 36. It is a schematic block diagram of the molten metal supply apparatus of a 5th example. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the structure of the supply cylinder of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the guide part of FIG.
  • a molten solder obtained by melting a SnAgAl-based alloy that is a low melting point metal is supplied to the outer peripheral gap of a pair of glass substrates that are plate-like bodies, and then a pair of bonded bodies as a joined body.
  • a case where a glass substrate is bonded to manufacture a glass panel will be specifically described. However, even when the glass substrate is replaced with a metal substrate or a ceramic substrate, similar actions and effects can be obtained.
  • solders having various compositions including, for example, Sn, Zn, Ti, etc., or In alloys are used as the low melting point metal, similar actions and effects can be obtained. Further, the present invention is not limited to these examples, and can be modified within the technical scope within the same range as the examples.
  • Example 1-1 a molten metal supply cylinder of the aspect described in the above (1), a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder, a molten metal supply method, and desirable aspects thereof will be described below as Example 1-1. Description will be made based on 1-2 examples and 1-3 examples.
  • Example 1-1 A molten metal supply cylinder and a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the molten metal supply cylinder according to Example 1-1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • the symbol W is a glass panel manufactured using the supply device of Example 1-1.
  • the symbols w1 and w2 are a pair of glass substrates having a dimension g and opposing main surfaces with a predetermined gap therebetween.
  • the symbol m is provided in a frame shape on the outer peripheral edge portions of the glass substrates w1 and w2 arranged opposite to each other, specifically slightly inward of the respective outer peripheral edges, and is directly joined to the respective main surfaces to be described later. It is the junction part which forms.
  • the bonding portion m includes a bonding portion m1 formed on the glass substrate w1 and a bonding portion m2 formed on the glass substrate w2 on each bonding surface. It is configured in a state of being joined and integrated.
  • SnAgAl-type alloy which is a low melting metal excellent in the joining property of the glass substrates w1 and w2, specifically, Ag is 8.5% in mass%, Al is 0.35%, and the remainder An alloy made of Sn is used.
  • the space defined by the glass substrates w1 and w2 and the joint portion m constitutes an airtight chamber, and the airtight chamber is filled with a vacuum atmosphere or a predetermined gas or liquid according to the use of the glass panel W. .
  • the configuration of the glass panel W is not limited to the above.
  • the bonding portion m is directly bonded only to one glass substrate w1 and melted with the bonding portion m.
  • the glass panel W in a mode in which it is bonded to the other glass substrate w2 through the base layer u rich in wettability, or the bonding portion m is bonded directly to only one substrate w1.
  • the glass panel W of the aspect joined to the other glass substrate w2 via the frame-shaped member V and the glass frit G which were comprised with the metal, glass, etc. for ensuring the clearance gap between the glass substrates w1 and w2 is excluded. Not what you want. That is, the supply device and the supply method of Example 1-1 can be applied to the glass panel W in which the bonding portion m is directly bonded to at least one of the pair of glass substrates w1 and w2.
  • Reference numeral 1 denotes a production line for the glass panel W including the supply device of Example 1-1.
  • the preload chamber 1a that houses the glass substrates w1 and w2 in order and has a predetermined atmosphere, and foreign matter and moisture adhering to the surface.
  • Glass substrate w1 and w2 for heat treatment, pretreatment chamber 1b for performing plasma irradiation treatment, molten solder supply chamber 1c incorporating the supply device of Example 1-1, and glass substrates w1 and w2 are joined.
  • reference numeral 2 denotes a supply device.
  • the supply device 2 controls the atmosphere of the thread solder supply means 2a, the heating and melting means 3, the moving means 2e, the airtight chamber 2k containing each of the above means, the control means 2p for controlling the operation of each of the above means, and the airtight chamber 2k. It is comprised with the atmosphere control means 2s. About each said component, the case where molten solder is supplied to one glass substrate w1 is demonstrated below as an example.
  • Reference numeral 2b is a bobbin-shaped thread solder sending section for winding a wire-like material (hereinafter referred to as thread solder) M made of SnAgAl-based alloy.
  • the thread solder M is rotated quantitatively by a motor or the like not shown. Send it out.
  • Reference numeral 2c denotes a substantially tubular thread solder guide portion having both ends opened and having a through hole which is a guide passage through which the thread solder M can be inserted.
  • the supply device 2 uses the thread solder M formed to have a diameter of about 2 mm. In the initial state, the tip of the thread solder M wound around the thread solder delivery part 2b is drawn out from the thread solder delivery part 2b.
  • the yarn solder guide portion 2c is set in a state where it is inserted into the guide passage from the upper end opening and protrudes from the lower end opening (see FIG. 3).
  • a preferred example of the thread solder delivery unit 2b will be described with reference to FIG. 6 is a package for storing the thread solder M in a non-oxidizing atmosphere.
  • the thread solder M is wound around the winding core 5b. It is composed of a hollow cylindrical box 5a for storing the thread solder M, a hole 5d formed on the side of the box 5a, and a drawing member 5e fitted in the hole 5d.
  • the drawing member 5e has a drawing hole smaller than the diameter of the thread solder M.
  • the drawing member 5e is formed of an elastic material such as rubber, and when the free end of the thread solder M is pulled out from the drawing hole.
  • the inner surface of the lead-out hole is in close contact with the outer peripheral surface of the thread solder M, and the airtightness of the storage chamber 5c of the thread solder delivery section 5 that is a package is maintained.
  • the atmosphere of the storage chamber 5c is, for example, a vacuum atmosphere or an inert atmosphere, and it is preferable that a moisture removing agent such as activated carbon is enclosed in order to keep the humidity of the storage chamber 5c constant.
  • reference numeral 2d denotes an ultrasonic wave that irradiates ultrasonic waves to the contact interface between the molten solder M1 and the main surface S of the glass substrate w1 through the molten solder M1 formed by melting the yarn solder M by the heating and melting means 3. It is an application part (refer FIG. 3).
  • the ultrasonic application unit 2 d is incorporated in the heating and melting means 3 and is configured to apply ultrasonic waves through the supply tube 3 a of the heating and melting means 3.
  • reference numeral 3a is a supply cylinder that supplies the molten solder M1 to the main surface S, which is the surface on which the joint portion of the glass substrate w1 is to be formed.
  • the supply cylinder 3a has a substantially columnar shape, and a core material is formed of stainless steel having a high thermal conductivity, and the outer peripheral surface of the core material is rich in wettability with the molten solder M1.
  • a Cr layer is formed, and a Ni layer having low wettability with the molten solder M1 is formed on the Cr layer except for the lower end surface of the supply cylinder 3a.
  • the supply cylinder 3a is arranged such that the lower end surface where the second opening 3f opens is opposed to the main surface S of the glass substrate w1, and supplies the molten solder M1 to the main surface S.
  • Reference numeral 3 c is a heater wound around the outer periphery of the supply cylinder 3 a and heats the supply cylinder 3 a to a temperature equal to or higher than the melting point of the thread solder M.
  • Reference numeral 3b in FIG. 2 is a main body portion in which the supply cylinder 3a is fixed and a heating circuit of the heater 3c is incorporated. As described above, the ultrasonic generator, the control circuit, and the like of the ultrasonic application unit 2d are built in the main body 3b.
  • the supply cylinder 3 a is provided with a melting portion 3 g where the thread solder M abuts and generates the molten solder M ⁇ b> 1 at the upper portion (one end portion), and one opening (first opening) 3 e is the melting portion.
  • the other opening (second opening) 3f opens on the lower end surface (the other end surface).
  • a sealed circular passage 3d is provided in the inside except for the first opening 3e and the second opening 3f. Therefore, the molten solder M1 generated in the melting part 3g flows into the flow passage 3d from the first opening 3e that is the introduction port of the molten solder M1, flows downward through the flow passage 3d, and the second opening 3f that is the discharge port.
  • a Cr layer that improves wettability with the molten solder M1 is formed on the surface as a preferable configuration for smoothly flowing the molten solder M1.
  • a layer made of Al, Mo, W, V, Nb, Ta may be provided instead of the Cr layer.
  • the flow passage 3d of this example is subjected to nitriding treatment as an anti-corrosion treatment so that the surface thereof is eroded by the molten solder M1 and impurities are not mixed into the molten solder M1, and the Cr layer is nitridated. Formed on the surface.
  • nitriding treatment as an anti-corrosion treatment
  • the melting part 3g will be described in more detail. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the melting part 3g is formed in a concave shape on the upper side surface of the supply tube 3a, and an annular oxide removing part 4 is provided integrally with the melting part 3g at the bottom. It has been. In FIG. 4 (a), the oxide removing portion 4 is shown with a cross hatch for the sake of understanding, but the oxide removing portion 4 is integrally formed with the molten portion 3g.
  • the first opening 3e is open to the melting surface 3j where the thread solder M, which is the upper surface of the oxide removing portion 4 (the bottom surface of the melting portion 3g), contacts and melts.
  • the diameter ⁇ 2 of the first opening 3e is less than the diameter ⁇ 1 of the end surface of the thread solder M that comes into contact with the melting surface 3j.
  • the lower end portion of the thread solder guide portion 2c is positioned and fixed to the fixing member 2j of the moving means 2e in a posture toward the first opening 3e of the oxide removing portion 4 opened to the melting surface 3j. (See FIG. 2).
  • the yarn solder M sent quantitatively from the yarn solder delivery portion 2b is guided by the guide passage of the yarn solder guide portion 2c, and is fed out from the opening at the lower end portion. It abuts on the melting surface 3j in a posture to close the first opening 3e.
  • the heating and melting means 3 is positioned and fixed to the fixing member 2j of the moving means 2e so that the positional relationship between the yarn solder M fed from the yarn solder guide portion 2c and the melting portion 3g can be maintained (FIG. 2).
  • the thread solder M fed out from the opening at the lower end of the thread solder guide portion 2c comes into contact with the melting surface 3j heated by the heater 3c and melts, so that the molten solder M1 is melted. It is formed.
  • the thread solder M is melted so that the end face of the first opening 3e of the oxide removing portion 4 formed to have a diameter ⁇ 2 smaller than the diameter ⁇ 1 is closed.
  • the molten solder M1 is generated by contacting and melting 3j.
  • the oxide E2 generated on the outer peripheral surface of the thread solder M flows into the molten portion 3g and the oxide E2 generated during melting exists.
  • the oxide E2 and the clean molten solder M1 in the central portion not containing the oxide are separated at the outer peripheral edge portion of the first opening 3e of the oxide removing portion 4, and the oxide E2 is removed. Therefore, inflow of the oxide E2 into the flow passage 3d is prevented by the melting surface 3j which is the outer peripheral edge of the first opening 3e, and only clean molten solder M1 in which the oxide E2 is not mixed is passed through the first opening 3e. It flows into 3d. Furthermore, since the inside of the flow passage 3d extending from the first opening 3e to the second opening 3f is a sealed non-oxidizing atmosphere, the progress of oxidation of the molten solder M1 during the supply process is also suppressed.
  • the thickness of the layer of the oxide E1 generated on the surface of the thread solder M stored in the atmosphere is usually about several tens of ⁇ m, and thus is a difference in diameter between the thread solder M and the first opening 3e. It is sufficient to set ⁇ 1 to ⁇ 2 around 1 mm, but the dimensions may be appropriately determined depending on the low melting point metal material to be supplied.
  • the oxide E2 that has been prevented from flowing into the flow passage 3d as described above is stored in the storage portion 3k and remains around the first opening 3e.
  • the oxide discharge portion 3h that discharges the oxide E2 from the periphery of the first opening 3e is provided. It is provided as a preferred configuration.
  • the oxide discharge portion 3h has an inclined surface 3i that continues downward from the melting surface 3j, and is configured such that the oxide E2 remaining around the first opening 3e flows downward. What is necessary is just to collect
  • an oxide capturing part 3l is provided on the melting surface 3j as shown in FIG. 4B.
  • the oxide capturing part 3l in FIG. 4B is a plurality of irregularities formed on the surface of the melting surface 3j, and the oxide E2 is captured by the irregularities, whereby the flow of the oxide E2 is suppressed.
  • the effect of preventing the residual oxide E2 from flowing into the flow passage 3d can be further enhanced.
  • the oxide removing unit 4a according to the first modification shown in FIG. 5A has an aspect in which the oxide removing unit 4a is provided separately from the supply tube 3a. That is, the substantially annular oxide removing portion 4a has a through hole 4b in which an upper opening is formed with a diameter ⁇ 3 smaller than the diameter ⁇ 1 of the thread solder M, and the lower opening of the through hole 4b is a flow passage. It is arranged at a position opposite to the 3d first opening 3e. The outer peripheral edge of the upper opening of the through hole 4b is configured as a blade portion for cutting and removing the outer peripheral surface of the thread solder M.
  • the oxide E1 on the outer peripheral surface of the supplied thread solder M is removed by the blade at the outer peripheral edge of the upper opening having a smaller diameter than the thread solder M, and the thread solder M in a state where the oxide E1 is removed is downward.
  • the molten solder M1 that is sent and abuts on the melting part 3g and melts and does not contain oxide flows into the flow passage 3d through the first opening 3e.
  • an inert gas is supplied from the nozzle 4c between the oxide removing unit 4a and the first opening 3e. It is desirable that a non-oxidizing atmosphere be formed between the oxide removing portion 4a and the first opening 3e.
  • FIG. 5B shows the oxide removing unit 4d according to the second modification.
  • the oxide removing portion 4d is an example of removing the oxide E1 with the plasma 4e, and the annular oxide removing portion 4d having a through-hole through which the thread solder M can be inserted is connected to a plasma generating means (not shown). It is configured as a plasma irradiation means for irradiating plasma 4e from the inner surface toward the center.
  • the oxide removing unit 4d is arranged separately from the supply cylinder 3a at a position where the outer periphery of the supplied thread solder M can be irradiated with the plasma 4e, and is supplied to the through hole of the oxide removing unit 4d.
  • the oxide E1 on the outer peripheral surface of the threaded solder M is removed by the plasma 4e, and the threaded solder M from which the oxide E1 has been removed comes into contact with the melting portion 3g and melts.
  • FIG. 5C shows the oxide removing unit 4f according to the third modification.
  • the oxide removing portion 4f is an example in which the oxide E1 is removed with 4g of hard particles. That is, the oxide removing portion 4f has an upper opening inserted in a state in which the thread solder M to which the oxide E1 has adhered is in close contact and a lower opening to be discharged in a state in which the thread solder M from which the oxide E1 has been removed is in close contact. It has a substantially circular tubular container 4j in which a through-hole is formed, and a flow pipe 4h having a particle supply passage 4i provided penetrating from the right side surface to the left side surface of the container 4j.
  • the right end of the flow pipe 4h is connected to a hard particle supply means for supplying a gas containing hard particles 4g such as ceramic particles at a predetermined flow rate, and the oxide removing unit 4f is arranged from the right side to the left side of the flow pipe 4h. It is configured as shot blasting means in which 4 g of hard particles are distributed. And the oxide removal part 4f is arrange
  • the oxide E1 on the outer peripheral surface of the supplied thread solder M is removed by the hard particles 4g, and the thread solder M from which the oxide E1 has been removed comes into contact with the melting portion 3g and melts. It is preferable to supply the thread solder M to the oxide removing portion 4f while rotating it around the axis because the oxide E1 can be uniformly removed.
  • the moving means 2e includes a portal-type support 2f, an elevating part 2g fixed to the upper side of the support 2f, and provided between both sides of the support 2f.
  • a horizontal moving part 2h that can move in the horizontal direction, and a table 2i provided on the horizontal moving part 2h that can place the glass substrate w1 in a horizontal posture with the main surface on which the joint m1 is formed facing upward.
  • the thread solder guide portion 2c and the heating and melting means 3 are connected to the lower end portion of the elevating portion 2g via the fixing member 2j.
  • the vertical movement direction of the elevating part 2g is the Z-axis direction
  • the horizontal movement part 2h is the movement direction parallel to the plane of the paper, the X-axis direction, the X-axis, and the Z-axis.
  • the direction perpendicular to the axis is called the Y-axis direction.
  • the table 2i may be provided with a panel-like heating element that can heat the entire surface of the glass substrate w1.
  • a panel-like heating element that can heat the entire surface of the glass substrate w1.
  • control means 2p is comprised by the control part 2r connected with the said each component of the supply apparatus 2 via the telecommunication line 2q, and controls operation
  • the control unit 2r is configured by a computer, and the operation part (CPU) stored in the storage unit (memory) is read by the operation unit (CPU) and appropriately calculated, whereby the yarn solder sending unit 2b.
  • the yarn solder sending unit 2b is configured to control the supply amount of the thread solder M, to control the heat generation temperature by instructing the heater 3c, to instruct the elevator unit 2g and the horizontal moving unit 2h constituting the moving means 2e to It is configured to control the movement route and movement speed.
  • the hermetic chamber 2k includes a housing 2l that forms an airtight space 2m that encloses each of the above-described components of the supply device 2, and a housing for loading and discharging the glass substrate w1 into and from the manufacturing device 2. It comprises a carry-in port 2n and a carry-out port 2o provided on both side walls of the body 2l.
  • the carry-in port 2n and the carry-out port 2o are provided with hermetic doors in order to ensure the hermeticity of the hermetic chamber 2k.
  • the atmosphere control means 2s includes a gas supply unit 2u that is provided with a supply pump and can supply a predetermined gas stored at a predetermined pressure, and a vacuum pump that vacuums the airtight space 2m of the airtight chamber 2k.
  • a gas supply unit 2u, and a vacuum pump 2v are connected to a supply pipe 2t that connects the airtight space 2m, and the airtight space 2m is controlled to a predetermined atmosphere.
  • the gas supply unit 2u includes a plurality of kinds of gases applied according to the use of the glass substrate w1, for example, an argon gas that is an inert gas, a nitrogen gas, a hydrogen gas that is a reducing gas, or a carbon monoxide gas.
  • the oxygen gas which is an oxidizing gas, can be separated and stored, and these gases can be mixed at a predetermined ratio and supplied to the airtight space 2m by a mixing valve provided in the gas supply unit 2u.
  • the prepared glass substrates w1 and w2 are put into the preload chamber 1a. After the glass substrates w1 and w2 are charged, the inside of the preload chamber 1a is once evacuated and then replaced with argon gas to create an inert atmosphere. Note that the following pretreatment chamber 1b, bonding portion forming chamber 1c, bonding chamber 1d, cooling chamber 1e, and unload chamber 1f are similarly in an inert atmosphere.
  • the glass substrates w1 and w2 are put into the pretreatment chamber 1b and subjected to a heat treatment at a predetermined temperature or a plasma cleaning process to clean and remove moisture and foreign matters adhering to the surfaces of the glass substrates w1 and w2.
  • a degassing process for removing the impurity gas generated from the bonding portion in the heat treatment step is also performed. Can do.
  • the glass substrate w1 is placed on the table 2i in a horizontal posture with the main surface S, which is the surface to which the joining portion m1 is to be joined, facing upward.
  • a predetermined gap is formed between the lower end surface of the supply tube 3a and the main surface S of the glass substrate w1 (see FIG. 3), and the starting point is the rectangular frame-shaped joint portion m1 to be formed.
  • the elevation part 2g and the horizontal movement part 2h are moved in the X, Y, and Z axis directions so that the lower end surface of the supply cylinder 3a is positioned at the corner B1 defined as follows (see FIG. 50B).
  • the supply device 2 drives the motor of the thread solder delivery section 2b and feeds the thread solder M from the thread solder guide section 2c.
  • the drawn-out solder Y comes into contact with the molten surface 3j heated by the heater 3c and becomes the molten solder M1.
  • the oxide E1 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the thread solder M is separated from the molten solder M1 by the molten surface 3j of the oxide removing portion 4, and only clean molten solder M1 in which the oxide E1 is not mixed is obtained. It flows into the flow passage 3d, flows out from the second opening 3f, and is supplied to the main surface S of the glass substrate w1.
  • the supply device 2 moves the glass substrate w1 by the horizontal moving unit 2h, and relatively moves the supply cylinder 3a horizontally from the corners B1 to B2 of the glass substrate w1.
  • the ultrasonic waves are applied to the contact interface between the supplied molten solder M1 and the main surface S of the glass substrate w1 by the ultrasonic wave application means, bubbles and foreign substances existing at the contact interface are removed, The wettability of the molten solder M1 with respect to the glass substrate w1 increases.
  • the glass substrate w1 is moved by the horizontal moving part 2h, and the supply cylinder 3a is horizontally moved along the movement path of one stroke writing which ends at the corner B1 which is the starting point via the corners B3 and B4 of the glass substrate w1. (See FIG. 50B), the molten solder M1 is supplied in a rectangular frame shape.
  • the joining device 6 is driven and controlled by the control means 2p, which is placed in the internal space 2m of the airtight chamber 2k whose atmosphere is controlled by the atmosphere control means 2s, similar to the supply device 2 described above.
  • the moving means 2e is provided.
  • the table 2i of the moving means 2e is configured such that the glass substrate w1 can be placed in a horizontal posture with the main surface S supplied with the molten solder M1 facing upward.
  • the elevating part 2g incorporates holding means 7 for holding the glass substrate w2 in a horizontal posture with the main surface S supplied with the molten solder M2 facing downward.
  • the holding means 7 includes a holding portion 7a capable of holding the glass substrate w2 in the above-described posture, and a panel-like heating portion that generates heat by energization provided between the holding portion 7a and the glass substrate w2. 7b.
  • a holding portion 7a capable of holding the glass substrate w2 in the above-described posture
  • a panel-like heating portion that generates heat by energization provided between the holding portion 7a and the glass substrate w2. 7b.
  • FIG. 8 in order to facilitate understanding of the positional relationship between the glass substrates w ⁇ b> 1 and w ⁇ b> 2 and the heat generating portion 7 b, they are shown in a cross-sectional view.
  • the heat generating portion 7b is formed with a rectangular frame-shaped protruding portion 7c corresponding to the molten solder M2 supplied to the main surface of the glass substrate w2.
  • the protrusion 7c is in a position corresponding to the molten solder M2 in the horizontal plane and contacts a surface opposite to the surface to which the molten solder M2 is supplied.
  • the heat generating part 7b generates heat, only the molten solder M2 is efficiently heated through the protrusions 7c, and the molten state of the molten solder M2 is maintained.
  • the glass substrate w1 is placed on the table 2i with the main surface S on which the molten solder M1 is formed facing upward, and the glass substrate w2 is directed on the main surface S on which the molten solder M2 is formed downward.
  • the holding unit 7a is held in the posture.
  • the heating element of the table 2i and the heat generating portion 7b of the holding means 28 are energized to generate heat, and the molten solders M1 and M2 maintain a molten state.
  • the joining device 6 moves the elevating unit 2g and the horizontal moving unit 2h in the X, Y, and Z axis directions so that the surfaces of the molten solders M1 and M2 are in contact with each other, and the elevating unit 2g Is driven downward to slightly pressurize the contact interface between the molten solders M1 and M2. Then, the molten solders M1 and M2 are joined and integrated at the contact interface. Thereafter, the joining device 6 stops energization of the heating element of the table 2i and the heating part 7b of the holding means 7, and the joined molten solder M1 and M2 are cooled and solidified to form the joined part m. As described above, the glass panel W shown in FIG. 50A can be obtained.
  • Example 1-2 The supply cylinder of Example 1-2 of the present invention and the molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • the glass panel W manufactured by the supply device of Example 1-2 is basically the same as the glass panel W manufactured by the glass panel manufacturing line of Example 1-1, but FIG. As shown in b), there is no bonding interface in the bonding portion n for bonding the glass substrates w3 and w4, and a gap for forming a gap between the glass substrates w3 and w4. The difference is that the holding member Q is provided. In the following description, it is assumed that the dimensions of the glass substrates w3 and w4 are the same.
  • the supply device 8 of Example 1-2 includes a thread solder supply means 2a, a heating and melting means 9, a moving means 8a, an airtight chamber 8c, and a control means 2p, and further, glass in a predetermined posture.
  • a holding means 8d for holding the substrate w3 is incorporated.
  • the same components as those of the supply device 2 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Description is omitted.
  • the holding unit 8 d includes a plurality of suction portions 8 f that can suck and hold the glass substrate w ⁇ b> 3 in a horizontal posture with the main surface to which the joint portion n is to be joined facing downward, and suction portions. It is comprised by the substantially flat support part 8e to which 8f was fixed.
  • the moving means 8a of the supply device 8 includes a first elevating part 2g fixed to the left end of the upper side part of the support 2f, and a second elevating part 8b fixed to the right end of the upper side part.
  • the holding means 8d is attached to the lower end of the second elevating part 8b.
  • the said 2nd raising / lowering part 8b and the horizontal movement part 2h comprise the positioning means of the glass substrate w3 with respect to the glass substrate w4 by these cooperation, and each end surface is substantially as shown to Fig.10 (a).
  • the glass substrates w3 and w4 are opposed to each other in the horizontal direction so as to be in a straight line, and are positioned in the vertical direction so that a predetermined gap is formed between the glass substrates w3 and w4. After the vertical positioning of the glass substrates w3 and w4 is completed, the suction of the glass substrate w3 by the suction portion 8f is released, but the gap is held by the gap holding member Q.
  • the above-mentioned supply device 2 is controlled in an inert atmosphere by the atmosphere control means in that the airtight chamber 8c for storing the yarn solder supply means 2a, the heating and melting means 9 and the moving means 8a is an atmospheric atmosphere (oxidizing atmosphere). This is different from the airtight chamber 2k.
  • the structure of the supply cylinder 9a of the supply device 8 can supply the molten solder M1 to the glass substrates w3 and w4 while suppressing the progress of oxidation even in the supply process in the atmospheric atmosphere, that is, the oxidizing atmosphere. This is because.
  • the basic configuration of the heating and melting means 9 of this example is similar to that of the heating and melting means 3, but the structure of the supply cylinder and its attitude with respect to the glass substrates w3 and w4 are different. That is, as shown in FIG. 10A, the supply tube 9a of the heating and melting means 9 is provided with a melting portion 3g at the right end portion (one end portion) where the thread solder M abuts and generates the molten solder M1.
  • One opening (first opening) 3e is opened in the oxide removing portion 4 (cross hatch portion) provided integrally with the portion 3g, and the other opening (second opening) 3f is the left end surface (the other end surface).
  • a substantially circular flow passage 3d that is open at the inside is provided inside.
  • the melting portion 3g is formed in a concave shape on the upper surface of the right end of the supply cylinder 9a, and the first opening 3e is a bottom surface of the melting portion 3g, that is, a melting surface 3j on which the thread solder M abuts and melts, that is, oxide removal.
  • An opening is formed on the upper surface of the portion 4.
  • the diameter ⁇ B of the first opening 3e is less than the diameter ⁇ A of the end surface of the thread solder M that is in contact with the melting surface 3j
  • the diameter ⁇ C of the second opening 3f is less than or equal to the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4. It is. Then, after the thread solder M is fed out from the opening at the lower end of the thread solder guide portion, the end surface abuts against the melting surface 3j so as to close the first opening 3e.
  • the supply cylinder 9a of the 1-2 example extends in the horizontal direction along the axial center of the flow passage 3d as shown in FIG. 10 (a) and FIG.
  • a substantially flat guide portion 9b is provided.
  • the guide portion 9b has a protruding portion 9c protruding from the second opening 3f by a predetermined length L at the tip thereof.
  • the protruding length L of the protruding portion 9c is in accordance with the width of the joint n to be formed, and the thickness thereof is less than the size g of the outer peripheral gap k formed between the glass substrates w3 and w4.
  • the guide portion 9b realizes a function of smoothly supplying the molten solder M1 flowing out from the second opening 3f to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 as described in detail below. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 10B, which is a BB cross section of FIG. 10A, the base end of the guide portion 9b needs to be included in the second opening 3f. On the other hand, a gap through which the molten solder M1 can flow must be formed between the guide portion 9b and the flow passage 3d so that the guide portion 9b does not hinder the outflow of the molten solder M1 from the second opening 3f. .
  • the surface of the guide portion 9b is subjected to a process for improving the wettability with the molten solder M1 similarly to the molten portion 3g and the flow passage 3d. It is preferable.
  • the supply cylinder 9a provided with the guide portion 9b will be described below as an example.
  • the molten metal has high wettability
  • the molten metal has a relatively wide dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k
  • the guide portion is not necessarily an essential component.
  • the supply cylinder 9a is held in a horizontal posture so that the protruding portion 9c can be inserted into the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 disposed so as to face each other, and when supplying the molten solder M1 to the outer peripheral gap k, Since the left end surface on which the two openings 3f are formed is in contact with the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, the second opening 3f is positioned by the moving means 8a so as to be connected to the outer peripheral gap k. Accordingly, as shown in FIG.
  • the flow passage 3d is directly connected to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 to which the molten solder M1 is to be supplied, and the molten solder M1 that flows through the flow passage 3d. Fills the outer circumferential gap k without touching the surrounding atmosphere (oxygen). Furthermore, since the guide portion 9b is provided, the molten solder M1 flowing out from the second opening 3f is filled very smoothly into the outer peripheral gap k. Since the melting part 3g of the supply cylinder 9a is configured similarly to the supply cylinder 3a, it goes without saying that the oxide E1 existing on the outer peripheral surface of the thread solder M1 can be prevented from being mixed into the molten solder M1. .
  • the guide portion 9d in FIG. 10 (d) has a tip tapered along the axial center of the flow passage 3d, and the molten solder M1 flowing out of the second opening 3f flows more smoothly into the outer peripheral gap k. It is comprised so that the supply property of molten solder may improve.
  • a guide groove u for guiding the molten solder M1 to the outer peripheral gap k is formed in the guide portion 9e of FIG.
  • a plurality of guide grooves u are formed in a straight line substantially parallel to the axial center of the flow passage 3d.
  • a plurality of guide grooves are formed radially or curved. May be formed.
  • Example 1-2 the operation of the supply device 8 of Example 1-2 will be described.
  • the glass substrates w3 and w4 thrown into the supply apparatus 8 have already finished the pretreatment process, and moisture and foreign substances have been removed from the surfaces thereof.
  • the glass substrate w3 is held by the holding means 8d in a horizontal posture with the main surface to which the bonding portion n is bonded downward, and the glass is applied to the table 2i in a horizontal posture with the main surface to which the bonding portion n is bonded upward.
  • a substrate w4 is placed.
  • the supply device 8 moves the second elevating unit 8b and the horizontal moving unit 2h, and arranges the glass substrates w3 and w4 in the horizontal direction so as to face each other so that the outer peripheral end surfaces are aligned and substantially in a straight line. Positioning in the vertical direction is performed so that a predetermined gap is formed between the substrates w3 and w4. Thereafter, the supply device 8 cancels the suction of the glass substrate w3 by the suction portion 8f, and lifts the second lifting / lowering portion 8b to retract the holding means 8d from above the table 2i.
  • the supply device 8 generates heat from the heating element built in the table 2i and heats the glass substrates w3 and w4 to about the melting temperature of the molten solder M1. Then, the first elevating part 2g and the horizontal moving part 2h are moved, and the protruding part 9c of the guide part 9b is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k at one corner of the glass substrates w3 and w4 held by the gap maintaining member Q.
  • the supply tube 9a is positioned so that the left end surface of the guide portion 9b is in contact with the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4.
  • the supply device 8 drives the motor of the yarn solder delivery unit and feeds the yarn solder M from the yarn solder supply unit.
  • the drawn-out solder Y comes into contact with the molten surface 3j heated by the heater 3c, and a molten solder M1 is generated.
  • the oxide E1 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the thread solder M is separated from the molten solder M1 by the oxide removing unit 4, and only clean molten solder M1 in which the oxide E1 is not mixed flows into the flow passage 3d.
  • the clean molten solder M1 in which the oxidation is suppressed is supplied to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4.
  • the horizontal movement unit 2h moves the glass substrates w3 and w4 so that the supply cylinder 9a goes around the outer periphery of the glass substrates w3 and w4 while maintaining the vertical positional relationship between the supply cylinder 9a and the glass substrates w3 and w4.
  • the molten solder M1 is supplied to all of the outer peripheral gaps k of the glass substrates w3 and w4, and the molten solder M1 is filled in a rectangular frame shape.
  • the heating function of the glass substrate w3 is provided in the holding means 8d, and the second elevating part 8b is configured to be movable in the X and Y axis directions, so that the above can be achieved without using the gap holding member Q.
  • the molten solder M1 can be supplied to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 by a similar operation.
  • the glass substrates w3 and w4 have the same dimensions for ease of understanding. However, even if the dimensions are different, the joining apparatus can be configured by appropriately devising the structure of the supply cylinder 9a. That is, when the planar dimensions of the glass substrates w3 and w4 are different and the end surfaces of both the glass substrates w3 and w4 are not aligned and a step is formed, the left end surface of the supply tube 9a may be shaped according to the step. .
  • FIG. 11 (a) is an example of FIG. 51 (b), that is, a glass having a joining portion n having a surplus portion n1 in a portion protruding from the end face as well as the outer peripheral gap k of the glass substrates w3 and w4.
  • a supply cylinder 9f shown in FIG. 11A is a second opening 9h having a diameter ⁇ 3 larger than the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k of the glass substrates w3 and w4, in other words, the second opening 9h formed so as to include the outer peripheral gap k.
  • the surplus portion n1 is formed in a portion larger than the outer peripheral gap k in the second opening 9h. This surplus portion n1 becomes a barrier to the atmosphere, and the progress of oxidation after the supply due to the molten solder M1 supplied to the outer circumferential gap k coming into contact with the atmosphere is suppressed.
  • the supply cylinder 9i in FIG. 11B removes bubbles and foreign substances existing on the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 and improves the activity of the surface so that the wettability of the molten solder M1 with respect to the glass substrate.
  • a contact surface 9l that contacts the supply surface to which the molten solder M1 is supplied is provided on the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4.
  • contact surface 9l in FIG.11 (b) has comprised the protrusion part 9k of the guide part 9j so that it can contact with the main surface of the glass substrates w3 and w4, it is comprised in ninety-fold shape, 9l may be appropriately configured so as not to impair the flow of the molten solder M1 in the outer peripheral gap k.
  • Example 1-3 A molten metal supply cylinder and a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder according to the first to third examples of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • the basic configuration of the supply device is the same as that shown in FIG. 9, and a description of the structure and operation of the entire supply device will be omitted.
  • the supply device in the first to second examples shown in FIG. 12 supplies the molten solder M1 horizontally to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4.
  • This method is different from the supply device of the first and second examples in that a method of supplying the molten solder M1 vertically is used and no guide is provided.
  • the supply cylinder 10 shown in FIG. 12 (a) is a bottomed circular container with an upper opening.
  • a heater 10 d for melting the thread solder M is wound around the outer periphery of the supply cylinder 10.
  • An annular protrusion formed at the center of the supply cylinder 10 and having an upper surface serving as the melting surface 10b is a melting portion 10a that generates the molten solder M1, and the oxide removing portion 10i is provided integrally on the upper portion of the melting portion 10a.
  • the first opening 10f opens on the melting surface 10b
  • the second opening 10g opens on the lower surface
  • a flow passage 10e formed so as to connect the first opening 10f and the second opening 10g is provided in the center.
  • the diameter ⁇ B of the first opening 10f is less than the diameter ⁇ A of the thread solder M
  • the diameter ⁇ C of the second opening 10g is the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4. It is below dimension g.
  • the supply cylinder 10 is formed with a storage portion 10c for storing the removed oxide E2 so as to form an annular groove around the melting portion 10a, and the oxide E2 stored in the storage portion 10c. Is configured to be discharged at an oxide discharge portion (not shown).
  • the supply cylinder 10 is configured such that the second opening 10g is connected to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 facing each other in a posture in which the main surface on which the joint portion n is to be formed stands in the vertical direction. k and the flow passage 10e are held in a connectable posture.
  • the lower surface on which the second opening 10g is formed contacts the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, so that the second opening 10g is positioned in a state of being connected to the outer peripheral gap k.
  • the thread solder M fed from the thread solder supply section comes into contact with the melting surface 10b, and the molten solder M1 is generated.
  • the molten solder M1 is quickly supplied by gravity to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4.
  • the structure of the supply cylinder 10 and the positional relationship between the glass substrates w3 and w4 are the same as those of the supply cylinder 9a. Needless to say, mixing can be suppressed, and oxidation of the molten solder M1 in the supply process can be suppressed.
  • the supply cylinder 10j shown in FIG. 12 (b) has basically the same configuration as the supply cylinder 10 except that the diameter ⁇ C of the second opening 10l is larger than the dimension g of the outer circumferential gap k. According to the supply cylinder 10j having such a configuration, the glass panel W having the surplus portion n1 can be formed in the same manner as the supply cylinder 9a described with reference to FIG.
  • the supply cylinder 10m shown in FIG. 13 has basically the same configuration as the supply cylinder 10, but differs in that it has a tubular guide portion 10n connected below the second opening 10g. According to the supply cylinder 10m in this example, the molten solder M1 is more smoothly supplied to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4.
  • Example 2-1 A molten metal supply cylinder and a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder according to Example 2-1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • FIG. 19, 20, 23, 24 which shows the modification of FIG. 14, the same code
  • the supply device 11 of Example 2-1 manufactures the glass panel W described with reference to FIGS. 51A and 51B.
  • the supply device 11 has a configuration suitable for automation. It comprises a placement means 11a, a thread solder supply means 11d, a molten solder supply means 12, a moving means 11g, a control means 11o, an airtight chamber 11l and an atmosphere control means 11r.
  • a placement means 11a a thread solder supply means 11d
  • a molten solder supply means 12 a moving means 11g
  • control means 11o an airtight chamber 11l
  • an atmosphere control means 11r an atmosphere control means
  • reference numeral 11b denotes a first glass substrate (hereinafter referred to as the first substrate in Example 2-1 and the same in Example 2-2) through the gap holding member w3 and the second.
  • the glass substrate (hereinafter referred to as the second substrate in the 2-1 example and the same in the 2-2 example) w4 is positioned so as to be opposed to each other and a predetermined gap is formed between the main surfaces S. It is a table on which the unjoined body W0 composed of the glass substrates w3 and w4 can be placed in a horizontal posture.
  • This table 11b has a built-in panel-like heating element capable of heating the unbonded body W0 as a preferred configuration, and the glass substrates w3 and w4 are heated to about the melting temperature of the molten solder by this heating element.
  • the glass substrate w3 and w4 can be prevented from being damaged by the stress generated by the temperature difference between the molten solder and the glass substrates w3 and w4, and the wettability between the molten solder and the glass substrates w3 and w4 is increased. Bondability with the glass substrates w3 and w4 can be improved.
  • Numeral 11c is a table moving unit provided with a table 11b at the top and capable of moving vertically and horizontally with respect to the paper surface.
  • the movement direction of the table moving unit 11c and the axis parallel to the paper surface are the X axis and the vertical axis is the Y axis, and both are orthogonal to the X and Y axes.
  • the vertical axis to be used is the Z axis.
  • each of the glass substrates w3 and w4 constituting the unbonded body W0 is substantially parallel to a plane including the X axis and the Y axis, and the outer peripheral end surface of the unbonded body W0 is substantially parallel to the Z axis. Is placed.
  • thread solder supply means 11d which is an example of a configuration for supplying a raw material for forming molten solder
  • reference numeral 11e denotes a bobbin around which a wire-shaped material (hereinafter referred to as thread solder) M made of SnAgAl-based alloy is wound.
  • This is a thread solder sending unit that is rotated by a motor or the like (not shown) to send the thread solder M quantitatively.
  • Reference numeral 11f denotes a substantially tubular thread solder guide portion having both ends open and having a through hole that is a guide passage through which the thread solder M can be inserted, and is positioned and fixed to the fixing member 11k of the moving means 11g.
  • the thread solder M formed to have a diameter of about 2 mm is used.
  • the tip of the thread solder M wound around the thread solder delivery unit 11e is from the thread solder delivery unit 11e. It is pulled out, inserted into the guide passage from the introduction opening of the thread solder guide portion 11f, protrudes from the supply opening, and is set to take a posture toward the inlet 14a of the supply cylinder 14 (see FIG. 14).
  • the molten solder supply unit 13 includes a supply tube 14, a guide unit 16 attached to the tip of the supply tube 14, and a support unit 15 that is a floating mechanism that supports the supply tube 14.
  • reference numeral 14 h is a cylindrical body having a substantially cylindrical shape whose left end is reduced in diameter.
  • the cylindrical body 14h has one surface (hereinafter referred to as a melting surface in Examples 2-1 and 2-2) 14e provided on the upper right portion of the cylindrical body 14h and the other surface (hereinafter referred to as the second surface) provided on the left end.
  • a melting surface in Examples 2-1 and 2-2 is provided on the upper right portion of the cylindrical body 14h and the other surface (hereinafter referred to as the second surface) provided on the left end.
  • -1 example and 2-2 example are referred to as discharge surfaces.
  • the supply cylinder 14 of this example has annular weirs 14g on both sides of the melting surface 14e, and the bottom surface of the concave portion surrounded by the two weirs 14g is the melting surface 14e.
  • the cylindrical body 14h is preferably formed of stainless steel or the like having a high thermal conductivity.
  • the molten surface 14e and the discharge surface 14f are provided with a Cr layer or the like rich in wettability with the molten solder M1. It is desirable to form.
  • Reference numeral 14d is a heating member that is wound in a coil shape along the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical body 14h between the melting surface 14e and the discharge surface 14f, and heats the cylindrical body 14h above the melting temperature of the thread solder M.
  • a heating control unit 12a for controlling the heat generation temperature and the heat generation pattern is connected to the heating member 14d.
  • Reference numeral 14c denotes a flow path that penetrates the inside of the cylindrical body 14h, and includes a first opening (hereinafter referred to as an inflow port in Examples 2-1 and 2-2) 14a opened on the melting surface 14e, and a discharge surface 14f.
  • a second opening hereinafter referred to as a discharge port in Examples 2-1 and 2-2
  • the inflow port 14a has a diameter ⁇ B less than the diameter ⁇ A of the thread solder M. It is.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the flow path 14c is not limited to a circular shape, and may be a rectangular shape, for example.
  • a Cr layer having high wettability with the molten solder M1 is formed on the surface of the flow path 14c so that the molten solder M1 flows smoothly.
  • a layer made of Al, Mo, W, V, Nb, Ta, Ag or Ni may be provided.
  • the flow path 14c be subjected to nitriding treatment as a corrosion preventing treatment so that the surface thereof is eroded by the molten solder M1 and impurities are not mixed into the molten solder M1.
  • the discharge port 14b has a diameter D1 that is the diameter exceeding the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k.
  • the reached molten solder M1 comes into contact with the outer peripheral end surfaces of the first substrate w3 and the second substrate w4 and is supplied not only to the outer peripheral gap k but also to the outer peripheral end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), in the glass panel W manufactured using the discharge port 14b of this example, a joint portion n including a protruding portion n1 that is in close contact with the outer peripheral end surface is formed in the outer peripheral gap k. Is done.
  • the diameter D1 of the discharge port 17a can be set to be equal to or less than the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k as in the supply cylinder 17 shown in FIG. 19A in which the illustration of the molten solder M1 is omitted for understanding.
  • the discharge port 17a since the discharge port 17a is opened only in the outer peripheral gap k, the molten solder M1 reaching the discharge port 17a is filled only in the outer peripheral gap k. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), in the glass panel W manufactured using the supply cylinder 17 of this example, the joint portion n is formed only in the outer peripheral gap k.
  • the shape of the terminal portion of the flow path 14c is substantially reduced in diameter toward the discharge surface 14f so that the discharge port 17a on the discharge surface 14f on which the molten solder M1 is actually discharged is less than or equal to the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k.
  • a conical shape is preferred.
  • the tip of the thread solder M is set on the thread solder guide 11f in a posture toward the inlet 14a of the supply cylinder 14. Accordingly, the thread solder M sent out quantitatively from the thread solder delivery section 11e comes into contact with the melting surface 14e in such a posture that the tip end face closes the inflow port 14a.
  • the thread solder M that has touched the melting surface 14e heated by the heating member 14d is melted to form a molten solder M1.
  • the molten solder M1 flows in from the inflow port 14a, flows in the flow path 14c toward the left end, and is discharged from the discharge port 14b.
  • the cylindrical body 14h is positioned and fixed to the fixing member 11k so that the positional relationship between the thread solder M fed from the thread solder guide portion 11f and the melting surface 14e can be maintained.
  • the supply device 11 of the present example is an example in which the solid solder M supplied by the thread solder supply means 11d is melted by the supply cylinder 14 itself to form the molten solder M1.
  • a configuration in which molten solder is extruded from its container that can be stored in a molten state by its own weight or pressure and supplied to the supply cylinder can be incorporated in the supply device 11, and other supply mechanisms can be incorporated as long as the object of the present invention is not contradicted. You can also
  • the guide portion 16 is inserted into the outer circumferential gap k of the unjoined body W0 in the direction (hereinafter referred to as the insertion direction) from the outer peripheral end surface of the unjoined body W0 along the horizontal plane as indicated by an arrow Y1 in FIG.
  • the molten solder M1 discharged from the discharge port 14b of the supply cylinder 14 is guided and supplied to the outer peripheral gap k. Therefore, the guide part 16 is fitted so as to cross the discharge port 14b in an attachment groove formed at a substantially central part of the discharge surface 14f in the Z-axis direction.
  • a reference numeral 16h denotes a thin plate-like iron portion that is as thin as T2 with respect to the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k and protrudes from the discharge surface 14f of the supply cylinder 14 by a length L2. It is.
  • the iron part 16 includes an upper surface (first plane) 16i facing the main surface S1 of the first substrate w3 of the unjoined body W0 placed on the mounting means 11a via a predetermined first gap G1, and a first surface 16i. It has a main surface S2 of the two substrates w4 and a lower surface (second plane) 16j facing each other with a predetermined second gap G2.
  • the first gap G1 and the second gap G2 have the same size.
  • the molten solder M1 supplied to the outer peripheral gap k through the discharge port 14b is introduced into the upper surface 16i and the lower surface 16j of the iron part 16 and spreads between the gaps G1 and G2.
  • the wet spread of the molten solder M1 remains at the tip of the iron part 16h (the tip in FIG. 17 and the left end in FIG. 18A). Therefore, the width of the supplied molten solder M1 from the outer edge of the unjoined body W0 is regulated by the length L2 of the iron part 16h.
  • the molten solder supply unit 13 is moved horizontally along the outer edge of the unjoined body W0 in the state where the gaps G1 and G2 are filled with the molten solder M1, the molten solder M1 supplied to the gaps G1 and G2 by the horizontal movement.
  • the molten solder M1 is applied to the glass substrates w3 and w4 by the flow of the molten solder M1, and the molten solder M1 fills the outer peripheral gap k with a substantially constant width along the outer edge of the unjoined body W0.
  • the supply device 11 of this example includes an ultrasonic oscillation unit 12 b that transmits ultrasonic waves to the iron part 16 h as shown in FIGS. 14 and 16, and melts filling the gaps G ⁇ b> 1 and G ⁇ b> 2.
  • Ultrasonic wave is applied to the contact interface between the solder M1 and the glass substrates w3 and w4 through the iron part 16h to activate the solder and adjust the solder to the contact interface, and it is possible to remove bubbles and foreign substances existing on the contact interface. It is configured as follows. It is more preferable to apply ultrasonic waves so that the iron part 16h vibrates along the insertion direction of the guide part 16.
  • At least the upper surface 16i and the lower surface 16j of the iron portion 16h are preferably provided with a layer made of Cr, Al, Mo, W, V, Nb, Ag, Ni, or Ta in order to improve wettability with the molten solder M1. Further, it is desirable to perform a nitriding treatment or the like as an anti-corrosion treatment so that the iron part 16h is eroded by the molten solder M1 and impurities are not mixed into the molten solder M1. Furthermore, in order to improve the followability of the molten solder M1, it is preferable to form irregularities that intersect the moving direction of the iron part 16h on the upper surface 16i and the lower surface 16j of the iron part 16h.
  • reference numeral 16a is a first contact portion
  • reference numeral 16f is a second contact portion.
  • the first contact portion 16a is composed of a pair of protrusions 16b and 16c protruding from the upper surface 16i of the iron portion 16h.
  • the protrusions 16b and 16c have a first contact surface 16d that contacts the main surface S1 of the first substrate w3 in a state where the guide portion 16 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k, and the length in the X-axis direction is supplied. It is L1 on the basis of the discharge surface 14f of the cylinder 14, and the height in the Z-axis direction is substantially the same as the first gap G1.
  • the second contact portion 16f includes a pair of protrusions 16m and 16l protruding from the lower surface 16j of the iron portion 16h.
  • Each of the protrusions 16m and 16l has a second contact surface 16g that contacts the main surface S2 of the second substrate w4 in a state where the guide portion 16 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k, and the first contact portion 16a and the first contact portion 16a.
  • the length is L1
  • its height is almost the same size as the second gap G2.
  • the first contact surface 16d and the second contact surface 16g are convex in the width direction of the guide portion 16 (the direction orthogonal to the insertion direction of the guide portion 16 in the horizontal plane) because of the relationship with the floating mechanism described later.
  • the cylindrical surface is formed.
  • the thickness of the guide portion 16 where the contact portions 16a and 16f are formed is equal to the thickness T2 of the iron portion 16h and the height of the contact portions 16a and 16f (from the upper surface 16i of the iron portion 16h). 1 to the contact surface 16d and the height from the lower surface 16j of the iron part 16h to the second contact surface 16g).
  • the thickness T1 is equal to or slightly smaller than the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k so that the contact portions 16a and 16f are in contact with the main surfaces S1 and S2 of each glass substrate and can slide in the outer peripheral gap k. Dimensions.
  • the contact surfaces 16d and 16g are in contact with the main surfaces S1 and S2, and the guide portion 16 is fitted in the outer peripheral gap k.
  • the height from the upper surface 16i of the iron part 16h, which is the height of the first contact part 16a, to the first contact surface 16d is the same as the gap G1
  • the iron part is the height of the second contact part 16f.
  • the height from the lower surface 16j of 16h to the second contact surface 16g is the same as the gap G2.
  • the contact parts 16a and 16f are always sliding with the main surfaces S1 and S2. Since the guide portion 16 moves, the sizes of the gaps G1 and G2 are always maintained constant.
  • the height of the first contact portion 16a and the second contact portion 16f in this example that is, the dimensions of the first gap G1 and the second gap G2 are the same, but this dimension depends on the characteristics of the molten solder M1. What is necessary is just to set suitably according to it, and you may comprise so that the dimension of both may differ. In this case, since the supplied molten solder M1 flows down by gravity, it is preferable to make the first gap G1 larger than the second gap G2.
  • the first contact surface 16d and the second contact surface 16g are preferably subjected to a Ni water repellent plating process or a surface smoothing process, which is a process for improving the slidability between the glass substrates w3 and w4.
  • the contact portions 16a and 16f are respectively provided with recesses 17c and 17d in the intermediate portion along the insertion direction Y1 of the guide portion 16 in the drawing. You may form.
  • the contact portions 16a and 16f may be configured to make point contact with the main surfaces S1 and S2.
  • the contact portions 16a and 16f are corners of the face C1 and the side face C2 facing the outer peripheral end surface of the unjoined body W0 in the insertion direction Y1 shown in FIG. It is preferable to form a C plane or an R plane.
  • the C surface and the R surface can be formed by applying cutting, abrasive processing, etching, or the like to the corners of the surfaces C1 and C2.
  • the contact portions 16a and 16f have a certain amount in the Z-axis direction in order to cope with fluctuations in the position and size of the outer circumferential gap k of the unjoined body W0. It is desirable to have elasticity that can only bend.
  • reference numeral 16e is a first guide groove provided at the upper part of the iron part 16h
  • reference numeral 16k is a second guide groove provided at the lower part.
  • the guide grooves 16e and 16k are provided with projections 16b of the contact parts 16a and 16f in the width direction of the guide part 16, A rectangular groove is formed between 16c and 16m and 16l.
  • the guide grooves 16e and 16k are provided so as to divide the center of each of the contact portions 16a and 16f, and the iron portion 16h and the discharge port 14b are directly connected via the guide grooves 16e and 16k.
  • the shape of the guide grooves 16e and 16k may be determined as appropriate according to the fluidity of the molten solder M1, but in order to smoothly guide the molten solder M1 to the iron part 16h,
  • the bottom surface of the guide groove 16e is formed in the same plane as the upper surface 16i of the iron portion 16h
  • the bottom surface of the guide groove 16k is formed in the same plane as the lower surface 16j of the iron portion 16h, and the step at the connecting portion between the guide grooves 16e and 16k It is preferable that there is no.
  • a layer made of Cr, Al, Mo, W, V, Nb, Ta, Ag or Ni on the inner surfaces of the guide grooves 16e and 16k in order to improve wettability with the molten solder M1, and further melt It is desirable to perform a nitriding treatment or the like as an anti-corrosion treatment so that impurities are not mixed into the molten solder M1 after being eroded by the solder M1.
  • the configuration of the guide groove is not limited to the embodiment shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, and contact portions 18a and 18d are provided at the center portion of the iron portion 16h in the width direction as in the guide portion 18 shown in FIG. 19B.
  • the upper and lower guide grooves 18b and 18c and 18e and 18f communicating from the discharge port 14b to the upper surface 16i and the lower surface 16j may be arranged on both sides of the contact portions 18a and 18d.
  • the iron part and the contact part may have an integral structure, but the iron part and the contact part have different functions and different characteristics. Therefore, for example, as in the guide part 19 shown in FIG. 20, the iron part 19f is made of a material having high wettability with the molten solder M1, and the contact parts 19a and 19c are made of a material that is excellent in slidability with the glass substrate and hardly wears. It is also possible to form the guide part by forming and assembling the separate iron part 19f and the contact parts 19a and 19c by an appropriate method such as bonding or screwing. Furthermore, a soldering part or a contact part may be formed on the discharge surface of the supply cylinder, or they may be integrally formed.
  • the support portion 15 of this example indirectly supports the guide portion 16 via the supply tube 14, and also the Z-axis direction (thickness direction of the outer peripheral gap k) and the axis of the supply tube 14 (insertion axis of the guide portion 16).
  • a floating mechanism is constructed that follows the force acting on the guide portion 16 only in the vicinity of the guide portion 16 and swings the guide portion 16 (that is, does not move in the horizontal plane).
  • reference numeral 15 g is a columnar support member connected to the right end surface of the supply cylinder 14.
  • the small diameter portion 15 i is adjacent to the right end, and the large diameter portion 15 h is adjacent to the small diameter portion 15 i in the axial direction. Is formed.
  • the small diameter portion 15i is supported by a bearing 15j provided on the bearing member 15f, and the support member 15g is rotatable around the axis of the supply cylinder 14. Further, as shown in FIG. 15 which is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the support member 15g and the bearing member 15f of FIG. 14 as viewed from the left side, the large diameter portion 15h has a substantially fan shape with the lower part cut away.
  • a pair of coiled compression springs 15k are inserted in a compressed state between the notch of the large diameter portion 15h and both side surfaces of the protrusion 15l provided on the inner surface of the bearing member 15f.
  • the pair of compression springs are adjusted so that the guide portion 16 is in a horizontal posture when there is no load.
  • Reference numeral 15e is a U-shaped moving member opened on the left side, and the bearing member 15f is attached to the inner side surface.
  • Reference numeral 15b is a linear guide as a linear drive member, and a moving element is attached to the outer surface of the moving member 15e to move the moving member 15e only in the Z-axis direction.
  • Reference numeral 15a is a U-shaped casing that opens to the left that is slightly larger than the moving member 15e. A rail of the linear guide 15b is attached to the inner surface, and the casing 15a is positioned on the fixed member 11k of the moving means 11g. It is fixed (see FIG. 16).
  • Reference numeral 15c is a pair of elastic members incorporated in a compressed state between the outer upper arm surface of the moving member 15e and the upper arm inner surface of the casing 15a and between the lower arm outer surface of the moving member 15e and the lower arm inner surface of the casing 15a.
  • Reference numeral 15d denotes a coil-like compression spring.
  • One end of the casing 15a is inserted into a through hole (not shown) provided in the upper arm and the lower arm of the casing 15a and the compression spring 15c so as to be freely movable, and the upper arm of the moving member 15e.
  • the other end is fixed to the lower arm and is a regulating shaft that regulates the radial movement of the compression spring 15c.
  • the support portion 15 having such a structure performs the following operation. That is, as shown in FIG. 22, for example, when the position along the Z axis of the outer peripheral gap k of the unjoined body W0 fluctuates due to inadequate combination accuracy of the glass substrates w3 and w4 and inadequate running accuracy of the table moving unit 11c.
  • a constant force around the axis of the supply tube 14 or along the Z-axis direction acts on the guide portion 16 via the contact portions 16a and 16f that contact the glass substrates w3 and w4.
  • the force around the axis of the supply cylinder 14 is transmitted to the support member 15g via the supply cylinder 14.
  • the support member 15g is restricted in the direction of movement only in the rotational direction by the bearing member 15f, and the large-diameter portion 15h is supported by a pair of compression springs 15k. Move only to. Further, the Z-axis direction force acting on the guide portion 16 is transmitted to the moving member 15e via the supply cylinder 14 and the like. Since the moving direction of the moving member 15e is restricted by the linear moving member 15b so as to be movable only in the Z-axis direction and is supported by the compression spring 15c, the moving member 15e moves only in the Z-axis direction according to the applied force.
  • the moving means 11g is composed of a gate-shaped support 11h and an elevating part 11i fixed to the upper side of the support 11h, and is moved up and down in the Z-axis direction in the figure at the bottom of the elevating part 11i.
  • a lifting shaft 11j that turns in the ⁇ -axis direction is provided.
  • the thread solder guide portion 11f and the molten solder supply portion 13 are connected to the lower end portion of the lifting shaft 11j via the fixing member 11k.
  • control means 11o is comprised by the control part 11q connected with each said component of the supply apparatus 11 via the telecommunication line 11p, and controls operation
  • control unit 11q is configured by a computer, and the calculation unit (CPU) reads out the program and various data stored in the storage unit (memory) and appropriately calculates them, whereby the yarn solder sending unit 11e.
  • the hermetic chamber 11 l is configured with a housing 11 m that forms a hermetic space 11 n that encloses the above-described components of the supply device 11.
  • the atmosphere control means 11r includes a supply pump and a gas supply unit 11t capable of supplying a predetermined gas stored therein at a predetermined pressure, and a vacuum pump that vacuums the airtight space 11n of the airtight chamber 11l.
  • a gas supply unit 11t, and a vacuum pump 11u are connected to the airtight space 11n.
  • the airtight space 11n is controlled to a predetermined atmosphere.
  • a plurality of kinds of gases applied according to the use of the glass panel for example, argon gas as an inert gas, nitrogen gas, hydrogen gas as a reducing gas, carbon monoxide gas, Oxygen gas, which is an oxidizing gas, can be separated and stored, and these gases can be mixed at a predetermined ratio and supplied to the airtight space 11n by a mixing valve provided in the gas supply unit 11t.
  • gases applied according to the use of the glass panel for example, argon gas as an inert gas, nitrogen gas, hydrogen gas as a reducing gas, carbon monoxide gas, Oxygen gas, which is an oxidizing gas
  • the supply device 11 having the above configuration will be described below. First, it is a preparation process. As shown in FIG. 16, the unjoined body W0 in which the main surfaces S1 and S2 are opposed to each other through a predetermined gap by the gap holding member Q is placed at a predetermined position on the table 11b in a horizontal posture. Next, when the supply device 11 is activated, the supply device 11 makes the airtight space 11n airtight and exhausts the air with the vacuum pump 11u to bring the inside of the airtight space 11n into a vacuum state.
  • the supply device 11 supplies a gas containing oxygen at a predetermined ratio from the gas supply unit 11t to the airtight space 11n, and the molten solder M1 made of SnAgAl-based solder containing an easily oxidizable element is joined to the glass substrates w3 and w4. Easy atmosphere. Further, the supply device 11 generates heat from the heating element built in the table 11b, heats the unbonded body W0 to about the melting temperature of the molten solder M1, and further applies ultrasonic waves to be applied to the molten solder M1 to the iron part 16h. The ultrasonic oscillator 12b is oscillated to transmit to
  • the supply device 11 lowers the lifting shaft 11j by the lifting and lowering portion 11i and further turns it when necessary to position the molten solder supply portion 13 at a predetermined position.
  • the molten solder supply portion 13 is positioned, as shown in FIG. 14, the molten solder supply portion 13 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k of the unjoined body W0 in the Z-axis direction.
  • the discharge surface 14f of the supply tube 14 and the outer peripheral end surface of the unjoined body W0 are arranged in parallel.
  • the supply device 11 horizontally moves the table moving unit 11c so that the discharge surface 14f of the supply cylinder 14 and the outer peripheral end surface of the unjoined body W0 are opposed to each other with a very small gap.
  • Position W0 at a predetermined position.
  • the guide portion 16 is inserted into the outer circumferential gap k of the unjoined body W0.
  • the corners of the contact portions 16a and 16f of the guide portion 16 are as described above. Since the C surface and the R surface are formed, the contact portions 16a and 16f are smoothly inserted into the outer peripheral gap k.
  • the guide portion 16 is supported by the support portion 15 that is a floating mechanism, for example, even if the center of the outer peripheral gap k and the guide portion 16 in the Z-axis direction is different, the difference follows the difference.
  • the moving contact portions 16a and 16f are inserted into the outer peripheral gap k.
  • the contact portions 16a and 16f come into contact with the main surfaces S1 and S2 of the glass substrates w3 and w4, respectively, and therefore the guide portion 16 is fitted into the outer peripheral gap k.
  • the iron part 16h is positioned substantially at the center of the outer circumferential gap k in the Z-axis direction, and gaps G1 and G2 are formed between the glass substrates w3 and w4 and the iron part 16h.
  • the supply device 11 drives the motor of the thread solder delivery part 11e shown in FIG. 16, and feeds the thread solder M from the lower end of the thread solder guide part 11f.
  • the unwound yarn solder M is brought into contact with the melting surface 14e of the supply cylinder 14 heated by the heating member 14d at a temperature equal to or higher than the melting temperature of the yarn solder M, thereby forming a molten solder M1.
  • the diameter ⁇ B of the inlet 14a opened to the melt surface 14e is smaller than the diameter ⁇ A of the thread solder M, even if oxide is generated on the outer peripheral surface of the thread solder M, the oxide is not in the inlet 14a.
  • the supply device 11 continuously sends out the thread solder M at a constant speed until the filling operation is completed, and supplies the molten solder M1 to the flow path 14c. Since the thickness of the oxide layer formed on the surface of the thread solder M stored in the atmosphere is usually about several tens of ⁇ m, the difference in diameter between the thread solder M and the inlet 14a ( ⁇ A ⁇ B) Is sufficient if it is about 1 mm.
  • the oxide removed at the melting surface 14e in the supply step is deposited around the inlet 14a while being restricted in flow by the weir 14g, and then swept away by the subsequent oxide to reach the lower surface of the supply cylinder 14, where It is collected by the collecting means that does not.
  • the molten solder M1 flowing into the flow path 14c is discharged from the discharge port 14b and flows in the upper and lower guide grooves 16e and 16k of the guide portion 16 as shown in FIG. Is introduced into the gap G2.
  • the molten solder M1 supplied from the supply cylinder 14 passes through the guide grooves 16e and 16k in a state of being substantially sealed by the glass substrates w3 and W4 and the discharge surface 14f and not touching oxygen, and is supplied to the gaps G1 and G2.
  • the sealing quality in the glass panel can be improved.
  • the supply device 11 forms a rectangular frame around the outer peripheral edge of the unjoined body W0 while maintaining the horizontal positional relationship between the molten solder supply section 13 and the unjoined body W0.
  • the table moving unit 11c is caused to travel at a constant speed in the X-axis or Y-axis direction so that the guide unit 16 goes around, thereby moving the unjoined body W0 horizontally.
  • the molten solder M1 supplied to the gaps G1 and G2 wets the main surfaces S1 and S2 of the glass substrates w3 and w4 and fills the outer peripheral gap k with the width of the length L2 of the guide portion 16 while being applied. It will be done.
  • the supply device 11 controls the movement of the unjoined body W0 in the X and Y axis directions by the table moving portion 11c, as shown in FIG. 21, which is a partially enlarged plan view of FIG. And the movement control in the ⁇ -axis direction of the molten solder supply unit 13 by the elevating shaft 11j are combined, the guide unit 16 is horizontally moved along an arcuate path, and the outer peripheral gap k at the four corners is filled with the molten solder M1.
  • the contact parts 16a and 16f are always in contact with the main surfaces S1 and S2 of the glass substrates w3 and w4 as shown in FIG.
  • the movement of the iron part 16h in the direction is regulated by the contact parts 16a and 16f.
  • the iron part 16h does not come into contact with the glass substrates w3 and w4, and the main surfaces S1 and S2 are not damaged so as to hinder the bonding property with the bonding part n.
  • the sizes of the gaps G1 and G2 between the glass substrates w3 and w4 and the iron part 16h, which are one element for satisfactorily applying the molten solder M1 to the glass substrates w3 and w4, are the gaps G1 and G2.
  • the contact portions 16a and 16f projected from the iron portion 16h at a height corresponding to the height are maintained during the supplying process. As a result, the bonding strength between the bonding portion n and the glass substrates w3 and w4 can be made uniform.
  • the guide portion 16 is supported by the support portion 15 which is a floating mechanism, there is a case where the outer peripheral gap k of the unjoined body W0 as shown in FIG. Even when the travel route of the table moving part 11c is inclined by an angle ⁇ with respect to the outer peripheral gap k as shown in FIG. Move up and down. As a result, the gaps G1 and G2 between the guide portion 16 and the glass substrates w3 and w4 are kept constant.
  • the joint is formed through a molten solder cooling process for cooling and solidifying the filled molten solder M1. Then, the glass substrates w3 and w4 are joined to form the glass panel W.
  • This cooling step may be performed by stopping the heat generation of the heating body while the unjoined body W0 is placed on the table 11b shown in FIG. 16, or the unjoined body W0 is removed from the table 11b and performed separately. Also good.
  • the table 11b is structured so as to be detachable from the table moving unit 11c, and the table 11b itself on which the unjoined body W0 is placed can be replaced at every supply process It is desirable to do.
  • the guide portion 16 slides the contact portion outside the joint portion for protection of the wiring pattern, such as a glass panel in which the wiring pattern incorporated in the flat image display device is formed inside the joint portion.
  • the glass substrates w3 and w4 the jointability of the joint portion existing in the sliding portion between the contact portions 16a and 16f is inferior to the non-sliding portion due to the sliding between the contact portions 16a and 16f.
  • the joints that exist in the region become wasteful and the width of the joints must be relatively wide. Therefore, when it is necessary to form a relatively narrow joint portion, it is preferable to use the guide portion 20 shown in FIG.
  • the contact parts 20a and 20c are arranged at the tip of the iron part 20e in the insertion direction Y1 of the guide part 20.
  • the molten solder M1 discharged from the discharge port 14b of the supply cylinder 14 is directly supplied to the iron part 20e, no guide groove is provided.
  • the iron part 20e does not contact the glass substrates w3 and w4, and the supplied molten solder M1 wets and spreads the upper and lower surfaces of the iron part 20e.
  • the gap between the molten solders M1 is filled by the contact portions 20a and 20c, the molten solder M1 can be filled with a relatively narrow width from the outer edge of the unjoined body.
  • the molten solder can be filled in the outer peripheral gap with a substantially constant width along the outer edge of the unjoined body.
  • the first contact portion 16a is disposed on the main surface S1 of the first substrate w3.
  • both the second contact portions 16f are in contact with the main surface S2 of the two substrates w4 simultaneously, the contact portions 21a and 21b are always in contact with the main surfaces S1 and S2 as in the guide portion 21 shown in FIG.
  • it may be configured to contact the glass substrates w3 and w4 when necessary.
  • the basic structure of the guide portion 21 is the same as that of the guide portion 16; the iron portion 16h, the first contact portion 21a protruding from the upper surface of the iron portion 16h, and the first protrusion protruding from the lower surface of the iron portion 16h.
  • the thickness T1 of the guide portion 21 in the contact portions 21a and 21b is less than the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k. Therefore, when the guide portion 21 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k, the first contact portion 21a faces the main surface S1 of the first substrate w3 via the first gap, and similarly the second contact portion 21b.
  • each contact surface formed on the contact portion of the guide portion may be a flat surface, and only one on one surface of the iron portion.
  • a contact portion may be formed. Even in such a configuration, in a predetermined case such as when the dimensional accuracy of the outer peripheral gap of the unjoined body is high or when the traveling accuracy of the table moving unit is high, contact between the main surface of the glass substrate and the iron portion is avoided. The action exerted by the contact portion can prevent the glass substrate from being damaged, and thus can exhibit the effect of enhancing the sealing performance with the joint portion in the glass panel.
  • Example 2-2 A molten metal supply cylinder and a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder according to Example 2-2 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26.
  • FIG. The supply device of Example 2-2 is basically configured in the same manner as the supply device 11 described with reference to FIG. 16, and only the molten solder supply unit is different. Only the portion related to the supply unit is shown, and the other components are not shown. Moreover, the same code
  • the molten solder supply unit 22 of the supply device of Example 2-2 includes a supply cylinder 23 having substantially the same configuration as the supply cylinder 14 and a support member 22d connected to a simple support portion that does not constitute a floating mechanism.
  • the guide tube 22 is separated from the guide portion 22a in front of the guide portion 22a in the moving direction of the molten solder supply portion 22 in the supply step indicated by the arrow X1 in the drawing. Arranged in a state.
  • An outer diameter supply pipe 23a that can be inserted into the outer peripheral gap k of the unjoined body W0 is provided at the distal end of the supply cylinder 23, and the molten solder M1 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k in front of the guide portion 22a in the moving direction.
  • a plurality of supply pipes 23a may be arranged, or a supply pipe having an elliptical cross section or a rectangular cross section may be used.
  • the insertion depth of the supply pipe 23a may be determined in accordance with the width of the joint portion to be formed. Particularly when a wide joint portion is formed, a plurality of supply pipes may be configured to change the insertion depth. It is valid.
  • the supply pipe 23a is made of a soft material or coated with a resin, for example, so as not to damage the glass substrates w3 and w4 when contacted.
  • the guide portion 22a in this example is bent in the Z-axis direction which is the thickness direction of the outer peripheral gap k or around the axis of the supply cylinder 23 instead of the floating mechanism like the supply device in the 2-1 example. It has a configuration that can be elastic. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25, the guide portion 22a has upper and lower contact portions 22b and 22c formed of elastic metal, resin, or other elastic members, and the contact portions 22b and 22c have flexibility. Thus, even when the position of the outer peripheral gap k varies, the contact portions 22b and 22c are configured to be able to bend and follow.
  • the entire contact portions 22b and 22c are not formed of an elastic member, and for example, an elastic layer may be provided on the contact surfaces of the main surfaces S1 and S2 of the glass substrates w3 and w4 of the contact portions 22b and 22c.
  • an elastic layer may be provided on the contact surfaces of the main surfaces S1 and S2 of the glass substrates w3 and w4 of the contact portions 22b and 22c.
  • a guide portion 22e shown in FIG. 26A is a first modification of the guide portion 22a.
  • the guide portion 22e has elastic layers 22f and 22g formed on the surfaces of the contact portions 16a and 16f behind the guide portion 22e in the insertion direction Y1, and is supported from above and below by a support member 22d whose tip is cracked.
  • the elastic layers 22f and 22g are sandwiched and supported.
  • the guide portion 22e has the elastic layers 22f and 22g of which the contact surfaces of the exposed contact portions 16a and 16f where the elastic layers 22f and 22g are not formed are in contact with the glass substrates w3 and w4. Do not touch directly.
  • the elastic layers 22f and 22g can cope with the fluctuations in the position of the outer peripheral gap k in the same manner as described above, and are configured by separate members suitable for performing the functions of the contact portions 16a and 16f and the elastic layers 22f and 22g. There is also an advantage of being able to.
  • a guide portion 22h shown in FIG. 26B is a second modification of the guide portion 22a.
  • the guide portion 22h is provided with an elastic portion 22i between the support portion 22d and the iron portion 16h and the contact portions 16a and 16f inserted into the outer peripheral gap k of the unjoined body W0.
  • the elastic portion 22i is formed in a thin plate shape with a protruding length L3 from the end face of the support member 22d so as to be easily bent in the Z-axis direction.
  • a guide portion 22j shown in FIG. 26C is a third modification of the guide portion 22a.
  • the guide portion 22j is provided with a pair of upper and lower elastic portions 22k and 22l between the iron portion 16h and the contact portions 16a and 16f and the support member 22d inserted into the outer peripheral gap k of the unjoined body W0.
  • the elastic portion 22k is formed in a thin plate shape behind the contact portion 16a, and the elastic portion 22l is formed behind the contact portion 16f with a protruding length L3 from the end face of the support member 22d.
  • the guide portions 22a to 22j are incorporated in place of the floating mechanism, but the guide portions 22a to 22j are provided with a floating mechanism depending on the object to be filled. Of course, it may be incorporated in the supply device.
  • the unjoined body W0 composed of the glass substrates w3 and w4 having the same size in plan view is targeted for easy understanding, but a glass substrate having a different size can be used. be able to. That is, the end portions of the unjoined body in which two glass substrates having different sizes are aligned do not coincide, and a step is formed, but the shape of the discharge surface of the supply cylinder may be a shape corresponding to the step. .
  • Example 3-1 A molten metal supply cylinder and a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder according to Example 3-1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • FIG. 27 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the main part of the molten metal supply device in this example
  • FIGS. 28 and 29 are a cross-sectional view and a partial perspective view of the supply tube 24 in this example.
  • the supply device manufactures the glass panel W described with reference to FIGS. 51A and 51B.
  • the supply tube 24, the holder 24a to which the supply tube 24 is attached, and the holder 24a are mainly floated up and down.
  • the floating mechanism 24b can be realized by a structure in which rubbers and springs having appropriate flexibility are arranged above and below, and the supply cylinder 24 without applying an excessive force to the glass substrates w3 and w4 or the supply cylinder 24. Can keep the posture.
  • the ultrasonic vibrator 24 c attached to the holder 24 a is joined to the supply cylinder 24 via the shaft member 24 d and the ultrasonic vibration is applied in the longitudinal direction of the supply cylinder 24.
  • the supply cylinder 24 has a circular cross-sectional flow path 24i through which the molten solder M1 opened on one surface 24m and the other surface 24n flows, and has a second opening 24h orthogonal to the other surface 24n.
  • a guide portion 25 that is inserted and attached to the flow path 24i by a depth L0 is provided so as to supply the molten solder M1 discharged from the second opening 24h to the outer peripheral gap via the guide portion 25.
  • the supply device inserts the guide tube 25 into the outer peripheral gap k of the glass substrates w3 and w4 while the other surface 24n is separated from the outer peripheral end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 by a predetermined gap s. It is moved so that it can make a round along the outer circumferential gap k at a predetermined speed. Note that this movement operation does not have to be performed by the entire supply device, and may be relatively performed by sharing a table or the like on which the glass substrates w3 and w4 are placed. Thus, the supply device can take various structures in accordance with the movement form.
  • the movement mechanism of the glass substrates w3 and w4 and the movement mechanism of the supply device are known techniques, for example, linear movement is a motor and a ball screw or a linear guide, and swivel movement is a motor or cylinder. This can be realized by combining the bearings.
  • the casing 24e may be attached to the moving mechanism through a jig or the like that adjusts the position in the vertical direction. With this configuration, the height of the guide portion 25 can be adjusted with respect to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 in accordance with the thickness of the glass substrate w4 and the height of the gap holding member Q. .
  • the guide unit 25 will be described.
  • the guide portion 25 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and is discharged from the second opening (hereinafter referred to as a discharge port in the third and third examples) of the supply tube 24.
  • the molten solder M1 is supplied to the outer peripheral gap k.
  • the guide portion 25 is moved along the outer circumferential gap k, the molten solder M1 is slid on the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, and is supplied to the outer edge interval k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 while being applied. .
  • the guide portion 25 is arranged in a state offset downward from the center of the discharge port 24h in the vertical direction. Therefore, the area of the upper outlet 24j partitioned by the guide portion 25 is larger than the area of the lower outlet 24k.
  • the guide portion 25 includes a plate-like body 25c having a thickness (T2) smaller than the dimension g of the outer-periphery gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and an outer peripheral gap protruding from the upper and lower surfaces of the plate-like body 25c. and a protrusion 25a having substantially the same thickness (T1) as the dimension g of k.
  • This plate-like body 25c is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k, and molten solder M1 is introduced into the gap between the glass substrates w3 and w4 facing the surface of the plate-like body 25c, and is applied to the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4.
  • the portion of L2 that is inserted into the outer circumferential gap k is hereinafter referred to as a soldering portion 25d.
  • the protrusions 25a formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the plate-like body 25c are formed so as to protrude by L1 from the discharge port 24h.
  • the protrusion 25a has a contact surface that is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k and is slidable with the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4.
  • a portion where the contact surface is formed is referred to as a contact portion 25b.
  • the vertical position of the iron portion 25d in the outer peripheral gap k is defined by fitting the contact portion 25b into the outer peripheral gap k. That is, as shown in FIG. 30, the first gap Gu between the upper surface of the iron part 25d and the glass substrate w3 and the second gap Gd between the lower surface of the iron part 25d and the glass substrate w4 are kept constant. can do.
  • the contact portion 25b is preferably subjected to a surface treatment for improving the slipperiness between the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, for example, Ni water repellent plating.
  • the chamfering c is a portion where the corner is rounded into a straight line or a curve, and can be formed by cutting, abrasive processing, etching, or the like.
  • the plate-like body 25c and the protrusion 25a may be formed as an integral structure, or may be an assembly structure in which different members are fixed by adhesion or a lamination process.
  • an appropriate material can be selected and combined in accordance with a required function, for example, the plate-like body 25c is made of glass and the protrusion 25a is made of metal.
  • the protrusions 25a formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the plate-like body 25c are arranged to the left and right so as to sandwich the guide grooves 25e and 25h through which the molten solder M1 from the flow path 24i can flow. Is formed.
  • the guide grooves 25e and 25h can be formed, for example, by performing groove processing so as to divide the integrally formed protrusion 25a.
  • the width and depth of the guide grooves 25e and 25h may be appropriately determined in accordance with the flowability of the molten solder M1, but a larger one is preferable for flowability, and a plate-like body 25c is dug as shown in FIG. In this case, the iron part 25d may be reached.
  • the iron part 25d is for introducing the molten solder M1 supplied via the guide grooves 25e and 25h into the gaps Gu and Gd, and for firmly bonding the glass substrates w3 and w4. Therefore, as the iron part 25d moves, the outer peripheral gap k behind the iron part 25d in the moving direction is filled with the molten solder M1 from the gaps Gu and Gd, and the width of the joint part n is the iron part 25d. Is defined by a length L2.
  • the thickness T2 of the iron part 25d is set from the dimensions of the first gap Gu and the second gap Gd so that the molten solder M1 can be applied if it is brought into contact with the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 with a uniform surface pressure. Is done.
  • the gaps Gu and Gd are preferably narrow.
  • a groove that intersects the moving direction may be formed on the surface of the iron part 25d.
  • the supply cylinder 24 supplies the molten solder M1 from a first opening 24g formed on one surface 24m, and discharges it from a discharge port 24h which is a second opening formed on the other surface 24n.
  • the molten solder M1 supplied to the first opening 24g is melted by, for example, the supply cylinder 24 while feeding the thread solder M to the first opening 24g at a predetermined speed, and sufficiently fills the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4. It is supplied at a controlled flow rate based on the supply amount.
  • the supply cylinder 24 is formed with a flow path 24i through which the molten solder M1 formed by melting the thread solder M as described above and a first opening 24g of the flow path 24i are formed. It has a melting surface 24m for melting M and a discharge surface 24n which is the other surface on which the discharge port 24h is formed, and a heater 24l for melting the yarn solder M is wound around the outer peripheral surface thereof.
  • the thread solder M is sent out at a controlled speed so that the lower end surface is in contact with the melting surface 24m so as to close the first opening 24g, and is pressed and melted against the melting surface 24m. Then, the molten solder M1 flows through the flow path 24i and is continuously discharged from the discharge port 24h.
  • the melting surface 24m through which the first opening 24g opens is a bottom surface of a concave portion formed by, for example, counterboring the surface of the supply cylinder 24.
  • the first opening 24g has a diameter ⁇ B that is less than the diameter ⁇ A of the end face of the thread solder M that contacts the melting surface 24m, and the flow path 24i is formed in a tubular shape having a diameter ⁇ B at least in the vicinity of the melting surface 24m.
  • the peripheral wall 24o around the circumference of the supply cylinder 24 so as to surround the melting surface 24m.
  • the oxide E which is prevented from flowing into the flow path 24i, is stored in the concave bottom of the melting surface 24m. However, it may be recovered by appropriately sucking it out or cutting out a part of the peripheral wall 24o.
  • the flow path 24i in the vicinity of the discharge surface 24n is parallel to the outer peripheral gap k. It becomes a state.
  • the supply device When supplying the molten solder M1, the supply device is configured to move along the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 when the flow state of the molten solder M1 in the supply cylinder 24 is in a steady state.
  • This steady state refers to a state in which the molten solder M1 can be introduced into the gaps Gu and Gd from the guide grooves 25e and 25h of the guide portion 25.
  • the molten solder M1 reaching the discharge port 24h is guided. In this state, the level is higher than that of the groove 25e.
  • the time from when the molten solder M1 is supplied from the first opening 24g until the steady state is reached is preferably as short as possible. For this reason, when the supply of the molten solder M1 that is in an unsteady state is started, the flow path 24i is quickly filled with the molten solder M1, and in the steady state, the molten solder M1 has a flow rate that can sufficiently fill the outer circumferential gap k. The amount of supply is controlled.
  • the lower flow path 24q of the flow paths 24i divided up and down by the guide portion 25 is filled with the molten solder M1, so that the lower discharge where the lower flow path 24q is opened.
  • the molten solder M1 is also filled in the gap s between the outlet 24k and the end surface of the glass substrate w4.
  • the molten solder M1 is introduced into the second gap Gd, but excess molten solder M1 overflows from the gap s between the discharge port 24k and the end face of the glass substrate w4.
  • the molten solder M1 supplied to the flow path 24i has a controlled flow rate, and the molten solder M1 existing in the gap s between the discharge port 24k and the end surface of the glass substrate w4 is applied with a small supply pressure. Since the direction (downward) is open, the leaked molten solder M1 hangs down. Since the leakage from the lower flow path 24q also occurs from the start of the supply of the molten metal M1 until the steady state is reached, it is desirable that the amount of leakage be small.
  • the molten solder M1 existing in this gap leaks because the guide portion 25 exists. Hard to put out. Accordingly, in order to reduce the amount of molten solder M1 leaking from the gap s between the discharge port 24h and the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, the amount of molten solder M1 discharged from the lower flow path 24q should be reduced. That's fine.
  • the supply tube 24 is attached at a position where the guide 25 is offset downward from the center of the discharge port 24h, the area of the lower discharge port 24k is smaller than the area of the upper discharge port 24j. Further, the volume of the lower flow path 24q is smaller than the volume of the upper flow path 24p. Accordingly, the amount discharged from the lower discharge port 24k is smaller than the amount discharged from the upper discharge port 24j. That is, the amount of molten solder M1 discharged from the lower flow path 24q in the supply cylinder 24 is small, and the amount of leakage from the gap s between the discharge port 24h and the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 can be reduced. The time to reach a steady state can also be shortened.
  • the offset amount F of the guide portion 25 is appropriately set based on the supply amount of the molten solder M1, the size of the gap s between the discharge surface 24n and the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, the size of the guide grooves 25e and 25h, and the like.
  • the larger the amount the smaller the amount of molten solder M1 that fills the lower flow path 24q. Therefore, the amount of leakage can be reduced, and the time to reach a steady state can be shortened.
  • the supplied clean molten solder M1 can be brought into contact with the external atmosphere only slightly by the gap s between the discharge surface 24n and the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 and the gaps Gu and Gd. And w4 are supplied to the outer peripheral gap k. Accordingly, the supplied clean molten solder M1 comes into contact with the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 in a state in which oxidation is suppressed even in an air atmosphere. Therefore, the supply device of this example is suitable for using SnAgAl alloy solder having excellent bonding properties with glass through an appropriate amount of oxygen.
  • a process for increasing the wettability with the molten solder M1 for example, Ag, Cr, Al, Mo, etc. It is preferable to coat W, V, Nb, Ta, and the like, and the surface of the guide portion 25 is eroded by the molten solder M1 so that impurities are not mixed into the molten solder M1. It is preferable to apply. These treatments are also preferably performed on the surface of the flow path 24i.
  • the glass substrates w3 and w4 set up and down via a gap holding member Q having a predetermined dimension are positioned on a table that is movable in the XY2 axis direction with a built-in heating element, and the glass substrates w3 and w4 are made of the molten solder M1. Heat to about melting temperature.
  • the guide portion 25 is inserted into a predetermined position at one end of the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and a predetermined gap s is formed between the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 and the discharge surface 24n. Moved. At this time, the mounting position of the iron part 25d is adjusted in advance so as to be near the center in the vertical direction of the outer circumferential gap k, but it is difficult to adjust precisely to the center of the outer circumferential gap k.
  • a predetermined amount of clean molten solder M1 is supplied to the flow path 24i and begins to be discharged from the discharge port 24h. Since the guide portion 25 is offset and attached to the lower side of the discharge port 24h, it reaches a steady state in a short time, and immediately passes the glass substrates w3 and w4 in one direction to supply the molten solder M1 to one side of the outer peripheral gap k. It can be moved in the (X direction) at a predetermined speed. During this time, the molten solder M1 is introduced into the gaps Gu and Gd and filled into the outer peripheral gap k.
  • the molten solder M1 leaks from the gap s between the discharge port 24k below the guide portion 25 and the glass substrate w4, and droops or drops. Hardly occurs. Further, since the contact portion 25b is fitted in the outer peripheral gap k and is in a floating state, the outer periphery generated during the movement of the glass substrates w3 and w4 such as the variation in the thickness of the glass substrate w4 and the vertical undulation of the table in the X direction. Following the positional variation in the vertical direction of the gap k, the sizes of the gaps Gu and Gd are maintained.
  • the molten solder M1 is introduced in substantially the same amount along the upper and lower surfaces of the iron portion 25d, so that the flow state of the molten solder M1 that moves with the movement of the iron portion 25d is substantially the same in the gaps Gu and Gd.
  • the molten solder M1 is supplied in the same manner to the main surface of the glass substrate w3 and to the main surface of the glass substrate w4.
  • the ultrasonic vibration when the ultrasonic vibration is applied during the filling and the ultrasonic vibration is applied to the guide portion 25, the wettability of the molten solder M1 and the guide portion 25 and the molten solder M1 and the glass substrates w3 and w4 is improved, and the gap Gu and Even when Gd is narrow, the molten solder M1 is supplied smoothly.
  • This ultrasonic vibration also acts on the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 via the molten solder M1, and removes foreign matters such as bubbles and oxide films existing at the contact interface between the molten solder M1 and the glass substrates w3 and w4. Therefore, the bondability of the molten solder M1 to the glass substrates w3 and w4 can be enhanced, and it is effective for improving the bonding strength of the glass panel W.
  • the casing 24e fitted with the supply cylinder 24 turns 90 degrees horizontally, and then the glass substrates w3 and w4 are the other sides orthogonal to the one side. Move horizontally along.
  • the molten metal M1 is supplied to the outer peripheral gap k with almost no dripping of the molten solder M1 on the outer peripheral end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4. This operation is sequentially performed on each side, and the molten solder M1 is supplied to all of the outer peripheral gaps k of the glass substrates w3 and w4. Is supplied.
  • the table on which the glass substrates w3 and w4 are placed is transferred to the outside.
  • the glass substrates w3 and w4 are removed from the table carried out to the outside, the operation of removing the solder from the table is not necessary because the molten solder M1 is not attached on the table.
  • the supply cylinder 24 is supported by the floating mechanism in the vertical direction, and the chamfering c is applied to the contact portion 25b. It can be inserted at the center position of the outer peripheral gap k, and the molten solder M1 can be filled while maintaining the dimensions of the gaps Gu and Gd.
  • the molten solder M1 permeates between the contact part 25b and the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 by a capillary phenomenon.
  • the molten solder M1 is drawn from the iron portion 25d and supplied to the contact area after the contact portion 25b passes through the contact portion 25b while being in contact with the molten solder M1.
  • the length L1 of the contact portion 25b is long, the molten solder M1 may not be supplied to all portions of the contact region. Therefore, it is preferable that the length L1 of the contact portion 25b shown in FIG.
  • the width is preferably about 10 to 20% of the width of the junction n.
  • the upper and lower surfaces of the contact portion 25b are not limited to a flat plane as shown in FIG. 29, and may be a plane in which a groove is formed, or may be a curved surface.
  • Example 3-2 A molten metal supply cylinder and a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder, which is a third-second example of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • the supply cylinder 24 of the third example is a form in which the guide portion 25 is attached to be offset downward from the center of the discharge port 24h.
  • the supply cylinders 26a, 26c, and 26e in this example are the same as the discharge port 24h.
  • the guide portion 25 is attached at or near the center, the amount of molten solder M1 discharged from the lower discharge port 24k of the discharge port 24h is configured to be smaller than the amount discharged from the upper discharge port 24j. Is.
  • FIG. 31 (a) shows a supply cylinder 26a having a weir plate 26b attached to the end of the lower flow path 24q.
  • the dam plate 26b is disposed through a gap with the lower surface of the guide portion 25, and the gap forms a lower discharge port 24k.
  • a supply cylinder 26c shown in FIG. 31 (b) is provided with a weir plate 26d in the same manner as described above. However, no gap is provided between the guide tube 25 and a small cross section is melted above the weir plate 26d. A passage hole through which the solder M1 passes is formed, and this hole is used as the lower discharge port 24k.
  • a supply cylinder 26e in FIG. 31 (c) has a weir member 26f attached in the lower flow path 24q, and the volume of the lower flow path 24q is smaller than the volume of the upper flow path 24p. .
  • the protrusions constituting the contact portion 25b are formed on the guide portion 25 in order to keep the gaps Gu and Gd between the iron portion 25d and the glass substrates w3 and w4 constant.
  • the body 25a is provided, and the protrusion 25a is inserted into the supply tube 24 and disposed.
  • the protrusion 25a is not inserted into the supply cylinder 24, and the protrusion 25a is formed only on the part immediately coming out from the end surface of the supply cylinder 24, and the contact portion 25b. can do. Further, as shown in the supply cylinder 26k in FIG.
  • a protrusion 25a can be formed at the tip of the plate-like body 25c to form the contact portion 25b.
  • the plate-like body 25c and the protrusion 25a in the guide part 25 can be made of the same material such as metal, glass, ceramics, or different materials.
  • a plate-like body 26q having the same thickness and having no protrusions such as a supply cylinder 26p shown in FIG. 32 (c)
  • a supply cylinder 26p shown in FIG. 32 (c) can be used.
  • the variation in the thickness of the glass substrate and the guide deflection of the moving mechanism of the glass substrate are extremely small, such as for a small size glass substrate with a side of several to several tens of centimeters, and the gap fluctuates only to be negligible. It is good to apply to cases.
  • the supply cylinder does not necessarily have to be supported by the floating mechanism as the supply device.
  • the planar dimensions of the glass substrates w3 and w4 are the same for easy understanding, but they can be handled even if they have different dimensions. That is, when the planar dimensions of the glass substrates w3 and w4 are different and the outer edges of the glass substrates w3 and w4 are not aligned and a step is formed, as shown in the supply tube 26r of FIG. 33, the discharge port 24h is opened. This can be dealt with by making the discharge surface 24n to be shaped according to the level difference.
  • FIG. 34 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the main part of the supply device in Example 4-1
  • FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the supply cylinder in this example
  • FIGS. 36 and 37 are perspective views showing the guide part in this example and its modifications.
  • 38 is a view showing a state when the guide portion of FIG. 36 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap of the glass substrate and molten solder is supplied
  • FIG. 39 is a view showing a modification of the guide portion of FIG.
  • a supply device for manufacturing the glass panel W which includes a supply cylinder 27, a holder 27a for attaching the supply cylinder 27, a floating mechanism 27b for floating the holder 27a mainly up and down, and a casing 27e for supporting the floating mechanism 27b. Yes.
  • the floating mechanism 27b can be realized by a structure in which rubbers and springs having appropriate flexibility are arranged above and below, and the supply cylinder 27 without applying an excessive force to the glass substrates w3 and w4 or the supply cylinder 27. Can keep the posture.
  • the ultrasonic vibration body 27c attached to the holder 27a is joined to the supply cylinder 27 via the shaft member 27d, and the ultrasonic vibration is applied in the longitudinal direction of the supply cylinder 27.
  • the supply cylinder 27 has a flow path 27i through which molten solder M1 having a circular cross section opened to one surface 27k on the side surface and the other surface 271 on the end surface side flows, and a guide portion 28 attached to the other surface 271 side.
  • the leading end of the guide portion 28 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and the second opening on the other surface 27l side (hereinafter referred to as Example 4-1, Example 4-2, Example 4-3).
  • the molten solder M1 discharged from 27h is supplied to the outer peripheral gap k through the guide portion 28. As shown in FIG.
  • the supply cylinder 27 interferes with the protruding portion of the lower glass substrate w4 that protrudes from the upper glass substrate w3. In order to avoid this, it is positioned at a position away from the outer peripheral gap k by a predetermined height. Accordingly, the guide portion 28 in the present example has a shape having a step corresponding to the difference in height between the discharge port 27h of the supply tube 27 and the outer circumferential gap k in the vertical direction.
  • the supply device inserts the tip of the guide portion 28 into the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, with the other surface 271 separated from the end surface of the upper glass substrate w3 by a predetermined gap s. At the same time, it is moved along the outer peripheral gap so that it can make one round at a predetermined speed.
  • the moving operation need not be performed entirely by the supply device, and may be performed relatively by sharing the table on which the glass substrates w3 and w4 are placed.
  • the supply apparatus can take various structures according to the movement form.
  • the movement mechanism of the glass substrates w3 and w4 and the movement mechanism of the supply device are known techniques, for example, linear movement is a motor and a ball screw or a linear guide, and swivel movement is a motor or cylinder. This can be realized by combining the bearings.
  • the casing 27e may be attached to the moving mechanism via a jig or the like that adjusts the position in the vertical direction. With this configuration, the height of the guide portion 25 relative to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 can be adjusted according to the thickness of the glass substrate w4 and the height of the gap holding member P.
  • the guide unit 28 of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 36A and 38, the guide portion 28 is attached to the lower portion of the discharge port 27h so that only the upper surface thereof faces the flow path 27i, and the molten solder M1 discharged from the discharge port 27h is basically the same. Therefore, it is configured to flow only on the upper surface and not on the lower surface.
  • the guide portion 28 includes a single stepped plate-like body 28c and a protrusion 28a formed on the surface of the plate-like body 28c.
  • the plate-like body 28c has a base end portion 28e attached to the supply cylinder 27, a tip end portion 28d inserted into the outer peripheral gap, and an inclined portion 28f connecting between the two.
  • the proximal end portion 28e is disposed substantially parallel to the distal end portion 28d, and the inclined portion 28f is disposed so as to form a predetermined angle ⁇ with respect to the distal end portion 28d.
  • This angle ⁇ is an angle determined by the protruding dimension L in the horizontal direction of the inclined portion 28f and the step dimension F in the height direction.
  • the dimensions L and F are determined based on the gap s between the other surface 271 of the supply cylinder 27 and the glass substrate w3, the outer diameter dimensions of the supply cylinder 27 and the flow path 27i, and the like.
  • the angle ⁇ is usually an obtuse angle, but the protruding dimension L may be zero. In this case, the angle ⁇ is 90 °.
  • the plate-like body 28c may be formed by bending a plate material at two places, or may be formed by cutting from a block body by cutting.
  • the guide portion 28 has the tip 28d of the plate-like body 28c inserted into the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and the outer periphery of the molten solder M1 discharged from the discharge port 27h of the supply tube 27. Supply to gap k.
  • the molten solder M1 is slid on the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, and is supplied to the outer edge interval k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 while being applied. .
  • the front end portion 28d of the plate-like body 28c has a thickness T2 smaller than the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4.
  • the range of L2 from the tip of the tip portion 28d is hereinafter referred to as a trowel portion 28g.
  • the upper and lower surfaces of the iron portion 28g are arranged to face the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 with a certain gap Gu and Gd therebetween.
  • the protrusion 28a When the guide 28 is inserted and moved in the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, the protrusion 28a maintains the gaps Gu and Gd constant even if there is a change in the position of the outer peripheral gap k in the vertical direction. .
  • the protrusion 28a is provided at the tip 28d, but may be formed other than the tip 28d for other purposes to be described later.
  • the protrusion 28a provided at the distal end portion 28d is referred to as a contact portion 28b.
  • the contact portion 28b protrudes from the upper and lower surfaces of the tip end portion 28d, and its thickness T1 is substantially the same as the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k.
  • the contact portion 28b is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k and can slide on the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4. Has a good contact surface.
  • the protrusion 28a may be formed on the plate-like body 28c (tip portion 28d) by adhesion or a lamination process.
  • the metal, glass, ceramics and the like used for the plate-like body 28c do not necessarily have to be made of the same material, and an appropriate material according to the required function such as slidability and wear resistance. Can be used.
  • the protrusion 28a may be formed integrally with the plate-like body 28c.
  • the vertical position of the iron part 28g in the outer peripheral gap k is defined by fitting the contact part 28b into the outer peripheral gap k. . That is, the first gap Gu between the upper surface of the iron part 28g and the glass substrate w3 and the second gap Gd between the lower surface of the iron part 28g and the glass substrate w4 can be maintained constant.
  • the contact portion 28b is preferably subjected to surface treatment for improving the slipperiness with the glass substrates w3 and w4, for example, Ni water repellent plating. Further, it is preferable to chamfer the corner portion in the insertion direction in order to make the contact portion 28b easily fit into the outer circumferential gap k. This chamfering is a part in which a corner is rounded into a straight line or a curve, and can be formed by cutting, abrasive processing, etching, or the like.
  • the molten solder M1 from the discharge port 27h is discharged to the upper surface of the guide portion 28.
  • a guide groove 28h for smoothly guiding the molten solder M1 to the distal end portion 28d is provided on the upper surface of the guide portion 28 of this example as a preferred embodiment.
  • the plurality of linear guide grooves 28h are continuous with the upper surface of the base end portion 28e, the inclined portion 28f, and the tip end portion 28d along the axis of the flow path 27i in the vicinity of the discharge port 27h, which is the discharge direction of the molten solder M1. Is formed.
  • the guide groove is not limited to the mode shown in FIG.
  • a groove 29a may be provided, and as in the guide portion 30 shown in FIG. 37 (a), the protrusion 28a extends to the inclined portion 28f and the base end portion 28e, and the protrusion 28a serves as a side wall. It can be set as the aspect which provided the groove
  • the structure of the guide groove may be suitably formed as a single structure or a composite structure in accordance with the flowability of the molten solder M1 and the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k.
  • the molten solder M1 flows on the upper surface of the guide portion 28 and is supplied to the first gap Gu.
  • the thickness direction A through hole 28b formed by a through hole 29b or a notch 28j penetrating the tip 28d is provided in the tip 28d.
  • a notch portion 31a is provided on the side surface of the tip portion facing the moving direction indicated by the arrow when the guide portion 28 is inserted and moved in the outer circumferential gap k.
  • the molten solder M1 introduced into the first gap Gu may be introduced into the second gap Gd.
  • the notch 31a is also an embodiment of the through portion 28i.
  • the molten solder M1 introduced into the first gap Gu is good in the second gap Gd as the guide portion 28 inserted into the outer gap k moves along the outer gap k. Led to.
  • the molten solder M1 is supplied from the gaps Gu and Gd to the outer peripheral gap k behind the guide portion 28, and is applied to the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 by the iron portion 28g. Is included.
  • the supply width of the molten metal M1 is substantially defined by the length L2 of the iron part 28g, and a stable supply width can be obtained.
  • the thickness T2 of the iron part 28g is set based on the dimensions of the gaps Gu and Gd that can be applied while bringing the molten solder M1 into contact with the glass substrates w3 and w4 with a uniform surface pressure.
  • the gaps Gu and Gd are preferably narrow so that the molten solder M1 moves together following the iron part 28g and can be satisfactorily applied to the glass substrates w3 and w4. Further, in order to improve the followability of the molten solder M1, it is preferable to form a fine groove that intersects the moving direction on the surface of the iron part 28g.
  • the supply cylinder 27 supplies the molten solder M1 from the first opening 27g formed on the one surface 27k, and discharges it from the discharge port 27h which is the second opening formed on the other surface 27l.
  • the molten solder M1 supplied to the first opening 27g is melted by the supply cylinder 27 while feeding, for example, the thread solder M to the first opening 27g at a predetermined speed, and sufficiently fills the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4. It is supplied at a controlled flow rate based on the supply amount.
  • the supply cylinder 27 has a flow path 27i through which the molten solder M1 formed by melting the thread solder M and a first opening 27g of the flow path 27i are formed to melt the thread solder M. It has a melting surface 27k and a discharge surface 27l in which a discharge port 27h is formed, and a heater 27j for melting the yarn solder M is wound around the outer peripheral surface thereof.
  • the thread solder M is sent out at a controlled speed so that the lower end surface is in contact with the melting surface 27k so as to close the first opening 27g, and is pressed against the melting surface 27k to be melted. Then, the molten solder M1 flows through the flow path 27i and is continuously discharged from the discharge port 27h.
  • the melting surface 27k through which the first opening 27g opens is a bottom surface of a concave portion formed by, for example, counterboring the side surface of the supply cylinder 27.
  • the diameter ⁇ B of the first opening 27g is less than the diameter ⁇ A of the end surface of the thread solder M that contacts the melting surface 27k, and the flow path 27i is formed in a tubular shape having a diameter ⁇ B in the vicinity of the melting surface 27k.
  • a peripheral wall 27m around the supply cylinder 27 so as to surround the melting surface 27k.
  • the oxide E which is prevented from flowing into the flow path 27i, is stored in the concave bottom of the melting surface 27k, but may be sucked out or removed by cutting out a part of the peripheral wall 27m and recovered appropriately.
  • a notch groove is provided below the discharge surface 27, and the base end portion 28e is inserted into the notch groove so that the base end portion 28e is exposed to the flow path 27i.
  • the guide portion 28 is incorporated in the supply cylinder 27.
  • the guide portion 28 may be configured such that the molten solder M1 discharged from the discharge port 27h flows only on the upper surface even if the upper surface is not exposed to the flow path 27i.
  • a lower portion of the supply cylinder 27 is cut out from the discharge surface 27l in a predetermined length axial direction so as to include the flow path 27i to form a notch.
  • a sealing plate 32a is provided to seal the gap.
  • an attachment surface in which the flow path 27i is not exposed is formed in the lower portion of the supply cylinder 27 in the axial direction, and the upper surface of the base end portion 28e is adhered to the attachment surface. These may be joined together.
  • an insertion hole is provided in the cylindrical portion of the supply cylinder 27 so as not to expose the flow path 27i, and the guide portion 28 is inserted into the insertion hole. May be incorporated.
  • the distal end portion 28d and the proximal end portion 28e of the guide portion 28 are arranged in parallel, but the distal end portion 28d and the proximal end portion 28e intersect at a predetermined angle. It may be arranged as follows.
  • the supply device When supplying the molten solder M1, the supply device is configured to move along the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 when the flow state of the molten solder M1 in the supply cylinder 27 is in a steady state.
  • This steady state means a state in which the molten solder M1 is discharged from the discharge port 27h onto the upper surface of the guide portion 28 and can be introduced into the outer circumferential gap k.
  • the discharge port 27h is almost filled with the molten solder M1. It is the state that was done.
  • the time from when the molten solder M1 is supplied from the first opening 27g until the steady state is reached is as short as possible. For this reason, the flow path 27i is quickly filled with the molten solder M1 at the start of supply of the molten solder M1, which is in an unsteady state, and in a steady state, the flow rate is such that the outer peripheral gap k can be sufficiently filled.
  • the supply amount of the molten solder M1 is controlled.
  • the molten solder M1 discharged from the discharge port 27h is supplied to the outer peripheral gap k only from the upper surface of the guide portion 28, and is therefore first introduced into the first gap Gu. After that, it is introduced into the second gap Gd through the first gap Gu. At this time, the molten solder M1 is introduced into the first gap Gu while filling the gap s between the upper surface of the inclined portion 28f and the glass substrate w3.
  • the molten solder M1 flows down the inclined portion 28f and the guide groove 28h is formed in the guide portion 28 along the flowing direction of the molten solder M1, the molten solder M1 is very smoothly formed in the first gap Gu. Introduced into.
  • the molten solder M1 present in the gap s between the upper surface of the inclined portion 28f and the glass substrate w3 has almost no leakage from the inclined portion 28f because the tip portion 28d exists. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 51 (e), the joint n where the molten solder M1 does not leak can be formed in the protruding portion of the lower glass substrate w4.
  • the supply cylinder 27 When the supply cylinder 27 is used, the supplied clean molten solder M1 is slightly exposed to the external atmosphere at the gaps s and the gaps Gu and Gd between the discharge surface 27l and the end surface of the glass substrate w3. The outer peripheral gap k is filled. Accordingly, the supplied clean molten solder M1 comes into contact with the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 in a state in which oxidation is suppressed even in an air atmosphere. Therefore, the supply device of this example is suitable for using SnAgAl alloy solder having excellent bonding properties with glass through an appropriate amount of oxygen.
  • a process for increasing the wettability with the molten solder M1 for example, Ag, Cr, Al, Mo, It is preferable to coat W, V, Nb, Ta, etc., and a nitriding treatment is performed as a corrosion preventing treatment so that the surface of the guide portion 27 is eroded by molten solder M1 and impurities are not mixed into the molten solder M1. It is preferable. In addition, it is preferable to perform these processes also on the surface of the flow path 27i.
  • the glass substrates w3 and w4 set up and down via a gap holding member P of a predetermined size are positioned on a table that can move in the XY2 axis direction with a built-in heating element, and the glass substrates w3 and w4 are made of the molten solder M1. Heat to about melting temperature.
  • the iron part 28g of the guide part 28 is inserted into a predetermined position at one end of the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and a predetermined gap s is formed between the end surface of the glass substrate w3 and the discharge surface 27l. Moved to form. At this time, the mounting position of the iron part 28g is adjusted in advance so as to be near the center in the vertical direction of the outer peripheral gap k, but it is difficult to adjust precisely to the center of the outer peripheral gap k.
  • the iron part 28g is positioned substantially in the center in the vertical direction of the outer peripheral gap k, and the gaps Gu and Gd between the iron part 28g and the glass substrates w3 and w4 are substantially the same both in the vertical direction.
  • the glass substrates w3 and w4 are immediately unidirectionally supplied to supply the molten solder M1 to one side of the outer peripheral gap k ( X direction) can be moved at a predetermined speed.
  • the molten solder M1 is introduced into the gaps Gu and Gd and supplied to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4.
  • the molten solder M1 is not supplied from the lower surface of the guide portion 28, the lower glass The molten solder M1 does not leak into the protruding portion of the substrate w4.
  • the contact portion 28b is fitted in the outer peripheral gap k and is in a floating state, the outer periphery generated when the glass substrates w3 and w4 are moved, such as the thickness variation of the glass substrate w4 and the vertical swell of the table in the X direction.
  • the position changes in the vertical direction of the gap k, and the dimensions of the gaps Gu and Gd are maintained.
  • the molten solder M1 is introduced in substantially the same amount along the upper and lower surfaces of the iron portion 28g, so that the flow state of the molten solder M1 that moves with the movement of the iron portion 28g is substantially the same in the gaps Gu and Gd.
  • the molten solder M1 is supplied in the same manner to the main surface of the glass substrate w3 and to the main surface of the glass substrate w4.
  • the ultrasonic vibration when the ultrasonic vibration is applied during the filling and the ultrasonic vibration is applied to the guide portion 28, the wettability of the molten solder M1 and the guide portion 28, and the molten solder M1 and the glass substrates w3 and w4 is improved, and the gap Gu and Even when Gd is narrow, the molten solder M1 is supplied smoothly.
  • This ultrasonic vibration also acts on the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 via the molten solder M1, and removes foreign matters such as bubbles and oxide films existing at the contact interface between the molten solder M1 and the glass substrates w3 and w4. Therefore, the bondability of the molten solder M1 to the glass substrates w3 and w4 can be enhanced, and it is effective for improving the bonding strength of the glass panel W.
  • the casing 27e fitted with the supply cylinder 27 turns 90 degrees horizontally, and then the glass substrates w3 and w4 are the other sides orthogonal to the one side. Move horizontally along In the other side, similarly to the one side, the molten metal M1 is supplied to the outer peripheral gap k without the molten solder M1 leaking into the protruding portion of the glass substrate w4.
  • This operation is sequentially performed on each side, and the molten solder M1 is supplied to all the outer peripheral gaps k of the glass substrates w3 and w4, and the molten solder M1 is supplied without leaking to the protruding portion of the glass substrate w4.
  • the table on which the glass substrates w3 and w4 are placed is transferred to the outside. Although the glass substrates w3 and w4 are removed from the table carried out to the outside, the operation of removing the solder from the table is not necessary because the molten solder M1 is not attached on the table.
  • the molten solder M1 permeates between the contact part 28b and the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 by a capillary phenomenon.
  • the molten solder M1 wraps around from the iron portion 28g and is supplied to the contact area after the contact portion 28b passes through the contact portion 28b while being in contact with the molten solder M1.
  • the length of the contact portion 28b is long, the molten solder M1 may not be supplied to all portions of the contact region. Therefore, it is preferable that the length of the contact portion 28b is short and the width of the joint portion n. It is preferably about 10 to 20%.
  • the upper and lower surfaces of the contact portion 28b are not limited to a flat plane as shown in FIG. 36 or 37, and may be a plane in which a groove is formed, or may be a curved surface.
  • Example 4-2 A molten metal supply cylinder and a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder according to the 4-2 example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the supply tube 27 is formed by replacing the plate-like body 28c having a stepped shape bent at two locations having a distal end portion 28d, a proximal end portion 28e, and an inclined portion 28f that connects the distal end portion 28d with the guide portion 28. Described in the example of elements.
  • the supply cylinder 33 in this example uses an L-shaped plate 33c opened by a predetermined angle ⁇ as an element of the guide portion. That is, the plate-like body 33c is bent at one place, has a tip portion 33d and an inclined portion 33e, and the inclined portion 33e is at the bottom of the discharge port 33b in a posture parallel to the flow path 27i. It is attached.
  • the supply cylinder 33 of this example can supply the molten solder M1 to the outer peripheral gap k by flowing the molten solder M1 only on the upper surface of the plate-like body 33c, as in the case of the supply cylinder 27.
  • the shape of the plate-like body 33c can be simplified.
  • the flow path 27i is inclined with respect to the outer circumferential gap k by a predetermined angle ⁇ , and the flow path 27i is inclined downward.
  • the cylinder 33 is arranged.
  • the molten solder M1 in the flow path 27i tends to flow downward, and the fluidity of the molten solder M1 in the flow path 27i is high. Therefore, the molten solder M1 can be supplied to the outer peripheral gap k satisfactorily.
  • Example 4-3 A molten metal supply cylinder and a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder, which is a fourth example of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the supply cylinders 27 and 33 in the examples 4-1 and 4-2 used a plate-like body bent at one or two places, but the supply cylinders 34 and 35 in this example are The difference is that a straight plate-like body in which the distal end portion and the proximal end portion are directly connected in a straight line is used as an element of the guide portion.
  • the supply cylinder 34 shown in FIG. 41 (a) forms a notch by notching the lower part of the supply cylinder 34 in the axial direction by a predetermined length from the discharge surface 27l so as to include the flow path 27i.
  • the upper surface of the base end portion 34d of the plate-like body 34c is in close contact and joined so as to close the surface, and the molten solder M1 is allowed to flow only on the upper surface of the plate-like body 34c and is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k.
  • the molten solder M1 is supplied via Note that the length of the notch is equal to or longer than the length of the protruding portion of the lower glass substrate w4. If a gap occurs at the joint between the notch and the base end 34d, the gap is sealed. A sealing plate 32a that stops is provided. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the protruding portion of the glass substrate w4 from interfering with the supply cylinder 34 without arranging the supply cylinder 34 above the glass substrate w4 when supplying the molten solder M1.
  • a supply tube 35 having a square cross section in which the bottom surface to which the base end portion 35d is attached is a plane may be used.
  • the molten solder M1 may be discharged from the entire surface of the discharge port 27h opened to the discharge surface 27l to the upper surface of the guide portion 35d.
  • the lid 35b that closes the discharge surface 27l can also be applied to the supply cylinders of the above-described examples 4-1 and 4-2.
  • the contact portion for maintaining a constant gap between the iron portion and the main surface of the glass substrate is provided on the rear end side of the plate-like body.
  • the arranged supply cylinder may be a guide part 36 in which a contact part 28b is arranged at the tip of the tip part 28d. In this case, a joint with a more stable width can be formed.
  • it can also be set as the structure which does not have a contact part like the guide part 37 shown in FIG.42 (b).
  • the supply device may not necessarily support the supply cylinder with the floating mechanism.
  • the glass substrates W3 and w4 have different plane dimensions, and the glass panel W in which the lower glass substrate w4 protrudes from the upper glass substrate w3 is described as an example.
  • the above example can also be applied to the glass panel W using the glass substrates w3 and w4 having the same dimensions and having matching end faces.
  • the supply device manufactures the glass panel W described with reference to FIGS. 51A and 51B.
  • the supply tube 38, the holder 38a to which the supply tube 38 is attached, and the holder 38a are mainly floated up and down.
  • the floating mechanism 38b can be realized by a structure in which rubbers and springs having appropriate flexibility are arranged above and below, and the supply cylinder 38 without exerting an excessive force on the glass substrates w3 and w4 or the supply cylinder 38. Can keep the posture. Note that it is preferable to apply an ultrasonic vibration in the longitudinal direction of the supply cylinder 38 so that the ultrasonic vibration body 38c is attached to the holder 38a and joined to the supply cylinder 38 via the shaft member 38d.
  • the supply cylinder 24 has a circular cross-sectional flow path 38i through which the molten solder M1 opened on one surface 38k and the other surface 38l flows, and is perpendicular to the other surface 38l and has a second opening. (Hereinafter referred to as a discharge port in the fifth example.)
  • a guide part 39 is provided which is inserted by a depth L0 into the flow path 38i across 38h, and is provided with an opening (hereinafter referred to as the fifth example in the fifth example).
  • the molten solder M1 supplied from 38g and discharged from the second opening 38h is supplied to the outer peripheral gap k through the guide portion 39.
  • the supply device inserts the guide tube 39 into the outer peripheral gap k of the glass substrates w3 and w4 while the other surface 38l is separated from the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 by a predetermined gap s. It is moved so that it can make one round along the gap k at a predetermined speed. Note that this moving operation is not necessarily performed by the supply device, but is performed relatively by a table or the like on which the glass substrates w3 and w4 are placed. May be. Thus, the supply device can take various structures in accordance with the movement form.
  • the movement mechanism of the glass substrates w3 and w4 and the movement mechanism of the supply device are known techniques, for example, linear movement is a motor and a ball screw or a linear guide, and swivel movement is a motor or cylinder. This can be realized by combining the bearings.
  • the casing 24e may be attached to the moving mechanism through a jig or the like that adjusts the position in the vertical direction. With this configuration, the height of the guide portion 25 can be adjusted with respect to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 in accordance with the thickness of the glass substrate w4 and the height of the gap holding member Q. .
  • the guide portion 39 includes a plate-like body 39c having a thickness (T2) smaller than the dimension g of the outer-space gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and an outer peripheral gap protruding from the upper and lower surfaces of the plate-like body 39c. And a protrusion 39a having substantially the same thickness (T1) as the above-mentioned dimension.
  • the protrusions 39a of this example are arranged on the left and right sides of the rear end side of the plate-like body 39c, and the guide portion 39 is inserted into the supply cylinder 38 so as to cross the substantially central portion of the discharge port 38h in the vertical direction. It is attached with.
  • the guide portion 39 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and supplies the molten solder M1 discharged from the discharge port 38h of the supply cylinder 38 to the outer peripheral gap k. .
  • the molten solder M1 is slid on the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, and is supplied to the outer edge interval k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 while being applied.
  • the portion of L2 inserted into the outer peripheral gap k in the plate-like body 39c is hereinafter referred to as a trowel portion 39d.
  • the protrusions 39a formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the plate-like body 39c are formed so as to protrude by L1 from the discharge port 38h.
  • the protrusion 39a has a contact surface that is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k and is slidable with the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4.
  • a portion where the contact surface is formed is referred to as a contact portion 39b.
  • the iron part 39d uses the molten solder M1 supplied from the discharge port 38h, the first gap Gu between the upper surface of the iron part 39d and the glass substrate w3, the lower surface of the iron part 39d, and the glass substrate w4. And is applied to the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4. Therefore, in order for the molten solder M1 to be satisfactorily applied to the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, it is preferable that the gaps Gu and Gd are narrow so that the molten solder M1 moves together following the iron part 39d. However, the molten solder M1 introduced into the narrow gaps Gu and Gd is difficult to reach the tip of the iron part 39d due to fluid resistance.
  • FIG. 47A is a tip portion of a plate-like body having a rectangular shape in plan view, and the iron portion 40c moves in the direction of arrow F.
  • the molten solder M1 supplied from the supply cylinder 38 flows in the gaps Gu and Gd toward the tip 40g of the iron part 40c.
  • the flow rate of the molten solder M1 decreases toward the tip 40g due to fluid resistance, and the iron part 40c moves in the direction of the arrow F, so the flow direction of the molten solder M1 flowing through the gaps Gu and Gd is The closer to the tip of the iron part 40c, the more backward the movement direction F is.
  • the flow lines of the molten solder M1 flowing in the gaps Gu and Gd are the supply amount of the molten solder M1, the flow velocity at the entrance of the gaps Gu and Gd, the friction coefficient between the glass substrate and the iron part, the glass substrate and
  • the molten solder M1 flowing through the gaps Gu and Gd The outer periphery r does not reach the tip 40g of the iron part 40c.
  • the width of the joint portion n to be finally formed is the coating width when the molten solder M1 that has flowed through the gaps Gu and Gd is separated from the rear surface 40i of the iron portion 40c and merges to fill the outer peripheral gap. It is prescribed by.
  • the coating width is defined by the position of the outer periphery r of the molten metal M1 on the rear surface 40i.
  • the flow state of the molten solder M1 also changes, and the molten solder M1 moves away from the rear surface 40i at a position where the outer periphery r is different between the first gap Gu and the second gap Gd.
  • the coating width becomes non-uniform.
  • the amount of the molten solder M1 that moves as the iron part 40c moves is small, defects such as voids occur in the contact interface between the molten solder M1 and the glass substrate, and the glass of the joint part Bonding strength to the substrate and sealing performance are reduced.
  • the flow state of the molten solder M1 is regulated by the tip 40g, so that the coating width is stabilized.
  • the molten solder M1 leaks from the gap s between the supply cylinder 38 and the end face of the glass substrate, which causes a problem that the appearance quality and the like of the glass panel deteriorate.
  • the iron part 39d of the guide part 39 is a side part facing in the moving direction F and has a notch part 39m at its tip part facing in the protruding direction.
  • the iron part 39d includes a front surface 39f orthogonal to the movement direction F, a tip surface 39g formed at the tip in the protruding direction of the iron part 39d and parallel to the movement direction F of the iron part 39d, and a iron part.
  • It has a shape having an inclined surface 39h and a rear surface 39i which are inclined backward with respect to the moving direction F of 39d and connect the front surface 39f and the tip surface 39g in a chamfered manner, and are inclined with an extension line of the front surface 39f and the tip surface 39g.
  • a region defined by the surface 39h is a notch 39m.
  • the iron part 39d having the notch part 39m the following effects are obtained. That is, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), of the molten solder M1 flowing through the first gap Gu, the molten solder M1 existing at the front in the moving direction F reaches the inclined surface 39h of the iron portion 39d. It flows along the inclined surface 39h and is guided to the tip surface 39g.
  • a part of the molten solder M1 reaching the inclined surface 39h gets over the inclined surface 39h and enters the notch 39m, and then joins the molten solder M1 flowing through the second gap Gd, along the inclined surface 39h. It flows and is guided to the tip surface 39g.
  • the position of the outer circumference r of the molten solder M1 flowing through the gaps Gu and Gd is regulated by the front end surface 39g and is always constant, and the width of the molten solder M1 that has merged away from the rear surface 39i is stabilized.
  • the iron part 39d of this example cuts the outer periphery r of the molten solder M1 flowing through the gaps Gu and Gd without filling the outer peripheral gap between the glass substrates with excessive supply of the molten solder M1.
  • the molten solder M1 can be supplied in a desired width by crossing the inclined surface 39h of the notch 39m and guiding it to the tip surface 39g.
  • the iron part 41d attached to the supply cylinder 41 shown in FIG. 48A is similar to the iron part 39d in addition to the inclined surface (first inclined surface) 39h formed at the tip of the iron part 41d.
  • the second inclined surface 41a has a second inclined surface 41a which is inclined rearward with respect to the moving direction F and formed on the proximal end side of the iron part 41d.
  • the second inclined surface 41 has a first inclined surface 39h and ends thereof are R-shaped.
  • the notches 41m are defined by the extended lines of the front end surface 39g and the front surface 39f, the first inclined surface 39h, and the second inclined surface 41a.
  • the iron part 43d attached to the supply cylinder 43 shown in FIG. 48 (c) is inclined backward with respect to the movement direction F of the iron part 43d and formed on the base end side of the iron part 43d.
  • the inclined surface 43b is orthogonally connected to the orthogonal surface 43a and the ends thereof are smoothly connected to each other by the R surface, and the extended line and the inclined surface of the end surface 39g and the front surface 39f.
  • a notch 43m is defined by the surface 43b and the orthogonal surface 43a.
  • the cutaway portions 39m and 41m to 43m are formed by defining a straight surface in plan view. However, even if these surfaces are curved, the shape is a combination of a straight line and a curved line. There may be.
  • the tip of the iron portion does not have to be a tip surface having a certain length, and for example, may have a shape with a sharp tip. Further, the inclination angle and shape of the inclined surface, etc.
  • a rear surface 44a may be formed so as to be substantially parallel to the inclined surface 39h like a soldering portion 44d attached to the supply cylinder 44 shown in FIG.
  • the length of the iron part 44d along the movement direction F of the iron part 44d is substantially constant from the base end to the distal end surface 39g, and in the direction (width direction) perpendicular to the movement direction F, The effect of applying the molten solder M1 to the main surface can be made uniform.
  • the contact part 39b will be described. As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, when the guide portion 39 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k, the guide portion 39 is fitted in the outer peripheral gap k so that the iron portion 39d is moved in the vertical direction in the outer peripheral gap k.
  • the position of is defined. That is, the first gap Gu between the upper surface of the iron part 39d and the glass substrate w3 and the second gap Gd between the lower surface of the iron part 39d and the glass substrate w4 can be maintained constant.
  • the contact portion 39b is preferably subjected to a surface treatment for improving the slipperiness between the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, for example, Ni water repellent plating.
  • the plate-like body 39c constituting the iron part 39d and the protrusion 39a constituting the contact part 39b may be formed in an integrated structure or may be an assembly structure in which another member is fixed by adhesion or a lamination process. With the assembly structure, it is possible to select and combine appropriate materials in accordance with required functions, such as using the plate-like body 39c as glass and the protrusion 39a as metal. Further, it is preferable to chamfer c on the side surface or the corner of the stepped surface with the trowel portion 39d so that the contact portion 39b can be easily fitted into the outer peripheral gap k. This chamfering is a part in which a corner is rounded into a straight line or a curve, and can be formed by cutting, abrasive processing, etching, or the like.
  • guide grooves 39e having left and right protrusions 39a as side walls are formed at the base ends of the upper and lower surfaces of the guide portion 39.
  • the guide groove 39e communicates with the flow path 38i via the discharge port 38h, the molten solder M1 flowing through the flow path 38i and discharged from the senior outlet 38h flows into the iron part 39d via the guide groove 39e.
  • the width, depth, and shape of the guide groove 39e may be appropriately determined according to the fluidity of the molten solder M1.
  • a guide groove that digs into the upper and lower surfaces of the plate-like body 39c and reaches the inclined surface 39h may be provided.
  • the supply cylinder 38 supplies the molten solder M1 from the first opening 38g formed on the one surface 38k, and discharges it from the discharge port 38h formed on the other surface 38l.
  • the molten solder M1 supplied to the first opening 38g is melted by the supply cylinder 38 while feeding the thread solder M to the first opening 38g at a predetermined speed, and sufficiently fills the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4. It is supplied at a controlled flow rate based on the supply amount.
  • the supply cylinder 24 is formed with a flow path 38i through which the molten solder M1 formed by melting the thread solder M as described above and a first opening 38g of the flow path 38i are formed. It has a melting surface 38k for melting M and a discharge surface 38l in which a discharge port 38h is formed, and a heater 38j for melting the thread solder M is wound around the outer peripheral surface thereof.
  • the yarn solder M is sent out at a speed controlled so that the lower end surface of the first opening 38g is in contact with the melting surface 38k, and is pressed against the melting surface 38k to be melted. Then, the molten solder M1 flows through the flow path 38i and is continuously discharged from the discharge port 38h.
  • the melting surface 38k through which the first opening 38g opens is, for example, a bottom surface of a concave portion formed by counterboring the surface of the supply cylinder 38.
  • the first opening 38g has a diameter ⁇ B that is less than the diameter ⁇ A of the end face of the thread solder M that abuts the melting surface 38k, and the flow path 38i is formed in a tubular shape having a diameter ⁇ B at least in the vicinity of the melting surface 38k.
  • a peripheral wall 38m around the supply cylinder 38 so as to surround the melting surface 38k.
  • the oxide E which is prevented from flowing into the flow path 38i, is stored in the concave bottom of the melting surface 38k, but may be sucked out or discharged by cutting out a part of the peripheral wall 38m as appropriate.
  • the supply device When supplying the molten solder M1, the supply device is configured to move along the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 when the flow state of the molten solder M1 in the supply cylinder 38 is in a steady state.
  • This steady state means a state in which the molten solder M1 is discharged from the discharge port 38h onto the upper surface of the guide portion 39 and can be introduced into the outer circumferential gap k.
  • the discharge port 38h is substantially filled with the molten solder M1. It is the state that was done.
  • the time from when the molten solder M1 is supplied from the first opening 38g until the steady state is reached is preferably as short as possible. For this reason, the flow path 38i is quickly filled with the molten solder M1 when the supply of the molten solder M1 in an unsteady state is started, and in a steady state, the flow rate is such that the outer peripheral gap k can be sufficiently filled.
  • the supply amount of the molten solder M1 is controlled.
  • the supplied clean molten solder M1 is slightly touched with the external atmosphere at the gaps s and gaps Gu and Gd between the discharge surface 38l and the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4. And w4 are filled in the outer circumferential gap k. Accordingly, the supplied clean molten solder M1 comes into contact with the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 in a state in which oxidation is suppressed even in an air atmosphere. Therefore, the supply device of this example is suitable for using SnAgAl alloy solder having excellent bonding properties with glass through an appropriate amount of oxygen.
  • a process for increasing the wettability with the molten solder M1 for example, Ag, Cr, Al, Mo, etc. It is preferable to coat W, V, Nb, Ta, etc., and a nitriding treatment is performed as a corrosion preventing treatment so that the surface of the guide portion 39 is eroded by the molten solder M1 and impurities are not mixed into the molten solder M1. It is preferable. In addition, it is preferable to perform these processes also on the surface of the flow path 38i.
  • the glass substrates w3 and w4 set up and down via a gap holding member Q having a predetermined dimension are positioned on a table that is movable in the XY2 axis direction with a built-in heating element, and the glass substrates w3 and w4 are made of the molten solder M1. Heat to about melting temperature.
  • the iron part 39d of the guide part 39 is inserted at a predetermined position on one side edge in the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and a predetermined gap is formed between the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 and the discharge surface 38l. It is moved so that s is formed. At this time, the attachment position of the iron part 39d is adjusted in advance so as to be near the center in the vertical direction of the outer circumferential gap k, but it is difficult to adjust precisely to the center of the outer circumferential gap k.
  • the contact part 39b hits the end surface of either the upper or lower glass substrate w3 or w4.
  • the supply cylinder 38 is supported by a floating mechanism in the vertical direction, and the chamfering c is applied to the contact portion 39b, the contact portion 39b can be easily fitted into the outer peripheral gap k.
  • the iron part 39d is positioned substantially in the center in the vertical direction of the outer circumferential gap k, and the gaps Gu and Gd between the iron part 39d and the glass substrates w3 and w4 are substantially the same in the vertical direction.
  • Glass substrates w3 and w4 are supplied in order to supply clean molten solder M1 having a predetermined flow rate to flow path 38i and begin to be discharged from discharge port 38h, reach a steady state in a short time, and supply molten solder M1 to one side of outer peripheral gap k. Can be immediately moved in one direction (X direction) at a predetermined speed. During this time, the molten solder M1 is introduced into the gaps Gu and Gd and supplied to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4. However, the contact portion 39b is fitted into the outer peripheral gap k and is in a floating state.
  • the molten solder M1 is introduced in substantially the same amount along the upper and lower surfaces of the iron portion 39d, so that the flow state of the molten solder M1 that moves with the movement of the iron portion 39d is substantially the same in the gaps Gu and Gd.
  • the molten solder M1 is supplied in the same manner to the main surface of the glass substrate w3 and to the main surface of the glass substrate w4.
  • the ultrasonic vibration when the ultrasonic vibration is applied during the filling and the ultrasonic vibration is applied to the guide portion 39, the wettability of the molten solder M1 and the guide portion 39, and the molten solder M1 and the glass substrates w3 and w4 is improved, and the gap Gu and Even when Gd is narrow, the molten solder M1 is supplied smoothly.
  • This ultrasonic vibration also acts on the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 via the molten solder M1, and removes foreign matters such as bubbles and oxide films existing at the contact interface between the molten solder M1 and the glass substrates w3 and w4. Therefore, the bondability of the molten solder M1 to the glass substrates w3 and w4 can be enhanced, and it is effective for improving the bonding strength of the glass panel W.
  • the casing 38e fitted with the supply cylinder 38 turns 90 degrees horizontally, and then the glass substrates w3 and w4 are on the other side orthogonal to the one side. Move horizontally along In the other side, the molten metal M1 is supplied to the outer peripheral gap k in the same manner as the one side. This operation is sequentially performed on each side, and the molten solder M1 is supplied to all the outer peripheral gaps k of the glass substrates w3 and w4.
  • the table on which the glass substrates w3 and w4 are placed is transferred to the outside. Although the glass substrates w3 and w4 are removed from the table carried out to the outside, the operation of removing the solder from the table is not necessary because the molten solder M1 is not attached on the table.
  • the supply cylinder 38 is supported by the floating mechanism in the vertical direction, and the chamfering c is applied to the contact portion 39b. It can be inserted at the center position of the outer circumferential gap k, and the molten solder M1 can be filled while maintaining the dimensions of the gaps Gu and Gd.
  • the molten solder M1 permeates between the contact part 39b and the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 by a capillary phenomenon.
  • the molten solder M1 is drawn from the iron part 39d and supplied to the contact area after the contact part 39b passes through while being in contact with the molten solder M1.
  • the length of the contact portion 39b is long, the molten solder M1 may not be supplied to all portions of the contact region. Therefore, it is preferable that the length of the contact portion 39b is short and the width of the joint portion n is small. It is preferably about 10 to 20%.
  • the upper and lower surfaces of the contact portion 39b are not limited to a flat plane as shown in FIG. 45, and may be a plane in which a groove is formed, or may be a curved surface.
  • the supply device of the fifth example is provided with the protrusion 39a constituting the contact portion 39b in the guide portion 39 in order to keep the gaps Gu and Gd between the iron portion 39d and the glass substrates w3 and w4 constant, and the protrusion 39a.
  • the protrusion 39a is not inserted into the supply cylinder 45, and the protrusion 39a is formed only on the part immediately coming out from the end surface of the supply cylinder 45, and the contact part 39b. can do.
  • a protrusion 39a can be formed at the tip of the plate-like body 39c to form the contact portion 39b.
  • a plate-like body 47a having the same thickness and having no protrusions can be used as in the supply cylinder 47 shown in FIG. 49 (c).
  • the variation in the thickness of the glass substrate and the guide deflection of the moving mechanism of the glass substrate are extremely small, such as for a small size glass substrate with a side of several to several tens of centimeters, and the gap fluctuates only to be negligible. It is good to apply to cases.
  • the supply device may not necessarily support the supply cylinder with the floating mechanism.
  • the guide part 39 should just be attached to the supply pipe
  • the guide portion may be provided with appropriate through holes and through grooves so that the molten solder flows from the upper surface side to the lower surface side.

Abstract

Provided is a molten metal supply pipe with which the admixing of oxides produced on the surface of a solid-phase, low melting point metal material can be limited with a construction that is simpler than prior constructions. The molten metal supply pipe, which is a molten metal supply pipe that melts and supplies a solid-phase, low melting point metal material, is characterized in comprising a melting zone that is directly or indirectly contacted by the low melting point metal material to produce a molten metal and a flow channel roughly in the form of a pipe that has a first opening formed in the melting zone at one end and a second opening at the other end and through which the molten metal produced by the melting zone flows, and by the fact that the melting zone melts the low melting point metal material from which surface oxides have been removed in an oxide removal zone prior to the low melting point metal material being melted.

Description

溶融金属の供給筒、その供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置及び溶融金属の供給方法Molten metal supply cylinder, molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder, and molten metal supply method
 本発明は、ガラス、セラミックス、金属などの部材に半田、インジューム等の低融点金属素材を溶融して供給する溶融金属の供給筒、その供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置及び溶融金属の供給方法に係わるものである。 The present invention relates to a molten metal supply tube for melting and supplying a low-melting-point metal material such as solder or indium to a member such as glass, ceramics or metal, a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply tube, and a molten metal This is related to the supply method.
 図51(a)、(b)に、画像表示装置の真空容器や複層ガラス(いわゆるペアガラス)を構成するガラスパネルを示す。ガラスパネルWは、厚み方向に寸法gの間隙が形成されるように間隙保持部材Q(例えばガラス球や樹脂球など)を介して主面S1とS2とが対向配置された一対のガラス基板w3とw4と、このガラス基板w3とw4の間隙の外周部分(以下外周間隙と言う。)kにおいて主面S1及びS2ともに接合され、この外周間隙kを封止し気密室を形成する接合部nとを有している。この接合部nは、従来ガラスフリットにより形成されていたが、近年、高気密性や低アウトガス性等の封止品質の向上という観点から例えばインジュームや半田などの低融点金属で形成することが提案されている。なお、以下、本発明について、ガラスパネルの製造技術を一例として説明するが、本発明の適用対象を限定するものではない。 51 (a) and 51 (b) show a glass panel that constitutes a vacuum container or a multi-layer glass (so-called pair glass) of an image display device. The glass panel W has a pair of glass substrates w3 in which the main surfaces S1 and S2 are arranged to face each other through a gap holding member Q (for example, a glass sphere or a resin sphere) so that a gap having a dimension g is formed in the thickness direction. And w4 and the main surfaces S1 and S2 are bonded together at the outer peripheral portion (hereinafter referred to as the outer peripheral gap) k of the gap between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and the joint n that seals the outer peripheral gap k and forms an airtight chamber. And have. The joint n has been conventionally formed of glass frit, but in recent years, it may be formed of a low melting point metal such as indium or solder from the viewpoint of improving sealing quality such as high airtightness and low outgas. Proposed. In the following, the present invention will be described by taking a glass panel manufacturing technique as an example, but the scope of application of the present invention is not limited.
 上記複層ガラスや真空容器を構成するガラスパネルは次のような工程を経て製造される。(1)矩形状の2枚のガラス基板w3、w4を準備する。(2)インジュームや半田等の低融点金属素材を溶融した溶融金属を、一方又は双方のガラス基板の接合面に外周縁に沿い枠状に供給し、接合部を形成する。(3)ガラス基板w3、w4の接合面同士が対向するように位置決めする。(4)ガラス基板w3とw4とを重ね合わせ、接合部を介して2枚のガラス基板w3とw4とを接合する。 The glass panels constituting the multilayer glass and the vacuum vessel are manufactured through the following steps. (1) Two rectangular glass substrates w3 and w4 are prepared. (2) A molten metal obtained by melting a low melting point metal material such as indium or solder is supplied in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge to the bonding surface of one or both glass substrates to form a bonding portion. (3) Position the glass substrates w3 and w4 so that the bonding surfaces face each other. (4) The glass substrates w3 and w4 are overlapped, and the two glass substrates w3 and w4 are bonded via the bonding portion.
 上記(2)の溶融金属の供給工程に関する技術が特許文献1及び非特許文献1に開示されている。すなわち、特許文献1には、画像表示装置の真空容器を構成する前面基板及び背面基板(いずれもガラス基板である。)を直接的又は間接的に接合する金属封着材(本明細書における低融点金属素材に相当する。)からなる接合部材を当該前面基板及び背面基板の接合面に形成するため、当該接合面に超音波を印加しながら溶融した金属封着材を塗布する装置が開示されている。また、非特許文献1には、Zn、Al、Si、Tiなど易酸化元素がPb-Sn系半田とガラス基板との接合性を高める点に着目し、これら易酸化元素の1種以上を含むPb-Sn系半田を接合材として使用しガラス基板など酸化表面を有する被接合体を直接接合する技術、及び溶融半田とガラス基板との接触界面に超音波振動を付与することにより当該接触界面に存在する気泡を除去し、半田とガラス基板との接合性を改善する超音波半田付け技術が開示されている。 The technology relating to the molten metal supply step (2) is disclosed in Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 1. That is, Patent Document 1 discloses a metal sealing material (low in this specification) for directly or indirectly joining a front substrate and a rear substrate (both are glass substrates) constituting a vacuum container of an image display device. An apparatus for applying a molten metal sealing material while applying ultrasonic waves to the bonding surface is disclosed in order to form a bonding member composed of a melting point metal material.) On the bonding surface of the front substrate and the rear substrate. ing. Further, Non-Patent Document 1 pays attention to the fact that easily oxidizable elements such as Zn, Al, Si, and Ti improve the bondability between the Pb—Sn solder and the glass substrate, and include one or more of these easily oxidizable elements. A technique for directly joining an object to be joined having an oxidized surface such as a glass substrate using Pb—Sn solder as a bonding material, and applying ultrasonic vibration to the contact interface between the molten solder and the glass substrate to the contact interface. An ultrasonic soldering technique that removes existing bubbles and improves the bondability between the solder and the glass substrate is disclosed.
 このように溶融した低融点金属素材(以下特に断らない限り本明細書では「溶融した低融点金属素材」を「溶融金属」という。)をガラス基板に塗布するときに超音波を印加すると、ガラス基板の表面に存在する気泡や異物が超音波により除去され、ガラス基板と接合部材との接合界面の接合性は向上するという利点がある。 When an ultrasonic wave is applied when a low melting point metal material thus melted (hereinafter referred to as “molten low melting point metal material” is referred to as “molten metal” in the present specification unless otherwise specified) is applied to a glass substrate, There is an advantage that bubbles and foreign matters existing on the surface of the substrate are removed by ultrasonic waves, and the bonding property of the bonding interface between the glass substrate and the bonding member is improved.
 ところで、一般に、金属材料は固相、液相いずれにおいても大気中では酸化が進み易く、表面に酸化物が生じる。このことは大気中で保管されている固相の低融点金属素材でも同様であり、この素材を溶融して接合部を形成すると、その表面に生成している酸化物がそのまま接合部とガラス基板との接合面に介在したり、溶融金属中に混入する。そして、混入した酸化物はガラス基板と接合部との界面欠陥や接合部の内部欠陥の起因となり、接合部の気密性、ガラス基板と接合部との界面強度及び接合部自体の強度などを劣化させるという問題を招く。特に、特許文献1及び非特許文献1に係る技術のごとく、超音波振動を利用して接合部材を形成する場合には、溶融金属に混入した酸化物が超音波振動で攪拌されるため上記問題が顕著に現われる。 By the way, in general, a metal material is easily oxidized in the atmosphere in both the solid phase and the liquid phase, and an oxide is generated on the surface. The same applies to solid-phase low-melting-point metal materials stored in the atmosphere. When this material is melted to form a joint, the oxide produced on the surface remains as it is and the glass substrate. It intervenes in the joint surface with and mixes in the molten metal. The mixed oxide causes interface defects between the glass substrate and the joint and internal defects in the joint, and deteriorates the airtightness of the joint, the interface strength between the glass substrate and the joint, and the strength of the joint itself. Cause the problem of In particular, as in the technique according to Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 1, when forming a joining member using ultrasonic vibration, the above problem is caused because the oxide mixed in the molten metal is stirred by ultrasonic vibration. Appears prominently.
 上記問題を解消する技術の一例が特許文献2、3に記載されている。特許文献2には、金属材料の酸化物の発生を抑制し、金属材料と板ガラスとの接合及びそれによる気密封止を安定して行うことができるガラスパネルの製造方法を提供するため、一対の板ガラスを間隙を介して上下対面配置すると共に、貯留される溶融金属材料の表面が接する雰囲気を不活性ガス雰囲気状態とした貯留部から、溶融金属材料を外周間隙に供給し充填することにより、板ガラス同士を接合し、間隙を気密に封止するという構成が開示されている。 Examples of techniques for solving the above problems are described in Patent Documents 2 and 3. Patent Document 2 provides a method for manufacturing a glass panel that suppresses generation of an oxide of a metal material, and can stably perform the bonding between the metal material and plate glass and the hermetic sealing thereby, The plate glass is disposed by facing the upper and lower surfaces through a gap, and supplying and filling the molten metal material into the outer circumferential gap from a storage part in which the atmosphere in contact with the surface of the molten metal material to be stored is in an inert gas atmosphere state. A configuration is disclosed in which the members are joined together and the gap is hermetically sealed.
 特許文献3には、大気中で溶融した金属封着材を充填するにも係らず、金属封着材表面における酸化膜の生成を抑制して、金属封着材の封着面に対する濡れ性の向上を得られ、完全な封着を可能とする画像表示装置の製造方法および封着材充填装置を提供するため、封着面を有する被封着物を位置決め支持する支持台と、溶融した金属封着材を貯溜する密閉された貯溜部、貯溜部から送られる溶融金属封着材を上記封着面に充填するノズル、ノズルの先端面とその周辺に安定ガスを供給して安定ガス雰囲気となすガス供給手段を有する充填ヘッドからなる封着材充填装置に係る構成が開示されている。 In Patent Document 3, although the metal sealing material melted in the atmosphere is filled, the generation of an oxide film on the surface of the metal sealing material is suppressed, and the wettability of the sealing surface of the metal sealing material is reduced. In order to provide an image display apparatus manufacturing method and a sealing material filling apparatus that can achieve improvement and enable complete sealing, a support base for positioning and supporting an object to be sealed having a sealing surface, and a molten metal seal A sealed reservoir for storing the deposit, a nozzle for filling the sealing surface with the molten metal sealing material sent from the reservoir, and supplying a stable gas to and around the tip of the nozzle to create a stable gas atmosphere. The structure which concerns on the sealing material filling apparatus which consists of a filling head which has a gas supply means is disclosed.
 上記工程(2)に関する別の技術が特許文献4に開示されている。特許文献4には、貯留された溶融金属材料(溶融半田)を排出する排出口と、排出口の中央部に設置され溶融半田を排出口から外周間隙に導入する導入板とを備えた金属供給筒を使用した溶融半田の充填方法において、一対の板ガラスの間隙寸法が小さい場合であっても、溶融半田の漏れを抑制して確実に外周間隙に充填するため、排出口と板ガラスの端面との間に形成される隙間の距離を板ガラスの間隙寸法の10倍以下になるように設定する溶融半田の充填方法が開示されている。かかる特許文献4の充填方法によれば、板ガラスの間隙が小さい場合でも、溶融半田が予定外の範囲に広がるのを抑制しつつ外周間隙に溶融半田を充填することが可能であると記載されている。 Another technique related to the above step (2) is disclosed in Patent Document 4. Patent Document 4 discloses a metal supply including a discharge port that discharges a stored molten metal material (molten solder) and an introduction plate that is installed at the center of the discharge port and introduces molten solder from the discharge port to the outer peripheral gap. In the method of filling molten solder using a cylinder, even when the gap between the pair of glass sheets is small, it is possible to prevent the molten solder from leaking and reliably fill the outer circumferential gap. A molten solder filling method is disclosed in which the distance between the gaps formed therebetween is set to be 10 times or less the gap dimension of the plate glass. According to the filling method of Patent Document 4, it is described that even when the gap between the plate glasses is small, it is possible to fill the outer peripheral gap with the molten solder while suppressing the spread of the molten solder to an unplanned range. Yes.
 上記工程(2)に関するさらに別の技術が特許文献5に開示されている。特許文献5には、一対のガラス板の間にスペーサ-を配設して間隙を形成し、溶融した単一の金属材料を間隙の周縁部に充填して一対のガラス板と金属材料とを直接接合し、間隙を気密に封止するガラスパネルの製造方法において、一対のガラス板の外周間隙に溶融した金属材料を供給するため、溶融した金属材料を導く板状又は棒状のガイドの少なくとも一部分を外周間隙に挿入するガラスパネルの製造方法が記載されている。 Still another technique relating to the above step (2) is disclosed in Patent Document 5. In Patent Document 5, a spacer is provided between a pair of glass plates to form a gap, and a molten single metal material is filled into the peripheral edge of the gap to directly bond the pair of glass plates and the metal material. In the glass panel manufacturing method in which the gap is hermetically sealed, at least a part of the plate-shaped or bar-shaped guide for guiding the molten metal material is supplied to the outer periphery to supply the molten metal material to the outer peripheral gap of the pair of glass plates. A method for producing a glass panel to be inserted into the gap is described.
 そして、特許文献5には、狭隘な外周間隙の場合に困難な金属材料の導入が上記ガイドにより促進され、容易になり、さらに導入速度が大きくなるため、金属材料とガラス基板との直接接合が形成し易くなると記載されている。また、上記ガイドの大きさ及び形状を外周間隙に応じて適宜に設定することで、溶融金属材料を外周間隙へ確実に充填することができると記載されている。 In Patent Document 5, the introduction of a metal material which is difficult in the case of a narrow outer peripheral gap is facilitated and facilitated by the guide, and the introduction speed is increased. Therefore, direct bonding between the metal material and the glass substrate is possible. It is described that it is easy to form. Further, it is described that the molten metal material can be surely filled into the outer peripheral gap by appropriately setting the size and shape of the guide according to the outer peripheral gap.
 さらに、特許文献5には、一対のガラス板の大きさがそれぞれ異なり、一方のガラス板の端縁が他方のガラス板の端縁を越えて突出するガラスパネルの製造方法において、一方のガラス板の突出部分から外周間隙に向かい毛細管現象により溶融半田を浸透させ、外周間隙に溶融半田を充填するガラスパネルの製造方法が記載されている。なお、毛細管現象は、溶融半田又はガラス板の少なくとも一方に振動を印加し、ガラス板への溶融半田の濡れを向上させることにより生じると特許文献5には記載されている。 Further, in Patent Document 5, in the method of manufacturing a glass panel in which the size of a pair of glass plates is different and the edge of one glass plate protrudes beyond the edge of the other glass plate, Describes a method of manufacturing a glass panel in which molten solder is infiltrated by capillary action from the protruding portion of the metal to the outer peripheral gap, and the outer peripheral gap is filled with molten solder. Patent Document 5 describes that the capillary phenomenon occurs when vibration is applied to at least one of molten solder or a glass plate to improve the wettability of the molten solder to the glass plate.
 加えて、特許文献5の実施例14には、具体的な半田供給装置が記載されている。この半田供給装置は、金属材料と接合されるべき主面間に0.2mmの間隙が形成されるよう配置された2枚のガラス板の外周間隙に、内径3mmのパイプを通じて半田溶融槽から溶融半田を自重で送り込み、パイプの先端に取付けられた厚さ0.15mmの金属製の板状のガイドを外周間隙に約5mm挿入し、ガラス板の外周縁に沿って外周間隙に溶融半田を充填するよう構成されている。そして、この半田供給装置によれば、溶融半田による外周間隙の封止幅はガラス板の外周縁から約5mmであり、リーク試験、熱貫流率の測定、鉛溶出試験、酸素含有率の測定結果は問題なかったことが記載されている。 In addition, in Example 14 of Patent Document 5, a specific solder supply device is described. This solder supply device is melted from a solder melting tank through a pipe having an inner diameter of 3 mm in an outer peripheral gap between two glass plates arranged so that a 0.2 mm gap is formed between main surfaces to be bonded to a metal material. Solder is fed by its own weight, a metal plate guide with a thickness of 0.15 mm attached to the tip of the pipe is inserted into the outer peripheral gap about 5 mm, and the outer peripheral gap of the glass plate is filled with molten solder. It is configured to And according to this solder supply apparatus, the sealing width of the outer peripheral gap by the molten solder is about 5 mm from the outer peripheral edge of the glass plate, and the leak test, the measurement of the thermal conductivity, the lead elution test, the measurement result of the oxygen content rate It is described that there was no problem.
特開2002-184313号公報JP 2002-184313 A 特開2002-255591号公報Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-255591 特開2005-331673号公報JP 2005-331673 A 特開2002-167245号公報JP 2002-167245 A WO00/58234号公報WO00 / 58234
[第1の課題]
 上記特許文献2、3に記載された技術は、いずれも非酸化雰囲気中で溶融金属を操作するものであり、低融点金属素材の溶融過程及び溶融金属の供給過程における酸化物の生成を抑制することができ、もってそれらの過程で生じた酸化物に起因した欠陥生成を抑制できるという利点がある。しかしながら、固相の低融点金属素材の表面に既に存在する酸化物は、かかる特許文献2、3の技術のように非酸化雰囲気中で操作を行っても、それを完全に除去することは難しく、溶融金属中に混入するので、特許文献1及び非特許文献1が抱えていた問題を完全に解消することができない。更に、上記非特許文献1で例示したように、酸化表面を有する被接合体に易酸化元素を含む接合材を直接接合する場合には、酸化表面と接合材の間には接合性を確保するため所定量の酸素が存在している必要がある。一方でその酸素は溶融した接合材の酸化を進行させ、その結果接合材と被接合体の間に酸化膜が生成され接合性が害されるというトレードオフの関係が生じる。この問題は非酸化雰囲気中で各種操作を行う特許文献2、3の技術では解消できない。
[First task]
The techniques described in Patent Documents 2 and 3 operate the molten metal in a non-oxidizing atmosphere, and suppress the generation of oxides in the melting process of the low melting point metal material and the supply process of the molten metal. Therefore, there is an advantage that generation of defects due to oxides generated in these processes can be suppressed. However, it is difficult to completely remove the oxide already existing on the surface of the low-melting-point metal material in the solid phase even if it is operated in a non-oxidizing atmosphere as in the techniques of Patent Documents 2 and 3. In addition, since it is mixed in the molten metal, the problems of Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 1 cannot be solved completely. Further, as exemplified in Non-Patent Document 1 above, when a bonding material containing an easily oxidizable element is directly bonded to an object to be bonded having an oxidized surface, bondability is ensured between the oxidized surface and the bonding material. Therefore, a predetermined amount of oxygen needs to be present. On the other hand, the oxygen causes the molten bonding material to oxidize, and as a result, an oxide film is generated between the bonding material and the object to be bonded, thereby causing a trade-off relationship. This problem cannot be solved by the techniques of Patent Documents 2 and 3 in which various operations are performed in a non-oxidizing atmosphere.
 本発明は、従来技術に係る構成に較べシンプルな構成で、固相の低融点金属素材を溶融して供給する際に酸化物が溶融金属に混入することを抑制できる溶融金属の供給筒、その供給筒を用いることにより酸化物の混入を抑制しつつ溶融金属を供給する溶融金属の供給装置及び供給方法を提供することを第1の目的としている。 The present invention has a simple configuration compared to the configuration according to the prior art, and a molten metal supply cylinder capable of suppressing the mixing of oxide into the molten metal when the low-melting-point metal material in the solid phase is melted and supplied, It is a first object of the present invention to provide a molten metal supply device and a supply method for supplying a molten metal while suppressing mixing of oxides by using a supply cylinder.
[第2の課題]
 本発明は、上記特許文献4、5に記載された従来技術を鑑みてなされたものであり、互いの主面が間隙を介し配置された一対の被接合材である板状体の外周間隙に溶融金属を供給するに際し、従来技術に対し改善された溶融金属の供給筒、その供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置及び溶融金属の供給方法提供することを第2の目的としている。
[Second issue]
The present invention has been made in view of the prior art described in Patent Documents 4 and 5, and the outer surfaces of the plate-like bodies, which are a pair of materials to be joined, are arranged with a gap between the main surfaces. When supplying molten metal, the second object is to provide a molten metal supply cylinder, a molten metal supply apparatus and a molten metal supply method in which the supply cylinder is improved compared to the prior art.
[第3の課題]
 一対の板ガラスの外周間隙に溶融半田を充填して接合部を形成するに際し、特許文献4にも記されているように、板ガラスの端面から溶融半田の排出口を一定の距離だけ離しておく必要がある。この場合、排出口と板ガラスの端面に形成された隙間に満たされた状態で溶融半田は充填されるため、その隙間から溶融半田が漏れ出し、図51(b)に示すように、板ガラスw3、w4の外周間隙に溶融半田が充填されるだけではなく板ガラスw3、w4の端面にも溶融半田n1が付着した状態となる。この排出口と板ガラスの端面に形成された隙間から漏れ出した溶融半田の量が増えると、端面に付着する溶融半田n1が高く盛り上がり、著しい場合には板ガラスw4の端面を流下する場合がある。このようなガラスパネルは外観的に好ましくないだけでなく、その実装性を損なうおそれがある。また、板ガラスが載置される部材の載置面に漏れた溶融半田が落下するようになると、この溶融半田がガラス板w4の清浄とすべき面を汚染するという品質的な問題、載置する部材へ次の板ガラスw4を載置する場合に高さ方向の位置決め精度が劣化するという工業生産上の問題が生じる。
[Third issue]
When a molten solder is filled in the outer peripheral gap of a pair of glass plates to form a joint, as described in Patent Document 4, it is necessary to keep the molten solder discharge port away from the end surface of the glass plate by a certain distance. There is. In this case, since the molten solder is filled in a state where the gap formed in the discharge port and the end face of the plate glass is filled, the molten solder leaks from the gap, and as shown in FIG. Not only is the molten solder filled in the outer peripheral gap of w4, but the molten solder n1 is also attached to the end surfaces of the plate glasses w3 and w4. When the amount of molten solder leaking from the gap formed between the discharge port and the end face of the plate glass increases, the molten solder n1 adhering to the end face rises, and in some cases, the end face of the plate glass w4 may flow down. Such a glass panel is not only unfavorable in appearance, but also has a risk of impairing its mountability. Further, when the molten solder leaking on the mounting surface of the member on which the plate glass is mounted falls, the quality problem that this molten solder contaminates the surface to be cleaned of the glass plate w4 is mounted. When the next plate glass w4 is placed on the member, there is a problem in industrial production that the positioning accuracy in the height direction deteriorates.
 この問題は、溶融半田の排出口と板ガラスの端面に形成する隙間の適正化、又は溶融半田の供給量の適正化を図ることで解消することもできるが、さまざまな形態を有するガラスパネルにおいて適正な条件をいちいち決定することは工業生産上非常に困難であり、コスト高となる。 This problem can be solved by optimizing the gap formed between the molten solder discharge port and the end face of the plate glass, or by optimizing the amount of molten solder supplied, but it is appropriate for glass panels with various forms. It is very difficult for industrial production to determine the appropriate conditions one by one, resulting in high costs.
 本発明は、互いの主面が間隙を介し配置された一対の被接合材である板状体の外周間隙に溶融金属を供給するに際し、板状体の端面に溶融金属が付着し難い溶融金属の供給筒、その供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置及び溶融金属の供給方法を提供することを第3の目的としている。 The present invention provides a molten metal that hardly adheres to the end face of the plate-like body when supplying the molten metal to the outer peripheral gap of the plate-like body, which is a pair of materials to be joined with the principal surfaces of each other being interposed via a gap. A third object of the present invention is to provide a supply tube for molten metal, an apparatus for supplying molten metal in which the supply tube is incorporated, and a method for supplying molten metal.
[第4の課題]
 上記第3の課題に加え、図51(d)に示すように一対のガラス板の大きさがそれぞれ異なり、一方のガラス板の端縁が他方のガラス板の端縁を越えて突出している場合に、特許文献5に記載された毛細管現象を利用して溶融半田を外周間隙に導入する方法を用いると、溶融半田が板ガラスw4の端面を流下するおそれは少ないが、図51(d)に示すように、溶融半田n2がガラス板w4の突出部分まで大きく漏出した状態となる。さらに、特許文献5の実施例1に記載されているように接合部nの幅が2.5~4mmと接合幅が安定しないという問題がある。
[Fourth issue]
In addition to the third problem, as shown in FIG. 51 (d), the pair of glass plates are different in size, and the edge of one glass plate protrudes beyond the edge of the other glass plate. In addition, when the method of introducing molten solder into the outer peripheral gap using the capillary phenomenon described in Patent Document 5 is used, there is little possibility that the molten solder will flow down the end face of the plate glass w4, as shown in FIG. Thus, it will be in the state which the molten solder n2 leaked greatly to the protrusion part of the glass plate w4. Furthermore, as described in Example 1 of Patent Document 5, there is a problem that the width of the joint portion n is 2.5 to 4 mm and the joint width is not stable.
 本発明は、互いの主面が間隙を介し配置された一対の被接合材である板状体の外周間隙に溶融金属を供給するに際し、板状体の端面に溶融金属が付着し難い溶融金属の供給筒、その供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置及び溶融金属の供給方法、特に一対の板状体の大きさがそれぞれ異なり、一方の板状体の端縁が他方の板状体の端縁を越えて突出している場合に、溶融金属が突出部分に漏出しがたく、外周間隙に一定の幅で溶融金属を安定して供給できる溶融金属の供給筒、その供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置及び溶融金属の供給方法を提供することを第4の目的としている。 The present invention provides a molten metal that hardly adheres to the end face of the plate-like body when supplying the molten metal to the outer peripheral gap of the plate-like body, which is a pair of materials to be joined with the principal surfaces of each other being interposed via a gap. Supply tube, molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply tube, and molten metal supply method, in particular, a pair of plate-like bodies have different sizes, and the edge of one plate-like body is the other plate-like body In the case where the molten metal protrudes beyond the edge of the metal, the molten metal does not leak into the protruding portion, and a molten metal supply tube that can stably supply molten metal with a certain width to the outer circumferential gap is incorporated. Another object of the present invention is to provide a molten metal supply apparatus and a molten metal supply method.
[第5の課題]
特許文献5に記載されたガイドを外周間隙に挿入して溶融金属材料を充填する場合、溶融金属材料は、ガイドとガラス基板との間に形成される間隙の中を流動して外周間隙に充填される。しかしながら、ガイドとガラス基板の間隙が小さくなると流体抵抗が大きくなり、その間隙を流れる溶融半田はガイドの先端まで到達しにくくなる。加えて、溶融金属材料が供給される方向に対し直交する方向にガイドは移動するので、ガイドとガラス基板の間隙を流動する溶融半田の量は先端ほど少なくなる。これらにより、特に外周間隙が狭小化した場合には、一定の幅で安定して外周間隙に溶融金属材料を供給することが困難となる。
[Fifth issue]
When the molten metal material is filled by inserting the guide described in Patent Document 5 into the outer circumferential gap, the molten metal material flows in the gap formed between the guide and the glass substrate and fills the outer circumferential gap. Is done. However, when the gap between the guide and the glass substrate is reduced, the fluid resistance is increased, and the molten solder flowing through the gap is difficult to reach the tip of the guide. In addition, since the guide moves in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the molten metal material is supplied, the amount of molten solder that flows through the gap between the guide and the glass substrate decreases toward the tip. Thus, particularly when the outer peripheral gap is narrowed, it becomes difficult to stably supply the molten metal material to the outer peripheral gap with a constant width.
 なお、本発明者は、ガイドを移動させた場合に溶融半田がガイドに追従して移動する程度にガイドとガラス基板の間隙を狭小化すると接合部とガラス板の接合強度が高まり、その間隙の大きさは具体的には0.01~0.005mm程度であるとの知見を得た。しかしながら、特許文献5のガイドを用いガラス基板との間隙を0.01~0.005mm程度とすると、ガイドの先端に到達する溶融半田の量が少なく、またその幅も安定しないという問題があった。加えて、溶融半田の供給不足により、ガラス基板と接合部の接合界面に線状或いは点状に空孔欠陥が生じ接合強度が低下するという問題も生じた。 In addition, when the guide is moved, if the gap between the guide and the glass substrate is reduced to such an extent that the molten solder moves following the guide, the bonding strength between the joint and the glass plate is increased. Specifically, it was found that the size was about 0.01 to 0.005 mm. However, when the guide of Patent Document 5 is used and the gap with the glass substrate is about 0.01 to 0.005 mm, there is a problem that the amount of molten solder reaching the tip of the guide is small and the width is not stable. . In addition, due to insufficient supply of molten solder, there is a problem in that the bonding strength is reduced due to the occurrence of vacancy defects in a linear or dotted manner at the bonding interface between the glass substrate and the bonding portion.
 本発明は、互いの主面が間隙を介し配置された一対の被接合材である板状体の外周間隙に溶融金属を供給するに際し、外周間隙に一定の幅で溶融金属を安定して供給できる溶融金属の供給筒、その供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置及び溶融金属の供給方法を提供することを第5の目的としている。 In the present invention, when supplying molten metal to the outer peripheral gap of a plate-like body, which is a pair of materials whose main surfaces are arranged via a gap, the molten metal is stably supplied to the outer peripheral gap with a certain width. It is a fifth object of the present invention to provide a molten metal supply tube, a molten metal supply device incorporating the supply tube, and a molten metal supply method.
(1) 上記第1の目的を達成する請求項1に記載の溶融金属の供給筒は、固相の低融点金属素材を溶融して供給する溶融金属の供給筒であって、低融点金属素材が直接的または間接的に当接して溶融金属を生成する溶融部と、溶融部に形成された第1開口を一端に及び第2開口を他端に有するとともに溶融部で生成された溶融金属が流通する略管状の流通通路とを有し、低融点金属素材が溶融する時以前に酸化物除去部で表層の酸化物が除去された当該低融点金属素材を溶融部で溶融することを特徴としている。 (1) The molten metal supply tube according to claim 1, which achieves the first object, is a molten metal supply tube that melts and supplies a solid-phase low-melting-point metal material. A molten part that directly or indirectly abuts to generate a molten metal, a first opening formed in the molten part at one end and a second opening at the other end and a molten metal generated at the molten part A low-melting-point metal material having a surface layer of oxide removed before the low-melting-point metal material is melted in the melting portion. Yes.
 上記(1)の供給筒は以下の作用を奏する。すなわち、固相の低融点金属素材は溶融部に当接することにより溶融して溶融金属が生成され、その溶融金属は第1開口から流入し流通通路を流動して第2開口から流出する。ここで、流通通路は第1開口及び第2開口以外は密閉されているので、供給過程において溶融金属は大気と触れることがなく酸化物の生成が抑制され、溶融金属への酸化物の混入が回避される。更に、低融点金属素材は、その表層の酸化物が酸化物除去部で除去されたうえで溶融部において溶融されるので、低融点金属素材の表面に付着している酸化物の流通通路への進入は阻止される。なお、本明細書における「低融点金属」とは、例えばSn、In、Zn、Ga等で例示される概ね400℃以下の比較的低い温度で溶融する金属のことを言う。 The supply cylinder (1) has the following effects. That is, the low-melting-point metal material in the solid phase is melted by coming into contact with the melting part to generate molten metal, and the molten metal flows from the first opening, flows through the flow passage, and flows out from the second opening. Here, since the flow passage is sealed except for the first opening and the second opening, the molten metal does not come into contact with the atmosphere in the supply process, and the generation of oxide is suppressed, and the mixing of the oxide into the molten metal is prevented. Avoided. Furthermore, the low melting point metal material is melted in the melted portion after the surface oxide is removed in the oxide removing portion, so that the oxides adhering to the surface of the low melting point metal material enter the flow passage. The entry is blocked. Note that the “low melting point metal” in this specification refers to a metal that melts at a relatively low temperature of approximately 400 ° C. or less, exemplified by Sn, In, Zn, Ga, and the like.
(2) 上記(1)の供給筒において、酸化物が除去された低融点金属素材の表面に再び酸化物が生じることを防止するためには、酸化物除去部と溶融部とが近接して配置されていることが望ましく、酸化物除去部は溶融部と一体的に設けられており、低融点金属素材が溶融する時に低融点金属素材の表層の酸化物を除去するよう構成されていることが望ましい。 (2) In the supply cylinder of (1) above, in order to prevent the oxide from being generated again on the surface of the low melting point metal material from which the oxide has been removed, the oxide removal part and the melting part are close to each other. It is desirable that the oxide removal portion is provided integrally with the melting portion, and is configured to remove oxide on the surface layer of the low melting point metal material when the low melting point metal material is melted. Is desirable.
(3) 具体的には、上記(2)の供給筒において、第1開口は酸化物除去部に開口し、その第1開口の面積は低融点金属素材が溶融部に当接する面積未満であることが望ましい。第1開口の面積を低融点金属素材が溶融部に当接している面積未満とし、当該第1開口を閉塞するように溶融部へ低融点金属素材を当接することで、低融点金属素材の表面に付着している酸化物は第1開口の外周縁部で除去され、酸化物の流通通路への進入は阻止される。 (3) Specifically, in the supply cylinder of (2) above, the first opening opens to the oxide removing portion, and the area of the first opening is less than the area where the low melting point metal material contacts the melting portion. It is desirable. By setting the area of the first opening to be less than the area where the low-melting-point metal material is in contact with the melting part, and bringing the low-melting-point metal material into contact with the melting part so as to close the first opening, the surface of the low-melting-point metal material The oxide adhering to is removed at the outer peripheral edge of the first opening, and the oxide is prevented from entering the flow passage.
(4) 流通通路への進入を阻止された酸化物が移動して再び流通通路へ進入することを回避するため、上記(2)又は(3)の供給筒において、第1開口の周囲には酸化物捕捉部が設けられ、酸化物が移動しないように酸化物を捕捉することが望ましい。 (4) In order to avoid the oxide that has been prevented from entering the distribution passage from moving and entering the distribution passage again, in the supply cylinder of (2) or (3) above, It is desirable to provide an oxide capturing part and capture the oxide so that the oxide does not move.
(5) 上記(2)又は(3)の供給筒において、流通通路への進入を阻止された酸化物が第1開口の周囲の非開口部に堆積し、再び流通通路へ進入することを回避するためには、第1開口の周囲から酸化物を排出する酸化物排出部を有することが望ましい。 (5) In the supply tube of (2) or (3) above, it is avoided that the oxide that has been prevented from entering the flow passage accumulates in the non-opening around the first opening and enters the flow passage again. In order to achieve this, it is desirable to have an oxide discharge portion that discharges oxide from the periphery of the first opening.
(6) 上記(1)の供給筒において、酸化物除去部は別体として設けられており、低融点金属素材の溶融前において低融点金属素材の表層の酸化物を除去するよう構成されていることが望ましい。 (6) In the supply cylinder of (1) above, the oxide removing section is provided as a separate body, and is configured to remove the oxide on the surface of the low melting point metal material before melting the low melting point metal material. It is desirable.
(7) 上記(6)の供給筒において、酸化物除去部は、低融点金属素材の表層を除去する刃部、(8)プラズマ照射手段、又は(9)ショットブラスト手段を含むことができる。 (7) In the supply cylinder of (6) above, the oxide removal unit can include a blade part for removing the surface layer of the low melting point metal material, (8) plasma irradiation means, or (9) shot blasting means.
(10) 上記(1)の供給筒において、溶融金属を安定して円滑に供給するためには、流通通路の表面には溶融金属との濡れ性を高める処理がなされていることが望ましい。この処理としては、例えば低融点金属として半田を利用する場合、メッキ法、CVD、PVDやスパッタ法等での、Cr、Al、Mo、W、V、Nb、Ta、Ti等金属層形成処理を採用することができる。 (10) In the supply cylinder of (1) above, in order to stably and smoothly supply the molten metal, it is desirable that the surface of the flow passage is subjected to a treatment for improving wettability with the molten metal. As this process, for example, when using solder as a low melting point metal, a metal layer forming process such as Cr, Al, Mo, W, V, Nb, Ta, Ti by plating, CVD, PVD, sputtering or the like is performed. Can be adopted.
(11) 上記(1)の供給筒において、溶融金属の汚染を防止するためには、流通通路の表面には溶融金属に対する溶食防止処理がなされ、流通する溶融金属により流通通路の表面が溶食され溶融半田M1に不純物が混入しないことが望ましい。かかる処理としては、例えば供給筒が鋼などで構成されている場合には流通通路の表面に窒化処理を施したり、流通通路の表面に例えばTiN等のセラミックスを被覆処理したりする手段を採用することができる。 (11) In the supply cylinder of (1) above, in order to prevent contamination of the molten metal, the surface of the flow passage is subjected to a corrosion prevention treatment for the molten metal, and the surface of the flow passage is dissolved by the molten metal flowing. It is desirable that impurities are not mixed into the molten solder M1. As such processing, for example, when the supply cylinder is made of steel or the like, a means for performing nitriding treatment on the surface of the flow passage or coating the surface of the flow passage with ceramics such as TiN is adopted. be able to.
(12) 上記(1)の供給筒において、第2開口から流出する溶融金属をワークへ安定して供給するためには、溶融部で生成され第2開口から排出される溶融金属を案内する案内部を有することが望ましい。 (12) In the supply cylinder of (1) above, in order to stably supply the molten metal flowing out from the second opening to the workpiece, guidance for guiding the molten metal generated in the melting part and discharged from the second opening. It is desirable to have a part.
 なお、案内部は、溶融金属が流出する供給筒の第2開口に取り付けられていることが、所望の量の溶融金属を確実に外周間隙に供給し、溶融金属の供給幅を安定化させるという点から望ましい。更に、下記実施態様の項で詳細に説明するとおり、所定の場合には、第2開口から外周間隙に供給されるときの溶融金属への酸化物の混入が抑制される。 Note that the guide portion is attached to the second opening of the supply cylinder through which the molten metal flows out, so that a desired amount of molten metal is reliably supplied to the outer peripheral gap and the supply width of the molten metal is stabilized. Desirable in terms. Furthermore, as will be described in detail in the section of the embodiment below, in a predetermined case, mixing of oxide into the molten metal when supplied to the outer peripheral gap from the second opening is suppressed.
(13) 上記(12)の供給筒において、板状部材の表面や2枚の板状部材の隙間に溶融金属を供給する場合には、案内部が略平板状であることが望ましい。 (13) In the supply cylinder of (12) above, when the molten metal is supplied to the surface of the plate-like member or the gap between the two plate-like members, it is desirable that the guide portion is substantially flat.
(14) 上記(12)の供給筒において、ワークに形成された空孔の中へ溶融金属を供給する場合には、案内部が略柱状又は略筒状であることが望ましい。 (14) In the supply cylinder of (12) above, when the molten metal is supplied into the holes formed in the workpiece, it is desirable that the guide portion has a substantially columnar shape or a substantially cylindrical shape.
(15) 上記(12)乃至(14)の供給筒において、案内部で溶融金属を円滑に案内し途切れることなくワークに供給するためには、案内部は先細り形状をなしていることが望ましい。 (15) In the above supply cylinders (12) to (14), it is desirable that the guide part has a tapered shape so that the molten metal can be smoothly guided by the guide part and supplied to the workpiece without interruption.
(16) 上記(12)乃至(14)の供給筒において、案内部で溶融金属を円滑に案内し途切れることなくワークに供給するためには、案内部には溶融金属の案内溝が形成されていることが望ましい。 (16) In the supply cylinder of (12) to (14) above, in order to smoothly guide the molten metal at the guide portion and supply it to the workpiece without interruption, a guide groove for the molten metal is formed in the guide portion. It is desirable that
(17) 上記(12)乃至(14)の供給筒において、ワーク表面に存在する気泡や異物を除去し、ワーク表面の活性度を向上させてワーク表面に対する溶融金属の濡れ性を高めるためには、案内部には溶融金属が供給される被供給面に当接する当接面が形成されていることが望ましい。 (17) In the above supply cylinders (12) to (14), in order to remove bubbles and foreign matter existing on the workpiece surface, improve the activity of the workpiece surface, and increase the wettability of the molten metal to the workpiece surface. It is desirable that the guide portion is formed with an abutting surface that abuts on a surface to be supplied with molten metal.
(18) 互いの主面が間隙を介し配置された一対の板状体の外周間隙に溶融金属を供給する上記(12)の供給筒において、上記第2の目的を達成するためには、案内部は、一方の板状体の主面と第1の間隙を介し対向する第1の平面と他方の板状体の主面と第2の間隙を介し対向する第2の平面とを有するとともに一対の板状体の外周間隙に挿入可能に構成されたコテ部と、コテ部の第1の平面から突起し一方の板状体の主面に接触可能な第1の接触部及び/又はコテ部の第2の平面から突起し他方の板状体の主面に接触可能な第2の接触部とを有することが望ましい。 (18) In the supply cylinder of (12), in which the molten metal is supplied to the outer peripheral gap of the pair of plate-like bodies whose main surfaces are arranged with a gap therebetween, in order to achieve the second object, a guide is provided. The portion has a first plane opposing the main surface of one plate-like body via a first gap and a second plane opposing the main surface of the other plate-like body via a second gap. A iron part configured to be insertable into the outer peripheral gap of the pair of plate-like bodies, a first contact part and / or a iron that protrudes from the first plane of the iron part and can contact the main surface of one plate-like body It is desirable to have the 2nd contact part which protrudes from the 2nd plane of a part, and can contact the main surface of the other plate-shaped object.
 この(18)の供給筒によれば、一対の板状体の外周間隙に供給された溶融金属は、その外周間隙に挿入され一対の板状体の外周縁に沿い移動される案内部のコテ部により外周間隙に供給される。この溶融金属の供給動作において、板状体の各々の主面とコテ部の第1の平面及び第2の平面との間で設定される第1の間隙及び第2の間隙に導入された溶融金属は板状体の外周縁に沿うコテ部の移動によりコテ部で押し付けられ板状体の各々の主面へ塗り込まれる。この塗り込むという動作により流動性が付与された溶融金属は、主面の活性化を促して溶融金属と主面の濡れ性を高めるとともに溶融金属と主面との接触界面に存する気泡や異物を除去するので、被接合材である板状体と接合部との接合品質を向上することができる。 According to the supply cylinder of (18), the molten metal supplied to the outer peripheral gap of the pair of plate-like bodies is inserted into the outer peripheral gap and moved along the outer peripheral edge of the pair of plate-like bodies. Is supplied to the outer circumferential gap by the section. In this molten metal supply operation, the molten metal introduced into the first gap and the second gap set between each main surface of the plate-like body and the first plane and the second plane of the iron portion. The metal is pressed by the iron portion by the movement of the iron portion along the outer peripheral edge of the plate-like body, and is applied to each main surface of the plate-like body. The molten metal to which fluidity is imparted by the operation of applying the coating promotes the activation of the main surface to increase the wettability of the molten metal and the main surface, and removes bubbles and foreign substances existing at the contact interface between the molten metal and the main surface. Since it removes, the joining quality of the plate-shaped body which is a to-be-joined material, and a junction part can be improved.
 加えて、案内部に設けられた第1の接触部はコテ部の第1の平面から突起し一方の板状体の主面に接触可能に構成され、第2の接触部はコテ部の第2の平面から突起し他方の板状体の主面に接触可能に構成されている。そのため、上記供給動作において、例えば一対の板状体を位置決めする機構や案内部を移動させる機構の動作精度の問題から外周間隙の厚み方向にコテ部が相対的に移動した場合でも、板状体の主面に接触部が接触することにより、コテ部と主面とが直接接触することが回避され、その結果、主面の損傷が防止され、板状体と接合部との接合品質を向上することができる。なお、案内部には第1の接触部若しくは第2の接触部のみを設けてもよく、又は両者とも設けてもよく、その選択は上記例示したように案内部を動作させるための周辺機器の動作精度や板状体の組み合わせによる外周間隙の寸法精度等により決定される。 In addition, the first contact portion provided in the guide portion protrudes from the first plane of the iron portion and is configured to be able to contact the main surface of one plate-like body, and the second contact portion is the first portion of the iron portion. It protrudes from two planes and is configured to be able to contact the main surface of the other plate-like body. Therefore, in the above supply operation, for example, even when the iron part moves relatively in the thickness direction of the outer peripheral gap due to the problem of the operation accuracy of the mechanism for positioning the pair of plate-like bodies and the mechanism for moving the guide part, the plate-like body When the contact part comes into contact with the main surface of the steel plate, direct contact between the iron part and the main surface is avoided. As a result, the main surface is prevented from being damaged and the bonding quality between the plate-like body and the joint is improved. can do. Note that the guide unit may be provided with only the first contact unit or the second contact unit, or both of them may be provided, and selection thereof is performed by a peripheral device for operating the guide unit as illustrated above. It is determined by the accuracy of the operation and the dimensional accuracy of the outer peripheral gap due to the combination of the plate-like bodies.
 なお、(18)の供給筒において、上記(16)の案内溝は接触部に形成されていることが好ましい。その理由を以下説明する。すなわち、外周間隙へ溶融金属を供給する態様としては、例えば一対の板状体の外周縁に沿い移動する案内部の移動方向において案内部の前方で外周間隙に溶融金属を供給し、その後移動してきたコテ部が供給された溶融半田に浸漬されるよう構成することができる。しかしながら、この構成の場合には、コテ部が浸漬される前に溶融金属が外周間隙に流入するため、溶融金属の供給圧力の変動や溶融金属と板状体の濡れ性のムラなどによって一定の幅で溶融金属を供給することが難しく、形成された接合部の幅が不均一になるおそれがある。また、外周間隙が狭くなると溶融半田を充分に供給出来なくなる場合もある。一方で、上記の好ましい態様では、接触部に形成された案内溝を通じて溶融金属は直接コテ部へ円滑に流入し、更にコテ部との濡れにより溶融金属の濡れ広がりはコテ部の範囲に留まり溶融金属は一定の幅で供給され、もって接合部の幅をより均一にすることが可能となる。さらに、下記で詳細に説明するとおり、所定の場合には、外周間隙に供給された溶融金属の表面に生じた酸化物の巻き込みが抑制され、接合部と板状体との接合品質を高めることができるという効果を奏することができる。 In the supply cylinder (18), the guide groove (16) is preferably formed in the contact portion. The reason will be described below. That is, as an aspect of supplying the molten metal to the outer peripheral gap, for example, the molten metal is supplied to the outer peripheral gap in front of the guide portion in the moving direction of the guide portion moving along the outer peripheral edge of the pair of plate-like bodies and then moved. The soldering iron part can be configured to be immersed in the supplied molten solder. However, in this configuration, since the molten metal flows into the outer peripheral gap before the iron part is immersed, it may be constant due to fluctuations in the supply pressure of the molten metal or unevenness in the wettability between the molten metal and the plate-like body. It is difficult to supply molten metal with a width, and the width of the formed joint portion may be nonuniform. Further, when the outer peripheral gap becomes narrow, there are cases where the molten solder cannot be supplied sufficiently. On the other hand, in the above preferred embodiment, the molten metal smoothly flows directly into the iron part through the guide groove formed in the contact part, and further, the wetting and spreading of the molten metal stays in the range of the iron part due to wetting with the iron part. The metal is supplied with a constant width, so that the width of the joint can be made more uniform. Furthermore, as will be described in detail below, in a predetermined case, the inclusion of oxide generated on the surface of the molten metal supplied to the outer circumferential gap is suppressed, and the bonding quality between the bonded portion and the plate-like body is improved. It is possible to produce an effect of being able to.
(19) 上記(18)の供給筒において、外周間隙に案内部を挿入したとき、第1の接触部は一方の板状体の主面に接触し、かつ第2の接触部は他方の板状体の主面に接触するよう構成されていることが望ましい。この好ましい構成によれば、第1の接触部と第2の接触部とは一対の板状体の各々の主面に常時接しているので、この第1の接触部と第2の接触部により案内部は外周間隙に嵌入された状態となる。したがって、コテ部の第1の平面と一方の板状体の主面との第1の間隙の量は第1の接触部の突起量で規制され、第2の平面と他方の板状体の主面との第2の間隙の量は第2の接触部の突起量で規制される。これにより、上記供給動作の間における板状体の各々の主面とコテ部との第1の間隙及び第2の間隙の量は常に一定となり、常に同じ状態で溶融金属は主面に塗り込められるので接合部と板状体との接合強度の均一化を図られ、接合品質を向上することができる。 (19) In the supply cylinder of (18), when the guide portion is inserted into the outer circumferential gap, the first contact portion contacts the main surface of one plate-like body, and the second contact portion is the other plate. It is desirable to be comprised so that the main surface of a shape may be contacted. According to this preferable configuration, since the first contact portion and the second contact portion are always in contact with the main surfaces of the pair of plate-like bodies, the first contact portion and the second contact portion are used. The guide portion is in a state of being fitted into the outer peripheral gap. Therefore, the amount of the first gap between the first plane of the iron part and the main surface of one plate-like body is regulated by the projection amount of the first contact portion, and the second plane and the other plate-like body The amount of the second gap with the main surface is regulated by the amount of protrusion of the second contact portion. Thereby, the amount of the first gap and the second gap between each main surface of the plate-like body and the iron part during the supplying operation is always constant, and the molten metal is always applied to the main surface in the same state. Therefore, the bonding strength between the bonding portion and the plate-like body can be made uniform, and the bonding quality can be improved.
(20) 上記(18)の供給筒において、案内部の移動にともなう板状体と接触部の摺動により生じる板状体の損傷を防止するとともに接触部の摺動を円滑にするためには、接触部の板状体の主面との接触面には板状体との摺動性を高める処理がなされていることが望ましい。 (20) In the supply cylinder of (18) above, in order to prevent the plate-like body from being damaged due to the sliding of the plate-like body and the contact portion accompanying the movement of the guide portion, and to smoothly slide the contact portion. In addition, it is desirable that the contact surface of the contact portion with the main surface of the plate-like body is subjected to a process for improving the slidability with the plate-like body.
(21) また、同様な目的のため、接触部には、案内部の外周間隙への挿入方向に沿い凹部が形成され、板状体との接触面積が少なくされていることが望ましい。 (21) Further, for the same purpose, it is desirable that the contact portion is formed with a recess along the direction of insertion into the outer peripheral gap of the guide portion so that the contact area with the plate-like body is reduced.
(22) 上記(18)の供給筒において、板状体の各主面に形成された接合部の内周部に配線パターン等が形成されている場合には、接触部の接触による配線パターン等の損傷を防止するため、接触部は、案内部の外周間隙への挿入方向において後端側に配置されていることが望ましい。 (22) In the supply cylinder of (18) above, when a wiring pattern or the like is formed on the inner peripheral portion of the joint formed on each main surface of the plate-like body, the wiring pattern or the like due to contact of the contact portion In order to prevent damage, it is desirable that the contact portion is disposed on the rear end side in the insertion direction of the guide portion into the outer circumferential gap.
(23) また、板状体の各主面に形成された接合部の外周部に配線パターン等が形成されている場合には、接触部は、案内部の外周間隙への挿入方向において先端側に配置されていることが望ましい。なお、下記で詳細に説明するとおり、所定の場合には、先端側に配置した接触部で溶融金属の流動を規制することにより接合部の幅を高い精度で規制できるという効果を奏することができる。 (23) Further, when a wiring pattern or the like is formed on the outer peripheral portion of the joint portion formed on each main surface of the plate-like body, the contact portion is on the tip side in the insertion direction into the outer peripheral gap of the guide portion. It is desirable to be arranged in. In addition, as described in detail below, in a predetermined case, it is possible to achieve an effect that the width of the joint portion can be regulated with high accuracy by regulating the flow of the molten metal at the contact portion arranged on the tip side. .
(24) 上記(18)の供給筒において、接触部は、外周間隙の厚み方向に撓むことができる弾性を有することが望ましい。 (24) In the supply cylinder of (18) above, it is desirable that the contact portion has elasticity capable of bending in the thickness direction of the outer peripheral gap.
 この望ましい態様によれば以下の作用を奏することができる。すなわち、例えば充分に組立精度が確保できず板状体の外周間隙が屈曲している場合や、外周間隙は直線状に形成されているが板状体の移動機構の走行精度が充分に確保できず外周間隙の厚み方向に位置が変動しながら相対的に非水平に案内部が移動する場合など、案内部の走行経路と外周間隙との平行度が低いために上記充填動作において板状体が案内部に接触する状態となることがある。しかしながら、上記構成によれば、板状体はまず第1及び第2の接触部に接触し、外周間隙の厚み方向に沿い所定の力で第1及び第2の接触部を押圧する。押圧された第1及び第2の接触部はその弾性により撓むので、厚み方向における外周間隙の位置の変動に追従しながら案内部は上下動する。その結果、上記状態となっても、コテ部と板状体との接触を防止できるとともに、外周間隙に安定して溶融金属を充填することができる。 According to this desirable mode, the following effects can be achieved. That is, for example, when sufficient assembly accuracy cannot be ensured and the outer peripheral gap of the plate-like body is bent, or the outer peripheral gap is formed in a straight line, the running accuracy of the plate-like body moving mechanism can be sufficiently ensured. When the guide part moves relatively non-horizontal while the position of the outer peripheral gap varies in the thickness direction, the plate-like body is It may be in a state of contacting the guide part. However, according to the above configuration, the plate-like body first contacts the first and second contact portions and presses the first and second contact portions with a predetermined force along the thickness direction of the outer circumferential gap. Since the pressed first and second contact portions bend due to their elasticity, the guide portion moves up and down while following the change in the position of the outer circumferential gap in the thickness direction. As a result, even if it becomes the said state, while being able to prevent a contact with a iron part and a plate-shaped object, a molten metal can be stably filled with an outer periphery clearance gap.
(25) 互いの主面が間隙を介し配置された一対の板状体の外周間隙に溶融金属を供給する上記(12)の供給筒において、上記第3の目的を達成するためには、案内部は第2開口を横切るように取り付けられており、当該案内部で上側排出口と下側排出口とに分けられた第2開口において、下側排出口から排出される溶融金属の量が上側排出口から排出される溶融金属の量よりも少ないことが望ましい。これにより、排出口から排出される溶融金属のうち、下方に開放された状態に曝される溶融金属の量を少なくすることができるので、板状体の端面における溶融金属の盛り上がりや垂れ下がりを防止することができる。 (25) In the supply cylinder of (12), in which the molten metal is supplied to the outer peripheral gap of the pair of plate-like bodies whose main surfaces are arranged with a gap, in order to achieve the third object, a guide is provided. The part is attached so as to cross the second opening, and the amount of molten metal discharged from the lower discharge port is the upper side in the second opening divided into the upper discharge port and the lower discharge port by the guide unit. It is desirable that the amount is less than the amount of molten metal discharged from the discharge port. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of molten metal that is exposed to a downwardly opened state among the molten metal discharged from the discharge port, thereby preventing the molten metal from rising and sagging on the end face of the plate-like body. can do.
(26) 上記(25)の供給筒において、下側排出口の面積の方が上側排出口の面積よりも小さいことが望ましい。 (26) In the supply cylinder of (25) above, it is desirable that the area of the lower outlet is smaller than the area of the upper outlet.
(27) 上記(25)の供給筒において、案内部は第2開口から所定深さ流路内に挿入され、当該案内部で上側流路と下側流路に分けられた流路において、下側流路の容積の方が上側流路の容積よりも小さいことが望ましい。 (27) In the supply cylinder of (25) above, the guide portion is inserted into the flow channel at a predetermined depth from the second opening, and in the flow channel divided into the upper flow channel and the lower flow channel by the guide portion, It is desirable that the volume of the side channel is smaller than the volume of the upper channel.
(28) 上記(25)の供給筒において、案内部は第2開口の中心より下方にオフセットされた状態で流通通路に挿入されていることが望ましい。 (28) In the supply cylinder of (25) above, it is desirable that the guide portion is inserted into the flow passage in a state offset downward from the center of the second opening.
(29) 上記(25)の供給筒において、案内部は第2開口の中心付近を横切って流通通路に挿入されており、流通通路の案内部より下側の排出口形成面に、下側排出口の面積を上側排出口の面積より小さくするような堰板が装着されていることが望ましい。 (29) In the supply cylinder of (25) above, the guide portion is inserted into the flow passage across the vicinity of the center of the second opening, and the lower discharge is formed on the discharge port forming surface below the flow passage guide portion. It is desirable to install a dam plate that makes the area of the outlet smaller than the area of the upper outlet.
(30) 上記(25)の供給筒において、案内部は第2開口の中心付近を横切って流通通路に挿入されており、下側流路の容積を上側流路の容積より小さくするような堰部材が、流通通路の下側流路内に形成されていることが望ましい。 (30) In the supply cylinder of (25) above, the guide is inserted into the flow passage across the vicinity of the center of the second opening, and the weir that makes the volume of the lower flow path smaller than the volume of the upper flow path It is desirable that the member is formed in the lower flow path of the circulation passage.
(31) 互いの主面が間隙を介し配置された一対の板状体の外周間隙に溶融金属を供給する上記(12)の供給筒において、上記第4の目的を達成するためには、案内部は第2開口の下部或いは第2開口より下に取り付けられ、当該第2開口から排出された溶融金属が案内部の上面から流出することが望ましい。このように、第2開口から排出される溶融金属を案内部の上面からだけ流して下面に沿っては流さないようにしているので、下側が突出した状態で配置された一対の板状体でも、突出部に溶融金属が漏洩して突出部分に付着することはほとんどない。また、両端が一致した一対の板状体においても、下方に開放された状態に曝される溶融金属は少なく、板状体の端面における溶融金属の盛り上がりや垂れ下がりを防止することができる。 (31) In the supply cylinder of (12), in which the molten metal is supplied to the outer peripheral gap of the pair of plate-like bodies whose main surfaces are arranged with a gap between them, in order to achieve the fourth object, a guide It is desirable that the part is attached below the second opening or below the second opening, and the molten metal discharged from the second opening flows out from the upper surface of the guide part. As described above, the molten metal discharged from the second opening is allowed to flow only from the upper surface of the guide portion and not to flow along the lower surface. Therefore, even with a pair of plate-like bodies arranged with the lower side protruding. The molten metal leaks into the protruding portion and hardly adheres to the protruding portion. Further, even in a pair of plate-like bodies whose both ends coincide with each other, there is little molten metal exposed to a state of being opened downward, and it is possible to prevent the molten metal from rising and sagging on the end surface of the plate-like body.
(32) さらに、上記(31)の供給筒において、案内部の先端部には、溶融金属を上面から下面側に導く貫通部が形成されていることが望ましい。 (32) Further, in the supply cylinder of (31) above, it is desirable that a penetrating portion for guiding the molten metal from the upper surface to the lower surface side is formed at the tip of the guide portion.
(33) 上記(31)の供給筒において、案内部は先端部に連なる傾斜部を有し、先端部と傾斜部とは鈍角又は直角をなした屈曲形状であることが望ましい。 (33) In the supply cylinder of (31), it is preferable that the guide portion has an inclined portion that is continuous with the tip portion, and the tip portion and the inclined portion have an obtuse angle or a right angle.
(34) 上記(31)の供給筒において、案内部は先端部に連なる傾斜部と傾斜部に連なる基端部を有し、先端部と基端部とは平行又は鈍角をなしており、2箇所が屈曲した段差形状であることが望ましい。 (34) In the supply cylinder of (31) above, the guide portion has an inclined portion that is continuous with the distal end portion and a proximal end portion that is continuous with the inclined portion, and the distal end portion and the proximal end portion are parallel or obtuse, and 2 It is desirable that the portion has a bent step shape.
(35) 上記(31)の供給筒において、流通通路を含む下部を第2開口の側から所定長さ軸方向に切り欠かれた切り欠き面を有し、案内部は上面を切り欠き面に当接して取り付けられ、切り欠かれた流通通路が案内部の下面側に露出する場合は、隙間を封止する部材が取り付けられることが望ましい。 (35) In the supply cylinder of (31) above, the lower part including the flow passage has a notch surface that is notched in the axial direction by a predetermined length from the second opening side, and the guide portion has the notch surface at the upper surface. In the case where the flow passage that is attached in contact and is cut out is exposed on the lower surface side of the guide portion, a member that seals the gap is preferably attached.
(36) 上記(31)の供給筒において、第2開口の側から軸方向において所定長さの範囲の下部に流通通路が露出しない平面部を有し、案内部は上面を平面部に当接して取り付けられていることが望ましい。 (36) The supply cylinder of (31) has a flat portion where the flow passage is not exposed in a lower portion within a predetermined length in the axial direction from the second opening side, and the guide portion abuts the upper surface on the flat portion. It is desirable to be attached.
(37) 上記(31)の供給筒において、一対の板状材は、下側の板状材の端縁が上側の板状材の端縁を越えて突出して上下に配置されていることが望ましい。 (37) In the supply cylinder of (31) above, the pair of plate-like members may be arranged vertically such that the edge of the lower plate-like member protrudes beyond the edge of the upper plate-like member. desirable.
(38) 互いの主面が間隙を介し配置された一対の板状体の外周間隙に溶融金属を供給する上記(12)の供給筒において、上記第5の目的を達成するためには、案内部には、当該案内部の移動方向に向いた側部の先端には切欠き部が形成されていることを特徴とする溶融金属の供給筒ことが望ましい。 (38) In the supply cylinder of (12), in which the molten metal is supplied to the outer peripheral gap of the pair of plate-like bodies whose main surfaces are arranged with a gap between them, in order to achieve the fifth object, a guide is provided. It is preferable that the molten metal supply tube is characterized in that a notch portion is formed at the tip of the side portion facing the moving direction of the guide portion.
 上記の構造としたことで、溶融金属の一部を案内部の主面上から切欠き部の側面へと入り込ませ、該側面に沿って案内部の先端に流すことがことができ、側面に沿って流れる溶融金属は、案内部の先端に達して先端に沿って流れるので先端のエッジで位置規制され、案内部の長さで規定された所定幅の接合部を安定して得ることができる。また、案内部の先端側における溶融金属の流量が増えるので、接合部と板状体の接合強度を高くすることができる。 By adopting the above structure, a part of the molten metal can enter the side surface of the notch portion from the main surface of the guide portion, and can flow to the tip of the guide portion along the side surface. Since the molten metal flowing along the tip reaches the tip of the guide and flows along the tip, the position of the molten metal is regulated by the edge of the tip, and a joint having a predetermined width defined by the length of the guide can be stably obtained. . Moreover, since the flow rate of the molten metal at the front end side of the guide portion increases, the bonding strength between the bonding portion and the plate-like body can be increased.
(39) なお、上記(38)の供給筒において、切欠き部は、案内部の移動方向に対して後方に向いた傾斜面を有していることが望ましい。 (39) In the supply cylinder of (38), it is desirable that the notch has an inclined surface facing backward with respect to the moving direction of the guide.
(40) 上記(38)の供給筒において、切欠き部は、案内部の移動方向に対して後方に向いた傾斜面と、該傾斜面と滑らかに連結された案内部の移動方向に略平行な面とを有していることが望ましい。 (40) In the supply tube of (38) above, the notch is substantially parallel to the inclined surface facing backward with respect to the moving direction of the guide portion and the moving direction of the guide portion smoothly connected to the inclined surface. It is desirable to have a flat surface.
(41) 上記(38)の供給筒において、切欠き部は、案内部の移動方向に対して後方に向いた傾斜面と、該傾斜面と滑らかに連結された案内部の移動方向に略直交する面とを有していることが望ましい。 (41) In the supply tube of (38) above, the notch is substantially orthogonal to the inclined surface facing backward with respect to the moving direction of the guide portion and the moving direction of the guide portion smoothly connected to the inclined surface. It is desirable to have the surface to do.
(42) 上記(38)の供給筒において、切欠き部は、直線若しくは曲線又はこれらの組み合わせで形成されていることが望ましい。 (42) In the supply tube of (38), the notch is preferably formed by a straight line, a curved line, or a combination thereof.
(43) 上記(12)乃至(42)の供給筒において、案内部の溶融金属との接触面には溶融金属との濡れ性を高める処理がなされていることが望ましい。 (43) In the above supply cylinders (12) to (42), it is desirable that the contact surface of the guide portion with the molten metal is subjected to a treatment for improving wettability with the molten metal.
(44) 上記第1の目的を達成する請求項44に記載の溶融金属の供給装置は、上記(1)乃至(43)のいずれかに記載の溶融金属の供給筒を有することを特徴としている。 (44) The molten metal supply device according to claim 44, which achieves the first object, has the molten metal supply cylinder according to any one of (1) to (43). .
(45) なお、上記(44)の供給装置において、供給筒は、フローティング機構により間接的または直接的に支持されていることが望ましい。この好ましい態様の供給装置によれば、溶融金属が塗布されるワークの形状のバラツキや供給筒の姿勢のバラツキなどがフローティング機構により吸収されるので、安定して溶融金属をワークへ塗布することが可能となる。 (45) In the supply device of (44), it is desirable that the supply cylinder is supported indirectly or directly by a floating mechanism. According to the supply device of this preferred aspect, the variation in the shape of the work to which the molten metal is applied and the variation in the posture of the supply cylinder are absorbed by the floating mechanism, so that the molten metal can be stably applied to the work. It becomes possible.
(46) 上記第1の目的を達成する請求項46に記載の溶融金属の供給装置は、上記(1)乃至(11)のいずれかの溶融金属の供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置であって、所定の間隙が形成される状態に一対の板状体を配置する板状体配置手段と、第2開口が間隙とほぼ連接する状態に供給筒を位置決めする供給筒位置決め手段とを有することを特徴としている。 (46) The molten metal supply apparatus according to claim 46, wherein the molten metal supply apparatus according to any one of (1) to (11) is incorporated. A plate-like body arranging means for arranging a pair of plate-like bodies in a state where a predetermined gap is formed, and a supply cylinder positioning means for positioning the supply cylinder in a state where the second opening is substantially connected to the gap. It is characterized by having.
 この態様の供給装置は、板状体として2枚の矩形状ガラス基板の場合を例とし説明すると、以下の作用を奏する。まず、2枚のガラス基板は、板状体配置手段により所定の間隙が形成される状態に配置される。次いで、上記供給筒は、供給筒位置決め手段により、その第2開口が間隙とほぼ連接するよう位置決めされる。そして、2枚のガラス基板の間隙には、供給筒の第2開口を通じて溶融金属が供給される。ここで、上記のように供給筒の第2開口は2枚のガラス基板の間隙とほぼ連接する状態に配置されるので、第2開口を通じて供給された溶融金属は大気に触れることなく間隙に満たされることとなり、溶融金属の供給過程における酸化の進行が抑制される。上記「第2開口が間隙とほぼ連接する状態」とは、第2開口と間隙とが密接している状態のみならず、第2開口と2枚のガラス基板の端面(間隙に対し垂直な面)との間に空隙が生じており第2開口と間隙とが完全に密接している状態でなくても、第2開口から流出した溶融金属が当該空隙から漏出しない程度の状態は本発明の範囲に含まれるという意味である。 Suppose that the supply device of this aspect is described by taking the case of two rectangular glass substrates as a plate-like body as an example, the following effects are obtained. First, the two glass substrates are arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed by the plate-like body arranging means. Next, the supply cylinder is positioned by the supply cylinder positioning means so that the second opening is substantially connected to the gap. The molten metal is supplied to the gap between the two glass substrates through the second opening of the supply cylinder. Here, as described above, the second opening of the supply cylinder is disposed so as to be substantially connected to the gap between the two glass substrates, so that the molten metal supplied through the second opening fills the gap without being exposed to the atmosphere. Thus, the progress of oxidation in the molten metal supply process is suppressed. The above-mentioned “state in which the second opening is substantially connected to the gap” means not only the state in which the second opening and the gap are in close contact, but also the end face of the second opening and the two glass substrates (a plane perpendicular to the gap). Even if the second opening and the gap are not completely in close contact with each other, the state in which the molten metal flowing out from the second opening does not leak from the gap is It means to be included in the range.
(47) 上記第2~第5の目的のいずれかを達成する請求項47に記載の溶融金属の供給装置は、上記(12)乃至(43)のいずれかの溶融金属の供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置であって、所定の間隙が形成される状態に一対の板状体を配置する板状体配置手段と、案内部を一対の板状体間に形成された間隙に挿入する供給筒位置決め手段とを有することを特徴としている。この供給装置によれば、案内部を通じて板状体同士の間隙に溶融金属を円滑に供給することができる。 (47) The molten metal supply apparatus according to claim 47, wherein any one of the second to fifth objects is achieved, wherein the molten metal supply cylinder according to any one of (12) to (43) is incorporated. A molten metal supply device, in which a pair of plate-like bodies are arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed, and a guide portion is inserted into the gap formed between the pair of plate-like bodies. And a supply cylinder positioning means. According to this supply device, the molten metal can be smoothly supplied to the gap between the plate-like bodies through the guide portion.
(48) なお、上記(46)又は(47)の供給装置において、第2開口は、外周間隙の厚みを越える口径を有することが望ましい。この態様の供給装置の作用について上記同様にガラス基板の場合を例にして説明すると、第2開口を通じて供給される溶融金属は、ガラス基板同士の間隙に供給されるのみならず、間隙以外の部分、すなわち第2開口で包含される2枚のガラス基板の端面(間隙に対し垂直な面)にも塗布されることとなる。このため、間隙に供給された溶融金属の外側に更に溶融金属からなる余肉部が形成されることとなる。もって、この余肉部が大気に対する障壁となり、既に間隙に供給された溶融金属が大気に触れることによる酸化の進行が抑制されるという効果を生じる。また、この構成によれば、一対の板状体の外周端面にも溶融金属を付着せしめ、その結果外周端面を覆うように封止機能を有する接合部を形成することができ、接合部に耐リーク性が要求される場合に適する。 (48) In the supply device of (46) or (47), it is desirable that the second opening has a diameter exceeding the thickness of the outer peripheral gap. The operation of the supply device of this aspect will be described by taking the case of a glass substrate as an example as described above. The molten metal supplied through the second opening is not only supplied to the gap between the glass substrates, but also the portion other than the gap. That is, it is also applied to the end surfaces (surfaces perpendicular to the gap) of the two glass substrates included in the second opening. For this reason, a surplus portion made of molten metal is further formed outside the molten metal supplied to the gap. Accordingly, this surplus portion serves as a barrier to the atmosphere, and the effect of suppressing the progress of oxidation due to the molten metal already supplied to the gap coming into contact with the atmosphere is produced. Further, according to this configuration, the molten metal can be adhered to the outer peripheral end surfaces of the pair of plate-like bodies, and as a result, a joint portion having a sealing function can be formed so as to cover the outer peripheral end surfaces. Suitable when leak performance is required.
(49) 上記(46)又は(47)の供給装置において、例えばガラスパネルの実装性や美観の面から外周端面に封止部を形成することが好ましく無い場合には、第2開口は、外周間隙の厚み以下の口径を有することが望ましい。 (49) In the supply device of (46) or (47) above, when it is not preferable to form a sealing portion on the outer peripheral end surface from the surface of mountability and aesthetics of the glass panel, for example, the second opening is the outer periphery It is desirable to have a caliber that is less than the thickness of the gap.
(50) 上記(46)又は(47)の供給装置において、(45)の供給装置のフローティング機構と同様な観点から、案内部は、フローティング機構により間接的または直接的に支持されていることが望ましい。 (50) In the supply device of (46) or (47) above, from the same viewpoint as the floating mechanism of the supply device of (45), the guide unit may be supported indirectly or directly by the floating mechanism. desirable.
(51) 上記(50)の供給装置において、フローティング機構は、一対の板状体で形成された間隙と平行な面内における案内部の移動を拘束する構成であることが望ましい。 (51) In the supply device according to (50), it is desirable that the floating mechanism be configured to restrain movement of the guide portion in a plane parallel to the gap formed by the pair of plate-like bodies.
 この望ましい態様によれば、一対の板状体で形成された間隙と平行な面内における案内部の移動を拘束するフローティング機構で案内部は支持されている、これを言い換えると外周間隙の厚み方向又は案内部の挿入軸回りには案内部は移動することができる。その結果、板状体の外周間隙の位置に変動が生じた場合でも、フローティング機構によりその変動に追従し厚み方向に案内部は上下動するので、板状体の各主面とコテ部に形成された間隙は維持され、溶融金属は安定して外周間隙に充填される。 According to this desirable mode, the guide part is supported by the floating mechanism that restrains the movement of the guide part in a plane parallel to the gap formed by the pair of plate-like bodies, in other words, the thickness direction of the outer peripheral gap. Alternatively, the guide unit can move around the insertion axis of the guide unit. As a result, even if fluctuations occur in the position of the outer peripheral gap of the plate-like body, the guide part moves up and down in the thickness direction following the fluctuation by the floating mechanism, so it is formed on each main surface and iron part of the plate-like body The formed gap is maintained, and the molten metal is stably filled in the outer circumferential gap.
(52) 上記(46)又は(47)の供給装置において、案内部を通じて間隙に供給された溶融金属と板状体との濡れ性を高めて接合信頼性を向上するためには、溶融金属と板状体との界面に存在する気泡や異物を除去することが望ましく、溶融金属と板状体との界面に超音波を印加する超音波印加手段を有することが望ましい。 (52) In the supply device of (46) or (47) above, in order to improve the wettability between the molten metal supplied to the gap through the guide and the plate-like body and improve the bonding reliability, It is desirable to remove bubbles and foreign substances present at the interface with the plate-like body, and it is desirable to have ultrasonic application means for applying ultrasonic waves to the interface between the molten metal and the plate-like body.
(53) 上記第1の目的を達成する請求項53に記載の溶融金属の供給方法は、上記(1)乃至(11)のいずれかの溶融金属の供給筒により溶融金属を供給する方法であって、所定の間隙が形成される状態に一対の板状体を配置する板状体配置工程と、第2開口が間隙とほぼ連接する状態に供給筒を位置決めする供給筒位置決め工程と、第2開口を通じて間隙に溶融金属を供給する溶融金属供給工程とを含むことを特徴としている。 (53) The method for supplying molten metal according to claim 53, which achieves the first object, is a method for supplying molten metal by a molten metal supply cylinder according to any one of (1) to (11). A plate-like body arranging step of arranging a pair of plate-like bodies in a state where a predetermined gap is formed, a supply cylinder positioning step of positioning the supply cylinder in a state where the second opening is substantially connected to the gap, and a second And a molten metal supply step of supplying the molten metal to the gap through the opening.
 かかる態様の供給方法は、板状体として2枚の矩形状ガラス基板の場合を例とし説明すると、以下の作用を奏する。まず、2枚のガラス基板は、板状体配置工程において所定の間隙が形成される状態に配置される。次いで、上記供給筒は、供給筒位置決め工程おいてその第2開口が間隙とほぼ連接するよう位置決めされる。そして、2枚のガラス基板の間隙には、溶融金属供給工程において、供給筒の第2開口を通じて溶融金属が供給される。ここで、上記のように供給筒の第2開口は2枚のガラス基板の間隙とほぼ連接する状態に配置されるので、第2開口を通じて供給された溶融金属は大気に触れることなく間隙に満たされることとなり、溶融金属の供給過程における酸化の進行が抑制される。 If the supply method of this aspect is demonstrated as an example in the case of two rectangular glass substrates as a plate-shaped body, the following effect | actions will be show | played. First, the two glass substrates are arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed in the plate-like body arranging step. Next, the supply cylinder is positioned in the supply cylinder positioning step so that the second opening is substantially connected to the gap. In the molten metal supply step, molten metal is supplied to the gap between the two glass substrates through the second opening of the supply cylinder. Here, as described above, the second opening of the supply cylinder is disposed so as to be substantially connected to the gap between the two glass substrates, so that the molten metal supplied through the second opening fills the gap without being exposed to the atmosphere. Thus, the progress of oxidation in the molten metal supply process is suppressed.
(54) 上記第2~第5の目的のいずれかを達成する請求項54に記載の溶融金属の供給装置は、上記(12)乃至(43)のいずれかの溶融金属の供給筒により溶融金属を供給する方法であって、所定の間隙が形成される状態に一対の板状体を配置する板状体配置工程と、案内部を一対の板状体間に形成された間隙に挿入する供給筒位置決め工程と、第2開口を通じて間隙に溶融金属を供給する溶融金属供給工程とを含むことを特徴としている。この供給方法によれば、案内部を通じて板状体同士の間隙に溶融金属を円滑に供給することができる。 (54) The molten metal supply apparatus according to claim 54, which achieves any one of the second to fifth objects, by the molten metal supply cylinder according to any one of (12) to (43). A plate-like body arranging step of arranging a pair of plate-like bodies in a state where a predetermined gap is formed, and supplying the guide portion into the gap formed between the pair of plate-like bodies The method includes a cylinder positioning step and a molten metal supply step of supplying a molten metal to the gap through the second opening. According to this supply method, the molten metal can be smoothly supplied to the gap between the plate-like bodies through the guide portion.
(55) なお、上記(53)又は(54)の供給方法において、案内部を通じて間隙に供給された溶融金属と板状体との濡れ性を高めて接合信頼性を向上するためには、溶融金属と板状体との界面に存在する気泡や異物を除去することが望ましく、溶融金属と板状体の界面に超音波を印加することが望ましい。 (55) In addition, in the supply method of (53) or (54) above, in order to increase the wettability between the molten metal supplied to the gap through the guide portion and the plate-like body and improve the bonding reliability, It is desirable to remove bubbles and foreign substances present at the interface between the metal and the plate-like body, and it is desirable to apply ultrasonic waves to the interface between the molten metal and the plate-like body.
 上記説明のとおり、本発明に係わる溶融金属の供給筒、その供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置及び溶融金属の供給方法によれば、本発明の課題を解決することが可能となる。 As described above, according to the molten metal supply cylinder, the molten metal supply apparatus and the molten metal supply method incorporating the supply cylinder according to the present invention, the problems of the present invention can be solved.
第1-1例の溶融金属供給装置を含むガラスパネル製造ラインの概略構成図である。It is a schematic block diagram of the glass panel manufacturing line containing the molten metal supply apparatus of the 1-1st example. 第1-1例の溶融金属供給装置の正面図及び側面図である。It is the front view and side view of the molten metal supply apparatus of 1-1 example. 図2の部分拡大側面図である。FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged side view of FIG. 2. 図3の部分拡大図である。FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged view of FIG. 3. 図4の酸化物除去部の変形例である。FIG. 5 is a modification of the oxide removing unit in FIG. 4. FIG. 図1の糸半田送出部の変形例である。It is a modification of the thread solder sending part of FIG. 図1のガラスパネル製造ラインに含まれるガラス基板の接合装置の正面図及び側面図である。It is the front view and side view of a glass substrate joining apparatus which are included in the glass panel production line of FIG. 図7の部分拡大正面図である。FIG. 8 is a partially enlarged front view of FIG. 7. 第1-2例の溶融金属供給装置の正面図および側面図である。It is the front view and side view of the molten metal supply apparatus of 1-2 example. 図9の部分拡大図である。FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged view of FIG. 9. 図10の部分拡大図である。It is the elements on larger scale of FIG. 第1-3例の溶融金属供給装置の部分拡大正面図である。FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front view of a molten metal supply apparatus of Example 1-3. 図12の供給筒の変形例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the modification of the supply cylinder of FIG. 第2-1例の溶融金属供給装置の部分拡大断面図である。It is a partial expanded sectional view of the molten metal supply apparatus of the 2-1 example. 図14の支持部の部分拡大断面図である。It is a partial expanded sectional view of the support part of FIG. 第2-1例の溶融金属供給装置の正面図及び側面図である。It is the front view and side view of the molten metal supply apparatus of the 2-1 example. 図14の供給筒の部分拡大斜視図である。It is a partial expansion perspective view of the supply cylinder of FIG. 図14のE部の拡大断面図及びその側面図である。It is an expanded sectional view of the E section of FIG. 14, and its side view. 図14に示す供給筒の別の変形例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows another modification of the supply cylinder shown in FIG. 図14に示す供給筒の更に別の変形例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows another modification of the supply cylinder shown in FIG. 図16の供給装置の動作状態を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the operation state of the supply apparatus of FIG. 図16の供給装置の動作状態を説明する別の図である。It is another figure explaining the operation state of the supply apparatus of FIG. 図14に示す供給筒の更に別の変形例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows another modification of the supply cylinder shown in FIG. 図14に示す供給筒の更に別の変形例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows another modification of the supply cylinder shown in FIG. 第2-2例の溶融金属供給装置の部分拡大平面図及び正面図である。FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged plan view and a front view of a molten metal supply device of Example 2-2. 図25の部分拡大断面図である。It is a partial expanded sectional view of FIG. 第3-1例の溶融金属供給装置の概略構成図である。It is a schematic block diagram of the molten metal supply apparatus of the 3-1 example. 図27の供給筒の構造を示す断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows the structure of the supply cylinder of FIG. 図27の供給筒の構成を示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the supply cylinder of FIG. 定常状態における図27の案内部による溶融半田の供給状態を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the supply state of the molten solder by the guide part of FIG. 27 in a steady state. 第3-2例の溶融金属供給装置の供給筒の部分拡大断面図である。It is a partial expanded sectional view of the supply cylinder of the molten metal supply apparatus of the 3-2 example. 図31の供給筒の変形例を示す部分拡大断面図である。FIG. 32 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view showing a modified example of the supply cylinder of FIG. 31. 図31の供給筒の別の変形例を示す部分拡大断面図である。It is a partial expanded sectional view which shows another modification of the supply cylinder of FIG. 第4-1例の溶融金属供給装置の概略構成図である。It is a schematic block diagram of the molten metal supply apparatus of the 4-1 example. 図34の供給筒の構造を示す部分拡大断面図である。It is a partial expanded sectional view which shows the structure of the supply cylinder of FIG. 図35の案内部の構造及びその変形例を示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the guide part of FIG. 35, and its modification. 図35の案内部の別の変形例を示す斜視図である。FIG. 36 is a perspective view showing another modified example of the guide unit of FIG. 35. 図35の案内部による溶融半田の供給状態を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the supply state of the molten solder by the guide part of FIG. 図35の供給筒の別の変形例を示す斜視図である。FIG. 36 is a perspective view showing another modification of the supply tube of FIG. 35. 第4-2例の溶融金属供給装置の供給筒を示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows the supply cylinder of the molten metal supply apparatus of the 4th-2 example. 第4-3例の溶融金属供給装置の供給筒を示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows the supply cylinder of the molten metal supply apparatus of the 4th-3 example. 図36の案内部における接触部の変形例を示す拡大断面図である。FIG. 37 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a modification of the contact portion in the guide portion of FIG. 36. 第5例の溶融金属供給装置の概略構成図である。It is a schematic block diagram of the molten metal supply apparatus of a 5th example. 図43の供給筒の構造を示す拡大断面図である。It is an expanded sectional view which shows the structure of the supply cylinder of FIG. 図43の案内部の構造を示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the guide part of FIG. 図43の案内部による溶融半田の供給状態を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the supply state of the molten solder by the guide part of FIG. 図43の案内部における溶融半田の流動状態を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the flow state of the molten solder in the guide part of FIG. 図45の案内部の変形例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the modification of the guide part of FIG. 図45の案内部における接触部の変形例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the modification of the contact part in the guide part of FIG. ガラスパネルの構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of a glass panel. 別のガラスパネルの構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of another glass panel.
 以下、本願発明について、その実施例に基づき図面を参照しながら説明する。なお、以下の実施例の説明では、板状体である一対のガラス基板の外周間隙に、低融点金属であるSnAgAl系合金を溶融した溶融半田を供給し、その後、被接合体としての一対のガラス基板を接合し、ガラスパネルを製造する場合を例として具体的に説明する。しかしながら、ガラス基板を金属基板またはセラミックス基板と置き換えた場合においても、同様な作用、効果を奏することができる。また、低融点金属として例えばSn、Zn、Ti等を含む種々の組成のハンダや、In合金を用いた場合でも、同様な作用、効果を奏することができる。さらに、本願発明はこれら実施例に限定されることなく、技術的思想において実施例と同一の範囲において変形実施することができる。 Hereinafter, the present invention will be described based on the embodiments with reference to the drawings. In the following description of the embodiments, a molten solder obtained by melting a SnAgAl-based alloy that is a low melting point metal is supplied to the outer peripheral gap of a pair of glass substrates that are plate-like bodies, and then a pair of bonded bodies as a joined body. A case where a glass substrate is bonded to manufacture a glass panel will be specifically described. However, even when the glass substrate is replaced with a metal substrate or a ceramic substrate, similar actions and effects can be obtained. Further, even when solders having various compositions including, for example, Sn, Zn, Ti, etc., or In alloys are used as the low melting point metal, similar actions and effects can be obtained. Further, the present invention is not limited to these examples, and can be modified within the technical scope within the same range as the examples.
[第1態様]
 まず、上記(1)で説明した態様の溶融金属の供給筒及びその供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置及び溶融金属の供給方法並びにそれらの望ましい態様について、以下その第1-1例、1-2例、1-3例に基づき説明する。
[First aspect]
First, a molten metal supply cylinder of the aspect described in the above (1), a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder, a molten metal supply method, and desirable aspects thereof will be described below as Example 1-1. Description will be made based on 1-2 examples and 1-3 examples.
[第1-1例]
 本発明の第1-1例である溶融金属の供給筒及びそれが組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置について図1~8、50を参照しつつ説明する。
[Example 1-1]
A molten metal supply cylinder and a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the molten metal supply cylinder according to Example 1-1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
 第1-1例の供給装置を用いて製造されるガラスパネルの構成について図50を参照し説明する。図50(a)、(c)において符合Wは第1-1例の供給装置を用いて製造されるガラスパネルである。符合w1及びw2は、寸法gで所定の間隙を介し主面が対向配置された一対のガラス基板である。符合mは、対向配置されたガラス基板w1とw2の外周縁部、具体的には夫々の外周縁よりやや内側寄りに枠状に設けられ、夫々の主面に直接接合し、後述する気密室を形成する接合部である。ここで、接合部mは、図50(b)、(c)に示すように、ガラス基板w1に形成された接合部m1とガラス基板w2に形成された接合部m2とを各々の接合面で合わせ接合し一体化された状態で構成されている。なお、接合部mとしてはガラス基板w1とw2との接合性に優れた低融点金属であるSnAgAl系合金、具体的には質量%でAgが8.5%、Alが0.35%、残部Snからなる合金を使用している。そして、ガラス基板w1とw2及び接合部mにより画成された空間は気密室を構成し、この気密室には、ガラスパネルWの用途に応じ、真空雰囲気や所定の気体または液体が封入される。 The configuration of a glass panel manufactured using the supply device of Example 1-1 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (c), the symbol W is a glass panel manufactured using the supply device of Example 1-1. The symbols w1 and w2 are a pair of glass substrates having a dimension g and opposing main surfaces with a predetermined gap therebetween. The symbol m is provided in a frame shape on the outer peripheral edge portions of the glass substrates w1 and w2 arranged opposite to each other, specifically slightly inward of the respective outer peripheral edges, and is directly joined to the respective main surfaces to be described later. It is the junction part which forms. Here, as shown in FIGS. 50B and 50C, the bonding portion m includes a bonding portion m1 formed on the glass substrate w1 and a bonding portion m2 formed on the glass substrate w2 on each bonding surface. It is configured in a state of being joined and integrated. In addition, as a joining part m, SnAgAl-type alloy which is a low melting metal excellent in the joining property of the glass substrates w1 and w2, specifically, Ag is 8.5% in mass%, Al is 0.35%, and the remainder An alloy made of Sn is used. The space defined by the glass substrates w1 and w2 and the joint portion m constitutes an airtight chamber, and the airtight chamber is filled with a vacuum atmosphere or a predetermined gas or liquid according to the use of the glass panel W. .
 なお、ガラスパネルWの構成は上記に限定されることなく、例えば図50(d)に示すように、接合部mが一方のガラス基板w1にのみに直接接合し、溶融した接合部mとの濡れ性に富む下地層uを介して他方のガラス基板w2に接合している態様のガラスパネルW、または図50(e)に示すように、接合部mが一方の基板w1のみに直接接合し、ガラス基板w1とw2との間隙を確保するための金属やガラス等で構成された枠状部材V及びガラスフリットGを介して他方のガラス基板w2に接合している態様のガラスパネルWを排除するものではない。すなわち、第1-1例の供給装置及び供給方法は、一対のガラス基板w1とw2の少なくとも一方に接合部mが直接接合しているガラスパネルWに適用することが出来る。 The configuration of the glass panel W is not limited to the above. For example, as shown in FIG. 50 (d), the bonding portion m is directly bonded only to one glass substrate w1 and melted with the bonding portion m. As shown in FIG. 50 (e), the glass panel W in a mode in which it is bonded to the other glass substrate w2 through the base layer u rich in wettability, or the bonding portion m is bonded directly to only one substrate w1. The glass panel W of the aspect joined to the other glass substrate w2 via the frame-shaped member V and the glass frit G which were comprised with the metal, glass, etc. for ensuring the clearance gap between the glass substrates w1 and w2 is excluded. Not what you want. That is, the supply device and the supply method of Example 1-1 can be applied to the glass panel W in which the bonding portion m is directly bonded to at least one of the pair of glass substrates w1 and w2.
 次に上記ガラスパネルWを製造する製造ラインについて図1を参照し説明する。符号1は第1-1例の供給装置を含むガラスパネルWの製造ラインであり、順に並んだ、ガラス基板w1とw2を収納し所定の雰囲気とするプリロード室1a、表面に付着した異物や水分等を除去するためガラス基板w1とw2を加熱処理、プラズマ照射処理等を行う前処理室1b、第1-1例の供給装置が組込まれた溶融半田供給室1c、ガラス基板w1とw2を接合しガラスパネルとする接合室1d、ガラスパネルを冷却する冷却室1e、ガラスパネルを払い出すアンロード室1f、及び上記各室で処理されたガラス基板w1とw2を各室に受け渡す搬送手段とで構成されている。この製造ライン1では、準備されたガラス基板w1とw2はプリロード室1aに投入され、その後、前処理室1b、溶融半田供給室1c、接合室1d、冷却室1e、アンロード室1fの順序で処理され、ガラスパネルWが製造される。 Next, a production line for producing the glass panel W will be described with reference to FIG. Reference numeral 1 denotes a production line for the glass panel W including the supply device of Example 1-1. The preload chamber 1a that houses the glass substrates w1 and w2 in order and has a predetermined atmosphere, and foreign matter and moisture adhering to the surface. Glass substrate w1 and w2 for heat treatment, pretreatment chamber 1b for performing plasma irradiation treatment, molten solder supply chamber 1c incorporating the supply device of Example 1-1, and glass substrates w1 and w2 are joined. A bonding chamber 1d for forming a glass panel, a cooling chamber 1e for cooling the glass panel, an unloading chamber 1f for discharging the glass panel, and a conveying means for transferring the glass substrates w1 and w2 processed in the chambers to the chambers. It consists of In this production line 1, the prepared glass substrates w1 and w2 are put into a preload chamber 1a, and then a pretreatment chamber 1b, a molten solder supply chamber 1c, a bonding chamber 1d, a cooling chamber 1e, and an unload chamber 1f are sequentially arranged. The glass panel W is processed.
 上記溶融半田供給室1cに組込まれる第1-1例の供給装置について図2~6を参照し説明する。図2において符号2は供給装置である。供給装置2は、糸半田供給手段2a、加熱溶融手段3、移動手段2e、上記各手段を内包する気密室2k、上記各手段の動作を制御する制御手段2p、気密室2kの雰囲気を制御する雰囲気制御手段2sとで構成されている。上記各構成要素について、一方のガラス基板w1に溶融半田を供給する場合を例として以下説明する。 A description will be given of the supply device of Example 1-1 incorporated in the molten solder supply chamber 1c with reference to FIGS. In FIG. 2, reference numeral 2 denotes a supply device. The supply device 2 controls the atmosphere of the thread solder supply means 2a, the heating and melting means 3, the moving means 2e, the airtight chamber 2k containing each of the above means, the control means 2p for controlling the operation of each of the above means, and the airtight chamber 2k. It is comprised with the atmosphere control means 2s. About each said component, the case where molten solder is supplied to one glass substrate w1 is demonstrated below as an example.
[糸半田供給手段]
 符号2bは、SnAgAl系合金からなるワイヤー状の素材(以下糸半田と言う。)Mを巻回するボビン状の糸半田送出部であり、図示しないモータ等で回転され定量的に糸半田Mを送り出す。符号2cは、糸半田Mが挿通可能な案内通路である貫通孔を有する両端開口の略管状の糸半田案内部である。供給装置2では、2mm程度の直径に成形した糸半田Mを用いており、初期状態において、糸半田送出部2bに巻回された糸半田Mの先端部分は糸半田送出部2bから引き出され、糸半田案内部2cの上方端部の開口から案内通路に挿入され下方端部の開口から突出した状態にセットされている(図3参照)。
[Thread solder supply means]
Reference numeral 2b is a bobbin-shaped thread solder sending section for winding a wire-like material (hereinafter referred to as thread solder) M made of SnAgAl-based alloy. The thread solder M is rotated quantitatively by a motor or the like not shown. Send it out. Reference numeral 2c denotes a substantially tubular thread solder guide portion having both ends opened and having a through hole which is a guide passage through which the thread solder M can be inserted. The supply device 2 uses the thread solder M formed to have a diameter of about 2 mm. In the initial state, the tip of the thread solder M wound around the thread solder delivery part 2b is drawn out from the thread solder delivery part 2b. The yarn solder guide portion 2c is set in a state where it is inserted into the guide passage from the upper end opening and protrudes from the lower end opening (see FIG. 3).
 なお、糸半田送出部2bの好ましい例について図6を参照して説明する。図6に示す糸半田送出部5は糸半田Mを非酸化雰囲気で保管するパッケージであり、糸半田Mがコイル状に巻回された回転可能な巻き芯5bと、その巻き芯5bに巻回された糸半田Mを収納する中空円筒形状の函体5aと、函体5aの側面に形成された孔部5dと、孔部5dに嵌め合いされた引出部材5eとから構成されている。そして、引出部材5eには糸半田Mの直径より小さな引出孔が形成されているが、引出部材5eはゴム等の弾性材料で形成されており、糸半田Mの自由端を引出孔から引き出すとき糸半田Mの外周面に引出孔の内面が密着し、パッケージである糸半田送出部5の収納室5cの気密性を維持する。なお、収納室5cの雰囲気は例えば真空雰囲気又は不活性雰囲気であり、更に収納室5cの湿度を一定に保つため活性炭など水分除去剤が内封されていることが好ましい。 A preferred example of the thread solder delivery unit 2b will be described with reference to FIG. 6 is a package for storing the thread solder M in a non-oxidizing atmosphere. The thread solder M is wound around the winding core 5b. It is composed of a hollow cylindrical box 5a for storing the thread solder M, a hole 5d formed on the side of the box 5a, and a drawing member 5e fitted in the hole 5d. The drawing member 5e has a drawing hole smaller than the diameter of the thread solder M. The drawing member 5e is formed of an elastic material such as rubber, and when the free end of the thread solder M is pulled out from the drawing hole. The inner surface of the lead-out hole is in close contact with the outer peripheral surface of the thread solder M, and the airtightness of the storage chamber 5c of the thread solder delivery section 5 that is a package is maintained. The atmosphere of the storage chamber 5c is, for example, a vacuum atmosphere or an inert atmosphere, and it is preferable that a moisture removing agent such as activated carbon is enclosed in order to keep the humidity of the storage chamber 5c constant.
 図2において符合2dは、加熱溶融手段3で糸半田Mを溶融して形成した溶融半田M1を介して溶融半田M1とガラス基板w1の主面Sとの接触界面に超音波を照射する超音波印加部である(図3参照)。なお、供給装置2では装置構成の便宜のため、超音波印加部2dは加熱溶融手段3に組み込まれており、加熱溶融手段3の供給筒3aを通じて超音波を印加するよう構成されている。 In FIG. 2, reference numeral 2d denotes an ultrasonic wave that irradiates ultrasonic waves to the contact interface between the molten solder M1 and the main surface S of the glass substrate w1 through the molten solder M1 formed by melting the yarn solder M by the heating and melting means 3. It is an application part (refer FIG. 3). In the supply device 2, for the convenience of the device configuration, the ultrasonic application unit 2 d is incorporated in the heating and melting means 3 and is configured to apply ultrasonic waves through the supply tube 3 a of the heating and melting means 3.
[加熱溶融手段]
 加熱溶融手段3において符合3aは、溶融半田M1をガラス基板w1の接合部を形成すべき表面である主面Sに供給する供給筒である。供給筒3aは、図3に示すように、略柱形状をなしており、熱伝導率の高いステンレスで芯材が形成され、その芯材の外周面には溶融半田M1との濡れ性に富むCr層が形成され、さらに供給筒3aの下端面を除きCr層の上に溶融半田M1との濡れ性の低いNi層が形成されている。そして、供給筒3aは、第2開口3fが開口する下端面がガラス基板w1の主面Sと相対する状態に配置され、溶融半田M1を主面Sに供給する。符号3cは、供給筒3aの外周に巻回されたヒータであり、供給筒3aを糸半田Mの融点以上の温度に加熱する。図2における符合3bは供給筒3aが固定されるとともにヒータ3cの発熱回路等が組み込まれた本体部である。なお、上記のとおり超音波印加部2dの超音波発生装置や制御回路等は本体部3bに内蔵されている。
[Heating and melting means]
In the heating and melting means 3, reference numeral 3a is a supply cylinder that supplies the molten solder M1 to the main surface S, which is the surface on which the joint portion of the glass substrate w1 is to be formed. As shown in FIG. 3, the supply cylinder 3a has a substantially columnar shape, and a core material is formed of stainless steel having a high thermal conductivity, and the outer peripheral surface of the core material is rich in wettability with the molten solder M1. A Cr layer is formed, and a Ni layer having low wettability with the molten solder M1 is formed on the Cr layer except for the lower end surface of the supply cylinder 3a. The supply cylinder 3a is arranged such that the lower end surface where the second opening 3f opens is opposed to the main surface S of the glass substrate w1, and supplies the molten solder M1 to the main surface S. Reference numeral 3 c is a heater wound around the outer periphery of the supply cylinder 3 a and heats the supply cylinder 3 a to a temperature equal to or higher than the melting point of the thread solder M. Reference numeral 3b in FIG. 2 is a main body portion in which the supply cylinder 3a is fixed and a heating circuit of the heater 3c is incorporated. As described above, the ultrasonic generator, the control circuit, and the like of the ultrasonic application unit 2d are built in the main body 3b.
 図3に示すように、供給筒3aには、糸半田Mが当接し溶融半田M1を生成する溶融部3gが上部(一端部)に設けられ、一方の開口(第1開口)3eが溶融部3gに開口し、他方の開口(第2開口)3fが下端面(他端面)に開口している。そして第1開口3e及び第2開口3f以外は密閉された略円管状の流通通路3dがその内部に設けられている。したがって、溶融部3gで生成された溶融半田M1は、溶融半田M1の導入口である第1開口3eから流通通路3dへ流入し、流通通路3dを下方に流れ、排出口である第2開口3fから流出し、ガラス基板w1の主面Sへ供給されることとなる。溶融部3g及び流通通路3dには、円滑に溶融半田M1を流動させるための好ましい構成として、その表面に溶融半田M1との濡れ性を高めるCr層が形成されている。なお、Cr層に代えてAl、Mo、W、V、Nb、Taからなる層を設けてもよい。さらに、本例の流通通路3dは、その表面が溶融半田M1で溶食され溶融半田M1に不純物が混入しないように溶食防止処理としての窒化処理が施されており、上記Cr層は窒化処理された表面上に形成されている。なお、上記濡れ性を高める処理及び溶食防止処理は対象とする溶融金属により適宜選択すればよい。 As shown in FIG. 3, the supply cylinder 3 a is provided with a melting portion 3 g where the thread solder M abuts and generates the molten solder M <b> 1 at the upper portion (one end portion), and one opening (first opening) 3 e is the melting portion. The other opening (second opening) 3f opens on the lower end surface (the other end surface). A sealed circular passage 3d is provided in the inside except for the first opening 3e and the second opening 3f. Therefore, the molten solder M1 generated in the melting part 3g flows into the flow passage 3d from the first opening 3e that is the introduction port of the molten solder M1, flows downward through the flow passage 3d, and the second opening 3f that is the discharge port. And flows out from the main surface S of the glass substrate w1. In the melting part 3g and the flow passage 3d, a Cr layer that improves wettability with the molten solder M1 is formed on the surface as a preferable configuration for smoothly flowing the molten solder M1. A layer made of Al, Mo, W, V, Nb, Ta may be provided instead of the Cr layer. Further, the flow passage 3d of this example is subjected to nitriding treatment as an anti-corrosion treatment so that the surface thereof is eroded by the molten solder M1 and impurities are not mixed into the molten solder M1, and the Cr layer is nitridated. Formed on the surface. In addition, what is necessary is just to select suitably the process which improves the said wettability, and a corrosion prevention process with the molten metal made into object.
 溶融部3gについて更に詳細に説明する。図4(a)に示すように、溶融部3gは、供給筒3aの上部側面に凹状に形成されており、その底部には円環状の酸化物除去部4が溶融部3gに一体的に設けられている。なお、図4(a)では理解のために酸化物除去部4の部分にクロスハッチを付して示しているが酸化物除去部4は溶融部3gと継ぎ目なく一体に形成されている。そして、第1開口3eは、この酸化物除去部4の上面(溶融部3gの底面)である糸半田Mが当接し溶融する溶融面3jに開口している。この第1開口3eの直径Φ2は、溶融面3jと当接する糸半田Mの端面の直径Φ1未満である。 The melting part 3g will be described in more detail. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the melting part 3g is formed in a concave shape on the upper side surface of the supply tube 3a, and an annular oxide removing part 4 is provided integrally with the melting part 3g at the bottom. It has been. In FIG. 4 (a), the oxide removing portion 4 is shown with a cross hatch for the sake of understanding, but the oxide removing portion 4 is integrally formed with the molten portion 3g. The first opening 3e is open to the melting surface 3j where the thread solder M, which is the upper surface of the oxide removing portion 4 (the bottom surface of the melting portion 3g), contacts and melts. The diameter Φ2 of the first opening 3e is less than the diameter Φ1 of the end surface of the thread solder M that comes into contact with the melting surface 3j.
 ここで、糸半田案内部2cは、その下方端部が、溶融面3jに開口した酸化物除去部4の第1開口3eへ向かう姿勢で、移動手段2eの固定部材2jに位置決め固定されている(図2参照)。そして、供給装置2の稼動時には、糸半田送出部2bから定量的に送り出された糸半田Mは、糸半田案内部2cの案内通路で導かれて下方端部の開口から繰り出され、その端面が第1開口3eを閉塞する姿勢で溶融面3jに当接する。なお、加熱溶融手段3は、糸半田案内部2cから繰り出される糸半田Mと溶融部3gとの上記位置関係が保持可能とされるよう移動手段2eの固定部材2jに位置決め固定されている(図2参照)。 Here, the lower end portion of the thread solder guide portion 2c is positioned and fixed to the fixing member 2j of the moving means 2e in a posture toward the first opening 3e of the oxide removing portion 4 opened to the melting surface 3j. (See FIG. 2). When the supply device 2 is in operation, the yarn solder M sent quantitatively from the yarn solder delivery portion 2b is guided by the guide passage of the yarn solder guide portion 2c, and is fed out from the opening at the lower end portion. It abuts on the melting surface 3j in a posture to close the first opening 3e. The heating and melting means 3 is positioned and fixed to the fixing member 2j of the moving means 2e so that the positional relationship between the yarn solder M fed from the yarn solder guide portion 2c and the melting portion 3g can be maintained (FIG. 2).
 上記加熱溶融手段3の構成によれば、糸半田案内部2cの下方端部の開口から繰り出された糸半田Mは、ヒータ3cで加熱された溶融面3jに当接し溶融して溶融半田M1が形成される。ここで、図4(a)に示すように、糸半田Mは、その直径Φ1より小径の直径Φ2に形成された酸化物除去部4の第1開口3eをその端面が閉塞するように溶融面3jに当接し溶融して溶融半田M1が生成される。この溶融半田M1の表面には、糸半田Mの外周面に生成していた酸化物E1が溶融部3gへ流れ込んだ酸化物E2や溶融時に生成した酸化物E2が存在する。しかしながら、この酸化物E2と酸化物を含まない中心部分の清浄な溶融半田M1は酸化物除去部4の第1開口3eの外周縁部で分離され、酸化物E2は除去される。したがって、第1開口3eの外周縁部である溶融面3jで流通通路3dへの酸化物E2の流入が阻止され、酸化物E2が混入しない清浄な溶融半田M1のみが第1開口3eを通じて流通通路3dへ流入する。さらに、第1開口3eから第2開口3fに至る流通通路3dの内部は密閉された非酸化雰囲気であるので、供給過程における溶融半田M1の酸化の進行も抑制される。なお、大気中で保管された糸半田Mの表面に生成している酸化物E1の層の厚さは通常数十μm程度であるので、糸半田Mと第1開口3eの直径の差であるΦ1-Φ2は1mm前後としておけば十分であるが、供給対象の低融点金属素材によりその寸法は適宜定めればよい。 According to the configuration of the heating and melting means 3, the thread solder M fed out from the opening at the lower end of the thread solder guide portion 2c comes into contact with the melting surface 3j heated by the heater 3c and melts, so that the molten solder M1 is melted. It is formed. Here, as shown in FIG. 4 (a), the thread solder M is melted so that the end face of the first opening 3e of the oxide removing portion 4 formed to have a diameter Φ2 smaller than the diameter Φ1 is closed. The molten solder M1 is generated by contacting and melting 3j. On the surface of the molten solder M1, the oxide E2 generated on the outer peripheral surface of the thread solder M flows into the molten portion 3g and the oxide E2 generated during melting exists. However, the oxide E2 and the clean molten solder M1 in the central portion not containing the oxide are separated at the outer peripheral edge portion of the first opening 3e of the oxide removing portion 4, and the oxide E2 is removed. Therefore, inflow of the oxide E2 into the flow passage 3d is prevented by the melting surface 3j which is the outer peripheral edge of the first opening 3e, and only clean molten solder M1 in which the oxide E2 is not mixed is passed through the first opening 3e. It flows into 3d. Furthermore, since the inside of the flow passage 3d extending from the first opening 3e to the second opening 3f is a sealed non-oxidizing atmosphere, the progress of oxidation of the molten solder M1 during the supply process is also suppressed. Note that the thickness of the layer of the oxide E1 generated on the surface of the thread solder M stored in the atmosphere is usually about several tens of μm, and thus is a difference in diameter between the thread solder M and the first opening 3e. It is sufficient to set Φ1 to Φ2 around 1 mm, but the dimensions may be appropriately determined depending on the low melting point metal material to be supplied.
 上記のように流通通路3dへの流入が阻止された酸化物E2は、貯留部3kに貯留され、第1開口3eの周囲に残留する。この酸化物E2が貯留部3kの中を流動し、再び流通通路3dへ流入することを防止するため、本例では、第1開口3eの周囲から酸化物E2を排出する酸化物排出部3hを好ましい構成として設けてある。この酸化物排出部3hは、溶融面3jから下方に連なる傾斜面3iを有し、第1開口3eの周囲に残留した酸化物E2が下方に流出するよう構成されている。この酸化物排出部3hから流出した酸化物E2は適宜な手段で回収すればよい。なお、酸化物排出部3hとしては、第1開口3eの周囲から酸化物E2を排出できるのであれば、例えば酸化物E2を吸引して排出する構成など他の手段を採用できることは言うまでもない。 The oxide E2 that has been prevented from flowing into the flow passage 3d as described above is stored in the storage portion 3k and remains around the first opening 3e. In order to prevent the oxide E2 from flowing in the storage portion 3k and flowing into the flow passage 3d again, in this example, the oxide discharge portion 3h that discharges the oxide E2 from the periphery of the first opening 3e is provided. It is provided as a preferred configuration. The oxide discharge portion 3h has an inclined surface 3i that continues downward from the melting surface 3j, and is configured such that the oxide E2 remaining around the first opening 3e flows downward. What is necessary is just to collect | recover the oxide E2 which flowed out from this oxide discharge part 3h by a suitable means. Needless to say, other means such as a structure for sucking and discharging the oxide E2 can be adopted as the oxide discharging portion 3h as long as the oxide E2 can be discharged from the periphery of the first opening 3e.
 さらに、第1開口3eの周囲に残留した酸化物E2が流動し流通通路3dへ流入することを防止するため、図4(b)に示すように酸化物捕捉部3lを溶融面3jに設けることができる。図4(b)の酸化物捕捉部3lは、溶融面3jの表面に形成した複数の凹凸であり、かかる凹凸で酸化物E2を捕捉することで酸化物E2の流動が抑制される。なお、上記酸化物排出部3hと酸化物捕捉部3lを組合せて使用することで、流通通路3dへの残留酸化物E2の流入防止効果をより高めることができる。 Further, in order to prevent the oxide E2 remaining around the first opening 3e from flowing and flowing into the flow passage 3d, an oxide capturing part 3l is provided on the melting surface 3j as shown in FIG. 4B. Can do. The oxide capturing part 3l in FIG. 4B is a plurality of irregularities formed on the surface of the melting surface 3j, and the oxide E2 is captured by the irregularities, whereby the flow of the oxide E2 is suppressed. In addition, by using the oxide discharge part 3h and the oxide capturing part 3l in combination, the effect of preventing the residual oxide E2 from flowing into the flow passage 3d can be further enhanced.
 酸化物除去部4の変形例について図5を参照し説明する。図5(a)に示す第1の変形例に係わる酸化物除去部4aは、酸化物除去部4aが供給筒3aとは別離して設けられた態様となっている。すなわち、略円環状の酸化物除去部4aは、糸半田Mの直径Φ1よりも小さな直径Φ3で上部開口が形成された貫通孔4bを有しており、その貫通孔4bの下部開口が流通通路3dの第1開口3eと相対する位置に配置されている。そして貫通孔4bの上部開口の外周辺縁は糸半田Mの外周面を切削除去する刃部として構成してある。したがって、供給された糸半田Mの外周面の酸化物E1は糸半田Mより小径である上部開口の外周縁の刃部で除去され、酸化物E1が除去された状態の糸半田Mが下方に送られて溶融部3gに当接して溶融し、酸化物の含まれない清浄な溶融半田M1が第1開口3eを通じて流通通路3dへ流入する。なお、酸化物除去部4aで外周面の酸化物E1が除去された糸半田Mに再び酸化物を生成させないため、酸化物除去部4aと第1開口3eとの間にノズル4cから不活性ガス等を流し、酸化物除去部4aと第1開口3eとの間が非酸化性雰囲気となる構成とすることが望ましい。 A modification of the oxide removing unit 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The oxide removing unit 4a according to the first modification shown in FIG. 5A has an aspect in which the oxide removing unit 4a is provided separately from the supply tube 3a. That is, the substantially annular oxide removing portion 4a has a through hole 4b in which an upper opening is formed with a diameter Φ3 smaller than the diameter Φ1 of the thread solder M, and the lower opening of the through hole 4b is a flow passage. It is arranged at a position opposite to the 3d first opening 3e. The outer peripheral edge of the upper opening of the through hole 4b is configured as a blade portion for cutting and removing the outer peripheral surface of the thread solder M. Accordingly, the oxide E1 on the outer peripheral surface of the supplied thread solder M is removed by the blade at the outer peripheral edge of the upper opening having a smaller diameter than the thread solder M, and the thread solder M in a state where the oxide E1 is removed is downward. The molten solder M1 that is sent and abuts on the melting part 3g and melts and does not contain oxide flows into the flow passage 3d through the first opening 3e. In addition, since the oxide is not generated again in the thread solder M from which the oxide E1 on the outer peripheral surface has been removed by the oxide removing unit 4a, an inert gas is supplied from the nozzle 4c between the oxide removing unit 4a and the first opening 3e. It is desirable that a non-oxidizing atmosphere be formed between the oxide removing portion 4a and the first opening 3e.
 図5(b)は第2の変形例に係わる酸化物除去部4dである。この酸化物除去部4dはプラズマ4eで酸化物E1を除去する例であり、糸半田Mが挿通可能な貫通孔を有する円環状の酸化物除去部4dは図示しないプラズマ発生手段に接続され、その内面から中心へ向いプラズマ4eを照射するプラズマ照射手段として構成されている。そして、酸化物除去部4dは、供給された糸半田Mの外周面にプラズマ4eを照射可能な位置に供給筒3aとは別離して配置されており、酸化物除去部4dの貫通孔に供給された糸半田Mの外周面の酸化物E1はプラズマ4eで除去され、酸化物E1が除去された糸半田Mが溶融部3gに当接し溶融する。 FIG. 5B shows the oxide removing unit 4d according to the second modification. The oxide removing portion 4d is an example of removing the oxide E1 with the plasma 4e, and the annular oxide removing portion 4d having a through-hole through which the thread solder M can be inserted is connected to a plasma generating means (not shown). It is configured as a plasma irradiation means for irradiating plasma 4e from the inner surface toward the center. The oxide removing unit 4d is arranged separately from the supply cylinder 3a at a position where the outer periphery of the supplied thread solder M can be irradiated with the plasma 4e, and is supplied to the through hole of the oxide removing unit 4d. The oxide E1 on the outer peripheral surface of the threaded solder M is removed by the plasma 4e, and the threaded solder M from which the oxide E1 has been removed comes into contact with the melting portion 3g and melts.
 図5(c)は第3の変形例に係わる酸化物除去部4fである。この酸化物除去部4fは硬質粒子4gで酸化物E1を除去する例である。すなわち、酸化物除去部4fは、酸化物E1が付着した糸半田Mが密着した状態で挿入される上部開口と酸化物E1が除去された糸半田Mが密着した状態で排出される下部開口を有する貫通孔が形成された略円管状の容器4jと、この容器4jの右側面から左側面に貫通して設けられた粒子供給通路4iを有する流通管4hとを有している。この流通管4hの右端には例えばセラミックス粒子などの硬質粒子4gを含む気体を所定の流速で供給する硬質粒子供給手段に接続されており、酸化物除去部4fは、流通管4hの右側から左側へ硬質粒子4gが流通するショットブラスト手段として構成されている。そして、酸化物除去部4fは、供給された糸半田Mの外周面に硬質粒子4gを照射可能な位置に供給筒3aとは別離して配置されており、酸化物除去部4fの貫通孔に供給された糸半田Mの外周面の酸化物E1は硬質粒子4gで除去され、酸化物E1が除去された糸半田Mが溶融部3gに当接し溶融する。なお、糸半田Mを軸芯回りに回転させながら酸化物除去部4fに供給すれば、酸化物E1を均一に除去できるので好ましい。 FIG. 5C shows the oxide removing unit 4f according to the third modification. The oxide removing portion 4f is an example in which the oxide E1 is removed with 4g of hard particles. That is, the oxide removing portion 4f has an upper opening inserted in a state in which the thread solder M to which the oxide E1 has adhered is in close contact and a lower opening to be discharged in a state in which the thread solder M from which the oxide E1 has been removed is in close contact. It has a substantially circular tubular container 4j in which a through-hole is formed, and a flow pipe 4h having a particle supply passage 4i provided penetrating from the right side surface to the left side surface of the container 4j. The right end of the flow pipe 4h is connected to a hard particle supply means for supplying a gas containing hard particles 4g such as ceramic particles at a predetermined flow rate, and the oxide removing unit 4f is arranged from the right side to the left side of the flow pipe 4h. It is configured as shot blasting means in which 4 g of hard particles are distributed. And the oxide removal part 4f is arrange | positioned separately from the supply cylinder 3a in the position which can irradiate the hard particle 4g to the outer peripheral surface of the supplied thread solder M, and it is arrange | positioned in the through-hole of the oxide removal part 4f. The oxide E1 on the outer peripheral surface of the supplied thread solder M is removed by the hard particles 4g, and the thread solder M from which the oxide E1 has been removed comes into contact with the melting portion 3g and melts. It is preferable to supply the thread solder M to the oxide removing portion 4f while rotating it around the axis because the oxide E1 can be uniformly removed.
[移動手段]
 図2に示すように、移動手段2eは、門型の支持体2f、支持体2fの上辺部に固定された昇降部2g、支持体2fの両側辺部の間に設けられ紙面に対し垂直及び水平方向に移動可能な水平移動部2h、接合部m1が形成される主面を上方に向けた水平な姿勢でガラス基板w1を載置可能な水平移動部2hに設けられたテーブル2iとで構成されている。そして、上記したように糸半田案内部2c及び加熱溶融手段3は固定部材2jを介して昇降部2gの下端部に接続されている。なお、以下、図2(a)に示すように、昇降部2gの上下移動方向をZ軸方向、水平移動部2hの移動方向であって紙面に平行な方向をX軸方向、X軸及びZ軸に共に直交する方向をY軸方向という。
[transportation]
As shown in FIG. 2, the moving means 2e includes a portal-type support 2f, an elevating part 2g fixed to the upper side of the support 2f, and provided between both sides of the support 2f. A horizontal moving part 2h that can move in the horizontal direction, and a table 2i provided on the horizontal moving part 2h that can place the glass substrate w1 in a horizontal posture with the main surface on which the joint m1 is formed facing upward. Has been. As described above, the thread solder guide portion 2c and the heating and melting means 3 are connected to the lower end portion of the elevating portion 2g via the fixing member 2j. Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 2A, the vertical movement direction of the elevating part 2g is the Z-axis direction, and the horizontal movement part 2h is the movement direction parallel to the plane of the paper, the X-axis direction, the X-axis, and the Z-axis. The direction perpendicular to the axis is called the Y-axis direction.
 なお、テーブル2iには、ガラス基板w1の全面を加熱可能なパネル状の発熱体を設けてもよい。この発熱体によりガラス基板w1を溶融半田M1の溶融温度程度に加熱することにより、溶融半田M1とガラス基板w1との温度差で生じる応力によるガラス基板w1の破損を防止することができ、また溶融半田M1とガラス基板w1との濡れ性が高まるので接合部m1とガラス基板w1との接合性を向上させることができる。 The table 2i may be provided with a panel-like heating element that can heat the entire surface of the glass substrate w1. By heating the glass substrate w1 to about the melting temperature of the molten solder M1 with this heating element, it is possible to prevent the glass substrate w1 from being damaged due to the stress caused by the temperature difference between the molten solder M1 and the glass substrate w1. Since the wettability between the solder M1 and the glass substrate w1 is increased, the bondability between the bonding portion m1 and the glass substrate w1 can be improved.
[制御手段]
 図2に示すように、制御手段2pは、電気通信回線2qを介して供給装置2の上記各構成要素と接続された制御部2rで構成されており、各構成要素の動作を制御する。具体的には、制御部2rはコンピュータで構成されており、その記憶部(メモリー)に格納された動作プログラム及び指令データを演算部(CPU)が読み出し適宜演算することにより、糸半田送出部2bに組み込まれたモータに指令して糸半田Mの供給量を制御し、ヒータ3cに指令して発熱温度を制御し、移動手段2eを構成する昇降部2g及び水平移動部2hに指令してその移動経路や移動速度を制御するよう構成されている。
[Control means]
As shown in FIG. 2, the control means 2p is comprised by the control part 2r connected with the said each component of the supply apparatus 2 via the telecommunication line 2q, and controls operation | movement of each component. Specifically, the control unit 2r is configured by a computer, and the operation part (CPU) stored in the storage unit (memory) is read by the operation unit (CPU) and appropriately calculated, whereby the yarn solder sending unit 2b. To control the supply amount of the thread solder M, to control the heat generation temperature by instructing the heater 3c, to instruct the elevator unit 2g and the horizontal moving unit 2h constituting the moving means 2e to It is configured to control the movement route and movement speed.
[気密室]
 図2に示すように、気密室2kは、供給装置2の上記各構成要素を内包する気密空間2mを形成する筐体2lと、製造装置2へのガラス基板w1の投入、排出のために筐体2lの両側壁に設けられた搬入口2n及び搬出口2oとで構成されている。なお、搬入口2n及び搬出口2oには気密室2kの気密性を確保するため気密扉が設けられている。
[Airtight room]
As shown in FIG. 2, the hermetic chamber 2k includes a housing 2l that forms an airtight space 2m that encloses each of the above-described components of the supply device 2, and a housing for loading and discharging the glass substrate w1 into and from the manufacturing device 2. It comprises a carry-in port 2n and a carry-out port 2o provided on both side walls of the body 2l. The carry-in port 2n and the carry-out port 2o are provided with hermetic doors in order to ensure the hermeticity of the hermetic chamber 2k.
[雰囲気制御手段]
 図2に示すように、雰囲気制御手段2sは、供給ポンプを備え収納された所定のガスを所定圧力で供給可能なガス供給部2uと、気密室2kの気密空間2mを真空状態とする真空ポンプ2vと、ガス供給部2uと真空ポンプ2vとを気密空間2mに接続する供給配管2tとで構成されており、気密空間2mを所定の雰囲気に制御する。ここで、ガス供給部2uには、ガラス基板w1の用途等に応じて適用する複数種のガス、例えば不活性ガスであるアルゴンガス、窒素ガス、還元性ガスである水素ガス、一酸化炭素ガス、酸化性ガスである酸素ガスを分離して収納することが可能であり、更にガス供給部2uに備える混合弁によりこれらのガスを所定割合で混合して気密空間2mに供給することもできる。
[Atmosphere control means]
As shown in FIG. 2, the atmosphere control means 2s includes a gas supply unit 2u that is provided with a supply pump and can supply a predetermined gas stored at a predetermined pressure, and a vacuum pump that vacuums the airtight space 2m of the airtight chamber 2k. 2v, a gas supply unit 2u, and a vacuum pump 2v are connected to a supply pipe 2t that connects the airtight space 2m, and the airtight space 2m is controlled to a predetermined atmosphere. Here, the gas supply unit 2u includes a plurality of kinds of gases applied according to the use of the glass substrate w1, for example, an argon gas that is an inert gas, a nitrogen gas, a hydrogen gas that is a reducing gas, or a carbon monoxide gas. The oxygen gas, which is an oxidizing gas, can be separated and stored, and these gases can be mixed at a predetermined ratio and supplied to the airtight space 2m by a mixing valve provided in the gas supply unit 2u.
 以下、ガラスパネル製造ライン1の全体の動作説明を含みつつ第1-1例の供給装置2の動作について説明する。 Hereinafter, the operation of the supply device 2 of Example 1-1 will be described, including the entire operation of the glass panel production line 1.
[準備工程]
 まず、図1に示すように、準備したガラス基板w1とw2をプリロード室1aに投入する。ガラス基板w1とw2の投入後、プリロード室1aの内部は一旦真空にされた後にアルゴンガスに置換され、不活性雰囲気とされる。なお、以下の前処理室1b、接合部形成室1c、接合室1d、冷却室1e及びアンロード室1fは、同様に不活性雰囲気とされている。
[Preparation process]
First, as shown in FIG. 1, the prepared glass substrates w1 and w2 are put into the preload chamber 1a. After the glass substrates w1 and w2 are charged, the inside of the preload chamber 1a is once evacuated and then replaced with argon gas to create an inert atmosphere. Note that the following pretreatment chamber 1b, bonding portion forming chamber 1c, bonding chamber 1d, cooling chamber 1e, and unload chamber 1f are similarly in an inert atmosphere.
[洗浄工程]
 次いで、ガラス基板w1とw2を前処理室1bに投入し、所定の温度で加熱処理し、またはプラズマ洗浄処理することによりガラス基板w1とw2の表面に付着した水分及び異物等を洗浄除去する。ここで、ガラスフリット等不純物ガスを生じる接合部がガラス基板w1とw2に形成されている場合には、上記加熱処理工程において接合部から生じた不純物ガスを除去する脱ガス処理も併せて行うことができる。
[Washing process]
Next, the glass substrates w1 and w2 are put into the pretreatment chamber 1b and subjected to a heat treatment at a predetermined temperature or a plasma cleaning process to clean and remove moisture and foreign matters adhering to the surfaces of the glass substrates w1 and w2. Here, in the case where the bonding portion that generates an impurity gas such as glass frit is formed on the glass substrates w1 and w2, a degassing process for removing the impurity gas generated from the bonding portion in the heat treatment step is also performed. Can do.
[溶融半田供給工程]
 前処理工程で洗浄等されたガラス基板w1とw2を溶融半田供給室1cに投入し、図50(b)に示すように、ガラス基板w1とw2にそれぞれ接合部m1とm2を形成するため溶融半田M1とM2を供給する。ここで、溶融半田M1とM2への溶融半田の供給方法は同一であるので、以下ガラス基板w1に溶融半田M1を供給する場合を例にして説明する。
[Molded solder supply process]
Glass substrates w1 and w2 cleaned in the pretreatment process are put into molten solder supply chamber 1c and melted to form joints m1 and m2 on glass substrates w1 and w2, respectively, as shown in FIG. 50 (b). Solder M1 and M2 are supplied. Here, since the method of supplying the molten solder to the molten solders M1 and M2 is the same, the case where the molten solder M1 is supplied to the glass substrate w1 will be described below as an example.
 図2に示すように、ガラス基板w1を、接合部m1が接合されるべき表面である主面Sを上方に向けた水平な姿勢でテーブル2iに載置する。次いで、供給装置2は、供給筒3aの下端面とガラス基板w1の主面Sとの間に所定の隙間が形成され(図3参照)、形成すべき矩形枠状の接合部m1に対し始点と定めた角部B1に供給筒3aの下端面が位置するよう(図50(b)参照)、X、Y、Z軸各方向へ昇降部2g及び水平移動部2hを移動する。 As shown in FIG. 2, the glass substrate w1 is placed on the table 2i in a horizontal posture with the main surface S, which is the surface to which the joining portion m1 is to be joined, facing upward. Next, in the supply device 2, a predetermined gap is formed between the lower end surface of the supply tube 3a and the main surface S of the glass substrate w1 (see FIG. 3), and the starting point is the rectangular frame-shaped joint portion m1 to be formed. The elevation part 2g and the horizontal movement part 2h are moved in the X, Y, and Z axis directions so that the lower end surface of the supply cylinder 3a is positioned at the corner B1 defined as follows (see FIG. 50B).
 供給装置2は、糸半田送出部2bのモータを駆動し、糸半田案内部2cから糸半田Mを繰り出す。繰り出された糸半田Mは、ヒータ3cで加熱された溶融面3jに当接し溶融半田M1となる。そして、上記説明のとおり糸半田Mの外周面に形成された酸化物E1は酸化物除去部4の溶融面3jにより溶融半田M1から分離され、酸化物E1が混入しない清浄な溶融半田M1のみが流通通路3dへ流入し、第2開口3fから流出し、ガラス基板w1の主面Sへ供給される。 The supply device 2 drives the motor of the thread solder delivery section 2b and feeds the thread solder M from the thread solder guide section 2c. The drawn-out solder Y comes into contact with the molten surface 3j heated by the heater 3c and becomes the molten solder M1. As described above, the oxide E1 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the thread solder M is separated from the molten solder M1 by the molten surface 3j of the oxide removing portion 4, and only clean molten solder M1 in which the oxide E1 is not mixed is obtained. It flows into the flow passage 3d, flows out from the second opening 3f, and is supplied to the main surface S of the glass substrate w1.
 供給装置2は、水平移動部2hでガラス基板w1を移動させ、供給筒3aをガラス基板w1の角部B1からB2へ相対的に水平移動させる。ここで、供給された溶融半田M1とガラス基板w1の主面Sとの接触界面には、超音波印加手段により超音波が印加されているので、接触界面に存在する気泡や異物が除去され、ガラス基板w1に対する溶融半田M1の濡れ性が高まる。その後、水平移動部2hでガラス基板w1を移動させ、ガラス基板w1の角部B3、B4を経由し始点であった角部B1で終着する一筆書きの移動経路に沿い供給筒3aを水平移動させ(図50(b)参照)、矩形枠状に溶融半田M1を供給する。 The supply device 2 moves the glass substrate w1 by the horizontal moving unit 2h, and relatively moves the supply cylinder 3a horizontally from the corners B1 to B2 of the glass substrate w1. Here, since ultrasonic waves are applied to the contact interface between the supplied molten solder M1 and the main surface S of the glass substrate w1 by the ultrasonic wave application means, bubbles and foreign substances existing at the contact interface are removed, The wettability of the molten solder M1 with respect to the glass substrate w1 increases. Thereafter, the glass substrate w1 is moved by the horizontal moving part 2h, and the supply cylinder 3a is horizontally moved along the movement path of one stroke writing which ends at the corner B1 which is the starting point via the corners B3 and B4 of the glass substrate w1. (See FIG. 50B), the molten solder M1 is supplied in a rectangular frame shape.
[接合工程]
 上記溶融半田供給工程で溶融半田M1とM2が供給されたガラス基板w1とw2を、図1に示す接合室1dに投入し、図7、8に示すガラス基板の接合装置6で接合する。
[Jointing process]
Glass substrates w1 and w2 to which molten solders M1 and M2 have been supplied in the molten solder supply step are put into a bonding chamber 1d shown in FIG. 1 and bonded by a glass substrate bonding apparatus 6 shown in FIGS.
 ここで、接合装置6は、図7に示すように、上記供給装置2と同様な、雰囲気制御手段2sで雰囲気制御される気密室2kの内部空間2mに置かれた、制御手段2pで駆動制御される移動手段2eを有している。その移動手段2eのテーブル2iは、溶融半田M1が供給された主面Sを上方に向け水平な姿勢でガラス基板w1を載置可能に構成されている。また、昇降部2gには、溶融半田M2が供給された主面Sを下方に向けた水平な姿勢でガラス基板w2を保持する保持手段7が組み込まれている。 Here, as shown in FIG. 7, the joining device 6 is driven and controlled by the control means 2p, which is placed in the internal space 2m of the airtight chamber 2k whose atmosphere is controlled by the atmosphere control means 2s, similar to the supply device 2 described above. The moving means 2e is provided. The table 2i of the moving means 2e is configured such that the glass substrate w1 can be placed in a horizontal posture with the main surface S supplied with the molten solder M1 facing upward. In addition, the elevating part 2g incorporates holding means 7 for holding the glass substrate w2 in a horizontal posture with the main surface S supplied with the molten solder M2 facing downward.
 保持手段7は、図8に示すように、上記の姿勢でガラス基板w2を保持可能な保持部7aと、保持部7aとガラス基板w2の間に設けられた通電により発熱するパネル状の発熱部7bとで構成されている。なお、図8では、ガラス基板w1とw2と発熱部7bとの位置関係を理解し易くするためそれらは断面図で示している。 As shown in FIG. 8, the holding means 7 includes a holding portion 7a capable of holding the glass substrate w2 in the above-described posture, and a panel-like heating portion that generates heat by energization provided between the holding portion 7a and the glass substrate w2. 7b. In FIG. 8, in order to facilitate understanding of the positional relationship between the glass substrates w <b> 1 and w <b> 2 and the heat generating portion 7 b, they are shown in a cross-sectional view.
 発熱部7bには、ガラス基板w2の主面に供給された溶融半田M2に対応した矩形枠状の突起部7cが形成されている。そして、当該突起部7cは、ガラス基板w2を保持部7aに保持したときに、水平面内において溶融半田M2に対応する位置で、かつ溶融半田M2の供給された面と反対の面に接触し、発熱部7bを発熱させた場合に突起部7c介して溶融半田M2のみが効率よく加熱され、溶融半田M2の溶融状態が維持されるよう構成されている。 The heat generating portion 7b is formed with a rectangular frame-shaped protruding portion 7c corresponding to the molten solder M2 supplied to the main surface of the glass substrate w2. When the glass substrate w2 is held by the holding portion 7a, the protrusion 7c is in a position corresponding to the molten solder M2 in the horizontal plane and contacts a surface opposite to the surface to which the molten solder M2 is supplied. When the heat generating part 7b generates heat, only the molten solder M2 is efficiently heated through the protrusions 7c, and the molten state of the molten solder M2 is maintained.
 上記接合装置6の動作を説明する。まず、ガラス基板w1を、溶融半田M1が形成された主面Sを上方に向けた姿勢でテーブル2iに載置し、ガラス基板w2を、溶融半田M2が形成された主面Sを下方に向けた姿勢で保持部7aに保持させる。このときテーブル2iの発熱体及び保持手段28の発熱部7bは通電され発熱しており、溶融半田M1とM2は溶融状態を維持している。次いで、接合装置6は、溶融半田M1とM2の各々の表面が相向合い接触する状態となるよう、X、Y、Z軸各方向へ昇降部2g及び水平移動部2hを移動し、昇降部2gを下方に駆動し、溶融半田M1とM2の接触界面をやや加圧する。すると、溶融半田M1とM2は接触界面において接合一体化される。その後、接合装置6は、テーブル2iの発熱体及び保持手段7の発熱部7bの通電を停止し、一体化した溶融半田M1とM2とを冷却凝固することで接合部mが形成される。以上により、図50(a)で示したガラスパネルWを得ることができる。 The operation of the joining device 6 will be described. First, the glass substrate w1 is placed on the table 2i with the main surface S on which the molten solder M1 is formed facing upward, and the glass substrate w2 is directed on the main surface S on which the molten solder M2 is formed downward. The holding unit 7a is held in the posture. At this time, the heating element of the table 2i and the heat generating portion 7b of the holding means 28 are energized to generate heat, and the molten solders M1 and M2 maintain a molten state. Next, the joining device 6 moves the elevating unit 2g and the horizontal moving unit 2h in the X, Y, and Z axis directions so that the surfaces of the molten solders M1 and M2 are in contact with each other, and the elevating unit 2g Is driven downward to slightly pressurize the contact interface between the molten solders M1 and M2. Then, the molten solders M1 and M2 are joined and integrated at the contact interface. Thereafter, the joining device 6 stops energization of the heating element of the table 2i and the heating part 7b of the holding means 7, and the joined molten solder M1 and M2 are cooled and solidified to form the joined part m. As described above, the glass panel W shown in FIG. 50A can be obtained.
[冷却工程]
 上記、ガラス基板接合工程で形成したガラスパネルWを冷却室1eに投入し、常温となるまで保持する。
[Cooling process]
The glass panel W formed in the glass substrate bonding step is put into the cooling chamber 1e and held until it reaches room temperature.
[払出工程]
 冷却されたガラスパネルWをアンロード室1fに投入する。ガラスパネルWは、アンロード室1fの内部をアルゴンガスから大気へ置換した後、外部へ払い出される。
[Payout process]
The cooled glass panel W is put into the unload chamber 1f. The glass panel W is discharged to the outside after the inside of the unload chamber 1f is substituted from the argon gas to the atmosphere.
 [第1-2例]
 本発明の第1-2例の供給筒及びその供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置について図9~11、51を参照しつつ説明する。
[Example 1-2]
The supply cylinder of Example 1-2 of the present invention and the molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder will be described with reference to FIGS.
 第1-2例の供給装置で製造されるガラスパネルWは基本的には第1-1例のガラスパネル製造ラインで製造されるガラスパネルWと同様であるが、図51(a)、(b)に示すように、ガラス基板w3とw4とを接合する接合部nの中に接合界面が無く一体的に構成されている点、及びガラス基板w3とw4との間隙を形成するための間隙維持部材Qを有する点において相違する。なお、以下、ガラス基板w3とw4の各部の寸法は同一であることを前提として説明をする。 The glass panel W manufactured by the supply device of Example 1-2 is basically the same as the glass panel W manufactured by the glass panel manufacturing line of Example 1-1, but FIG. As shown in b), there is no bonding interface in the bonding portion n for bonding the glass substrates w3 and w4, and a gap for forming a gap between the glass substrates w3 and w4. The difference is that the holding member Q is provided. In the following description, it is assumed that the dimensions of the glass substrates w3 and w4 are the same.
 第1-2例の供給装置8は、図9に示すように、糸半田供給手段2a、加熱溶融手段9、移動手段8a、気密室8c及び制御手段2pを備え、更に、所定の姿勢でガラス基板w3を保持する保持手段8dが組み込まれている。なお、糸半田供給手段2a、移動手段8a、気密室8c及び制御手段2pなど供給装置8の構成要素のうち上記供給装置2と同様に構成されているものについては同一符号を付し、詳細な説明を省略する。 As shown in FIG. 9, the supply device 8 of Example 1-2 includes a thread solder supply means 2a, a heating and melting means 9, a moving means 8a, an airtight chamber 8c, and a control means 2p, and further, glass in a predetermined posture. A holding means 8d for holding the substrate w3 is incorporated. Of the components of the supply device 8 such as the thread solder supply means 2a, the moving means 8a, the airtight chamber 8c, and the control means 2p, the same components as those of the supply device 2 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Description is omitted.
 [保持手段、移動手段]
 図9、10に示すように、保持手段8dは、接合部nが接合されるべき主面を下方に向けた水平な姿勢でガラス基板w3を吸着保持可能な複数の吸着部8fと、吸着部8fが固定された略平板状の支持部8eとで構成されている。また、供給装置8の移動手段8aは、支持体2fの上辺部の左端に固定された第1の昇降部2gと、同上辺部の右端に固定された第2の昇降部8bとを備えており、上記保持手段8dは、第2の昇降部8bの下端に取り付けられている。そして、上記第2の昇降部8b及び水平移動部2hは、これらの協動によりガラス基板w4に対するガラス基板w3の位置決め手段を構成し、図10(a)に示すように、各々の端面がほぼ一直線となるよう水平方向においてガラス基板w3とw4とを対向配置するとともに、ガラス基板w3とw4の間に所定の間隙が形成されるよう鉛直方向における位置決めする。そして、ガラス基板w3とw4の鉛直方向の位置決めが完了した後には、吸着部8fによるガラス基板w3の吸着は解除されるが、間隙は間隙保持部材Qにより保持される。
[Holding means, moving means]
As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the holding unit 8 d includes a plurality of suction portions 8 f that can suck and hold the glass substrate w <b> 3 in a horizontal posture with the main surface to which the joint portion n is to be joined facing downward, and suction portions. It is comprised by the substantially flat support part 8e to which 8f was fixed. Further, the moving means 8a of the supply device 8 includes a first elevating part 2g fixed to the left end of the upper side part of the support 2f, and a second elevating part 8b fixed to the right end of the upper side part. The holding means 8d is attached to the lower end of the second elevating part 8b. And the said 2nd raising / lowering part 8b and the horizontal movement part 2h comprise the positioning means of the glass substrate w3 with respect to the glass substrate w4 by these cooperation, and each end surface is substantially as shown to Fig.10 (a). The glass substrates w3 and w4 are opposed to each other in the horizontal direction so as to be in a straight line, and are positioned in the vertical direction so that a predetermined gap is formed between the glass substrates w3 and w4. After the vertical positioning of the glass substrates w3 and w4 is completed, the suction of the glass substrate w3 by the suction portion 8f is released, but the gap is held by the gap holding member Q.
 [気密室]
 糸半田供給手段2a、加熱溶融手段9及び移動手段8aを格納する気密室8cは、その内部が大気雰囲気(酸化雰囲気)である点で雰囲気制御手段により不活性雰囲気に制御される上記供給装置2の気密室2kと相違する。これは、下記で説明するように、供給装置8の供給筒9aの構造により、大気雰囲気すなわち酸化雰囲気中における供給過程でも酸化の進行を抑制しつつ溶融半田M1をガラス基板w3とw4に供給可能であるためである。
[Airtight room]
The above-mentioned supply device 2 is controlled in an inert atmosphere by the atmosphere control means in that the airtight chamber 8c for storing the yarn solder supply means 2a, the heating and melting means 9 and the moving means 8a is an atmospheric atmosphere (oxidizing atmosphere). This is different from the airtight chamber 2k. As will be described below, the structure of the supply cylinder 9a of the supply device 8 can supply the molten solder M1 to the glass substrates w3 and w4 while suppressing the progress of oxidation even in the supply process in the atmospheric atmosphere, that is, the oxidizing atmosphere. This is because.
 [加熱溶融手段]
 本例の加熱溶融手段9の基本構成は上記加熱溶融手段3と類似するが、供給筒の構造およびそのガラス基板w3、w4に対する姿勢が相違する。すなわち、加熱溶融手段9の供給筒9aには、図10(a)に示すように、糸半田Mが当接し溶融半田M1を生成する溶融部3gが右端部(一端部)に設けられ、溶融部3gに一体的に設けられた酸化物除去部4(クロスハッチの部分)に一方の開口(第1開口)3eが開口し、他方の開口(第2開口)3fが左端面(他端面)に開口した略円管状の流通通路3dがその内部に設けられている。具体的には、溶融部3gは供給筒9aの右端上面に凹状に形成され、第1開口3eは、糸半田Mが当接し溶融する溶融面3jである溶融部3gの底面、すなわち酸化物除去部4の上面に開口している。第1開口3eの直径ΦBは、溶融面3jと当接する糸半田Mの端面の直径ΦA未満であり、さらに第2開口3fの直径ΦCはガラス基板w3とw4との外周間隙kの寸法g以下である。そして、糸半田Mは、糸半田案内部の下方端部の開口から繰り出された後、その端面が第1開口3eを閉塞する姿勢で溶融面3jに当接するよう構成されている。
[Heating and melting means]
The basic configuration of the heating and melting means 9 of this example is similar to that of the heating and melting means 3, but the structure of the supply cylinder and its attitude with respect to the glass substrates w3 and w4 are different. That is, as shown in FIG. 10A, the supply tube 9a of the heating and melting means 9 is provided with a melting portion 3g at the right end portion (one end portion) where the thread solder M abuts and generates the molten solder M1. One opening (first opening) 3e is opened in the oxide removing portion 4 (cross hatch portion) provided integrally with the portion 3g, and the other opening (second opening) 3f is the left end surface (the other end surface). A substantially circular flow passage 3d that is open at the inside is provided inside. Specifically, the melting portion 3g is formed in a concave shape on the upper surface of the right end of the supply cylinder 9a, and the first opening 3e is a bottom surface of the melting portion 3g, that is, a melting surface 3j on which the thread solder M abuts and melts, that is, oxide removal. An opening is formed on the upper surface of the portion 4. The diameter ΦB of the first opening 3e is less than the diameter ΦA of the end surface of the thread solder M that is in contact with the melting surface 3j, and the diameter ΦC of the second opening 3f is less than or equal to the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4. It is. Then, after the thread solder M is fed out from the opening at the lower end of the thread solder guide portion, the end surface abuts against the melting surface 3j so as to close the first opening 3e.
 さらに、第1-2例の供給筒9aには、図10(a)及びそのC矢視図である同図(c)に示すように、流通通路3dの軸心に沿い水平方向に伸びた略平板状の案内部9bが設けられている。案内部9bは、その先端に、第2開口3fから所定の長さLだけ突出した突出部分9cを有している。この突出部分9cの突出長さLは形成すべき接合部nの幅に応じ、またその厚みはガラス基板w3とw4との間に形成される外周間隙kの大きさg未満である。この案内部9bは、下記で詳述するように第2開口3fから流出する溶融半田M1をガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kへ円滑に供給する機能を実現するものである。したがって、図10(a)のB-B断面である同図(b)に示すように、案内部9bの基端は第2開口3fの中に含まれている必要がある。一方で、第2開口3fからの溶融半田M1の流出を案内部9bが阻害しないよう、案内部9bと流通通路3dとの間には溶融半田M1が流通可能な隙間が生じている必要がある。さらに、溶融半田M1を外周間隙kへ円滑に供給するためには、案内部9bの表面には、溶融部3g及び流通通路3dと同様に溶融半田M1との濡れ性を高める処理がなされていることが好ましい。なお、本例の供給装置8では案内部9bを備えた供給筒9aを例として以下説明するが、例えば溶融金属の濡れ性が高い場合、外周間隙kの寸法gが比較的広い場合など溶融金属の濡れ広がりが円滑な場合には案内部は必ずしも必須の構成要素ではない。 Further, the supply cylinder 9a of the 1-2 example extends in the horizontal direction along the axial center of the flow passage 3d as shown in FIG. 10 (a) and FIG. A substantially flat guide portion 9b is provided. The guide portion 9b has a protruding portion 9c protruding from the second opening 3f by a predetermined length L at the tip thereof. The protruding length L of the protruding portion 9c is in accordance with the width of the joint n to be formed, and the thickness thereof is less than the size g of the outer peripheral gap k formed between the glass substrates w3 and w4. The guide portion 9b realizes a function of smoothly supplying the molten solder M1 flowing out from the second opening 3f to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 as described in detail below. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 10B, which is a BB cross section of FIG. 10A, the base end of the guide portion 9b needs to be included in the second opening 3f. On the other hand, a gap through which the molten solder M1 can flow must be formed between the guide portion 9b and the flow passage 3d so that the guide portion 9b does not hinder the outflow of the molten solder M1 from the second opening 3f. . Further, in order to smoothly supply the molten solder M1 to the outer peripheral gap k, the surface of the guide portion 9b is subjected to a process for improving the wettability with the molten solder M1 similarly to the molten portion 3g and the flow passage 3d. It is preferable. In the supply device 8 of the present example, the supply cylinder 9a provided with the guide portion 9b will be described below as an example. For example, when the molten metal has high wettability, the molten metal has a relatively wide dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k In the case where the wet spread is smooth, the guide portion is not necessarily an essential component.
 供給筒9aは、対向配置されたガラス基板w3とw4との外周間隙kに突出部分9cが挿入可能なよう水平な姿勢で保持されており、溶融半田M1を外周間隙kに供給するときには、第2開口3fが形成された左端面がガラス基板w3とw4の端面に共に接することで、第2開口3fが外周間隙kに連接した状態に移動手段8aで位置決めされる。これにより、図10(a)に示すように、溶融半田M1が供給されるべきガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kに流通通路3dは直接的に接続され、流通通路3dに流通する溶融半田M1は周囲の大気(酸素)に触れることなく外周間隙kに充填される。さらに、案内部9bが設けられているので、第2開口3fから流出する溶融半田M1は極めて円滑に外周間隙kに充填される。なお、供給筒9aの溶融部3gは、上記供給筒3aと同様に構成されているので、糸半田M1の外周面に存在する酸化物E1が溶融半田M1へ混入することを抑制できることは言うまでもない。 The supply cylinder 9a is held in a horizontal posture so that the protruding portion 9c can be inserted into the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 disposed so as to face each other, and when supplying the molten solder M1 to the outer peripheral gap k, Since the left end surface on which the two openings 3f are formed is in contact with the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, the second opening 3f is positioned by the moving means 8a so as to be connected to the outer peripheral gap k. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 10A, the flow passage 3d is directly connected to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 to which the molten solder M1 is to be supplied, and the molten solder M1 that flows through the flow passage 3d. Fills the outer circumferential gap k without touching the surrounding atmosphere (oxygen). Furthermore, since the guide portion 9b is provided, the molten solder M1 flowing out from the second opening 3f is filled very smoothly into the outer peripheral gap k. Since the melting part 3g of the supply cylinder 9a is configured similarly to the supply cylinder 3a, it goes without saying that the oxide E1 existing on the outer peripheral surface of the thread solder M1 can be prevented from being mixed into the molten solder M1. .
 ここで、上記案内部9bの変形例について図10(d)、(e)を参照して説明する。図10(d)の案内部9dは流通通路3dの軸心に沿い先端が先細り状に形成され、第2開口3fから流出した溶融半田M1がより円滑に外周間隙kの中を流入させることにより溶融半田の供給性が高まるよう構成されている。また、図10(e)の案内部9eには、同様な目的のため、案内部9bの表面に溶融半田M1を外周間隙kへ導くための案内溝uが形成されている。なお、図10(e)において、案内溝uは流通通路3dの軸心とほぼ平行に複数本、直線状に形成されているが、複数本の案内溝を放射状に形成したり、湾曲する形態で形成してもよい。 Here, a modified example of the guide portion 9b will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 (d) and 10 (e). The guide portion 9d in FIG. 10 (d) has a tip tapered along the axial center of the flow passage 3d, and the molten solder M1 flowing out of the second opening 3f flows more smoothly into the outer peripheral gap k. It is comprised so that the supply property of molten solder may improve. Further, for the same purpose, a guide groove u for guiding the molten solder M1 to the outer peripheral gap k is formed in the guide portion 9e of FIG. In FIG. 10 (e), a plurality of guide grooves u are formed in a straight line substantially parallel to the axial center of the flow passage 3d. However, a plurality of guide grooves are formed radially or curved. May be formed.
 以下、第1-2例の供給装置8の動作について説明する。なお、供給装置8に投入されるガラス基板w3とw4は既に前処理工程を終え、その表面から水分や異物が除去されたものである。 Hereinafter, the operation of the supply device 8 of Example 1-2 will be described. In addition, the glass substrates w3 and w4 thrown into the supply apparatus 8 have already finished the pretreatment process, and moisture and foreign substances have been removed from the surfaces thereof.
[基板位置決め工程]
 接合部nが接合される主面を下方に向け水平な姿勢でガラス基板w3を保持手段8dに保持させるとともに、接合部nが接合される主面を上方に向け水平な姿勢でテーブル2iにガラス基板w4を載置する。供給装置8は、第2の昇降部8b及び水平移動部2hを移動させることで、各々の外周端面同士が揃いほぼ一直線となるよう水平方向においてガラス基板w3とw4とを対向配置するとともに、ガラス基板w3とw4の間に所定の間隙が形成されるよう鉛直方向における位置決めする。その後、供給装置8は、吸着部8fによるガラス基板w3の吸着を解除し、第2の昇降部8bを上昇させることにより保持手段8dをテーブル2iの上方から退避させる。
[Board positioning process]
The glass substrate w3 is held by the holding means 8d in a horizontal posture with the main surface to which the bonding portion n is bonded downward, and the glass is applied to the table 2i in a horizontal posture with the main surface to which the bonding portion n is bonded upward. A substrate w4 is placed. The supply device 8 moves the second elevating unit 8b and the horizontal moving unit 2h, and arranges the glass substrates w3 and w4 in the horizontal direction so as to face each other so that the outer peripheral end surfaces are aligned and substantially in a straight line. Positioning in the vertical direction is performed so that a predetermined gap is formed between the substrates w3 and w4. Thereafter, the supply device 8 cancels the suction of the glass substrate w3 by the suction portion 8f, and lifts the second lifting / lowering portion 8b to retract the holding means 8d from above the table 2i.
[溶融半田供給工程]
 供給装置8は、テーブル2iに内蔵された発熱体を発熱させ、ガラス基板w3とw4を溶融半田M1の溶融温度程度に加熱する。そして、第1の昇降部2g及び水平移動部2hを移動させ、間隙維持部材Qで保持されているガラス基板w3とw4の一角部の外周間隙kに案内部9bの突出部分9cを挿入するとともに、案内部9bの左端面がガラス基板w3とw4の端面に共に接する状態に供給筒9aを位置決めする。
[Molded solder supply process]
The supply device 8 generates heat from the heating element built in the table 2i and heats the glass substrates w3 and w4 to about the melting temperature of the molten solder M1. Then, the first elevating part 2g and the horizontal moving part 2h are moved, and the protruding part 9c of the guide part 9b is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k at one corner of the glass substrates w3 and w4 held by the gap maintaining member Q. The supply tube 9a is positioned so that the left end surface of the guide portion 9b is in contact with the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4.
 次いで、供給装置8は、糸半田送出部のモータを駆動し、糸半田供給部から糸半田Mを繰り出す。繰り出された糸半田Mは、ヒータ3cで加熱された溶融面3jに当接し溶融半田M1が生成される。糸半田Mの外周面に形成された酸化物E1は酸化物除去部4により溶融半田M1から分離され、酸化物E1が混入しない清浄な溶融半田M1のみが流通通路3dへ流入する。そして、第1開口3e及び第2開口3f以外は密閉された流通通路3dを流動する溶融半田M1は、大気と触れることなく第2開口3fから流出し、さらに案内部9bで案内され、供給過程において酸化が抑制された清浄な溶融半田M1がガラス基板w3とw4との外周間隙kへ供給される。 Next, the supply device 8 drives the motor of the yarn solder delivery unit and feeds the yarn solder M from the yarn solder supply unit. The drawn-out solder Y comes into contact with the molten surface 3j heated by the heater 3c, and a molten solder M1 is generated. The oxide E1 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the thread solder M is separated from the molten solder M1 by the oxide removing unit 4, and only clean molten solder M1 in which the oxide E1 is not mixed flows into the flow passage 3d. Then, the melted solder M1 flowing in the closed flow passage 3d except for the first opening 3e and the second opening 3f flows out from the second opening 3f without being exposed to the atmosphere, and is further guided by the guide portion 9b, and the supply process. The clean molten solder M1 in which the oxidation is suppressed is supplied to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4.
 そして、上記供給筒9aとガラス基板w3とw4との鉛直方向における位置関係を保持しつつ供給筒9aがガラス基板w3とw4の外周を一周するよう水平移動部2hでガラス基板w3とw4を移動させることにより、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kの全てに溶融半田M1が供給され、矩形枠状に溶融半田M1が充填される。
 なお、ガラス基板w3の加熱機能を保持手段8dに設け、さらに第2の昇降部8bもX及びY軸方向に移動できるように構成することにより、間隙保持部材Qを使用しなくても上記と同様な動作でガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kに溶融半田M1を供給することができる。
The horizontal movement unit 2h moves the glass substrates w3 and w4 so that the supply cylinder 9a goes around the outer periphery of the glass substrates w3 and w4 while maintaining the vertical positional relationship between the supply cylinder 9a and the glass substrates w3 and w4. By doing so, the molten solder M1 is supplied to all of the outer peripheral gaps k of the glass substrates w3 and w4, and the molten solder M1 is filled in a rectangular frame shape.
In addition, the heating function of the glass substrate w3 is provided in the holding means 8d, and the second elevating part 8b is configured to be movable in the X and Y axis directions, so that the above can be achieved without using the gap holding member Q. The molten solder M1 can be supplied to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 by a similar operation.
[接合工程]
 テーブル2iの発熱体の通電を閉じガラス基板w3とw4を冷却し、溶融半田M1を凝固させ接合部nを形成する。上記のとおり糸半田Mの酸化物E1および供給過程において生成する酸化物の混入が抑制された清浄な溶融半田M1が外周間隙kへ供給されているの、でガラス基板w3とw4と接合部nとの接合界面には接合不良が生じ難く、気密性や接合強度の優れたガラスパネルWを得ることができる。
[Jointing process]
The energization of the heating element of the table 2i is closed, the glass substrates w3 and w4 are cooled, and the molten solder M1 is solidified to form the joint n. As described above, the oxide E1 of the thread solder M and the clean molten solder M1 in which mixing of the oxide generated in the supply process is suppressed are supplied to the outer peripheral gap k, so that the glass substrates w3 and w4 and the joint n It is difficult for bonding failure to occur at the bonding interface, and a glass panel W having excellent airtightness and bonding strength can be obtained.
 上記では理解を容易にするためガラス基板w3とw4の寸法は同一のものとしたが、異なる寸法であっても供給筒9aの構造を適宜工夫することで接合装置を構成することができる。すなわち、ガラス基板w3とw4の平面寸法が異なり、位置合わせした場合に双方の端面が揃わず段差が形成される場合には、供給筒9aの左端面をその段差に応じた形状とすればよい。 In the above description, the glass substrates w3 and w4 have the same dimensions for ease of understanding. However, even if the dimensions are different, the joining apparatus can be configured by appropriately devising the structure of the supply cylinder 9a. That is, when the planar dimensions of the glass substrates w3 and w4 are different and the end surfaces of both the glass substrates w3 and w4 are not aligned and a step is formed, the left end surface of the supply tube 9a may be shaped according to the step. .
 第1-2例の供給筒9aの好ましい例について、図11を参照し説明する。図11(a)の供給筒9fは、図51(b)の例、すなわちガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kのみならず端面からはみ出した部分に余肉部n1を有する接合部nを有するガラスパネルWを形成する場合の例である。図11(a)に示す供給筒9fは、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kの寸法gよりも大きな直径Φ3の第2開口9h、換言すれば外周間隙kを包含可能に形成された第2開口9hを有し、第2開口9hにおいて外周間隙kよりも大きな部分で余肉部n1が形成される。この余肉部n1が大気に対する障壁となり、外周間隙kに供給された溶融半田M1が大気に触れることによる供給後の酸化の進行が抑制される。 A preferred example of the supply cylinder 9a of Example 1-2 will be described with reference to FIG. The supply cylinder 9f in FIG. 11 (a) is an example of FIG. 51 (b), that is, a glass having a joining portion n having a surplus portion n1 in a portion protruding from the end face as well as the outer peripheral gap k of the glass substrates w3 and w4. This is an example of forming a panel W. A supply cylinder 9f shown in FIG. 11A is a second opening 9h having a diameter Φ3 larger than the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k of the glass substrates w3 and w4, in other words, the second opening 9h formed so as to include the outer peripheral gap k. The surplus portion n1 is formed in a portion larger than the outer peripheral gap k in the second opening 9h. This surplus portion n1 becomes a barrier to the atmosphere, and the progress of oxidation after the supply due to the molten solder M1 supplied to the outer circumferential gap k coming into contact with the atmosphere is suppressed.
 また、図11(b)の供給筒9iは、ガラス基板w3とw4の主面に存在する気泡や異物を除去し、またその表面の活性度を向上させてガラス基板に対する溶融半田M1の濡れ性を高めるため、ガラス基板w3とw4の主面において溶融半田M1が供給される供給面に当接する当接面9lを設けた例である。なお、図11(b)における当接面9lは、ガラス基板w3とw4の主面に接触可能なよう案内部9jの突出部分9kを九十九折状に構成してあるが、当接面9lは外周間隙kにおける溶融半田M1の流動を損なわないよう適宜構成すればよい。 Further, the supply cylinder 9i in FIG. 11B removes bubbles and foreign substances existing on the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 and improves the activity of the surface so that the wettability of the molten solder M1 with respect to the glass substrate. This is an example in which a contact surface 9l that contacts the supply surface to which the molten solder M1 is supplied is provided on the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4. In addition, although the contact surface 9l in FIG.11 (b) has comprised the protrusion part 9k of the guide part 9j so that it can contact with the main surface of the glass substrates w3 and w4, it is comprised in ninety-fold shape, 9l may be appropriately configured so as not to impair the flow of the molten solder M1 in the outer peripheral gap k.
 [第1-3例]
 本発明の第1-3例である溶融金属の供給筒及びその供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置について図12、13を参照し説明する。ここで、供給装置としての基本的な構成は図9と同様であるので供給装置全体の構造および動作に関する説明は省略する。
[Example 1-3]
A molten metal supply cylinder and a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder according to the first to third examples of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, the basic configuration of the supply device is the same as that shown in FIG. 9, and a description of the structure and operation of the entire supply device will be omitted.
 上記第1-2例の供給装置がガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kへ水平に溶融半田M1を供給していたのに対し、図12に示す第1-3例の供給装置は、重力を利用して垂直に溶融半田M1を供給する方式を採用し、案内部を有していない点で第1-2例の供給装置と相違している。 The supply device in the first to second examples shown in FIG. 12 supplies the molten solder M1 horizontally to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4. This method is different from the supply device of the first and second examples in that a method of supplying the molten solder M1 vertically is used and no guide is provided.
 図12(a)に示す供給筒10は上方開口した有底の円形容器状である。糸半田Mを溶融させるためのヒータ10dは供給筒10の外周に巻回されている。供給筒10の中央に形成され上面が溶融面10bとなる環状突起が溶融半田M1を生成する溶融部10aであり、酸化物除去部10iは溶融部10aの上部に一体的に設けられている。また、第1開口10fが溶融面10bに、第2開口10gが下面に開口し、第1開口10fと第2開口10gを連結するよう形成された流通通路10eが中央に設けられている。そして、図10で示した供給筒9aと同様に、第1開口10fの直径ΦBは糸半田Mの直径ΦA未満であり、第2開口10gの直径ΦCはガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kの寸法g以下である。さらに、供給筒10には、除去された酸化物E2を貯留する貯留部10cが溶融部10aの周囲に円環溝状をなすよう形成されており、その貯留部10cに貯留された酸化物E2は図示しない酸化物排出部で排出されるよう構成されている。 The supply cylinder 10 shown in FIG. 12 (a) is a bottomed circular container with an upper opening. A heater 10 d for melting the thread solder M is wound around the outer periphery of the supply cylinder 10. An annular protrusion formed at the center of the supply cylinder 10 and having an upper surface serving as the melting surface 10b is a melting portion 10a that generates the molten solder M1, and the oxide removing portion 10i is provided integrally on the upper portion of the melting portion 10a. The first opening 10f opens on the melting surface 10b, the second opening 10g opens on the lower surface, and a flow passage 10e formed so as to connect the first opening 10f and the second opening 10g is provided in the center. As in the supply cylinder 9a shown in FIG. 10, the diameter ΦB of the first opening 10f is less than the diameter ΦA of the thread solder M, and the diameter ΦC of the second opening 10g is the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4. It is below dimension g. Furthermore, the supply cylinder 10 is formed with a storage portion 10c for storing the removed oxide E2 so as to form an annular groove around the melting portion 10a, and the oxide E2 stored in the storage portion 10c. Is configured to be discharged at an oxide discharge portion (not shown).
 供給筒10は、接合部nが形成されるべき主面が鉛直方向に立った姿勢で対向配置されたガラス基板w3とw4との外周間隙kに対し、第2開口10gが連接して外周間隙kと流通通路10eが接続可能な姿勢で保持されている。溶融半田M1を外周間隙kに供給するときには、第2開口10gが形成された下面がガラス基板w3とw4の端面に共に接することで、第2開口10gが外周間隙kに連接した状態に位置決めされる。 The supply cylinder 10 is configured such that the second opening 10g is connected to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 facing each other in a posture in which the main surface on which the joint portion n is to be formed stands in the vertical direction. k and the flow passage 10e are held in a connectable posture. When supplying the molten solder M1 to the outer peripheral gap k, the lower surface on which the second opening 10g is formed contacts the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, so that the second opening 10g is positioned in a state of being connected to the outer peripheral gap k. The
 上記供給手段10の構成によれば、糸半田供給部から繰り出された糸半田Mは溶融面10bに当接し溶融半田M1が生成される。そして、溶融半田M1はガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kへ重力により速やかに供給される。なお、供給筒10の構造及びガラス基板w3とw4との位置関係は、上記供給筒9aと同様に構成されているので、糸半田M1の外周面に存在する酸化物E1の溶融半田M1への混入を抑制でき、さらに供給過程における溶融半田M1の酸化を抑制できることは言うまでもない。 According to the configuration of the supply means 10, the thread solder M fed from the thread solder supply section comes into contact with the melting surface 10b, and the molten solder M1 is generated. The molten solder M1 is quickly supplied by gravity to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4. The structure of the supply cylinder 10 and the positional relationship between the glass substrates w3 and w4 are the same as those of the supply cylinder 9a. Needless to say, mixing can be suppressed, and oxidation of the molten solder M1 in the supply process can be suppressed.
 図12(b)に示す供給筒10jは、基本的に上記供給筒10と同様な構成であり、第2開口10lの直径ΦCが外周間隙kの寸法gよりも大きい点のみが相違する。かかる構成の供給筒10jによれば、上記図11(a)で説明した供給筒9aと同様余肉部n1を有するガラスパネルWを形成することができる。 The supply cylinder 10j shown in FIG. 12 (b) has basically the same configuration as the supply cylinder 10 except that the diameter ΦC of the second opening 10l is larger than the dimension g of the outer circumferential gap k. According to the supply cylinder 10j having such a configuration, the glass panel W having the surplus portion n1 can be formed in the same manner as the supply cylinder 9a described with reference to FIG.
 さらに、図13に示す供給筒10mは、基本的に供給筒10と同一の構成であるが、第2開口10gの下方に接続された管状の案内部10nを有する点で相違している。かかる例の供給筒10mによれば、溶融半田M1はより円滑にガラス基板w3とw4との外周間隙kに供給される。 Furthermore, the supply cylinder 10m shown in FIG. 13 has basically the same configuration as the supply cylinder 10, but differs in that it has a tubular guide portion 10n connected below the second opening 10g. According to the supply cylinder 10m in this example, the molten solder M1 is more smoothly supplied to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4.
[第2態様]
 上記(18)で説明した態様の溶融金属の供給筒及びその供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置及び溶融金属の供給方法並びにそれらの望ましい態様について、以下その第2-1例、第2-2例に基づき説明する。
[Second embodiment]
Regarding the molten metal supply cylinder, the molten metal supply apparatus, the molten metal supply method in which the supply cylinder of the aspect described in the above (18) is incorporated, and the desirable aspects thereof, examples 2-1 and 2 -A description will be given based on an example.
[第2-1例]
 本発明の第2-1例である溶融金属の供給筒、その供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置について図14~図24を参照して説明する。なお、図14の変形例を示す図19、20、23、24において共通する構成要素については同一符号を付しており、同一要素の繰り返しの説明は省略する。
[Example 2-1]
A molten metal supply cylinder and a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder according to Example 2-1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, in FIG. 19, 20, 23, 24 which shows the modification of FIG. 14, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the same component, and the description of the repetition of the same element is abbreviate | omitted.
 第2-1例の供給装置11は、図51(a)、(b)を参照して説明したガラスパネルWを製造するものであり、図16に示すように、自動化に適する構成として、載置手段11a、糸半田供給手段11d、溶融半田供給手段12、移動手段11g、制御手段11o、気密室11l及び雰囲気制御手段11rとで構成されている。以下、各構成要素について説明する。 The supply device 11 of Example 2-1 manufactures the glass panel W described with reference to FIGS. 51A and 51B. As shown in FIG. 16, the supply device 11 has a configuration suitable for automation. It comprises a placement means 11a, a thread solder supply means 11d, a molten solder supply means 12, a moving means 11g, a control means 11o, an airtight chamber 11l and an atmosphere control means 11r. Hereinafter, each component will be described.
[載置手段]
 載置手段11aにおいて、符号11bは、間隙保持部材を介して第1のガラス基板(以下第2-1例において第1基板と言う。第2-2例においても同じ。)w3と第2のガラス基板(以下第2-1例において第2基板と言う。第2-2例においても同じ。)w4とが対向位置決めされ所定の間隙が各々の主面Sの間に形成されるよう配置されたガラス基板w3とw4で構成された未接合体W0を、水平な姿勢で載置可能なテーブルである。このテーブル11bには、好ましい構成として未接合体W0を加熱可能なパネル状の発熱体が内臓してあり、この発熱体によりガラス基板w3とw4とを溶融半田の溶融温度程度に加熱することにより、溶融半田とガラス基板w3及びw4との温度差で生じる応力によるガラス基板w3、w4の破損を防止することができ、更に溶融半田とガラス基板w3、w4との濡れ性が高まるので接合部とガラス基板w3及びw4との接合性を向上させることができる。
[Mounting means]
In the mounting means 11a, reference numeral 11b denotes a first glass substrate (hereinafter referred to as the first substrate in Example 2-1 and the same in Example 2-2) through the gap holding member w3 and the second. The glass substrate (hereinafter referred to as the second substrate in the 2-1 example and the same in the 2-2 example) w4 is positioned so as to be opposed to each other and a predetermined gap is formed between the main surfaces S. It is a table on which the unjoined body W0 composed of the glass substrates w3 and w4 can be placed in a horizontal posture. This table 11b has a built-in panel-like heating element capable of heating the unbonded body W0 as a preferred configuration, and the glass substrates w3 and w4 are heated to about the melting temperature of the molten solder by this heating element. The glass substrate w3 and w4 can be prevented from being damaged by the stress generated by the temperature difference between the molten solder and the glass substrates w3 and w4, and the wettability between the molten solder and the glass substrates w3 and w4 is increased. Bondability with the glass substrates w3 and w4 can be improved.
 符号11cは、テーブル11bが上部に設けられ紙面に対し垂直及び水平方向に移動可させるテーブル移動部である。なお、以下、図16(a)に示すように、テーブル移動部11cの移動方向であって紙面に平行な軸をX軸と、垂直な軸をY軸とし、X、Y軸に対し共に直交する鉛直な軸をZ軸とする。そして、未接合体W0を構成するガラス基板w3、w4の各々の主面SはX軸及びY軸を含む平面とほぼ平行に、未接合体W0の外周端面はZ軸とほぼ平行にテーブル11bに載置されている。 Numeral 11c is a table moving unit provided with a table 11b at the top and capable of moving vertically and horizontally with respect to the paper surface. In the following, as shown in FIG. 16A, the movement direction of the table moving unit 11c and the axis parallel to the paper surface are the X axis and the vertical axis is the Y axis, and both are orthogonal to the X and Y axes. The vertical axis to be used is the Z axis. The main surface S of each of the glass substrates w3 and w4 constituting the unbonded body W0 is substantially parallel to a plane including the X axis and the Y axis, and the outer peripheral end surface of the unbonded body W0 is substantially parallel to the Z axis. Is placed.
[糸半田供給手段]
 溶融半田を形成するための原料を供給する構成の一例である糸半田供給手段11dにおいて、符号11eは、SnAgAl系合金からなるワイヤー状の素材(以下糸半田と言う。)Mを巻回するボビン状の糸半田送出部であり、図示しないモータ等で回転され定量的に糸半田Mを送り出す。符号11fは、糸半田Mが挿通可能な案内通路である貫通孔を有する両端開口の略管状の糸半田案内部であり、移動手段11gの固定部材11kに位置決め固定されている。本例の供給装置11では、2mm程度の直径に成形した糸半田Mを用いており、初期状態において、糸半田送出部11eに巻回された糸半田Mの先端部は糸半田送出部11eから引き出され、糸半田案内部11fの導入開口から案内通路に挿入され供給開口から突出し、供給筒14の流入口14aへ向かう姿勢となるようセットされている(図14参照)。
[Thread solder supply means]
In a thread solder supply means 11d which is an example of a configuration for supplying a raw material for forming molten solder, reference numeral 11e denotes a bobbin around which a wire-shaped material (hereinafter referred to as thread solder) M made of SnAgAl-based alloy is wound. This is a thread solder sending unit that is rotated by a motor or the like (not shown) to send the thread solder M quantitatively. Reference numeral 11f denotes a substantially tubular thread solder guide portion having both ends open and having a through hole that is a guide passage through which the thread solder M can be inserted, and is positioned and fixed to the fixing member 11k of the moving means 11g. In the supply device 11 of this example, the thread solder M formed to have a diameter of about 2 mm is used. In the initial state, the tip of the thread solder M wound around the thread solder delivery unit 11e is from the thread solder delivery unit 11e. It is pulled out, inserted into the guide passage from the introduction opening of the thread solder guide portion 11f, protrudes from the supply opening, and is set to take a posture toward the inlet 14a of the supply cylinder 14 (see FIG. 14).
[溶融半田供給手段]
 溶融半田供給手段12において符号13は溶融半田供給部である。溶融半田供給部13は、図14に示すように供給筒14、供給筒14の先端に装着された案内部16及び供給筒14を支持するフローティング機構である支持部15とで構成されている。
[Melt solder supply means]
In the molten solder supply means 12, reference numeral 13 denotes a molten solder supply unit. As shown in FIG. 14, the molten solder supply unit 13 includes a supply tube 14, a guide unit 16 attached to the tip of the supply tube 14, and a support unit 15 that is a floating mechanism that supports the supply tube 14.
 まず、供給筒14について説明する。供給筒14において、符号14hは左端が縮径した略円筒形状をなす筒体である。筒体14hは、筒体14hの右上部に設けられた一面(以下第2-1例、2-2例において溶融面と言う。)14eと、左端部に設けられた他面(以下第2-1例、2-2例において吐出面と言う。)14fとを有し、未接合体W0の外周端面に対し微少な隙間を介して平行に吐出面14fが位置決め可能なよう構成されている。なお、本例の供給筒14には、溶融面14eを挟んで両側に円環状の堰14gが形成されており、この2つの堰14gにより囲まれた凹状部の底面が溶融面14eとなる。筒体14hは熱伝導率の高いステンレス等で形成することが望ましく、さらに円滑に溶融半田M1を流動させるため溶融面14eと吐出面14fには溶融半田M1との濡れ性に富むCr層等を形成することが望ましい。 First, the supply cylinder 14 will be described. In the supply cylinder 14, reference numeral 14 h is a cylindrical body having a substantially cylindrical shape whose left end is reduced in diameter. The cylindrical body 14h has one surface (hereinafter referred to as a melting surface in Examples 2-1 and 2-2) 14e provided on the upper right portion of the cylindrical body 14h and the other surface (hereinafter referred to as the second surface) provided on the left end. -1 example and 2-2 example are referred to as discharge surfaces. . The supply cylinder 14 of this example has annular weirs 14g on both sides of the melting surface 14e, and the bottom surface of the concave portion surrounded by the two weirs 14g is the melting surface 14e. The cylindrical body 14h is preferably formed of stainless steel or the like having a high thermal conductivity. In order to make the molten solder M1 flow more smoothly, the molten surface 14e and the discharge surface 14f are provided with a Cr layer or the like rich in wettability with the molten solder M1. It is desirable to form.
 符号14dは、溶融面14eと吐出面14fとの間の筒体14hの外周面に沿いコイル状に巻回され、糸半田Mの溶融温度以上に筒体14hを加熱する加熱部材である。加熱部材14dには、その発熱温度や発熱パターンを制御する加熱制御部12aが接続されている。 Reference numeral 14d is a heating member that is wound in a coil shape along the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical body 14h between the melting surface 14e and the discharge surface 14f, and heats the cylindrical body 14h above the melting temperature of the thread solder M. A heating control unit 12a for controlling the heat generation temperature and the heat generation pattern is connected to the heating member 14d.
 符号14cは筒体14hの内部を貫通する流路であり、溶融面14eに開口した第1開口(以下第2-1例、2-2例において流入口と言う。)14aと、吐出面14fに開口した第2開口(以下以下第2-1例、2-2例において吐出口と言う。)14bとを有しており、流入口14aは、その直径ΦBが糸半田Mの直径ΦA未満である。なお、流路14cの断面形状は円形状に限定されることはなく、例えば矩形状等としてもよい。 Reference numeral 14c denotes a flow path that penetrates the inside of the cylindrical body 14h, and includes a first opening (hereinafter referred to as an inflow port in Examples 2-1 and 2-2) 14a opened on the melting surface 14e, and a discharge surface 14f. A second opening (hereinafter referred to as a discharge port in Examples 2-1 and 2-2) 14b. The inflow port 14a has a diameter ΦB less than the diameter ΦA of the thread solder M. It is. The cross-sectional shape of the flow path 14c is not limited to a circular shape, and may be a rectangular shape, for example.
 上記流路14cには、円滑に溶融半田M1を流動させるため溶融半田M1との濡れ性の高いCr層をその表面に形成することが望ましい。このCr層に代えてAl、Mo、W、V、Nb、Ta、Ag又はNiからなる層を設けてもよい。加えて、流路14cには、その表面が溶融半田M1で溶食され溶融半田M1に不純物が混入しないように溶食防止処理としての窒化処理等を施すことが望ましい。 It is desirable that a Cr layer having high wettability with the molten solder M1 is formed on the surface of the flow path 14c so that the molten solder M1 flows smoothly. Instead of this Cr layer, a layer made of Al, Mo, W, V, Nb, Ta, Ag or Ni may be provided. In addition, it is desirable that the flow path 14c be subjected to nitriding treatment as a corrosion preventing treatment so that the surface thereof is eroded by the molten solder M1 and impurities are not mixed into the molten solder M1.
 吐出口14bは、理解のため溶融半田M1の図示を省略した図18(a)に示すように、その口径である直径D1が外周間隙kの寸法gを越える大きさであり、吐出口14bに達した溶融半田M1は、第1基板w3及び第2基板w4の各々の外周端面にも接するため外周間隙kのみならずガラス基板w3とw4の外周端面にも供給されることとなる。したがって、図51(b)に示すように、この例の吐出口14bを使用して製造されたガラスパネルWには、外周端面に密着する突起部分n1を含む接合部nが外周間隙kに形成される。 As shown in FIG. 18A in which the illustration of the molten solder M1 is omitted for the sake of understanding, the discharge port 14b has a diameter D1 that is the diameter exceeding the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k. The reached molten solder M1 comes into contact with the outer peripheral end surfaces of the first substrate w3 and the second substrate w4 and is supplied not only to the outer peripheral gap k but also to the outer peripheral end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), in the glass panel W manufactured using the discharge port 14b of this example, a joint portion n including a protruding portion n1 that is in close contact with the outer peripheral end surface is formed in the outer peripheral gap k. Is done.
 一方で、理解のため溶融半田M1の図示を省略した図19(a)に示す供給筒17ように、吐出口17aの口径D1を外周間隙kの寸法g以下とすることもできる。この例の場合、吐出口17aは外周間隙kの内にのみ開口しているので、吐出口17aに達した溶融半田M1は外周間隙kにのみ充填される。そのため、図51(c)に示すように、この例の供給筒17を使用して製造されたガラスパネルWには、外周間隙kにのみ接合部nが形成される。この吐出口17aのような態様の場合、流路14cの全長にわたり吐出口17aの直径と同じ直径D1とすると流動抵抗が大きくなり溶融半田M1の流動性が低下するおそれがある。そのため、溶融半田M1が実際に吐出される吐出面14fで吐出口17aが外周間隙kの寸法gと同一以下となるよう、流路14cの終端部の形状は吐出面14fに向かい縮径した略円錐形状であることが好ましい。 On the other hand, the diameter D1 of the discharge port 17a can be set to be equal to or less than the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k as in the supply cylinder 17 shown in FIG. 19A in which the illustration of the molten solder M1 is omitted for understanding. In this example, since the discharge port 17a is opened only in the outer peripheral gap k, the molten solder M1 reaching the discharge port 17a is filled only in the outer peripheral gap k. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), in the glass panel W manufactured using the supply cylinder 17 of this example, the joint portion n is formed only in the outer peripheral gap k. In the case of the discharge port 17a, if the diameter D1 is the same as the diameter of the discharge port 17a over the entire length of the flow path 14c, the flow resistance may increase and the fluidity of the molten solder M1 may decrease. Therefore, the shape of the terminal portion of the flow path 14c is substantially reduced in diameter toward the discharge surface 14f so that the discharge port 17a on the discharge surface 14f on which the molten solder M1 is actually discharged is less than or equal to the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k. A conical shape is preferred.
 図14に示すように糸半田Mの先端は、供給筒14の流入口14aへ向かう姿勢で糸半田案内部11fにセットされている。もって、糸半田送出部11eから定量的に送り出された糸半田Mは、その先端面が流入口14aを閉塞する姿勢で溶融面14eに当接する。加熱部材14dで加熱された溶融面14eに触れた糸半田Mは溶融し溶融半田M1が形成される。その溶融半田M1は流入口14aから流入し、流路14cの中を左端へ向けて流動し、吐出口14bから吐出される。なお、筒体14hは、糸半田案内部11fから繰り出される糸半田Mと溶融面14eとの上記位置関係が保持可能とされるよう固定部材11kに位置決め固定されている。 As shown in FIG. 14, the tip of the thread solder M is set on the thread solder guide 11f in a posture toward the inlet 14a of the supply cylinder 14. Accordingly, the thread solder M sent out quantitatively from the thread solder delivery section 11e comes into contact with the melting surface 14e in such a posture that the tip end face closes the inflow port 14a. The thread solder M that has touched the melting surface 14e heated by the heating member 14d is melted to form a molten solder M1. The molten solder M1 flows in from the inflow port 14a, flows in the flow path 14c toward the left end, and is discharged from the discharge port 14b. The cylindrical body 14h is positioned and fixed to the fixing member 11k so that the positional relationship between the thread solder M fed from the thread solder guide portion 11f and the melting surface 14e can be maintained.
 以上のように本例の供給装置11では、糸半田供給手段11dで供給された固状の糸半田Mを供給筒14それ自身で溶融して溶融半田M1を形成する例であるが、例えば半田を溶融状態で収納可能な容器から溶融半田を自重や加圧力で押出して供給筒へ供給する構成は供給装置11に組み込むことができ、その他本発明の目的に反しない限り他の供給機構を組み込むこともできる。 As described above, the supply device 11 of the present example is an example in which the solid solder M supplied by the thread solder supply means 11d is melted by the supply cylinder 14 itself to form the molten solder M1. A configuration in which molten solder is extruded from its container that can be stored in a molten state by its own weight or pressure and supplied to the supply cylinder can be incorporated in the supply device 11, and other supply mechanisms can be incorporated as long as the object of the present invention is not contradicted. You can also
 次に、案内部16について説明する。案内部16は、図14において矢印Y1で示すように水平面に沿い未接合体W0の外周端面から内部に向かう方向(以下挿入方向と言う)に未接合体W0の外周間隙kへ挿入され、上記供給筒14の吐出口14bから吐出される溶融半田M1を外周間隙kに案内し、供給するように構成されている。そのため、案内部16は、Z軸方向において吐出面14fのほぼ中央部に形成された取付け溝に吐出口14bを横切るように嵌着されている。 Next, the guide unit 16 will be described. The guide portion 16 is inserted into the outer circumferential gap k of the unjoined body W0 in the direction (hereinafter referred to as the insertion direction) from the outer peripheral end surface of the unjoined body W0 along the horizontal plane as indicated by an arrow Y1 in FIG. The molten solder M1 discharged from the discharge port 14b of the supply cylinder 14 is guided and supplied to the outer peripheral gap k. Therefore, the guide part 16 is fitted so as to cross the discharge port 14b in an attachment groove formed at a substantially central part of the discharge surface 14f in the Z-axis direction.
 案内部16の詳細を図示した図17、18において、符号16hは外周間隙kの寸法gに対し厚みがT2と薄く、供給筒14の吐出面14fから長さL2だけ突出した薄板状のコテ部である。コテ部16は、載置手段11aに置かれた未接合体W0の第1基板w3の主面S1と所定の第1の間隙G1を介して対向する上面(第1の平面)16iと、第2基板w4の主面S2と所定の第2の間隙G2を介して対向する下面(第2の平面)16jとを有している。なお、本例では第1の間隙G1と第2の間隙G2とは同程度の寸法である。かかる構造のコテ部16hによれば、吐出口14bを通じて外周間隙kに供給された溶融半田M1は、コテ部16の上面16i及び下面16jに導入され、間隙G1とG2の間を濡れ広がる。しかしながら、溶融半田M1の濡れ広がりはコテ部16hの先端(図17において先端、図18(a)において左端)に留まる。そのため、供給された溶融半田M1の未接合体W0の外縁からの幅は、コテ部16hの長さL2に規制される。そして、間隙G1とG2に溶融半田M1が充填された状態で未接合体W0の外縁に沿い溶融半田供給部13を水平移動させると、その水平移動により間隙G1とG2に供給された溶融半田M1には流動が生じ、その溶融半田M1の流動により溶融半田M1はガラス基板w3とw4に塗り込まれ、未接合体W0の外縁に添いほぼ一定の幅で溶融半田M1は外周間隙kに充填される。 In FIGS. 17 and 18 illustrating the details of the guide portion 16, a reference numeral 16h denotes a thin plate-like iron portion that is as thin as T2 with respect to the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k and protrudes from the discharge surface 14f of the supply cylinder 14 by a length L2. It is. The iron part 16 includes an upper surface (first plane) 16i facing the main surface S1 of the first substrate w3 of the unjoined body W0 placed on the mounting means 11a via a predetermined first gap G1, and a first surface 16i. It has a main surface S2 of the two substrates w4 and a lower surface (second plane) 16j facing each other with a predetermined second gap G2. In this example, the first gap G1 and the second gap G2 have the same size. According to the iron part 16h having such a structure, the molten solder M1 supplied to the outer peripheral gap k through the discharge port 14b is introduced into the upper surface 16i and the lower surface 16j of the iron part 16 and spreads between the gaps G1 and G2. However, the wet spread of the molten solder M1 remains at the tip of the iron part 16h (the tip in FIG. 17 and the left end in FIG. 18A). Therefore, the width of the supplied molten solder M1 from the outer edge of the unjoined body W0 is regulated by the length L2 of the iron part 16h. Then, when the molten solder supply unit 13 is moved horizontally along the outer edge of the unjoined body W0 in the state where the gaps G1 and G2 are filled with the molten solder M1, the molten solder M1 supplied to the gaps G1 and G2 by the horizontal movement. The molten solder M1 is applied to the glass substrates w3 and w4 by the flow of the molten solder M1, and the molten solder M1 fills the outer peripheral gap k with a substantially constant width along the outer edge of the unjoined body W0. The
 本例の供給装置11には、好ましい構成として、図14、16に示すようにコテ部16hに超音波を伝達する超音波発振部12bが組み込まれており、間隙G1とG2に充填された溶融半田M1とガラス基板w3とw4との接触界面にコテ部16hを介して超音波を印加し、活性化させて接触界面に半田を馴染ませるとともに、接触界面に存在する気泡や異物を除去可能なよう構成されている。なお、案内部16の挿入方向に沿ってコテ部16hが振動するよう超音波を印加することがさらに好ましい。 As shown in FIGS. 14 and 16, the supply device 11 of this example includes an ultrasonic oscillation unit 12 b that transmits ultrasonic waves to the iron part 16 h as shown in FIGS. 14 and 16, and melts filling the gaps G <b> 1 and G <b> 2. Ultrasonic wave is applied to the contact interface between the solder M1 and the glass substrates w3 and w4 through the iron part 16h to activate the solder and adjust the solder to the contact interface, and it is possible to remove bubbles and foreign substances existing on the contact interface. It is configured as follows. It is more preferable to apply ultrasonic waves so that the iron part 16h vibrates along the insertion direction of the guide part 16.
 なお、コテ部16hの少なくとも上面16i及び下面16jには溶融半田M1との濡れ性を高めるため、Cr、Al、Mo、W、V、Nb、Ag、Ni又はTaからなる層を設けることが好ましく、さらに溶融半田M1でコテ部16hが溶食され溶融半田M1に不純物が混入しないように溶食防止処理としての窒化処理等を施すことが望ましい。さらに、溶融半田M1の追従性を高めるためには、コテ部16hの上面16iと下面16jにコテ部16hの移動方向に対し交差する凹凸を形成しておくことが好ましい。 Note that at least the upper surface 16i and the lower surface 16j of the iron portion 16h are preferably provided with a layer made of Cr, Al, Mo, W, V, Nb, Ag, Ni, or Ta in order to improve wettability with the molten solder M1. Further, it is desirable to perform a nitriding treatment or the like as an anti-corrosion treatment so that the iron part 16h is eroded by the molten solder M1 and impurities are not mixed into the molten solder M1. Furthermore, in order to improve the followability of the molten solder M1, it is preferable to form irregularities that intersect the moving direction of the iron part 16h on the upper surface 16i and the lower surface 16j of the iron part 16h.
 図17、18に示す案内部16において、符号16aは第1の接触部であり、符号16fは第2の接触部である。第1の接触部16aは、コテ部16hの上面16iから突出した1対の突起体16bと16cとで構成されている。突起体16bと16cは、外周間隙kへ案内部16が挿入された状態で第1基板w3の主面S1に接触する第1の接触面16dを有し、そのX軸方向の長さは供給筒14の吐出面14fを基準としてL1であり、そのZ軸方向の高さは第1の間隙G1とほぼ同じ大きさである。 17 and 18, reference numeral 16a is a first contact portion, and reference numeral 16f is a second contact portion. The first contact portion 16a is composed of a pair of protrusions 16b and 16c protruding from the upper surface 16i of the iron portion 16h. The protrusions 16b and 16c have a first contact surface 16d that contacts the main surface S1 of the first substrate w3 in a state where the guide portion 16 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k, and the length in the X-axis direction is supplied. It is L1 on the basis of the discharge surface 14f of the cylinder 14, and the height in the Z-axis direction is substantially the same as the first gap G1.
 第2の接触部16fも上記第1の接触部16aと同様に、コテ部16hの下面16jから突出した一対の突起体16mと16lとで構成されている。各突起体16m、16lは、外周間隙kへ案内部16が挿入された状態で第2基板w4の主面S2に接触する第2の接触面16gを有し、上記第1の接触部16aと同様に長さがL1であり、その高さは第2の間隙G2とほぼ同じ大きさである。なお、第1の接触面16d及び第2の接触面16gは、後述するフローティング機構との関係から、案内部16の幅方向(案内部16の挿入方向と水平面内において直交する方向)に凸状の円筒面となるよう形成されている。 Similarly to the first contact portion 16a, the second contact portion 16f includes a pair of protrusions 16m and 16l protruding from the lower surface 16j of the iron portion 16h. Each of the protrusions 16m and 16l has a second contact surface 16g that contacts the main surface S2 of the second substrate w4 in a state where the guide portion 16 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k, and the first contact portion 16a and the first contact portion 16a. Similarly, the length is L1, and its height is almost the same size as the second gap G2. The first contact surface 16d and the second contact surface 16g are convex in the width direction of the guide portion 16 (the direction orthogonal to the insertion direction of the guide portion 16 in the horizontal plane) because of the relationship with the floating mechanism described later. The cylindrical surface is formed.
 上記構成の接触部16a、16fについて詳しく説明する。図18に示すように、接触部16aと16fが形成されている部分の案内部16の厚みは、コテ部16hの厚みT2に接触部16a及び16fの高さ(コテ部16hの上面16iから第1の接触面16dまでの高さ、コテ部16hの下面16jから第2の接触面16gまでの高さ)を加算した厚みT1である。そして、各ガラス基板の主面S1とS2に接触部16aと16fが各々接しつつ外周間隙kの中を摺動可能なように、その厚みT1は外周間隙kの寸法gと同等か僅かに小さな寸法である。そのため、案内部16が外周間隙kに挿入されると、接触面16dと16gは主面S1とS2に接し、案内部16は外周間隙kに嵌合された状態となる。
 また、第1の接触部16aの高さであるコテ部16hの上面16iから第1の接触面16dまでの高さは間隙G1と同一で、第2の接触部16fの高さであるコテ部16hの下面16jから第2の接触面16gまでの高さは間隙G2と同一である。その結果、コテ部16hを外周間隙kに挿入したとき、Z軸方向において、第1の間隙G1と第2の間隙G2が形成されるようにコテ部16hは位置決めされる。そして、外周間隙kへ溶融半田M1を供給するため未接合体W0の外周端面に沿い溶融半田供給部13を水平移動させると、接触部16aと16fが主面S1、S2と常時摺動しつつ案内部16は移動するので間隙G1とG2の大きさは常に一定に維持される。
The contact portions 16a and 16f configured as described above will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 18, the thickness of the guide portion 16 where the contact portions 16a and 16f are formed is equal to the thickness T2 of the iron portion 16h and the height of the contact portions 16a and 16f (from the upper surface 16i of the iron portion 16h). 1 to the contact surface 16d and the height from the lower surface 16j of the iron part 16h to the second contact surface 16g). The thickness T1 is equal to or slightly smaller than the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k so that the contact portions 16a and 16f are in contact with the main surfaces S1 and S2 of each glass substrate and can slide in the outer peripheral gap k. Dimensions. Therefore, when the guide portion 16 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k, the contact surfaces 16d and 16g are in contact with the main surfaces S1 and S2, and the guide portion 16 is fitted in the outer peripheral gap k.
Further, the height from the upper surface 16i of the iron part 16h, which is the height of the first contact part 16a, to the first contact surface 16d is the same as the gap G1, and the iron part is the height of the second contact part 16f. The height from the lower surface 16j of 16h to the second contact surface 16g is the same as the gap G2. As a result, when the iron part 16h is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k, the iron part 16h is positioned so that the first gap G1 and the second gap G2 are formed in the Z-axis direction. When the molten solder supply part 13 is moved horizontally along the outer peripheral end face of the unjoined body W0 in order to supply the molten solder M1 to the outer peripheral gap k, the contact parts 16a and 16f are always sliding with the main surfaces S1 and S2. Since the guide portion 16 moves, the sizes of the gaps G1 and G2 are always maintained constant.
 なお本例における第1の接触部16aと第2の接触部16fの高さ、つまり第1の間隙G1と第2の間隙G2の寸法は同一であるが、この寸法は溶融半田M1の特性に応じ適宜設定すればよく、両者の寸法が相違するよう構成してもよい。この場合には、供給された溶融半田M1は重力で流下するため、第1の間隙G1が第2の間隙G2より大きくなるようにする方が好ましい。 In addition, the height of the first contact portion 16a and the second contact portion 16f in this example, that is, the dimensions of the first gap G1 and the second gap G2 are the same, but this dimension depends on the characteristics of the molten solder M1. What is necessary is just to set suitably according to it, and you may comprise so that the dimension of both may differ. In this case, since the supplied molten solder M1 flows down by gravity, it is preferable to make the first gap G1 larger than the second gap G2.
 第1の接触面16d及び第2の接触面16gには、ガラス基板w3とw4との摺動性を高めるための処理であるNi撥水メッキ処理や表面の平滑化処理を施すことが好ましい。また、図14の案内部の変形例を図示した図19(a)に示すように、接触部16aと16fには案内部16の図示挿入方向Y1に沿いその中間部に各々凹部17cと17dを形成してもよい。かかる凹部17cと17dを接触部16aと16fに設けガラス基板w3とw4との接触面積を小さくして摺動抵抗を低減することで、溶融半田供給部13を円滑に移動させることができ、加えてガラス基板w3とw4の損傷をより抑制することができる。なお、必要な場合には各接触部16aと16fは主面S1とS2と点接触するよう構成してもよい。 The first contact surface 16d and the second contact surface 16g are preferably subjected to a Ni water repellent plating process or a surface smoothing process, which is a process for improving the slidability between the glass substrates w3 and w4. Further, as shown in FIG. 19A illustrating a modification of the guide portion of FIG. 14, the contact portions 16a and 16f are respectively provided with recesses 17c and 17d in the intermediate portion along the insertion direction Y1 of the guide portion 16 in the drawing. You may form. By providing the concave portions 17c and 17d in the contact portions 16a and 16f and reducing the sliding resistance by reducing the contact area between the glass substrates w3 and w4, the molten solder supply portion 13 can be moved smoothly. Thus, damage to the glass substrates w3 and w4 can be further suppressed. If necessary, the contact portions 16a and 16f may be configured to make point contact with the main surfaces S1 and S2.
 さらに、接触部16aと16fには、未接合体W0の外周間隙kへ挿入し易くするため、図17に示す挿入方向Y1において未接合体W0の外周端面との対面C1及び側面C2の角部にはC面又はR面を形成しておくことが好ましい。このC面やR面は、面C1及びC2の角部に切削加工、砥粒加工、エッチング等を施して形成することができる。 Further, in order to facilitate the insertion into the outer peripheral gap k of the unjoined body W0, the contact portions 16a and 16f are corners of the face C1 and the side face C2 facing the outer peripheral end surface of the unjoined body W0 in the insertion direction Y1 shown in FIG. It is preferable to form a C plane or an R plane. The C surface and the R surface can be formed by applying cutting, abrasive processing, etching, or the like to the corners of the surfaces C1 and C2.
 さらに、第2-2例の供給装置の説明で詳述するが、未接合体W0の外周間隙kの位置や大きさの変動に対応するため、接触部16aと16fはZ軸方向に一定量だけ撓むことができる弾性を有することが望ましい。 Furthermore, as will be described in detail in the description of the supply device of Example 2-2, the contact portions 16a and 16f have a certain amount in the Z-axis direction in order to cope with fluctuations in the position and size of the outer circumferential gap k of the unjoined body W0. It is desirable to have elasticity that can only bend.
 図17、18において符号16eはコテ部16hの上部に設けられた第1の案内溝、符号16kは下部に設けられた第2の案内溝である。案内溝16eと16kは、供給筒14の吐出口14bから吐出された溶融半田M1をコテ部16hに円滑に案内するため、案内部16の幅方向において接触部16aと16fの各突起体16bと16c及び16mと16lとの間に矩形溝状に形成されている。言い換えると、案内溝16eと16kは、接触部16aと16fの各々の中央を分断するように設けられており、案内溝16eと16kを介してコテ部16hと吐出口14bとを直結している。 17 and 18, reference numeral 16e is a first guide groove provided at the upper part of the iron part 16h, and reference numeral 16k is a second guide groove provided at the lower part. In order to smoothly guide the molten solder M1 discharged from the discharge port 14b of the supply cylinder 14 to the iron part 16h, the guide grooves 16e and 16k are provided with projections 16b of the contact parts 16a and 16f in the width direction of the guide part 16, A rectangular groove is formed between 16c and 16m and 16l. In other words, the guide grooves 16e and 16k are provided so as to divide the center of each of the contact portions 16a and 16f, and the iron portion 16h and the discharge port 14b are directly connected via the guide grooves 16e and 16k. .
 案内溝16eと16kの形態、すなわちその断面形状や幅と深さなどは溶融半田M1の流動性に合わせて適宜決めればよいが、溶融半田M1を円滑にコテ部16hへ案内するためには、案内溝16eの底面をコテ部16hの上面16iと、案内溝16kの底面をコテ部16hの下面16jとそれぞれ同一平面内に形成し、案内溝16eと16kとコテ部16hとの接続部分における段差が無いことが好ましい。さらに、案内溝16eと16kの内面にも溶融半田M1との濡れ性を高めるため、Cr、Al、Mo、W、V、Nb、Ta、Ag又はNiからなる層を設けることが好ましく、さらに溶融半田M1で溶食され溶融半田M1に不純物が混入しないように溶食防止処理としての窒化処理等を施すことが望ましい。 The shape of the guide grooves 16e and 16k, that is, the cross-sectional shape, width, depth, and the like may be determined as appropriate according to the fluidity of the molten solder M1, but in order to smoothly guide the molten solder M1 to the iron part 16h, The bottom surface of the guide groove 16e is formed in the same plane as the upper surface 16i of the iron portion 16h, and the bottom surface of the guide groove 16k is formed in the same plane as the lower surface 16j of the iron portion 16h, and the step at the connecting portion between the guide grooves 16e and 16k It is preferable that there is no. Further, it is preferable to provide a layer made of Cr, Al, Mo, W, V, Nb, Ta, Ag or Ni on the inner surfaces of the guide grooves 16e and 16k in order to improve wettability with the molten solder M1, and further melt It is desirable to perform a nitriding treatment or the like as an anti-corrosion treatment so that impurities are not mixed into the molten solder M1 after being eroded by the solder M1.
 さらに、案内溝の構成は図17、18の態様に限られることなく、図19(b)に示す案内部18のように、幅方向においてコテ部16hの中央部に接触部18aと18dを設け、吐出口14bから上面16iと下面16jに通じる上下各々2条の案内溝18bと18c及び18eと18fを接触部18aと18dの両側に配置した構成としてもよい。 Furthermore, the configuration of the guide groove is not limited to the embodiment shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, and contact portions 18a and 18d are provided at the center portion of the iron portion 16h in the width direction as in the guide portion 18 shown in FIG. 19B. The upper and lower guide grooves 18b and 18c and 18e and 18f communicating from the discharge port 14b to the upper surface 16i and the lower surface 16j may be arranged on both sides of the contact portions 18a and 18d.
 上記コテ部と接触部は一体構造としてもよいが、コテ部と接触部とは機能が相違しそれぞれに要求される特性が異なる。そこで、例えば図20に示す案内部19のように、溶融半田M1との濡れ性の高い材料でコテ部19fを、ガラス基板との摺動性に優れ磨耗し難い材料で接触部19aと19cを形成し、この別体のコテ部19fと接触部19a及び19cとを接着や螺止など適宜な方法で組み立てて案内部を構成することもできる。さらに、供給筒の吐出面にコテ部若しくは接触部を、又はそれらをいずれも一体的に形成してもよい。 The iron part and the contact part may have an integral structure, but the iron part and the contact part have different functions and different characteristics. Therefore, for example, as in the guide part 19 shown in FIG. 20, the iron part 19f is made of a material having high wettability with the molten solder M1, and the contact parts 19a and 19c are made of a material that is excellent in slidability with the glass substrate and hardly wears. It is also possible to form the guide part by forming and assembling the separate iron part 19f and the contact parts 19a and 19c by an appropriate method such as bonding or screwing. Furthermore, a soldering part or a contact part may be formed on the discharge surface of the supply cylinder, or they may be integrally formed.
 次に、好ましい構成として本例の供給装置11に組み込まれた支持部15について図14、15を参照して説明する。本例の支持部15は、供給筒14を介して間接的に案内部16を支持するとともに、Z軸方向(外周間隙kの厚み方向)及び供給筒14の軸心(案内部16の挿入軸)回りにのみに案内部16に作用する力に追従して案内部16を遥動させる(すなわち水平面内には移動しない)フローティング機構を構成している。その支持部15において、符号15gは供給筒14の右端面に接続された円柱形状の支持部材であり、その右端に小径部15iが、軸心方向において小径部15iに隣接し大径部15hが形成されている。その小径部15iは軸受部材15fに設けられた軸受15jで支持され、供給筒14の軸心回りに支持部材15gは回転自在となっている。また、図14の支持部材15gと軸受部材15fとを左側面から見た拡大断面図である図15に示すように、大径部15hは下方が切り欠かれた略扇形状をなしており、その大径部15hの切欠きと軸受部材15fの内面に設けられた突起部15lの両側面との間にコイル状の圧縮バネ15kが左右一対、圧縮状態で挿入されている。この一対の圧縮バネは、無負荷状態のときには案内部16が水平な姿勢となるよう調整されている。 Next, the support part 15 incorporated in the supply apparatus 11 of this example as a preferable structure will be described with reference to FIGS. The support portion 15 of this example indirectly supports the guide portion 16 via the supply tube 14, and also the Z-axis direction (thickness direction of the outer peripheral gap k) and the axis of the supply tube 14 (insertion axis of the guide portion 16). ) A floating mechanism is constructed that follows the force acting on the guide portion 16 only in the vicinity of the guide portion 16 and swings the guide portion 16 (that is, does not move in the horizontal plane). In the support portion 15, reference numeral 15 g is a columnar support member connected to the right end surface of the supply cylinder 14. The small diameter portion 15 i is adjacent to the right end, and the large diameter portion 15 h is adjacent to the small diameter portion 15 i in the axial direction. Is formed. The small diameter portion 15i is supported by a bearing 15j provided on the bearing member 15f, and the support member 15g is rotatable around the axis of the supply cylinder 14. Further, as shown in FIG. 15 which is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the support member 15g and the bearing member 15f of FIG. 14 as viewed from the left side, the large diameter portion 15h has a substantially fan shape with the lower part cut away. A pair of coiled compression springs 15k are inserted in a compressed state between the notch of the large diameter portion 15h and both side surfaces of the protrusion 15l provided on the inner surface of the bearing member 15f. The pair of compression springs are adjusted so that the guide portion 16 is in a horizontal posture when there is no load.
 符合15eは左側に開口したコの字状の移動部材であり、内側面に上記軸受部材15fが取り付けられている。符号15bは直線駆動部材としてのリニアガイドであり、移動部材15eの外側面に移動子が取り付けられ移動部材15eをZ軸方向にのみ移動させる。符号15aは移動部材15eより一回り大きな左側に開口したコの字状のケーシングであり、内側面にリニアガイド15bのレールが取り付けられており、さらにケーシング15aは移動手段11gの固定部材11kに位置決め固定されている(図16参照)。符号15cは、移動部材15eの上腕外面とケーシング15aの上腕内面との間及び移動部材15eの下腕外面とケーシング15aの下腕内面との間に圧縮した状態で組み込まれた一対の弾性部材であるコイル状の圧縮バネであり、符号15dは、ケーシング15aの上腕及び下腕に設けられた不図示の貫通孔及び圧縮バネ15cに一端部が遊動可能に挿通されているとともに移動部材15eの上腕及び下腕に他端部が固定され、圧縮バネ15cの径方向の移動を規制する規制軸である。 Reference numeral 15e is a U-shaped moving member opened on the left side, and the bearing member 15f is attached to the inner side surface. Reference numeral 15b is a linear guide as a linear drive member, and a moving element is attached to the outer surface of the moving member 15e to move the moving member 15e only in the Z-axis direction. Reference numeral 15a is a U-shaped casing that opens to the left that is slightly larger than the moving member 15e. A rail of the linear guide 15b is attached to the inner surface, and the casing 15a is positioned on the fixed member 11k of the moving means 11g. It is fixed (see FIG. 16). Reference numeral 15c is a pair of elastic members incorporated in a compressed state between the outer upper arm surface of the moving member 15e and the upper arm inner surface of the casing 15a and between the lower arm outer surface of the moving member 15e and the lower arm inner surface of the casing 15a. Reference numeral 15d denotes a coil-like compression spring. One end of the casing 15a is inserted into a through hole (not shown) provided in the upper arm and the lower arm of the casing 15a and the compression spring 15c so as to be freely movable, and the upper arm of the moving member 15e. The other end is fixed to the lower arm and is a regulating shaft that regulates the radial movement of the compression spring 15c.
 かかる構造の支持部15は次の動作をする。すなわち、図22に示すように、例えばガラス基板w3及びw4の組合精度の不備やテーブル移動部11cの走行精度の不備により未接合体W0の外周間隙kのZ軸に沿う位置が変動した場合には、ガラス基板w3とw4に接触する接触部16aと16fを介して供給筒14の軸心回り又はZ軸方向に沿う一定の力が案内部16に作用する。その供給筒14の軸心回りの力は、供給筒14を介して支持部材15gへ伝達される。支持部材15gは軸受部材15fにより回転方向のみに移動方向が規制されており、その大径部15hは一対の圧縮バネ15kで支持されているので、作用した力に応じ供給筒14の軸心回りにのみ移動する。また、案内部16に作用したZ軸方向の力は供給筒14などを介して移動部材15eに伝達される。移動部材15eはZ軸方向にのみ移動可能なよう直線移動部材15bで移動方向が規制されており、圧縮バネ15cで支持されているので、作用した力に応じZ軸方向にのみ移動する。 The support portion 15 having such a structure performs the following operation. That is, as shown in FIG. 22, for example, when the position along the Z axis of the outer peripheral gap k of the unjoined body W0 fluctuates due to inadequate combination accuracy of the glass substrates w3 and w4 and inadequate running accuracy of the table moving unit 11c. A constant force around the axis of the supply tube 14 or along the Z-axis direction acts on the guide portion 16 via the contact portions 16a and 16f that contact the glass substrates w3 and w4. The force around the axis of the supply cylinder 14 is transmitted to the support member 15g via the supply cylinder 14. The support member 15g is restricted in the direction of movement only in the rotational direction by the bearing member 15f, and the large-diameter portion 15h is supported by a pair of compression springs 15k. Move only to. Further, the Z-axis direction force acting on the guide portion 16 is transmitted to the moving member 15e via the supply cylinder 14 and the like. Since the moving direction of the moving member 15e is restricted by the linear moving member 15b so as to be movable only in the Z-axis direction and is supported by the compression spring 15c, the moving member 15e moves only in the Z-axis direction according to the applied force.
[移動手段]
 図16に示すように、移動手段11gは、門型の支持体11h、支持体11hの上辺部に固定された昇降部11iとから構成され、昇降部11iの底部には図示Z軸方向に昇降しかつθ軸方向に旋回する昇降軸11jが設けられている。そして、上記したように糸半田案内部11f及び溶融半田供給部13は固定部材11kを介して昇降軸11jの下端部に接続されている。
[transportation]
As shown in FIG. 16, the moving means 11g is composed of a gate-shaped support 11h and an elevating part 11i fixed to the upper side of the support 11h, and is moved up and down in the Z-axis direction in the figure at the bottom of the elevating part 11i. In addition, a lifting shaft 11j that turns in the θ-axis direction is provided. As described above, the thread solder guide portion 11f and the molten solder supply portion 13 are connected to the lower end portion of the lifting shaft 11j via the fixing member 11k.
[制御手段]
 図16に示すように、制御手段11oは、電気通信回線11pを介して供給装置11の上記各構成要素と接続された制御部11qで構成されており、各構成要素の動作を制御する。具体的には、制御部11qはコンピュータで構成されており、その記憶部(メモリー)に格納されたプログラム及び各種のデータを演算部(CPU)が読み出し適宜演算することにより、糸半田送出部11eに組み込まれたモータに指令して糸半田Mの供給量を制御し、加熱制御手段12aに指令して加熱部材14dの発熱温度を制御し、超音波発振部12bに指令してコテ部16hに印加する超音波の出力や印加パターンを制御し、移動手段11gを構成する昇降部11i及びテーブル移動部11cに指令してその移動経路や移動速度を制御するよう構成されている。
[Control means]
As shown in FIG. 16, the control means 11o is comprised by the control part 11q connected with each said component of the supply apparatus 11 via the telecommunication line 11p, and controls operation | movement of each component. Specifically, the control unit 11q is configured by a computer, and the calculation unit (CPU) reads out the program and various data stored in the storage unit (memory) and appropriately calculates them, whereby the yarn solder sending unit 11e. To control the supply amount of the thread solder M by instructing the motor incorporated in the motor, to instruct the heating control means 12a to control the heat generation temperature of the heating member 14d, to instruct the ultrasonic oscillator 12b to the iron part 16h It is configured to control the output and application pattern of ultrasonic waves to be applied, and to instruct the elevating unit 11i and the table moving unit 11c constituting the moving unit 11g to control the moving path and moving speed.
[気密室]
 図16に示すように、気密室11lは、供給装置11の上記各構成要素を内包する気密空間11nを形成する筐体11mとで構成されている。
[Airtight room]
As shown in FIG. 16, the hermetic chamber 11 l is configured with a housing 11 m that forms a hermetic space 11 n that encloses the above-described components of the supply device 11.
[雰囲気制御手段]
 図16に示すように、雰囲気制御手段11rは、供給ポンプを備え収納された所定のガスを所定圧力で供給可能なガス供給部11tと、気密室11lの気密空間11nを真空状態とする真空ポンプ11uと、ガス供給部11tと真空ポンプ11uとを気密空間11nに接続する配管11sとで構成されており、気密空間11nを所定の雰囲気に制御する。ここで、ガス供給部11tには、ガラスパネルの用途等に応じて適用する複数種のガス、例えば不活性ガスであるアルゴンガス、窒素ガス、還元性ガスである水素ガス、一酸化炭素ガス、酸化性ガスである酸素ガスを分離して収納することが可能であり、更にガス供給部11tに備える混合弁によりこれらのガスを所定割合で混合して気密空間11nに供給することもできる。
[Atmosphere control means]
As shown in FIG. 16, the atmosphere control means 11r includes a supply pump and a gas supply unit 11t capable of supplying a predetermined gas stored therein at a predetermined pressure, and a vacuum pump that vacuums the airtight space 11n of the airtight chamber 11l. 11u, a gas supply unit 11t, and a vacuum pump 11u are connected to the airtight space 11n. The airtight space 11n is controlled to a predetermined atmosphere. Here, in the gas supply unit 11t, a plurality of kinds of gases applied according to the use of the glass panel, for example, argon gas as an inert gas, nitrogen gas, hydrogen gas as a reducing gas, carbon monoxide gas, Oxygen gas, which is an oxidizing gas, can be separated and stored, and these gases can be mixed at a predetermined ratio and supplied to the airtight space 11n by a mixing valve provided in the gas supply unit 11t.
 上記構成の供給装置11の動作を以下説明する。まず、準備工程である。図16に示すように、間隙保持部材Qにより所定の間隙を介して主面S1とS2が対向した状態の未接合体W0を水平な姿勢でテーブル11bの上の所定の位置に載置する。次いで供給装置11を起動させると、供給装置11は気密空間11nを気密にして、真空ポンプ11uで空気を排気して気密空間11nの内部を真空状態とする。その後、供給装置11は、所定の割合で酸素を含むガスをガス供給部11tから気密空間11nへ供給し、易酸化元素を含むSnAgAl系半田からなる溶融半田M1がガラス基板w3とw4に接合し易い雰囲気とする。また、供給装置11はテーブル11bに内蔵された発熱体を発熱させて、溶融半田M1の溶融温度程度に未接合体W0を加熱し、さらに、溶融半田M1へ印加すべき超音波をコテ部16hに伝達するため超音波発振部12bを発振させる。 The operation of the supply device 11 having the above configuration will be described below. First, it is a preparation process. As shown in FIG. 16, the unjoined body W0 in which the main surfaces S1 and S2 are opposed to each other through a predetermined gap by the gap holding member Q is placed at a predetermined position on the table 11b in a horizontal posture. Next, when the supply device 11 is activated, the supply device 11 makes the airtight space 11n airtight and exhausts the air with the vacuum pump 11u to bring the inside of the airtight space 11n into a vacuum state. Thereafter, the supply device 11 supplies a gas containing oxygen at a predetermined ratio from the gas supply unit 11t to the airtight space 11n, and the molten solder M1 made of SnAgAl-based solder containing an easily oxidizable element is joined to the glass substrates w3 and w4. Easy atmosphere. Further, the supply device 11 generates heat from the heating element built in the table 11b, heats the unbonded body W0 to about the melting temperature of the molten solder M1, and further applies ultrasonic waves to be applied to the molten solder M1 to the iron part 16h. The ultrasonic oscillator 12b is oscillated to transmit to
 次に、供給筒の位置決め工程である。供給装置11は、昇降部11iで昇降軸11jを下降させ更に必要な場合には旋回させ、溶融半田供給部13を所定の位置に位置決めする。この溶融半田供給部13が位置決めされた時、図14に示すように、溶融半田供給部13は、Z軸方向においてはその案内部16のコテ部16hが未接合体W0の外周間隙kに挿入可能な位置に、θ軸方向においてはその供給筒14の吐出面14fと未接合体W0の外周端面とが平行となる位置に、配置されている。次いで、供給装置11は、供給筒14の吐出面14fと未接合体W0の外周端面とがごく僅かな隙間を介して対向する状態となるよう、テーブル移動部11cを水平移動させて未接合体W0を所定位置に位置決めする。この未接合体W0が水平面内で位置決めされる過程で未接合体W0の外周間隙kに案内部16は挿入されるが、案内部16の接触部16aと16fの角部には上記のようにC面やR面が形成されているので接触部16aと16fは円滑に外周間隙kに挿入される。しかも、案内部16はフローティング機構である支持部15で支持されているので、例えばZ軸方向における外周間隙kと案内部16との中心が相違している場合でも、その相違に追従して上下動し接触部16aと16fは外周間隙kに挿入される。そして、上記未接合体W0の位置決め動作が完了すると、接触部16aと16fはガラス基板w3とw4の各々の主面S1とS2といずれも接触するため案内部16は外周間隙kに嵌合された状態となり、Z軸方向において外周間隙kのほぼ中央にコテ部16hは位置決めされ、ガラス基板w3とw4とコテ部16hの間に間隙G1とG2が形成される。 Next is the supply cylinder positioning process. The supply device 11 lowers the lifting shaft 11j by the lifting and lowering portion 11i and further turns it when necessary to position the molten solder supply portion 13 at a predetermined position. When the molten solder supply portion 13 is positioned, as shown in FIG. 14, the molten solder supply portion 13 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k of the unjoined body W0 in the Z-axis direction. In a possible position, in the θ-axis direction, the discharge surface 14f of the supply tube 14 and the outer peripheral end surface of the unjoined body W0 are arranged in parallel. Next, the supply device 11 horizontally moves the table moving unit 11c so that the discharge surface 14f of the supply cylinder 14 and the outer peripheral end surface of the unjoined body W0 are opposed to each other with a very small gap. Position W0 at a predetermined position. In the process in which the unjoined body W0 is positioned in the horizontal plane, the guide portion 16 is inserted into the outer circumferential gap k of the unjoined body W0. However, the corners of the contact portions 16a and 16f of the guide portion 16 are as described above. Since the C surface and the R surface are formed, the contact portions 16a and 16f are smoothly inserted into the outer peripheral gap k. In addition, since the guide portion 16 is supported by the support portion 15 that is a floating mechanism, for example, even if the center of the outer peripheral gap k and the guide portion 16 in the Z-axis direction is different, the difference follows the difference. The moving contact portions 16a and 16f are inserted into the outer peripheral gap k. When the positioning operation of the unjoined body W0 is completed, the contact portions 16a and 16f come into contact with the main surfaces S1 and S2 of the glass substrates w3 and w4, respectively, and therefore the guide portion 16 is fitted into the outer peripheral gap k. In this state, the iron part 16h is positioned substantially at the center of the outer circumferential gap k in the Z-axis direction, and gaps G1 and G2 are formed between the glass substrates w3 and w4 and the iron part 16h.
 次いで、溶融半田の供給工程である。供給装置11は、図16に示す糸半田送出部11eのモータを駆動し、糸半田案内部11fの下端から糸半田Mを繰り出す。繰り出された糸半田Mは、図14に示すように、糸半田Mの溶融温度以上に加熱部材14dで加熱された供給筒14の溶融面14eに当接し溶融半田M1が形成される。ここで、溶融面14eに開口した流入口14aの直径ΦBは糸半田Mの直径ΦAより小さいので、糸半田Mの外周面に酸化物が生成していても、その酸化物は流入口14aの外周縁部すなわち溶融面14eにより分離され除去される。その結果、酸化物の流路14cへの混入は阻止され、酸化物がほとんど混入しない清浄な溶融半田M1が流路14cへ流入する。以後、供給装置11は、充填作業が完了するまで一定の速度で連続的に糸半田Mを送り出し、流路14cへ溶融半田M1を供給する。なお、大気中で保管された糸半田Mの表面に生成している酸化物層の厚さは通常数十μm程度であるので、糸半田Mと流入口14aの直径の差(ΦA-ΦB)は1mm前後としておけば十分である。 Next, a molten solder supply process. The supply device 11 drives the motor of the thread solder delivery part 11e shown in FIG. 16, and feeds the thread solder M from the lower end of the thread solder guide part 11f. As shown in FIG. 14, the unwound yarn solder M is brought into contact with the melting surface 14e of the supply cylinder 14 heated by the heating member 14d at a temperature equal to or higher than the melting temperature of the yarn solder M, thereby forming a molten solder M1. Here, since the diameter ΦB of the inlet 14a opened to the melt surface 14e is smaller than the diameter ΦA of the thread solder M, even if oxide is generated on the outer peripheral surface of the thread solder M, the oxide is not in the inlet 14a. It is separated and removed by the outer peripheral edge, that is, the melting surface 14e. As a result, mixing of the oxide into the flow path 14c is prevented, and clean molten solder M1 in which almost no oxide is mixed flows into the flow path 14c. Thereafter, the supply device 11 continuously sends out the thread solder M at a constant speed until the filling operation is completed, and supplies the molten solder M1 to the flow path 14c. Since the thickness of the oxide layer formed on the surface of the thread solder M stored in the atmosphere is usually about several tens of μm, the difference in diameter between the thread solder M and the inlet 14a (ΦA−ΦB) Is sufficient if it is about 1 mm.
 上記供給工程において溶融面14eで除去された酸化物は堰14gにより流動が制限されながら流入口14aの周囲に堆積した後、後続の酸化物により押し流されて供給筒14の下面に達し、そこで図示しない回収手段により回収される。 The oxide removed at the melting surface 14e in the supply step is deposited around the inlet 14a while being restricted in flow by the weir 14g, and then swept away by the subsequent oxide to reach the lower surface of the supply cylinder 14, where It is collected by the collecting means that does not.
 上記したように流路14cに流入した溶融半田M1は吐出口14bから吐出され、図18に示すように案内部16の上下の案内溝16eと16kを流動して第1の間隙G1と第2の間隙G2に導入される。ここで、供給筒14から供給される溶融半田M1は、ガラス基板w3とW4及び吐出面14fでほぼ密閉され酸素に触れない状態で案内溝16eと16kを通過し、間隙G1とG2に供給される。もって、溶融半田M1の表面の酸化が抑制された状態でガラス基板w3とw4の主面S1とS2に塗り込まれるので、ガラスパネルにおける封止品質を高めることができる。 As described above, the molten solder M1 flowing into the flow path 14c is discharged from the discharge port 14b and flows in the upper and lower guide grooves 16e and 16k of the guide portion 16 as shown in FIG. Is introduced into the gap G2. Here, the molten solder M1 supplied from the supply cylinder 14 passes through the guide grooves 16e and 16k in a state of being substantially sealed by the glass substrates w3 and W4 and the discharge surface 14f and not touching oxygen, and is supplied to the gaps G1 and G2. The Accordingly, since the main surfaces S1 and S2 of the glass substrates w3 and w4 are coated in a state where the oxidation of the surface of the molten solder M1 is suppressed, the sealing quality in the glass panel can be improved.
 そして、供給装置11は、図16に示すように、上記溶融半田供給部13と未接合体W0との水平方向の位置関係を維持しつつ未接合体W0の外周縁の周りを矩形枠状に案内部16が一周するよう、テーブル移動部11cをX軸又はY軸方向に一定の速度で走行させて未接合体W0を水平移動する。すると、間隙G1とG2に供給された溶融半田M1はガラス基板w3とw4の各々の主面S1とS2に濡れ、さらに塗り込まれつつ案内部16の長さL2の幅で外周間隙kに充填されていく。なお、未接合体W0の四隅部では、供給装置11は、図16の部分拡大平面図である図21に示すように、テーブル移動部11cによる未接合体W0のXとY軸方向の移動制御と昇降軸11jによる溶融半田供給部13のθ軸方向の移動制御を組み合わせ、円弧状の経路で案内部16を水平移動させ、四隅部の外周間隙kに溶融半田M1を充填する。 Then, as shown in FIG. 16, the supply device 11 forms a rectangular frame around the outer peripheral edge of the unjoined body W0 while maintaining the horizontal positional relationship between the molten solder supply section 13 and the unjoined body W0. The table moving unit 11c is caused to travel at a constant speed in the X-axis or Y-axis direction so that the guide unit 16 goes around, thereby moving the unjoined body W0 horizontally. Then, the molten solder M1 supplied to the gaps G1 and G2 wets the main surfaces S1 and S2 of the glass substrates w3 and w4 and fills the outer peripheral gap k with the width of the length L2 of the guide portion 16 while being applied. It will be done. At the four corners of the unjoined body W0, the supply device 11 controls the movement of the unjoined body W0 in the X and Y axis directions by the table moving portion 11c, as shown in FIG. 21, which is a partially enlarged plan view of FIG. And the movement control in the θ-axis direction of the molten solder supply unit 13 by the elevating shaft 11j are combined, the guide unit 16 is horizontally moved along an arcuate path, and the outer peripheral gap k at the four corners is filled with the molten solder M1.
 ここで上記供給工程において案内部16が水平移動する間、図18に示すように、接触部16aと16fは各々常にガラス基板w3とw4の主面S1とS2と接触した状態であり、Z軸方向におけるコテ部16hの移動は接触部16aと16fにより規制されている。その結果、コテ部16hがガラス基板w3とw4に接触することはなく、その主面S1とS2に接合部nとの接合性を阻害するような損傷が生じることがない。さらに、溶融半田M1をガラス基板w3とw4へ良好に塗り込むための一つの要素であるガラス基板w3及びw4とコテ部16hとの間の間隙G1とG2の大きさは、その間隙G1とG2に応じた高さでコテ部16hから突起させた接触部16aと16fにより供給工程の間は維持される。その結果、接合部nとガラス基板w3及びw4との接合強度の均一化を図ることができる。 Here, while the guide part 16 moves horizontally in the supply step, the contact parts 16a and 16f are always in contact with the main surfaces S1 and S2 of the glass substrates w3 and w4 as shown in FIG. The movement of the iron part 16h in the direction is regulated by the contact parts 16a and 16f. As a result, the iron part 16h does not come into contact with the glass substrates w3 and w4, and the main surfaces S1 and S2 are not damaged so as to hinder the bonding property with the bonding part n. Furthermore, the sizes of the gaps G1 and G2 between the glass substrates w3 and w4 and the iron part 16h, which are one element for satisfactorily applying the molten solder M1 to the glass substrates w3 and w4, are the gaps G1 and G2. The contact portions 16a and 16f projected from the iron portion 16h at a height corresponding to the height are maintained during the supplying process. As a result, the bonding strength between the bonding portion n and the glass substrates w3 and w4 can be made uniform.
 加えて、案内部16はフローティング機構である支持部15で支持されているので、図22(a)に示すような未接合体W0の外周間隙kにうねりがある場合や、同図(b)に示すようにテーブル移動部11cの走行経路が外周間隙kに対し角度ρだけ傾いている場合などでも、未接合体W0の移動に際して生じる外周間隙kの上下位置変動に追従して案内部16は上下動する。その結果、案内部16とガラス基板w3とw4との間隙G1とG2は一定に維持される。 In addition, since the guide portion 16 is supported by the support portion 15 which is a floating mechanism, there is a case where the outer peripheral gap k of the unjoined body W0 as shown in FIG. Even when the travel route of the table moving part 11c is inclined by an angle ρ with respect to the outer peripheral gap k as shown in FIG. Move up and down. As a result, the gaps G1 and G2 between the guide portion 16 and the glass substrates w3 and w4 are kept constant.
 さらに、図14に示すように、案内部16を介して間隙G1とG2に満たされた溶融金属M1とガラス基板w3とw4の接触界面に超音波を印加しているので、ガラス基板w3とw4と溶融半田M1との濡れ性が高まり、狭小な間隙G1とG2に溶融半田M1が充分に供給される。さらに、接触界面に存在する気泡や酸化膜等の異物が超音波振動により除去されるので、製品としてのガラスパネルの接合部とガラス基板との接合強度を高めることができる。 Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, since ultrasonic waves are applied to the contact interface between the molten metal M1 filled in the gaps G1 and G2 and the glass substrates w3 and w4 via the guide portion 16, the glass substrates w3 and w4 are applied. As a result, the wettability with the molten solder M1 increases, and the molten solder M1 is sufficiently supplied to the narrow gaps G1 and G2. Furthermore, since foreign substances such as bubbles and oxide films present at the contact interface are removed by ultrasonic vibration, the bonding strength between the bonded portion of the glass panel as the product and the glass substrate can be increased.
 上記供給工程が完了し、未接合体W0の四辺全ての外周間隙kに溶融半田M1が充填された後、充填された溶融半田M1を冷却し固化する溶融半田の冷却工程を経て接合部が形成され、ガラス基板w3とw4が接合され、ガラスパネルWが形成される。この冷却工程は、図16に示すテーブル11bに未接合体W0を載置したまま加熱体の発熱を停止することで行ってもよいし、テーブル11bから未接合体W0を取り外して別所で行ってもよい。なお、ガラスパネル製造の自動化のためには、例えばテーブル11bをテーブル移動部11cから着脱自在な構造とし、供給工程の毎に未接合体W0が載置されたテーブル11b自体を取り替え可能な構成とすることが望ましい。 After the above supply process is completed and all the outer peripheral gaps k of the unjoined body W0 are filled with the molten solder M1, the joint is formed through a molten solder cooling process for cooling and solidifying the filled molten solder M1. Then, the glass substrates w3 and w4 are joined to form the glass panel W. This cooling step may be performed by stopping the heat generation of the heating body while the unjoined body W0 is placed on the table 11b shown in FIG. 16, or the unjoined body W0 is removed from the table 11b and performed separately. Also good. In order to automate the manufacturing of the glass panel, for example, the table 11b is structured so as to be detachable from the table moving unit 11c, and the table 11b itself on which the unjoined body W0 is placed can be replaced at every supply process It is desirable to do.
 上記の供給装置11では、図17、18に示すように案内部16の挿入方向Y1においてコテ部16hの後端側に接触部16aと16fを設けた例を説明した。この例の案内部16は、例えば平面型画像表示装置に組み込まれる配線パターンが接合部よりも内側に形成されるガラスパネルのように、配線パターンの保護のため接合部の外側で接触部を摺動させる必要があるときに好適な構成である。一方で、ガラス基板w3とw4において接触部16aと16fとの摺動部分に存する接合部の接合性は、接触部16aと16fとの摺動により非摺動部分に比べ劣るため、摺動部分に存する接合部はいわば駄肉となり接合部の幅が比較的広くならざるを得ない。
 そこで、比較的狭幅の接合部を形成する必要がある場合には、図23に示す例の案内部20を用いることが好ましい。図23に示す案内部20では、案内部20の挿入方向Y1において接触部20aと20cはコテ部20eの先端に配置されている。なお、この例では、供給筒14の吐出口14bから吐出される溶融半田M1は直接コテ部20eへ供給されるため案内溝は設けられていない。この案内部20によれば、上記案内部16と同様にコテ部20eはガラス基板w3とw4に接触せず、供給された溶融半田M1はコテ部20eの上面及び下面を濡れ広がりガラス基板との間の間隙に充填されるが、その溶融半田M1の濡れ広がりは接触部20aと20cで規制されるため、未接合体の外縁から比較的狭幅で溶融半田を充填することができる。また、溶融半田の濡れ広がりを接触部20aと20cで規制することで、未接合体の外縁に沿いほぼ一定の幅で外周間隙に溶融半田を充填することができる。
In the supply device 11 described above, an example in which the contact portions 16a and 16f are provided on the rear end side of the iron portion 16h in the insertion direction Y1 of the guide portion 16 as illustrated in FIGS. In this example, the guide portion 16 slides the contact portion outside the joint portion for protection of the wiring pattern, such as a glass panel in which the wiring pattern incorporated in the flat image display device is formed inside the joint portion. This is a suitable configuration when it is necessary to move it. On the other hand, in the glass substrates w3 and w4, the jointability of the joint portion existing in the sliding portion between the contact portions 16a and 16f is inferior to the non-sliding portion due to the sliding between the contact portions 16a and 16f. In other words, the joints that exist in the region become wasteful and the width of the joints must be relatively wide.
Therefore, when it is necessary to form a relatively narrow joint portion, it is preferable to use the guide portion 20 shown in FIG. In the guide part 20 shown in FIG. 23, the contact parts 20a and 20c are arranged at the tip of the iron part 20e in the insertion direction Y1 of the guide part 20. In this example, since the molten solder M1 discharged from the discharge port 14b of the supply cylinder 14 is directly supplied to the iron part 20e, no guide groove is provided. According to this guide part 20, like the guide part 16, the iron part 20e does not contact the glass substrates w3 and w4, and the supplied molten solder M1 wets and spreads the upper and lower surfaces of the iron part 20e. Although the gap between the molten solders M1 is filled by the contact portions 20a and 20c, the molten solder M1 can be filled with a relatively narrow width from the outer edge of the unjoined body. In addition, by regulating the wetting and spreading of the molten solder by the contact portions 20a and 20c, the molten solder can be filled in the outer peripheral gap with a substantially constant width along the outer edge of the unjoined body.
 さらに、上記例の供給装置11では、図17、18に示すように、案内部16が外周間隙kへ挿入されたときには、第1基板w3の主面S1に第1の接触部16aを、第2基板w4の主面S2に第2の接触部16fを双方とも同時に接触させる構成としたが、図24に示す案内部21のように、接触部21aと21bは常に主面S1とS2と接触しておらず、必要な場合にガラス基板w3とw4に接触するよう構成してもよい。すなわち、案内部21は、基本的な構造は案内部16と同様であり、コテ部16hと、コテ部16hの上面から突起した第1の接触部21aと、コテ部16hの下面から突起した第2の接触部21bを有するが、図24(a)に示すように、接触部21aと21bの部分における案内部21の部分の厚みT1は外周間隙kの寸法g未満である。したがって、この案内部21が外周間隙kへ挿入されたとき、第1の接触部21aは第1基板w3の主面S1と第1の空隙を介して対向し、同様に第2の接触部21bは第2基板w4の主面S2と第2の空隙を介して対向し、案内部21が挿入された時点では接触部21aと21bは主面S1とS2に接触しない。かかる案内部21によれば、図24(b)に示すように、溶融金属の供給工程中、Z軸に沿い図示矢印Z1方向に相対的に案内部21の位置が変動した場合であっても、接触部21aと21bの規制によりガラス基板w3とw4にコテ部16hが触れることがなく、ガラス基板w3とw4の損傷を防止して接合部の接合品質を高めることができる。 Furthermore, in the supply device 11 of the above example, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the guide portion 16 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k, the first contact portion 16a is disposed on the main surface S1 of the first substrate w3. Although both the second contact portions 16f are in contact with the main surface S2 of the two substrates w4 simultaneously, the contact portions 21a and 21b are always in contact with the main surfaces S1 and S2 as in the guide portion 21 shown in FIG. However, it may be configured to contact the glass substrates w3 and w4 when necessary. In other words, the basic structure of the guide portion 21 is the same as that of the guide portion 16; the iron portion 16h, the first contact portion 21a protruding from the upper surface of the iron portion 16h, and the first protrusion protruding from the lower surface of the iron portion 16h. As shown in FIG. 24A, the thickness T1 of the guide portion 21 in the contact portions 21a and 21b is less than the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k. Therefore, when the guide portion 21 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k, the first contact portion 21a faces the main surface S1 of the first substrate w3 via the first gap, and similarly the second contact portion 21b. Faces the main surface S2 of the second substrate w4 via the second gap, and the contact portions 21a and 21b do not contact the main surfaces S1 and S2 when the guide portion 21 is inserted. According to the guide portion 21, as shown in FIG. 24B, even when the position of the guide portion 21 is relatively changed along the Z axis in the direction of the arrow Z1 during the molten metal supply process. Since the iron parts 16h do not touch the glass substrates w3 and w4 due to the regulation of the contact parts 21a and 21b, the glass substrates w3 and w4 can be prevented from being damaged and the joining quality of the joining parts can be improved.
 なお、上記支持部に組み込んだフローティング機構は必ずしも必要でなく、また案内部の接触部に形成した各々の接触面を平坦面にしても構わず、さらにコテ部の一方の面のみに1個だけ接触部を形成しても構わない。かかる構成であっても、未接合体の外周間隙の寸法精度が高い場合やテーブル移動部の走行精度が高い場合など所定の場合には、ガラス基板の主面とコテ部との接触を回避するという接触部の奏する作用によりガラス基板の損傷を防止せしめ、もってガラスパネルにおいて接合部との封止性を高めるという効果を発揮することができる。 Note that the floating mechanism incorporated in the support portion is not necessarily required, and each contact surface formed on the contact portion of the guide portion may be a flat surface, and only one on one surface of the iron portion. A contact portion may be formed. Even in such a configuration, in a predetermined case such as when the dimensional accuracy of the outer peripheral gap of the unjoined body is high or when the traveling accuracy of the table moving unit is high, contact between the main surface of the glass substrate and the iron portion is avoided. The action exerted by the contact portion can prevent the glass substrate from being damaged, and thus can exhibit the effect of enhancing the sealing performance with the joint portion in the glass panel.
[第2-2例]
 本発明の第2-2例に係わる溶融金属の供給筒及びその供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置について図25及び図26を参照して説明する。なお、第2-2例の供給装置は基本的に図16を参照して説明した供給装置11と同様に構成されており、溶融半田供給部のみが相違するので、図25、26ともに溶融半田供給部に関連する部分のみを図示し、他の構成要素の図示は省略している。また、供給装置11と同一の構成要素については同一符号を付しており、その構造及び動作の詳細な説明は省略する。
[Example 2-2]
A molten metal supply cylinder and a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder according to Example 2-2 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. The supply device of Example 2-2 is basically configured in the same manner as the supply device 11 described with reference to FIG. 16, and only the molten solder supply unit is different. Only the portion related to the supply unit is shown, and the other components are not shown. Moreover, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the component same as the supply apparatus 11, and the detailed description of the structure and operation | movement is abbreviate | omitted.
 第2-2例の供給装置の溶融半田供給部22は、図25に示すように、供給筒14とほぼ同様な構成の供給筒23と、フローティング機構を構成しない単なる支持部に繋がる支持部材22dの先端に設けられた案内部22aとを有し、図示矢印X1で示す供給工程における溶融半田供給部22の移動方向において、供給筒23は案内部22aの前方に案内部22aとは分離された状態で配置されている。この供給筒23の先端部には、未接合体W0の外周間隙kに挿入可能な外径の供給管23aが設けられており、移動方向において案内部22aの前方の外周間隙kへ溶融半田M1を供給する。この供給管23aは複数本配置してもよいし、楕円形断面や矩形断面の供給管を用いてもよい。供給管23aの挿入深さは形成すべき接合部の幅に応じて決めればよいが、特に広幅の接合部を形成する場合には複数本の供給管を各々挿入深さを変えるよう構成すれば有効である。更に、供給管23aは、接触した場合にガラス基板w3とw4を損傷させないよう、例えば表面を樹脂で被覆したり軟質な材料で構成することが望ましい。 As shown in FIG. 25, the molten solder supply unit 22 of the supply device of Example 2-2 includes a supply cylinder 23 having substantially the same configuration as the supply cylinder 14 and a support member 22d connected to a simple support portion that does not constitute a floating mechanism. The guide tube 22 is separated from the guide portion 22a in front of the guide portion 22a in the moving direction of the molten solder supply portion 22 in the supply step indicated by the arrow X1 in the drawing. Arranged in a state. An outer diameter supply pipe 23a that can be inserted into the outer peripheral gap k of the unjoined body W0 is provided at the distal end of the supply cylinder 23, and the molten solder M1 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k in front of the guide portion 22a in the moving direction. Supply. A plurality of supply pipes 23a may be arranged, or a supply pipe having an elliptical cross section or a rectangular cross section may be used. The insertion depth of the supply pipe 23a may be determined in accordance with the width of the joint portion to be formed. Particularly when a wide joint portion is formed, a plurality of supply pipes may be configured to change the insertion depth. It is valid. Furthermore, it is desirable that the supply pipe 23a is made of a soft material or coated with a resin, for example, so as not to damage the glass substrates w3 and w4 when contacted.
 本例の案内部22aは、第2-1例の供給装置のようなフローティング機構に替えて、外周間隙kの厚み方向であるZ軸方向又は供給筒23の軸心回りにそれ自身が撓むことが出来る弾性を有する構成となっている。具体的には、案内部22aは、図25に示すように上下の接触部22bと22cを弾性のある金属や樹脂その他の弾性部材で形成し、接触部22bと22cに撓み性を具備させることで外周間隙kの位置が変動した場合でも接触部22bと22cが撓んで追従可能なよう構成されている。なお、接触部22bと22cの全体を弾性部材で構成せず、例えば接触部22bと22cのガラス基板w3とw4の各主面S1とS2との接触面に弾性層を設けてもよい。かかる構成は、供給装置の構造が簡素化できるという利点があり、未接合体W0の外周間隙kのZ軸方向における位置の変動が比較的少ない場合に特に有利である。 The guide portion 22a in this example is bent in the Z-axis direction which is the thickness direction of the outer peripheral gap k or around the axis of the supply cylinder 23 instead of the floating mechanism like the supply device in the 2-1 example. It has a configuration that can be elastic. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25, the guide portion 22a has upper and lower contact portions 22b and 22c formed of elastic metal, resin, or other elastic members, and the contact portions 22b and 22c have flexibility. Thus, even when the position of the outer peripheral gap k varies, the contact portions 22b and 22c are configured to be able to bend and follow. Note that the entire contact portions 22b and 22c are not formed of an elastic member, and for example, an elastic layer may be provided on the contact surfaces of the main surfaces S1 and S2 of the glass substrates w3 and w4 of the contact portions 22b and 22c. Such a configuration has an advantage that the structure of the supply device can be simplified, and is particularly advantageous when the position variation in the Z-axis direction of the outer circumferential gap k of the unjoined body W0 is relatively small.
 図26(a)に示す案内部22eは上記案内部22aの第1の変形例である。案内部22eは、挿入方向Y1において案内部22eの後方であって接触部16aと16fの表面に重ねて形成された弾性層22fと22gを有し、先端が割られた支持部材22dで上下から弾性層22fと22gを挟持し支持する構造となっている。そして、溶融半田の供給工程において、案内部22eは、その弾性層22fと22gが形成されていない露出した接触部16aと16fの接触面はガラス基板w3とw4と接触するものの弾性層22fと22gは直接接触しない。したがって、弾性層22fと22gにより上記と同様に外周間隙kの位置の変動に対応でき、更に接触部16aと16fと弾性層22fと22gの各々の機能を果たすために適する別個の部材で構成することができるという利点もある。 A guide portion 22e shown in FIG. 26A is a first modification of the guide portion 22a. The guide portion 22e has elastic layers 22f and 22g formed on the surfaces of the contact portions 16a and 16f behind the guide portion 22e in the insertion direction Y1, and is supported from above and below by a support member 22d whose tip is cracked. The elastic layers 22f and 22g are sandwiched and supported. Then, in the molten solder supplying process, the guide portion 22e has the elastic layers 22f and 22g of which the contact surfaces of the exposed contact portions 16a and 16f where the elastic layers 22f and 22g are not formed are in contact with the glass substrates w3 and w4. Do not touch directly. Accordingly, the elastic layers 22f and 22g can cope with the fluctuations in the position of the outer peripheral gap k in the same manner as described above, and are configured by separate members suitable for performing the functions of the contact portions 16a and 16f and the elastic layers 22f and 22g. There is also an advantage of being able to.
 図26(b)に示す案内部22hは上記案内部22aの第2の変形例である。この案内部22hには、未接合体W0の外周間隙kに挿入されるコテ部16h及び接触部16aと16fと支持部材22dとの間に弾性部22iが設けられている。この弾性部22iは、Z軸方向に撓み易いよう、支持部材22dの端面からの突出長さL3で薄板状に形成してある。 A guide portion 22h shown in FIG. 26B is a second modification of the guide portion 22a. The guide portion 22h is provided with an elastic portion 22i between the support portion 22d and the iron portion 16h and the contact portions 16a and 16f inserted into the outer peripheral gap k of the unjoined body W0. The elastic portion 22i is formed in a thin plate shape with a protruding length L3 from the end face of the support member 22d so as to be easily bent in the Z-axis direction.
 図26(c)に示す案内部22jは上記案内部22aの第3の変形例である。この案内部22jには、未接合体W0の外周間隙kに挿入されるコテ部16h及び接触部16aと16fと支持部材22dとの間に上下一対の弾性部22kと22lが設けられている。そして弾性部22kは接触部16aの後方に、弾性部22lは接触部16fの後方に、各々支持部材22dの端面からの突出長さL3で薄板状に形成してある。この案内部22jによれば、Z軸方向における外周間隙kの位置が変動した場合に、コテ部16h及び接触部16aと16fとを一体の支点として弾性部22kと22lがリンク状に変位するので、外周間隙kの変動に対し水平な姿勢を保持しつつコテ部16h及び接触部16aと16fは追従することができるという利点がある。 A guide portion 22j shown in FIG. 26C is a third modification of the guide portion 22a. The guide portion 22j is provided with a pair of upper and lower elastic portions 22k and 22l between the iron portion 16h and the contact portions 16a and 16f and the support member 22d inserted into the outer peripheral gap k of the unjoined body W0. The elastic portion 22k is formed in a thin plate shape behind the contact portion 16a, and the elastic portion 22l is formed behind the contact portion 16f with a protruding length L3 from the end face of the support member 22d. According to this guide portion 22j, when the position of the outer peripheral gap k in the Z-axis direction fluctuates, the elastic portions 22k and 22l are displaced in a link shape with the iron portion 16h and the contact portions 16a and 16f as an integral fulcrum. There is an advantage that the iron part 16h and the contact parts 16a and 16f can follow up while maintaining a horizontal posture against the fluctuation of the outer peripheral gap k.
 上記第2-2例の供給装置では、フローティング機構に替えて上記案内部22a~22jを組み込んであるが、充填すべき対象物により上記案内部22a~22jをフローティング機構を有する第2-1例の供給装置に組み込んでも当然構わない。 In the supply device of Example 2-2, the guide portions 22a to 22j are incorporated in place of the floating mechanism, but the guide portions 22a to 22j are provided with a floating mechanism depending on the object to be filled. Of course, it may be incorporated in the supply device.
 また、上記説明では理解を容易にするため平面視の大きさが同一であるガラス基板w3とw4とからなる未接合体W0を対象としたが、異なる大きさのガラス基板であっても対応することができる。すなわち、異なる大きさの2枚のガラス基板を位置合わせした未接合体の端部は一致せず段差が形成されるが、供給筒の吐出面の形状をその段差に応じた形状とすればよい。 Further, in the above description, the unjoined body W0 composed of the glass substrates w3 and w4 having the same size in plan view is targeted for easy understanding, but a glass substrate having a different size can be used. be able to. That is, the end portions of the unjoined body in which two glass substrates having different sizes are aligned do not coincide, and a step is formed, but the shape of the discharge surface of the supply cylinder may be a shape corresponding to the step. .
[第3態様]
 上記(25)で説明した態様の溶融金属の供給筒及びその供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置及び溶融金属の供給方法並びにそれらの望ましい態様について、以下その第3-1例、第3-2例に基づき説明する。
[Third aspect]
Regarding the molten metal supply cylinder, the molten metal supply apparatus and the molten metal supply method in which the supply cylinder of the aspect described in the above (25) is incorporated, and desirable aspects thereof, examples 3-1 and 3 -A description will be given based on an example.
[第3-1例]
 本発明の第3-1例である溶融金属の供給筒及びその供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置及びについて図27~図30を参照して説明する。図27は本例における溶融金属の供給装置の主要部を示す部分断面図、図28、29は本例における供給筒24の断面図及び部分斜視図である。
[Example 3-1]
A molten metal supply cylinder and a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder according to Example 3-1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 27 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the main part of the molten metal supply device in this example, and FIGS. 28 and 29 are a cross-sectional view and a partial perspective view of the supply tube 24 in this example.
 まず、溶融金属の供給装置について説明する。供給装置は、図51(a)、(b)を参照して説明したガラスパネルWを製造するものであり、供給筒24と、供給筒24を取り付けるホルダー24aと、ホルダー24aを主として上下にフローティングさせるフローティング機構24bと、フローティング機構24bを支持するケーシング24eとを備えている。フローティング機構24bは、適度な柔軟性を有したゴムやバネを上下に配設した構造で実現することができ、ガラス基板w3、w4或いは供給筒24に無理な力を作用させずに供給筒24の姿勢を保つことができる。なお、ホルダー24aに取り付けた超音波振動体24cを軸部材24dを介し供給筒24と接合し、供給筒24の長手方向に超音波振動を印加することが好ましい。 First, the molten metal supply device will be described. The supply device manufactures the glass panel W described with reference to FIGS. 51A and 51B. The supply tube 24, the holder 24a to which the supply tube 24 is attached, and the holder 24a are mainly floated up and down. A floating mechanism 24b to be moved, and a casing 24e for supporting the floating mechanism 24b. The floating mechanism 24b can be realized by a structure in which rubbers and springs having appropriate flexibility are arranged above and below, and the supply cylinder 24 without applying an excessive force to the glass substrates w3 and w4 or the supply cylinder 24. Can keep the posture. In addition, it is preferable that the ultrasonic vibrator 24 c attached to the holder 24 a is joined to the supply cylinder 24 via the shaft member 24 d and the ultrasonic vibration is applied in the longitudinal direction of the supply cylinder 24.
 供給筒24は、図28に示すように、一面24mと他面24nに開口した溶融半田M1が流通する円形断面の流路24iを内部に有し、他面24nに直交し第2開口24hを横切って流路24iの中に深さL0だけ挿入して取り付けられた案内部25を備え、第2開口24hから排出される溶融半田M1を外周間隙に案内部25を介し供給する。 As shown in FIG. 28, the supply cylinder 24 has a circular cross-sectional flow path 24i through which the molten solder M1 opened on one surface 24m and the other surface 24n flows, and has a second opening 24h orthogonal to the other surface 24n. A guide portion 25 that is inserted and attached to the flow path 24i by a depth L0 is provided so as to supply the molten solder M1 discharged from the second opening 24h to the outer peripheral gap via the guide portion 25.
 供給装置は、供給筒24を、他面24nがガラス基板w3とw4の外周端面と所定の隙間sで隔てられた状態で案内部25をガラス基板w3,w4の外周間隙kに挿入するとともに、外周間隙kに沿って所定速度で一周できるように移動させる。なお、この移動動作は供給装置が全て行う必要はなく、ガラス基板w3とw4が載置されるテーブル等が分担して相対的に行ってもよい。このように、供給装置は、移動形態に合わせて種々の構造をとることができる。移動形態に基づく構造がどのようなものであれ、ガラス基板w3とw4の移動機構や供給装置の移動機構は公知の技術、例えば直線移動はモータとボールネジ又はリニアガイド等、旋回移動はモータまたはシリンダとベアリングを組み合わせて実現できる。上記ケーシング24eは、上下方向に位置を調節する治具等を介して移動機構に取り付けるとよい。このように構成することで、ガラス基板w4の厚さや間隙保持部材Qの高さに合わせて、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kに対し案内部25の高さを調節しておくことができる。 The supply device inserts the guide tube 25 into the outer peripheral gap k of the glass substrates w3 and w4 while the other surface 24n is separated from the outer peripheral end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 by a predetermined gap s. It is moved so that it can make a round along the outer circumferential gap k at a predetermined speed. Note that this movement operation does not have to be performed by the entire supply device, and may be relatively performed by sharing a table or the like on which the glass substrates w3 and w4 are placed. Thus, the supply device can take various structures in accordance with the movement form. Whatever the structure based on the movement form, the movement mechanism of the glass substrates w3 and w4 and the movement mechanism of the supply device are known techniques, for example, linear movement is a motor and a ball screw or a linear guide, and swivel movement is a motor or cylinder. This can be realized by combining the bearings. The casing 24e may be attached to the moving mechanism through a jig or the like that adjusts the position in the vertical direction. With this configuration, the height of the guide portion 25 can be adjusted with respect to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 in accordance with the thickness of the glass substrate w4 and the height of the gap holding member Q. .
 案内部25について説明する。案内部25は、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kに挿入されて、供給筒24の第2開口(以下第3-1例、第3-2例において排出口と言う。)24hから排出される溶融半田M1を外周間隙kに供給するものである。この案内部25は、外周間隙kに沿って移動させる時、溶融半田M1をガラス基板w3とw4の主面に摺動させる、いわゆる塗り込みながらガラス基板w3とw4との外縁間隔kに供給する。そして、本例における案内部に類似する特許文献4に記載された導入板が溶融半田の排出口の中心部に設置されて排出口の導入板で分割された上下の排出口の面積を同一となすようにしているのとは異なり、案内部25は、図30に示すように、鉛直方向において排出口24hの中心から下方にオフセットされた状態で配置されている。したがって、案内部25で仕切られた上側の排出口24jの面積は下側の排出口24kの面積より大きい。 The guide unit 25 will be described. The guide portion 25 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and is discharged from the second opening (hereinafter referred to as a discharge port in the third and third examples) of the supply tube 24. The molten solder M1 is supplied to the outer peripheral gap k. When the guide portion 25 is moved along the outer circumferential gap k, the molten solder M1 is slid on the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, and is supplied to the outer edge interval k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 while being applied. . And the area of the upper and lower discharge ports divided by the introduction plate of the discharge port that the introduction plate described in Patent Document 4 similar to the guide portion in this example is installed at the center of the discharge port of the molten solder is the same Unlike the arrangement, as shown in FIG. 30, the guide portion 25 is arranged in a state offset downward from the center of the discharge port 24h in the vertical direction. Therefore, the area of the upper outlet 24j partitioned by the guide portion 25 is larger than the area of the lower outlet 24k.
 図29に示すように、案内部25は、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kの寸法gより小さな厚さ(T2)の板状体25cと、板状体25cの上下面から突出した外周間隙kの寸法gとほぼ同一厚さ(T1)の突起体25aとを備えている。この板状体25cは、外周間隙kに挿入され、板状体25cの表面と相対するガラス基板w3とw4との間隙に溶融半田M1を導入し、ガラス基板w3とw4の主面に塗り込むものであり、外周間隙kに挿入されるL2の部分を以下コテ部25dと言う。また、板状体25cの上下面に形成された突起体25aは、排出口24hからL1だけ突き出るように形成されている。突起体25aは、外周間隙kに挿入されてガラス基板w3とw4の主面と摺動可能な接触面を有し、以下この接触面が形成された部分を接触部25bと言う。 As shown in FIG. 29, the guide portion 25 includes a plate-like body 25c having a thickness (T2) smaller than the dimension g of the outer-periphery gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and an outer peripheral gap protruding from the upper and lower surfaces of the plate-like body 25c. and a protrusion 25a having substantially the same thickness (T1) as the dimension g of k. This plate-like body 25c is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k, and molten solder M1 is introduced into the gap between the glass substrates w3 and w4 facing the surface of the plate-like body 25c, and is applied to the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4. The portion of L2 that is inserted into the outer circumferential gap k is hereinafter referred to as a soldering portion 25d. Further, the protrusions 25a formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the plate-like body 25c are formed so as to protrude by L1 from the discharge port 24h. The protrusion 25a has a contact surface that is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k and is slidable with the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4. Hereinafter, a portion where the contact surface is formed is referred to as a contact portion 25b.
 案内部25を外周間隙kに挿入するに際し、接触部25bを外周間隙kに嵌合せることにより、外周間隙kでのコテ部25dの上下方向の位置が規定される。すなわち、図30に示すように、コテ部25dの上面とガラス基板w3との間の第1の間隙Gu,コテ部25dの下面とガラス基板w4との間の第2の間隙Gdを一定に維持することができる。なお、接触部25bには、ガラス基板w3とw4の主面との滑り性をよくするための表面処理、例えばNi撥水メッキを施すことが好ましい。また、接触部25bには、外周間隙kに嵌入し易くするために、その側面又はコテ部25dとの段差面の角に面取りcを施すことが好ましい。この面取りcは、角部を直線状或いは曲線状に丸めた部位のことで、切削加工、砥粒加工、エッチング等で形成することができる。 When the guide portion 25 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k, the vertical position of the iron portion 25d in the outer peripheral gap k is defined by fitting the contact portion 25b into the outer peripheral gap k. That is, as shown in FIG. 30, the first gap Gu between the upper surface of the iron part 25d and the glass substrate w3 and the second gap Gd between the lower surface of the iron part 25d and the glass substrate w4 are kept constant. can do. The contact portion 25b is preferably subjected to a surface treatment for improving the slipperiness between the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, for example, Ni water repellent plating. Further, it is preferable to chamfer c on the contact portion 25b at the corner of the step surface with the side surface or the iron portion 25d so that the contact portion 25b can be easily fitted into the outer peripheral gap k. The chamfering c is a portion where the corner is rounded into a straight line or a curve, and can be formed by cutting, abrasive processing, etching, or the like.
 なお、上記板状体25cと突起体25aは、一体構造で形成してもよいし別部材を接着や積層プロセスなどで固着した組立構造としてもよい。組立構造とすると、板状体25cをガラスとし突起体25aを金属とするなど要求される機能に合わせて適宜な材質を選択して組み合わせることができる。 In addition, the plate-like body 25c and the protrusion 25a may be formed as an integral structure, or may be an assembly structure in which different members are fixed by adhesion or a lamination process. When the assembly structure is adopted, an appropriate material can be selected and combined in accordance with a required function, for example, the plate-like body 25c is made of glass and the protrusion 25a is made of metal.
 図29(a)に示すように、板状体25cの上下面に形成された突起体25aは、流路24iからの溶融半田M1を流入可能とする案内溝25e,25hを挟むように左右に形成されている。案内溝25eと25hは、例えば一体的に形成された突起体25aを分断するように溝加工を行うことで形成することができる。案内溝25eと25hの幅、深さは溶融半田M1の流通性に合わせて適宜決めればよいが、大きい方が流通性にとって好ましく、図29(b)に示すように板状体25cを掘り込んでコテ部25dに達するようにした形態としてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the protrusions 25a formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the plate-like body 25c are arranged to the left and right so as to sandwich the guide grooves 25e and 25h through which the molten solder M1 from the flow path 24i can flow. Is formed. The guide grooves 25e and 25h can be formed, for example, by performing groove processing so as to divide the integrally formed protrusion 25a. The width and depth of the guide grooves 25e and 25h may be appropriately determined in accordance with the flowability of the molten solder M1, but a larger one is preferable for flowability, and a plate-like body 25c is dug as shown in FIG. In this case, the iron part 25d may be reached.
 コテ部25dは、前述したように、案内溝25e、25hを介して供給された溶融半田M1を間隙Gu、Gdに導入するとともに、ガラス基板w3、w4に強固に接合させるためのものである。したがって、コテ部25dが移動するに伴い、その移動方向においてコテ部25dの後方の外周間隙kには間隙Gu、Gdから溶融半田M1が回り込んで充填され、接合部nの幅はコテ部25dの長さL2で規定される。コテ部25dの厚さT2は、溶融半田M1をガラス基板w3とw4の主面に均一な面圧で接触させならが塗り込めるよう、第1の間隙Gu及び第2の間隙Gdの寸法から設定される。溶融半田M1がコテ部25dに追従して一緒に移動しガラス基板w3とw4に良好に塗り込められるためには、間隙Gu、Gdは狭い方が好ましい。また、溶融半田M1の追従性を高めるため、コテ部25dの表面に移動方向に交差するような溝を形成してもよい。 As described above, the iron part 25d is for introducing the molten solder M1 supplied via the guide grooves 25e and 25h into the gaps Gu and Gd, and for firmly bonding the glass substrates w3 and w4. Therefore, as the iron part 25d moves, the outer peripheral gap k behind the iron part 25d in the moving direction is filled with the molten solder M1 from the gaps Gu and Gd, and the width of the joint part n is the iron part 25d. Is defined by a length L2. The thickness T2 of the iron part 25d is set from the dimensions of the first gap Gu and the second gap Gd so that the molten solder M1 can be applied if it is brought into contact with the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 with a uniform surface pressure. Is done. In order for the molten solder M1 to move together following the iron part 25d and be satisfactorily applied to the glass substrates w3 and w4, the gaps Gu and Gd are preferably narrow. Further, in order to improve the followability of the molten solder M1, a groove that intersects the moving direction may be formed on the surface of the iron part 25d.
 供給筒24について説明する。供給筒24は、一面24mに形成された第1開口24gから溶融半田M1を供給し、他面24nに形成された第2開口である排出口24hから排出する。この第1開口24gに供給される溶融半田M1は、例えば糸ハンダMを第1開口24gに所定の速度で送り込みながら供給筒24で溶融し、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kを充分に満たすべき供給量に基づき制御された流量で供給される。 The supply cylinder 24 will be described. The supply cylinder 24 supplies the molten solder M1 from a first opening 24g formed on one surface 24m, and discharges it from a discharge port 24h which is a second opening formed on the other surface 24n. The molten solder M1 supplied to the first opening 24g is melted by, for example, the supply cylinder 24 while feeding the thread solder M to the first opening 24g at a predetermined speed, and sufficiently fills the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4. It is supplied at a controlled flow rate based on the supply amount.
 供給筒24は、図28に示すように、上記のように糸ハンダMを溶融して形成された溶融半田M1が流通する流路24iと、流路24iの第1開口24gが形成され糸ハンダMを溶融する溶融面24mと、排出口24hが形成された他面である排出面24nとを有し、その外周面には糸ハンダMを溶融するためのヒータ24lが巻回されている。かかる構成の供給筒24によれば、下端面が第1開口24gを閉塞する姿勢で溶融面24mに当接するよう制御された速度で糸半田Mを送り出し、溶融面24mに押し付けて溶融する。すると、溶融半田M1は流路24iを流通して排出口24hから連続的に排出される。 As shown in FIG. 28, the supply cylinder 24 is formed with a flow path 24i through which the molten solder M1 formed by melting the thread solder M as described above and a first opening 24g of the flow path 24i are formed. It has a melting surface 24m for melting M and a discharge surface 24n which is the other surface on which the discharge port 24h is formed, and a heater 24l for melting the yarn solder M is wound around the outer peripheral surface thereof. According to the supply cylinder 24 having such a configuration, the thread solder M is sent out at a controlled speed so that the lower end surface is in contact with the melting surface 24m so as to close the first opening 24g, and is pressed and melted against the melting surface 24m. Then, the molten solder M1 flows through the flow path 24i and is continuously discharged from the discharge port 24h.
 第1開口24gが開口する溶融面24mは、例えば供給筒24の表面をザグリ加工して形成した凹状部の底面である。第1開口24gは、その直径ΦBが溶融面24mと当接する糸ハンダMの端面の直径ΦA未満であり、流路24iは少なくとも溶融面24m近傍では直径ΦBの管状に形成される。これにより、糸ハンダMの外周面に酸化物Eが生成していても、酸化物Eの流路24iへの流入は第1開口24gの外周縁部、すなわち溶融面24mにより阻止され、酸化物Eがほとんど混入しない清浄な溶融半田M1のみが流路24iへ流入する。なお、大気中で保管された糸ハンダMの表面に生成している酸化物Eの層の厚さは通常数十μm程度であるので、糸ハンダMと第1開口24gの直径の差、すなわちΦA-ΦBは1mm前後としておけば十分である。 The melting surface 24m through which the first opening 24g opens is a bottom surface of a concave portion formed by, for example, counterboring the surface of the supply cylinder 24. The first opening 24g has a diameter ΦB that is less than the diameter ΦA of the end face of the thread solder M that contacts the melting surface 24m, and the flow path 24i is formed in a tubular shape having a diameter ΦB at least in the vicinity of the melting surface 24m. Thereby, even if the oxide E is generated on the outer peripheral surface of the thread solder M, the inflow of the oxide E into the flow path 24i is blocked by the outer peripheral edge portion of the first opening 24g, that is, the melting surface 24m. Only clean molten solder M1 in which E hardly mixes flows into the flow path 24i. Since the thickness of the oxide E layer generated on the surface of the yarn solder M stored in the atmosphere is usually about several tens of μm, the difference in diameter between the yarn solder M and the first opening 24g, that is, It is sufficient to set ΦA-ΦB to around 1 mm.
 なお、溶融面24mを取り囲むように供給筒24の周廻りに周壁24oを形成することが好ましい。流路24iへの流入が阻止された酸化物Eは、溶融面24mの凹状の底部に貯留されるが、吸引したり或いは周壁24oの一部を切り欠いて流出させ適宜回収すればよい。また、排出面24nに近い流路24iの末端部は、排出面24nとほぼ直交するように形成することが好ましい。これにより、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周端面に隙間sで隔てて排出面24nが対向するように供給筒24を位置決めすると、排出面24nの近傍の流路24iは外周間隙kに対して平行な状態となる。 In addition, it is preferable to form the peripheral wall 24o around the circumference of the supply cylinder 24 so as to surround the melting surface 24m. The oxide E, which is prevented from flowing into the flow path 24i, is stored in the concave bottom of the melting surface 24m. However, it may be recovered by appropriately sucking it out or cutting out a part of the peripheral wall 24o. Moreover, it is preferable to form the terminal part of the flow path 24i near the discharge surface 24n so as to be substantially orthogonal to the discharge surface 24n. Thus, when the supply tube 24 is positioned so that the discharge surface 24n faces the outer peripheral end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 with a gap s, the flow path 24i in the vicinity of the discharge surface 24n is parallel to the outer peripheral gap k. It becomes a state.
 上記供給筒24による溶融半田M1の供給動作について説明する。溶融半田M1の供給に際し、供給装置は、供給筒24おける溶融半田M1の流通状態が定常状態にある時にガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kに沿って移動するよう構成されている。この定常状態とは、案内部25の案内溝25eと25hから間隙GuとGdに溶融半田M1を導入可能な状態をいい、図30に示すように、排出口24hに達した溶融半田M1が案内溝25eより高いレベルにある状態である。ここで、第1開口24gから溶融半田M1が供給され初めてからこの定常状態に達するまでの時間はできるだけ短い方がよい。このため、非定常状態である溶融半田M1の供給開始時では溶融半田M1で流路24iが迅速に満たされ、定常状態では外周間隙kを充分に満たすことができる流量となるように溶融半田M1の供給量は制御されている。 The operation of supplying the molten solder M1 by the supply cylinder 24 will be described. When supplying the molten solder M1, the supply device is configured to move along the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 when the flow state of the molten solder M1 in the supply cylinder 24 is in a steady state. This steady state refers to a state in which the molten solder M1 can be introduced into the gaps Gu and Gd from the guide grooves 25e and 25h of the guide portion 25. As shown in FIG. 30, the molten solder M1 reaching the discharge port 24h is guided. In this state, the level is higher than that of the groove 25e. Here, the time from when the molten solder M1 is supplied from the first opening 24g until the steady state is reached is preferably as short as possible. For this reason, when the supply of the molten solder M1 that is in an unsteady state is started, the flow path 24i is quickly filled with the molten solder M1, and in the steady state, the molten solder M1 has a flow rate that can sufficiently fill the outer circumferential gap k. The amount of supply is controlled.
 定常状態においては、案内部25によって上下に分けられた流路24iのうち、下側の流路24qは溶融半田M1で満たされているので、下側の流路24qが開口する下側の排出口24kとガラス基板w4の端面との間の隙間sにも溶融半田M1は満たされている。この状態で、溶融半田M1は第2の間隙Gdに導入されるが、排出口24kとガラス基板w4の端面の隙間sから余分な溶融半田M1は溢れることになる。流路24iに供給される溶融半田M1は制御された流量であり、排出口24kとガラス基板w4の端面の隙間sに存在する溶融半田M1には小さな供給圧力しかかからないが、この隙間sは重力方向(下方)が開放されているので、漏れた溶融半田M1は垂れ下がることになる。この下側の流路24qからの漏れ出しは、溶融金属M1の供給開始から定常状態に達するまでにも生じるので、漏れ出す量は少ない方が望ましい。一方、上側の流路24pに連なる上側の排出口24jとガラス基板w3の端面の隙間sが溶融半田M1で満たされても、この隙間に存在する溶融半田M1は案内部25が存在するので漏れ出しにくい。従って、排出口24hとガラス基板w3及びw4の端面との隙間sから漏れ出す溶融半田M1の量を少なくするためには、下側の流路24qから排出される溶融半田M1の量を少なくすればよい。 In the steady state, the lower flow path 24q of the flow paths 24i divided up and down by the guide portion 25 is filled with the molten solder M1, so that the lower discharge where the lower flow path 24q is opened. The molten solder M1 is also filled in the gap s between the outlet 24k and the end surface of the glass substrate w4. In this state, the molten solder M1 is introduced into the second gap Gd, but excess molten solder M1 overflows from the gap s between the discharge port 24k and the end face of the glass substrate w4. The molten solder M1 supplied to the flow path 24i has a controlled flow rate, and the molten solder M1 existing in the gap s between the discharge port 24k and the end surface of the glass substrate w4 is applied with a small supply pressure. Since the direction (downward) is open, the leaked molten solder M1 hangs down. Since the leakage from the lower flow path 24q also occurs from the start of the supply of the molten metal M1 until the steady state is reached, it is desirable that the amount of leakage be small. On the other hand, even if the gap s between the upper discharge port 24j connected to the upper flow path 24p and the end surface of the glass substrate w3 is filled with the molten solder M1, the molten solder M1 existing in this gap leaks because the guide portion 25 exists. Hard to put out. Accordingly, in order to reduce the amount of molten solder M1 leaking from the gap s between the discharge port 24h and the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, the amount of molten solder M1 discharged from the lower flow path 24q should be reduced. That's fine.
 供給筒24は、案内部25が排出口24hの中心から下方にオフセットした位置に取り付けられているので、下側の排出口24kの面積が上側の排出口24jの面積より小さくなっている。また、下側の流路24qの容積の方が上側の流路24pの容積よりも小さくなっている。従って、下側の排出口24kから排出される量は、上側の排出口24jから排出される量より少ない。すなわち、供給筒24における下側の流路24qから排出される溶融半田M1の量が少なく、排出口24hとガラス基板w3及びw4の端面の隙間sからの漏出量を少なくすることができ、さらに定常状態に達するまでの時間も短くできる。案内部25のオフセット量Fは、溶融半田M1の供給量、排出面24nとガラス基板w3及びw4の端面との隙間sの大きさ及び案内溝25eと25hの大きさ等を基にして適宜設定すればよいが、大きくするほど下側の流路24qが満たされる溶融半田M1の量が少なくなるので、漏れ出す量をより小さくできるとともに定常状態に達するまでの時間も短くできる。 Since the supply tube 24 is attached at a position where the guide 25 is offset downward from the center of the discharge port 24h, the area of the lower discharge port 24k is smaller than the area of the upper discharge port 24j. Further, the volume of the lower flow path 24q is smaller than the volume of the upper flow path 24p. Accordingly, the amount discharged from the lower discharge port 24k is smaller than the amount discharged from the upper discharge port 24j. That is, the amount of molten solder M1 discharged from the lower flow path 24q in the supply cylinder 24 is small, and the amount of leakage from the gap s between the discharge port 24h and the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 can be reduced. The time to reach a steady state can also be shortened. The offset amount F of the guide portion 25 is appropriately set based on the supply amount of the molten solder M1, the size of the gap s between the discharge surface 24n and the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, the size of the guide grooves 25e and 25h, and the like. However, the larger the amount, the smaller the amount of molten solder M1 that fills the lower flow path 24q. Therefore, the amount of leakage can be reduced, and the time to reach a steady state can be shortened.
 上記供給筒24を用いると、供給された清浄な溶融半田M1は、排出面24nとガラス基板w3及びw4の端面との隙間s及び間隙GuとGdでわずかに外部雰囲気と触れるだけでガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kに供給される。従って、供給された清浄な溶融半田M1は、大気雰囲気であっても酸化が抑制された状態でガラス基板w3とw4の主面と接触する。したがって、本例の供給装置は、適切な量の酸素を介しガラスと優れた接合性を有するSnAgAl系合金ハンダを使用するのに好適である。なお、溶融半田M1の充填性を向上するためには、案内部25の表面の少なくとも溶融半田M1が接触する面に溶融半田M1との濡れ性を高める処理、例えばAg、Cr、Al、Mo、W、V、Nb、Taなどを被覆することが好ましく、また、溶融半田M1で案内部25の表面が溶食され溶融半田M1に不純物が混入しないように溶食防止処理としての窒化処理等を施すことが好ましい。また、これらの処理は流路24iの表面に対しても行うことが好ましい。 When the supply cylinder 24 is used, the supplied clean molten solder M1 can be brought into contact with the external atmosphere only slightly by the gap s between the discharge surface 24n and the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 and the gaps Gu and Gd. And w4 are supplied to the outer peripheral gap k. Accordingly, the supplied clean molten solder M1 comes into contact with the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 in a state in which oxidation is suppressed even in an air atmosphere. Therefore, the supply device of this example is suitable for using SnAgAl alloy solder having excellent bonding properties with glass through an appropriate amount of oxygen. In order to improve the filling property of the molten solder M1, a process for increasing the wettability with the molten solder M1, for example, Ag, Cr, Al, Mo, etc. It is preferable to coat W, V, Nb, Ta, and the like, and the surface of the guide portion 25 is eroded by the molten solder M1 so that impurities are not mixed into the molten solder M1. It is preferable to apply. These treatments are also preferably performed on the surface of the flow path 24i.
 次に、本例の供給装置による外周間隙kへの溶融半田M1の供給動作を説明する。発熱体が内蔵されたXY2軸方向に移動可能なテーブルに、所定寸法の間隙保持部材Qを介して上下にセットされたガラス基板w3とw4を位置決めし、ガラス基板w3とw4を溶融半田M1の溶融温度程度に加熱する。供給筒24は、その案内部25がガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kにおいて一辺端部の所定位置に挿入され、ガラス基板w3とw4の端面と排出面24nとに所定の隙間sが形成されるよう移動される。この時、コテ部25dは外周間隙kの上下方向において中心近傍にくるように予め取り付け位置が調節されているが、厳密に外周間隙kの中央に調整するのは難しい。しかしながら、この調節が良好に行われていないと、コテ部25dは外周間隙kに挿入されるにしても、上下いずれかのガラス基板w3またはw4の端面に接触部25bが当たってしまう可能性がある。ここで、供給筒24は上下方向にフローティング機構で支持されており、また接触部25bには面取りcが施されているので、接触部25bは容易に外周間隙kに嵌入される。これにより、コテ部25dは外周間隙kの上下方向においてほぼ中央に位置決めされ、コテ部25dとガラス基板w3及びw4の間隙GuとGdは上下ともほぼ同じとなる。 Next, the supply operation of the molten solder M1 to the outer peripheral gap k by the supply device of this example will be described. The glass substrates w3 and w4 set up and down via a gap holding member Q having a predetermined dimension are positioned on a table that is movable in the XY2 axis direction with a built-in heating element, and the glass substrates w3 and w4 are made of the molten solder M1. Heat to about melting temperature. In the supply cylinder 24, the guide portion 25 is inserted into a predetermined position at one end of the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and a predetermined gap s is formed between the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 and the discharge surface 24n. Moved. At this time, the mounting position of the iron part 25d is adjusted in advance so as to be near the center in the vertical direction of the outer circumferential gap k, but it is difficult to adjust precisely to the center of the outer circumferential gap k. However, if this adjustment is not performed satisfactorily, even if the iron part 25d is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k, there is a possibility that the contact part 25b hits the end surface of either the upper or lower glass substrate w3 or w4. is there. Here, since the supply cylinder 24 is supported by a floating mechanism in the vertical direction, and the chamfering c is applied to the contact portion 25b, the contact portion 25b is easily fitted into the outer peripheral gap k. As a result, the iron part 25d is positioned substantially in the center in the vertical direction of the outer peripheral gap k, and the gaps Gu and Gd between the iron part 25d and the glass substrates w3 and w4 are substantially the same in the vertical direction.
 所定流量の清浄な溶融半田M1が流路24iに供給されて排出口24hから排出され始める。案内部25はオフセットされて排出口24hの下側に取り付けられているので、短時間で定常状態に達し、外周間隙kの一辺に溶融半田M1を供給するためガラス基板w3とw4を直ぐに一方向(X方向)に所定速度で移動させることができる。この間、溶融半田M1は間隙GuとGdに導入され外周間隙kに充填されていくが、案内部25の下部の排出口24kとガラス基板w4の隙間sから漏れる溶融半田M1は少なく、垂れ下がりや滴下はほとんど生じない。また、接触部25bは、外周間隙kに嵌入しかつフローティング状態にあるので、ガラス基板w4の厚さのバラツキやX方向へのテーブルの上下方向のうねりなどガラス基板w3とw4の移動に際して生じる外周間隙kの上下方向における位置変動に対しても追従し、間隙GuとGdはそれぞれの寸法が維持される。これにより、溶融半田M1はコテ部25dの上下面に沿ってほぼ同量導入されるので、コテ部25dの移動に伴って移動する溶融半田M1の流動状態は間隙GuとGdでほぼ同一となり、溶融半田M1はガラス基板w3の主面に対してもガラス基板w4の主面に対しても同じように供給される。 A predetermined amount of clean molten solder M1 is supplied to the flow path 24i and begins to be discharged from the discharge port 24h. Since the guide portion 25 is offset and attached to the lower side of the discharge port 24h, it reaches a steady state in a short time, and immediately passes the glass substrates w3 and w4 in one direction to supply the molten solder M1 to one side of the outer peripheral gap k. It can be moved in the (X direction) at a predetermined speed. During this time, the molten solder M1 is introduced into the gaps Gu and Gd and filled into the outer peripheral gap k. However, the molten solder M1 leaks from the gap s between the discharge port 24k below the guide portion 25 and the glass substrate w4, and droops or drops. Hardly occurs. Further, since the contact portion 25b is fitted in the outer peripheral gap k and is in a floating state, the outer periphery generated during the movement of the glass substrates w3 and w4 such as the variation in the thickness of the glass substrate w4 and the vertical undulation of the table in the X direction. Following the positional variation in the vertical direction of the gap k, the sizes of the gaps Gu and Gd are maintained. As a result, the molten solder M1 is introduced in substantially the same amount along the upper and lower surfaces of the iron portion 25d, so that the flow state of the molten solder M1 that moves with the movement of the iron portion 25d is substantially the same in the gaps Gu and Gd. The molten solder M1 is supplied in the same manner to the main surface of the glass substrate w3 and to the main surface of the glass substrate w4.
 また、充填中に超音波振動を作動させ案内部25に超音波振動を印加すると、溶融半田M1と案内部25、および溶融半田M1とガラス基板w3及びw4の濡れ性が向上し、間隙GuとGdが狭い場合でも溶融半田M1は円滑に供給される。この超音波振動は溶融半田M1を介してガラス基板w3とw4の主面にも作用し、溶融半田M1とガラス基板w3及びw4の接触界面に存在する気泡や酸化膜等の異物を除去する。したがって、ガラス基板w3とw4に対する溶融半田M1の接合性を高めることができ、ガラスパネルWの接合強度の向上のために有効である。 Further, when the ultrasonic vibration is applied during the filling and the ultrasonic vibration is applied to the guide portion 25, the wettability of the molten solder M1 and the guide portion 25 and the molten solder M1 and the glass substrates w3 and w4 is improved, and the gap Gu and Even when Gd is narrow, the molten solder M1 is supplied smoothly. This ultrasonic vibration also acts on the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 via the molten solder M1, and removes foreign matters such as bubbles and oxide films existing at the contact interface between the molten solder M1 and the glass substrates w3 and w4. Therefore, the bondability of the molten solder M1 to the glass substrates w3 and w4 can be enhanced, and it is effective for improving the bonding strength of the glass panel W.
 上記ように外周間隙kの一辺における溶融半田M1の供給が完了すると、供給筒24を装着したケーシング24eは90度水平方向に旋回し、次いで、ガラス基板w3とw4は上記一辺と直交する他辺に沿い水平移動する。そして、その他辺においても上記一辺と同様に、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周端面に溶融半田M1がほとんど垂れ下がることなく外周間隙kに溶融金属M1は供給される。この動作を順次各辺に対して行い、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kの全てに溶融半田M1が供給され、ガラス基板w3とw4の外縁端面に大きく盛り上がったり垂れ下がったりすることなく溶融半田M1は供給される。このガラス基板w3とw4への供給作業が完了すると、ガラス基板w3とw4を載置したテーブルは外部へ移し替えられる。なお、外部に搬出されたテーブルからガラス基板w3とw4は取り除かれるが、テーブル上には溶融半田M1が付着していないので、テーブルから半田を除去する作業は必要ない。 When the supply of the molten solder M1 in one side of the outer peripheral gap k is completed as described above, the casing 24e fitted with the supply cylinder 24 turns 90 degrees horizontally, and then the glass substrates w3 and w4 are the other sides orthogonal to the one side. Move horizontally along. In the other sides, similarly to the one side, the molten metal M1 is supplied to the outer peripheral gap k with almost no dripping of the molten solder M1 on the outer peripheral end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4. This operation is sequentially performed on each side, and the molten solder M1 is supplied to all of the outer peripheral gaps k of the glass substrates w3 and w4. Is supplied. When the supply operation to the glass substrates w3 and w4 is completed, the table on which the glass substrates w3 and w4 are placed is transferred to the outside. Although the glass substrates w3 and w4 are removed from the table carried out to the outside, the operation of removing the solder from the table is not necessary because the molten solder M1 is not attached on the table.
 引き続いて、別のガラス基板w3とw4を載置して加熱準備していた別のテーブルが新たに載せられ、新たなガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kへ上記した供給動作と同様にして溶融半田M1の供給作業が行われる。ここで、新たなガラス基板w3とw4は、ガラス基板w4の厚さ精度の違いやガラス基板w3とw4のテーブルへの取付状態の違いにより上下方向における外周間隙kの位置が相異している可能性がある。この場合でも、本例の供給装置によれば、供給筒24は上下方向にフローティング機構で支持されており、また接触部25bには面取りcが施されているので、上下方向においてコテ部25dを外周間隙kの中心位置に挿入でき、間隙GuとGdの寸法を維持した状態で溶融半田M1を充填できる。 Subsequently, another table on which the other glass substrates w3 and w4 are placed and prepared for heating is newly placed and melted in the same manner as the above-described supply operation to the outer peripheral gap k between the new glass substrates w3 and w4. Supply work of the solder M1 is performed. Here, the position of the outer peripheral gap k in the vertical direction is different between the new glass substrates w3 and w4 due to the difference in thickness accuracy of the glass substrate w4 and the mounting state of the glass substrates w3 and w4 on the table. there is a possibility. Even in this case, according to the supply device of this example, the supply cylinder 24 is supported by the floating mechanism in the vertical direction, and the chamfering c is applied to the contact portion 25b. It can be inserted at the center position of the outer peripheral gap k, and the molten solder M1 can be filled while maintaining the dimensions of the gaps Gu and Gd.
 なお、案内部25が外周間隙kに沿って移動する時、接触部25bとガラス基板w3及びw4の主面との間には毛細管現象で溶融半田M1が浸透する。この浸透した溶融半田M1に引かれ、接触部25bが接触しつつ通過したあとの接触領域には溶融半田M1がコテ部25dから回り込んで供給される。しかしながら、接触部25bの長さL1が長い場合には、接触領域すべての部分には溶融半田M1が供給されないおそれがあるため、図29に示す接触部25bの長さL1は短い方が好ましく、接合部nの幅の10~20%程度とするのが好適である。なお、接触部25bの上下面は、図29に示すような平坦な平面に限らず溝の形成された平面であってもよく、また曲面であってもよい。 In addition, when the guide part 25 moves along the outer periphery gap k, the molten solder M1 permeates between the contact part 25b and the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 by a capillary phenomenon. The molten solder M1 is drawn from the iron portion 25d and supplied to the contact area after the contact portion 25b passes through the contact portion 25b while being in contact with the molten solder M1. However, when the length L1 of the contact portion 25b is long, the molten solder M1 may not be supplied to all portions of the contact region. Therefore, it is preferable that the length L1 of the contact portion 25b shown in FIG. The width is preferably about 10 to 20% of the width of the junction n. The upper and lower surfaces of the contact portion 25b are not limited to a flat plane as shown in FIG. 29, and may be a plane in which a groove is formed, or may be a curved surface.
[第3-2例]
 本発明の第3-2例である溶融金属の供給筒及びその供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置について図31~図33を参照して説明する。
[Example 3-2]
A molten metal supply cylinder and a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder, which is a third-second example of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS.
 第3-1例の供給筒24は、案内部25を排出口24hの中心から下方にオフセットして取り付けた形態であったが、本例における供給筒26a、26c、26eは、排出口24hの中心或いは中心付近に案内部25を取り付ける一方で、排出口24hの下側の排出口24kから排出される溶融半田M1の量が上側の排出口24jから排出される量より少なくなるように構成したものである。 The supply cylinder 24 of the third example is a form in which the guide portion 25 is attached to be offset downward from the center of the discharge port 24h. However, the supply cylinders 26a, 26c, and 26e in this example are the same as the discharge port 24h. While the guide portion 25 is attached at or near the center, the amount of molten solder M1 discharged from the lower discharge port 24k of the discharge port 24h is configured to be smaller than the amount discharged from the upper discharge port 24j. Is.
 図31(a)に、下側の流路24qの端部に堰板26bを取り付けた供給筒26aを示す。この堰板26bは案内部25の下面と隙間を介して配設されており、その隙間が下側の排出口24kを形成している。図31(b)に示す供給筒26cは、上記と同様に堰板26dを配設したものであるが、案内部25との間に隙間を設けず、堰板26dの上方に小断面の溶融半田M1を通過させる通過穴を形成し、この穴を下側の排出口24kとしたものである。図31(c)の供給筒26eは、下側の流路24q内に堰部材26fが取り付けられたもので、下側の流路24qの容積を上部流路24pの容積より小さくしたものである。 FIG. 31 (a) shows a supply cylinder 26a having a weir plate 26b attached to the end of the lower flow path 24q. The dam plate 26b is disposed through a gap with the lower surface of the guide portion 25, and the gap forms a lower discharge port 24k. A supply cylinder 26c shown in FIG. 31 (b) is provided with a weir plate 26d in the same manner as described above. However, no gap is provided between the guide tube 25 and a small cross section is melted above the weir plate 26d. A passage hole through which the solder M1 passes is formed, and this hole is used as the lower discharge port 24k. A supply cylinder 26e in FIG. 31 (c) has a weir member 26f attached in the lower flow path 24q, and the volume of the lower flow path 24q is smaller than the volume of the upper flow path 24p. .
 以上、第3-1例、第3-2例の供給装置は、コテ部25dとガラス基板w3及びw4との間隙GuとGdを一定に維持するため案内部25に接触部25bを構成する突起体25aを設け、突起体25aを供給筒24の中に挿入し配置した例の供給装置であった。しかしながら、図32(a)に示す供給筒26gのように供給筒24に突起体25aを挿入させず、供給筒24の端面から出て直ぐの部分だけに突起体25aを形成し接触部25bとすることができる。また、図32(b)の供給筒26kに示すように、板状体25cの先端部に突起体25aを形成して接触部25bとすることもできる。なお、案内部25における板状体25c及び突起体25aは、金属、ガラス、セラミックスなどの同一材料、或いは別材料とすることができる。 As described above, in the supply devices of Examples 3-1 and 3-2, the protrusions constituting the contact portion 25b are formed on the guide portion 25 in order to keep the gaps Gu and Gd between the iron portion 25d and the glass substrates w3 and w4 constant. In this example, the body 25a is provided, and the protrusion 25a is inserted into the supply tube 24 and disposed. However, unlike the supply cylinder 26g shown in FIG. 32 (a), the protrusion 25a is not inserted into the supply cylinder 24, and the protrusion 25a is formed only on the part immediately coming out from the end surface of the supply cylinder 24, and the contact portion 25b. can do. Further, as shown in the supply cylinder 26k in FIG. 32 (b), a protrusion 25a can be formed at the tip of the plate-like body 25c to form the contact portion 25b. In addition, the plate-like body 25c and the protrusion 25a in the guide part 25 can be made of the same material such as metal, glass, ceramics, or different materials.
 また、図32(c)に示す供給筒26pのように、突起体を有しない厚さが同一な板状体26qのみを用いることもできる。これは、例えば一辺が数~十数cm程度の小サイズのガラス基板に対するように、ガラス基板の厚さバラツキやガラス基板の移動機構の案内振れなどが極めて小さく、間隙が無視できるほどしか変動しない場合などに適用するとよい。なお、この場合には、供給装置としては必ずしもフローティング機構で供給筒を支持しなくてもよい。 In addition, only a plate-like body 26q having the same thickness and having no protrusions, such as a supply cylinder 26p shown in FIG. 32 (c), can be used. This is because the variation in the thickness of the glass substrate and the guide deflection of the moving mechanism of the glass substrate are extremely small, such as for a small size glass substrate with a side of several to several tens of centimeters, and the gap fluctuates only to be negligible. It is good to apply to cases. In this case, the supply cylinder does not necessarily have to be supported by the floating mechanism as the supply device.
 以上の説明では理解を容易にするためガラス基板w3とw4の平面寸法は同一のものとしたが、これらは異なる寸法であっても対応することができる。すなわち、ガラス基板w3とw4の平面寸法が異なり、位置合わせした場合に双方の外縁端面が揃わず段差が形成される場合には、図33の供給筒26rに示すように、排出口24hが開口する排出面24nをその段差に応じた形状とすることで対応することができる。 In the above description, the planar dimensions of the glass substrates w3 and w4 are the same for easy understanding, but they can be handled even if they have different dimensions. That is, when the planar dimensions of the glass substrates w3 and w4 are different and the outer edges of the glass substrates w3 and w4 are not aligned and a step is formed, as shown in the supply tube 26r of FIG. 33, the discharge port 24h is opened. This can be dealt with by making the discharge surface 24n to be shaped according to the level difference.
[第4態様]
 上記(31)の溶融金属の供給筒、その供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置及び溶融金属の供給方法並びにそれらの望ましい態様について、以下その第4-1例、第4-2例、第4-3例に基づき説明する。
[Fourth aspect]
Regarding the molten metal supply cylinder (31), the molten metal supply apparatus in which the supply cylinder is incorporated, the molten metal supply method, and desirable modes thereof, Examples 4-1 and 4-2 will be described below. This will be described based on Example 4-3.
[第4-1例]
 本発明の第4-1例である溶融金属の供給筒及びその供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置について図34~図39を参照して説明する。図34は第4-1例における供給装置の主要部を示す部分断面図、図35は本例における供給筒の断面図、図36及び図37は本例の案内部及びその変形例を示す斜視図、図38は図36の案内部がガラス基板の外周間隙に挿入されて溶融半田が供給される時の状態を示す図、図39は図36の案内部の変形例を示す図である。
[4-1 example]
A molten metal supply cylinder and a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder according to Example 4-1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the main part of the supply device in Example 4-1, FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the supply cylinder in this example, and FIGS. 36 and 37 are perspective views showing the guide part in this example and its modifications. 38 is a view showing a state when the guide portion of FIG. 36 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap of the glass substrate and molten solder is supplied, and FIG. 39 is a view showing a modification of the guide portion of FIG.
 まず、本例の供給装置について説明する。供給装置は、図51(d)を参照して説明したガラス基板w3とw4の平面寸法が異なり、下側のガラス基板w4の端縁が上側のガラス基板w3の端縁を越えて突出しているガラスパネルWを製造する供給装置であり、供給筒27と、供給筒27を取り付けるホルダー27aと、ホルダー27aを主として上下にフローティングさせるフローティング機構27bと、フローティング機構27bを支持するケーシング27eとを備えている。フローティング機構27bは、適度な柔軟性を有したゴムやバネを上下に配設した構造で実現することができ、ガラス基板w3とw4或いは供給筒27に無理な力を作用させずに供給筒27の姿勢を保つことができる。なお、ホルダー27aに取り付けた超音波振動体27cを軸部材27dを介し供給筒27と接合し、供給筒27の長手方向に超音波振動を印加することが好ましい。 First, the supply device of this example will be described. In the supply apparatus, the planar dimensions of the glass substrates w3 and w4 described with reference to FIG. 51 (d) are different, and the edge of the lower glass substrate w4 protrudes beyond the edge of the upper glass substrate w3. A supply device for manufacturing the glass panel W, which includes a supply cylinder 27, a holder 27a for attaching the supply cylinder 27, a floating mechanism 27b for floating the holder 27a mainly up and down, and a casing 27e for supporting the floating mechanism 27b. Yes. The floating mechanism 27b can be realized by a structure in which rubbers and springs having appropriate flexibility are arranged above and below, and the supply cylinder 27 without applying an excessive force to the glass substrates w3 and w4 or the supply cylinder 27. Can keep the posture. In addition, it is preferable that the ultrasonic vibration body 27c attached to the holder 27a is joined to the supply cylinder 27 via the shaft member 27d, and the ultrasonic vibration is applied in the longitudinal direction of the supply cylinder 27.
 供給筒27は、側面上の一面27kと端面側の他面27lとに開口した円形断面の溶融半田M1が流通する流路27iを内部に有し、他面27l側に取り付けられた案内部28を備え、案内部28の先端部をガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kに挿入し、他面27l側の第2開口(以下第4-1例、第4-2例、第4-3例において排出口と言う。)27hから排出される溶融半田M1を外周間隙kに案内部28を介し供給する。
 供給筒27は、図34に示すように、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kに溶融半田M1を供給する時には、上側のガラス基板w3に対し突出した下側のガラス基板w4の突出部分と干渉しないように外周間隙kに対し所定の高さだけ上方に離れた位置に位置決めされる。従って、本例における案内部28は、上下方向における供給筒27の排出口27hと外周間隙kの高さの差に応じた段差を有する形状である。
The supply cylinder 27 has a flow path 27i through which molten solder M1 having a circular cross section opened to one surface 27k on the side surface and the other surface 271 on the end surface side flows, and a guide portion 28 attached to the other surface 271 side. The leading end of the guide portion 28 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and the second opening on the other surface 27l side (hereinafter referred to as Example 4-1, Example 4-2, Example 4-3). The molten solder M1 discharged from 27h is supplied to the outer peripheral gap k through the guide portion 28.
As shown in FIG. 34, when the molten solder M1 is supplied to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, the supply cylinder 27 interferes with the protruding portion of the lower glass substrate w4 that protrudes from the upper glass substrate w3. In order to avoid this, it is positioned at a position away from the outer peripheral gap k by a predetermined height. Accordingly, the guide portion 28 in the present example has a shape having a step corresponding to the difference in height between the discharge port 27h of the supply tube 27 and the outer circumferential gap k in the vertical direction.
 供給装置は、供給筒27を、その他面27lが上側のガラス基板w3の端面と所定の隙間sだけ隔てられた状態で、案内部28の先端部をガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kに挿入するとともに、外周間隙に沿って所定速度で一周できるように移動させる。
 なお、この移動動作は供給装置が全て行う必要はなく、ガラス基板w3とw4が載置されるテーブル等が分担して相対的に行ってもよい。このように、供給装置は、移動形態に合わせて種々の構造をとることができる。移動形態に基づく構造がどのようなものであれ、ガラス基板w3とw4の移動機構や供給装置の移動機構は公知の技術、例えば直線移動はモータとボールネジ又はリニアガイド等、旋回移動はモータまたはシリンダとベアリングを組み合わせて実現できる。上記ケーシング27eは、上下方向に位置を調節する治具等を介して移動機構に取り付けるとよい。このように構成することで、ガラス基板w4の厚さや間隙保持部材Pの高さに合わせて、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kに対する案内部25の高さを調節しておくことができる。
The supply device inserts the tip of the guide portion 28 into the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, with the other surface 271 separated from the end surface of the upper glass substrate w3 by a predetermined gap s. At the same time, it is moved along the outer peripheral gap so that it can make one round at a predetermined speed.
The moving operation need not be performed entirely by the supply device, and may be performed relatively by sharing the table on which the glass substrates w3 and w4 are placed. Thus, the supply apparatus can take various structures according to the movement form. Whatever the structure based on the movement form, the movement mechanism of the glass substrates w3 and w4 and the movement mechanism of the supply device are known techniques, for example, linear movement is a motor and a ball screw or a linear guide, and swivel movement is a motor or cylinder. This can be realized by combining the bearings. The casing 27e may be attached to the moving mechanism via a jig or the like that adjusts the position in the vertical direction. With this configuration, the height of the guide portion 25 relative to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 can be adjusted according to the thickness of the glass substrate w4 and the height of the gap holding member P.
 本例の案内部28について、図36~38を参照しながら説明する。案内部28は、図36(a)及び図38に示すように、その上面だけが流路27iに臨むように排出口27hの下部に取り付けられ、排出口27hから排出される溶融半田M1は基本的に上面のみで流れ、下面では流れないように構成されている。 The guide unit 28 of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 36A and 38, the guide portion 28 is attached to the lower portion of the discharge port 27h so that only the upper surface thereof faces the flow path 27i, and the molten solder M1 discharged from the discharge port 27h is basically the same. Therefore, it is configured to flow only on the upper surface and not on the lower surface.
 案内部28は、図36及び37に示すように、1段の階段状の板状体28cと、板状体28cの表面に形成された突起体28aとを備えている。板状体28cは、供給筒27に取り付けられる基端部28eと、外周間隙に挿入される先端部28dと、この間を連結する傾斜部28fとを有している。基端部28eは先端部28dと略平行に、傾斜部28fは先端部28dに対して所定の角度θをなすように配置される。この角度θは、傾斜部28fの水平方向の突出し寸法L、高さ方向の段差寸法Fで決まる角度である。この寸法L、Fは、供給筒27の他面27lとガラス基板w3との隙間s、供給筒27及び流路27iの外径寸法等をもとに決定する。角度θは通常は鈍角であるが、突出し寸法Lがゼロである場合もあり、この場合の角度θは90°である。上記板状体28cは、板材を2箇所屈曲して形成してもよく、ブロック体から切削加工で削りだして形成してもよい。 As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the guide portion 28 includes a single stepped plate-like body 28c and a protrusion 28a formed on the surface of the plate-like body 28c. The plate-like body 28c has a base end portion 28e attached to the supply cylinder 27, a tip end portion 28d inserted into the outer peripheral gap, and an inclined portion 28f connecting between the two. The proximal end portion 28e is disposed substantially parallel to the distal end portion 28d, and the inclined portion 28f is disposed so as to form a predetermined angle θ with respect to the distal end portion 28d. This angle θ is an angle determined by the protruding dimension L in the horizontal direction of the inclined portion 28f and the step dimension F in the height direction. The dimensions L and F are determined based on the gap s between the other surface 271 of the supply cylinder 27 and the glass substrate w3, the outer diameter dimensions of the supply cylinder 27 and the flow path 27i, and the like. The angle θ is usually an obtuse angle, but the protruding dimension L may be zero. In this case, the angle θ is 90 °. The plate-like body 28c may be formed by bending a plate material at two places, or may be formed by cutting from a block body by cutting.
 案内部28は、図38に示すように、板状体28cの先端部28dがガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kに挿入され、供給筒27の排出口27hから排出される溶融半田M1を外周間隙kに供給する。この案内部28は、外周間隙kに沿って移動させる時、溶融半田M1をガラス基板w3とw4の主面に摺動させる、いわゆる塗り込みながらガラス基板w3とw4との外縁間隔kに供給する。したがって、板状体28cの先端部28dは、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kの寸法gより小さな厚さT2である。先端部28dの先端からL2の範囲を以下コテ部28gと言う。コテ部28gの上下面は、ガラス基板w3とw4の主面と一定の間隙Gu及びGdを隔てて相対するよう配置される。 As shown in FIG. 38, the guide portion 28 has the tip 28d of the plate-like body 28c inserted into the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and the outer periphery of the molten solder M1 discharged from the discharge port 27h of the supply tube 27. Supply to gap k. When the guide portion 28 is moved along the outer peripheral gap k, the molten solder M1 is slid on the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, and is supplied to the outer edge interval k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 while being applied. . Therefore, the front end portion 28d of the plate-like body 28c has a thickness T2 smaller than the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4. The range of L2 from the tip of the tip portion 28d is hereinafter referred to as a trowel portion 28g. The upper and lower surfaces of the iron portion 28g are arranged to face the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 with a certain gap Gu and Gd therebetween.
 突起体28aは、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kに案内部28を挿入し移動する時、上下方向における外周間隙kの位置の変動等があっても、間隙GuとGdを一定に維持する。突起体28aは先端部28dに設けられるが、後述する他の目的ために先端部28d以外にも形成されることもある。以下、先端部28dに設けられた突起体28aを接触部28bと言う。接触部28bは先端部28dの上下面から突出し、その厚みT1は外周間隙kの寸法gとほぼ同一であり、外周間隙kに挿入されてガラス基板w3とw4の各々の主面と摺動可能な接触面を有している。なお、突起体28a(接触部28b)は板状体28c(先端部28d)に接着や積層プロセスなどで形成するとよい。これにより、板状体28cに用いられる例えば金属、ガラス、セラミックスなどと突起体28aを必ずしも同一材質としなくてもよく、摺動性や耐磨耗性など要求される機能に合わせて適宜な材質を用いることができる。なお、突起体28aは板状体28cと一体的に形成してもよい。 When the guide 28 is inserted and moved in the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, the protrusion 28a maintains the gaps Gu and Gd constant even if there is a change in the position of the outer peripheral gap k in the vertical direction. . The protrusion 28a is provided at the tip 28d, but may be formed other than the tip 28d for other purposes to be described later. Hereinafter, the protrusion 28a provided at the distal end portion 28d is referred to as a contact portion 28b. The contact portion 28b protrudes from the upper and lower surfaces of the tip end portion 28d, and its thickness T1 is substantially the same as the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k. The contact portion 28b is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k and can slide on the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4. Has a good contact surface. The protrusion 28a (contact portion 28b) may be formed on the plate-like body 28c (tip portion 28d) by adhesion or a lamination process. Thus, for example, the metal, glass, ceramics and the like used for the plate-like body 28c do not necessarily have to be made of the same material, and an appropriate material according to the required function such as slidability and wear resistance. Can be used. The protrusion 28a may be formed integrally with the plate-like body 28c.
 上記案内部28によれば、案内部28を外周間隙kに挿入するに際し、接触部28bを外周間隙kに嵌合することによって、外周間隙kにおけるコテ部28gの上下方向の位置が規定される。すなわち、コテ部28gの上面とガラス基板w3との間の第1の間隙Gu,コテ部28gの下面とガラス基板w4との間の第2の間隙Gdを一定に維持することができる。接触部28bには、ガラス基板w3及びw4との滑り性をよくするための表面処理、例えばNi撥水メッキを施すことが好ましい。また、接触部28bには、外周間隙kに嵌入し易くするために、嵌入方向にある角部に面取りを施すことが好ましい。この面取りは、角部を直線状或いは曲線状に丸めた部位のことで、切削加工、砥粒加工、エッチング等で形成することができる。 According to the guide part 28, when the guide part 28 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k, the vertical position of the iron part 28g in the outer peripheral gap k is defined by fitting the contact part 28b into the outer peripheral gap k. . That is, the first gap Gu between the upper surface of the iron part 28g and the glass substrate w3 and the second gap Gd between the lower surface of the iron part 28g and the glass substrate w4 can be maintained constant. The contact portion 28b is preferably subjected to surface treatment for improving the slipperiness with the glass substrates w3 and w4, for example, Ni water repellent plating. Further, it is preferable to chamfer the corner portion in the insertion direction in order to make the contact portion 28b easily fit into the outer circumferential gap k. This chamfering is a part in which a corner is rounded into a straight line or a curve, and can be formed by cutting, abrasive processing, etching, or the like.
 排出口27hからの溶融半田M1は案内部28の上面に排出される。本例の案内部28の上面には、好ましい態様として、溶融半田M1を先端部28dに円滑に導くための案内溝28hが設けられている。複数の線状の案内溝28hは、溶融半田M1の排出方向である排出口27h近傍の流路27iの軸心に沿い、基端部28e、傾斜部28f、先端部28dの上面に連続的に形成されている。なお、案内溝は、図36(a)に示す態様に限定されることなく、例えば図36(b)に示す案内部29のように、板状体28cに所定幅、深さの一条の案内溝29aを設けた態様としてもよく、図37(a)に示す案内部30のように、突起体28aを傾斜部28f及び基端部28eまで延設し、その突起体28aを側壁とした案内溝30aを設けた態様とすることができる。案内溝の構成は、溶融半田M1の流通性や外周間隙kの寸法gなどに合わせて、適宜単独あるいは複合構造で形成するとよい。 The molten solder M1 from the discharge port 27h is discharged to the upper surface of the guide portion 28. A guide groove 28h for smoothly guiding the molten solder M1 to the distal end portion 28d is provided on the upper surface of the guide portion 28 of this example as a preferred embodiment. The plurality of linear guide grooves 28h are continuous with the upper surface of the base end portion 28e, the inclined portion 28f, and the tip end portion 28d along the axis of the flow path 27i in the vicinity of the discharge port 27h, which is the discharge direction of the molten solder M1. Is formed. The guide groove is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 36 (a), but a guide having a predetermined width and depth on the plate-like body 28c, such as a guide portion 29 shown in FIG. 36 (b). A groove 29a may be provided, and as in the guide portion 30 shown in FIG. 37 (a), the protrusion 28a extends to the inclined portion 28f and the base end portion 28e, and the protrusion 28a serves as a side wall. It can be set as the aspect which provided the groove | channel 30a. The structure of the guide groove may be suitably formed as a single structure or a composite structure in accordance with the flowability of the molten solder M1 and the dimension g of the outer peripheral gap k.
 溶融半田M1は、案内部28の上面を流れて第1の間隙Guに供給される。本例の供給筒では、好ましい態様として、その第1の間隙Guに供給された溶融半田M1を第2の間隙Gdに導入するために、図36及び37(a)に示すように、厚み方向に先端部28dを貫通した貫通穴29bまたは切り欠き28jで構成された貫通部28iが先端部28dに設けられている。なお、図37(b)に示す案内部31のように、案内部28が外周間隙kに挿入され移動する際の矢印で示す移動方向に対面する先端部の側面に切欠き部31aを設け、第1の間隙Guに導入された溶融半田M1を第2の間隙Gdに導入するようにしてもよい。この切欠き部31aも貫通部28iの一態様である。 The molten solder M1 flows on the upper surface of the guide portion 28 and is supplied to the first gap Gu. In the supply cylinder of this example, as a preferred mode, in order to introduce the molten solder M1 supplied to the first gap Gu into the second gap Gd, as shown in FIGS. 36 and 37 (a), the thickness direction A through hole 28b formed by a through hole 29b or a notch 28j penetrating the tip 28d is provided in the tip 28d. Note that, as in the guide portion 31 shown in FIG. 37 (b), a notch portion 31a is provided on the side surface of the tip portion facing the moving direction indicated by the arrow when the guide portion 28 is inserted and moved in the outer circumferential gap k. The molten solder M1 introduced into the first gap Gu may be introduced into the second gap Gd. The notch 31a is also an embodiment of the through portion 28i.
 かかる貫通部28iを設けることにより、外周間隙kに挿入した案内部28が外周間隙kに沿って移動するに伴い、第1の間隙Guに導入された溶融半田M1は第2の間隙Gdに良好に導かれる。その結果、案内部28の移動方向において案内部28の後方の外周間隙kには間隙GuとGdから溶融半田M1が回り込んで供給され、コテ部28gによりガラス基板w3とw4の主面に塗り込まれる。ここで、溶融金属M1の供給幅はコテ部28gの長さL2でほぼ規定され、安定した供給幅を得ることができる。なお、コテ部28gの厚さT2は、溶融半田M1をガラス基板w3とw4に均一な面圧で接触させながら塗り込める間隙Gu及びGdの寸法に基づいて設定される。溶融半田M1がコテ部28gに追従して一緒に移動し、ガラス基板w3とw4に良好に塗り込められるためには、間隙GuとGdは狭い方が好ましい。また、溶融半田M1の追従性を高めるため、コテ部28gの表面に移動方向に交差する微細な溝を形成することが好ましい。 By providing the penetrating portion 28i, the molten solder M1 introduced into the first gap Gu is good in the second gap Gd as the guide portion 28 inserted into the outer gap k moves along the outer gap k. Led to. As a result, in the moving direction of the guide portion 28, the molten solder M1 is supplied from the gaps Gu and Gd to the outer peripheral gap k behind the guide portion 28, and is applied to the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 by the iron portion 28g. Is included. Here, the supply width of the molten metal M1 is substantially defined by the length L2 of the iron part 28g, and a stable supply width can be obtained. The thickness T2 of the iron part 28g is set based on the dimensions of the gaps Gu and Gd that can be applied while bringing the molten solder M1 into contact with the glass substrates w3 and w4 with a uniform surface pressure. The gaps Gu and Gd are preferably narrow so that the molten solder M1 moves together following the iron part 28g and can be satisfactorily applied to the glass substrates w3 and w4. Further, in order to improve the followability of the molten solder M1, it is preferable to form a fine groove that intersects the moving direction on the surface of the iron part 28g.
 供給筒27について説明する。供給筒27は、一面27kに形成された第1開口27gから溶融半田M1を供給し、他面27lに形成された第2開口である排出口27hから排出する。この第1開口27gに供給される溶融半田M1は、例えば糸ハンダMを第1開口27gに所定の速度で送り込みながら供給筒27で溶融し、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kを充分に満たすべき供給量に基づき制御された流量で供給される。 The supply cylinder 27 will be described. The supply cylinder 27 supplies the molten solder M1 from the first opening 27g formed on the one surface 27k, and discharges it from the discharge port 27h which is the second opening formed on the other surface 27l. The molten solder M1 supplied to the first opening 27g is melted by the supply cylinder 27 while feeding, for example, the thread solder M to the first opening 27g at a predetermined speed, and sufficiently fills the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4. It is supplied at a controlled flow rate based on the supply amount.
 供給筒27は、図35に示すように、糸ハンダMを溶融して形成された溶融半田M1が流通する流路27iと、流路27iの第1開口27gが形成され糸ハンダMを溶融する溶融面27kと、排出口27hが形成された排出面27lとを有し、その外周面には糸ハンダMを溶融するためのヒータ27jが巻回されている。かかる構成の供給筒27によれば、下端面が第1開口27gを閉塞する姿勢で溶融面27kに当接するよう制御された速度で糸半田Mを送り出し、溶融面27kに押し付けて溶融する。すると、溶融半田M1は流路27iを流通して排出口27hから連続的に排出される。 As shown in FIG. 35, the supply cylinder 27 has a flow path 27i through which the molten solder M1 formed by melting the thread solder M and a first opening 27g of the flow path 27i are formed to melt the thread solder M. It has a melting surface 27k and a discharge surface 27l in which a discharge port 27h is formed, and a heater 27j for melting the yarn solder M is wound around the outer peripheral surface thereof. According to the supply cylinder 27 having such a configuration, the thread solder M is sent out at a controlled speed so that the lower end surface is in contact with the melting surface 27k so as to close the first opening 27g, and is pressed against the melting surface 27k to be melted. Then, the molten solder M1 flows through the flow path 27i and is continuously discharged from the discharge port 27h.
 第1開口27gが開口する溶融面27kは、供給筒27の側面を例えばザグリ加工して形成した凹状部の底面である。第1開口27gの直径ΦBは、溶融面27kと当接する糸ハンダMの端面の直径ΦA未満であり、流路27iは溶融面27k近傍では直径ΦBの管状に形成される。これにより、糸ハンダMの外周面に酸化物Eが生成していても、酸化物Eの流路27iへの流入は第1開口27gの外周縁部、すなわち溶融面27kにより阻止され、酸化物Eがほとんど混入しない清浄な溶融半田M1のみが流路27iへ流入する。なお、大気中で保管された糸ハンダMの表面に生成している酸化物Eの層の厚さは通常数十μm程度であるので、糸ハンダMと第1開口24gの直径の差、すなわちΦA-ΦBは1mm前後としておけば十分である。 The melting surface 27k through which the first opening 27g opens is a bottom surface of a concave portion formed by, for example, counterboring the side surface of the supply cylinder 27. The diameter ΦB of the first opening 27g is less than the diameter ΦA of the end surface of the thread solder M that contacts the melting surface 27k, and the flow path 27i is formed in a tubular shape having a diameter ΦB in the vicinity of the melting surface 27k. Thereby, even if the oxide E is generated on the outer peripheral surface of the thread solder M, the inflow of the oxide E into the flow path 27i is blocked by the outer peripheral edge portion of the first opening 27g, that is, the melting surface 27k. Only clean molten solder M1 in which E hardly mixes flows into the flow path 27i. Since the thickness of the oxide E layer generated on the surface of the yarn solder M stored in the atmosphere is usually about several tens of μm, the difference in diameter between the yarn solder M and the first opening 24g, that is, It is sufficient to set ΦA-ΦB to around 1 mm.
 なお、溶融面27kを取り囲むように供給筒27の周廻りに周壁27mを形成することが好ましい。流路27iへの流入が阻止された酸化物Eは、溶融面27kの凹状の底部に貯留されるが、吸引したり或いは周壁27mの一部を切り欠いて流出させ適宜に回収すればよい。また、排出面27lに近い流路27iの末端部は、排出面27lとほぼ直交するように形成することが好ましい。これにより、ガラス基板w3の外周端面に隙間sで隔てて排出面27lが対向するように供給筒27を位置決めすると、排出面24nの近傍の流路24iは外周間隙kに対して平行な状態となる。 In addition, it is preferable to form a peripheral wall 27m around the supply cylinder 27 so as to surround the melting surface 27k. The oxide E, which is prevented from flowing into the flow path 27i, is stored in the concave bottom of the melting surface 27k, but may be sucked out or removed by cutting out a part of the peripheral wall 27m and recovered appropriately. Moreover, it is preferable to form the terminal part of the flow path 27i close to the discharge surface 27l so as to be substantially orthogonal to the discharge surface 27l. Thus, when the supply cylinder 27 is positioned so that the discharge surface 27l faces the outer peripheral end surface of the glass substrate w3 with a gap s, the flow path 24i in the vicinity of the discharge surface 24n is in a state parallel to the outer peripheral gap k. Become.
 なお、図36(a)の供給筒27では、排出面27の下部に切欠き溝を設け、基端部28eが流路27iに露出する状態となるよう基端部28eを切欠き溝に差し込むことで供給筒27に案内部28は組み込まれている。しかしながら、案内部28は上面が流路27iに露出していなくても、排出口27hから排出された溶融半田M1が上面のみを流れるように構成すればよい。図39(a)に示す供給筒32のように、流路27iを含むように供給筒27の下部を排出面27lから所定の長さ軸方向に切欠いて切欠き部を形成し、その切欠き部を塞ぐように基端部28eの上面を密着し、これらを接合した態様としてもよい。この切欠き部と基端部28eとの接合部の間に隙間が生じる場合には、この隙間を封止するような封止板32aが設けられる。
 また、図39(b)に示す供給筒32のように、供給筒27の下部に流路27iが露出しない取付け面を軸方向に形成し、その取付け面に基端部28eの上面を密着し、これらを接合した態様としてもよい。また、図36(a)に示す供給筒27において、流路27iが露出しないように供給筒27の筒体の部分に排出面27lから挿入穴を設け、この挿入穴に案内部28を挿入して組み込んでもよい。
36A, a notch groove is provided below the discharge surface 27, and the base end portion 28e is inserted into the notch groove so that the base end portion 28e is exposed to the flow path 27i. Thus, the guide portion 28 is incorporated in the supply cylinder 27. However, the guide portion 28 may be configured such that the molten solder M1 discharged from the discharge port 27h flows only on the upper surface even if the upper surface is not exposed to the flow path 27i. Like the supply cylinder 32 shown in FIG. 39 (a), a lower portion of the supply cylinder 27 is cut out from the discharge surface 27l in a predetermined length axial direction so as to include the flow path 27i to form a notch. It is good also as an aspect which stuck the upper surface of the base end part 28e so that a part may be plugged up, and joined these. In the case where a gap is generated between the joint between the notch and the base end portion 28e, a sealing plate 32a is provided to seal the gap.
Further, as in the supply cylinder 32 shown in FIG. 39 (b), an attachment surface in which the flow path 27i is not exposed is formed in the lower portion of the supply cylinder 27 in the axial direction, and the upper surface of the base end portion 28e is adhered to the attachment surface. These may be joined together. In addition, in the supply cylinder 27 shown in FIG. 36A, an insertion hole is provided in the cylindrical portion of the supply cylinder 27 so as not to expose the flow path 27i, and the guide portion 28 is inserted into the insertion hole. May be incorporated.
 また、図36(a)の供給筒27では案内部28の先端部28dと基端部28eとは平行に配置されているが、先端部28dと基端部28eとが所定の角度で交差するように配置されていてもよい。 In addition, in the supply cylinder 27 of FIG. 36A, the distal end portion 28d and the proximal end portion 28e of the guide portion 28 are arranged in parallel, but the distal end portion 28d and the proximal end portion 28e intersect at a predetermined angle. It may be arranged as follows.
 上記供給筒24による溶融半田M1の供給動作について説明する。溶融半田M1の供給に際し、供給装置は、供給筒27おける溶融半田M1の流通状態が定常状態にある時にガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kに沿って移動するよう構成されている。この定常状態とは、排出口27hから案内部28の上面に溶融半田M1が排出され外周間隙kに導入可能な状態をいい、図38に示すように、排出口27hが溶融半田M1でほぼ満たされた状態である。ここで、第1開口27gから溶融半田M1が供給され初めてからこの定常状態に達するまでの時間はできるだけ短い方がよい。このため、非定常状態である溶融半田M1の供給開始時では溶融半田M1で流路27iが迅速に満たされ、定常状態では外周間隙kを充分に満たすことができる充填可能な流量となるように溶融半田M1の供給量は制御されている。 The operation of supplying the molten solder M1 by the supply cylinder 24 will be described. When supplying the molten solder M1, the supply device is configured to move along the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 when the flow state of the molten solder M1 in the supply cylinder 27 is in a steady state. This steady state means a state in which the molten solder M1 is discharged from the discharge port 27h onto the upper surface of the guide portion 28 and can be introduced into the outer circumferential gap k. As shown in FIG. 38, the discharge port 27h is almost filled with the molten solder M1. It is the state that was done. Here, it is preferable that the time from when the molten solder M1 is supplied from the first opening 27g until the steady state is reached is as short as possible. For this reason, the flow path 27i is quickly filled with the molten solder M1 at the start of supply of the molten solder M1, which is in an unsteady state, and in a steady state, the flow rate is such that the outer peripheral gap k can be sufficiently filled. The supply amount of the molten solder M1 is controlled.
 定常状態において、図38に示すように、排出口27hから排出された溶融半田M1は、案内部28の上面のみから外周間隙kに供給されているため、まず第1の間隙Guに導入された後、第1の間隙Guを経て第2の間隙Gdへ導入される。この時、溶融半田M1は、傾斜部28fの上面とガラス基板w3との隙間sを満たしながら第1の間隙Guに導入される。ここで、溶融半田M1は傾斜部28fを流下し、かつ案内部28には溶融半田M1の流下方向に沿い案内溝28hが形成されているので、溶融半田M1は極めて円滑に第1の間隙Guへ導入される。一方、傾斜部28fの上面とガラス基板w3との隙間sに存在する溶融半田M1は先端部28dが存在するので、傾斜部28fから漏れることはほとんどない。従って、図51(e)に示すように、下側のガラス基板w4の突出部分に溶融半田M1が漏出しない接合部nを形成することができる。 In the steady state, as shown in FIG. 38, the molten solder M1 discharged from the discharge port 27h is supplied to the outer peripheral gap k only from the upper surface of the guide portion 28, and is therefore first introduced into the first gap Gu. After that, it is introduced into the second gap Gd through the first gap Gu. At this time, the molten solder M1 is introduced into the first gap Gu while filling the gap s between the upper surface of the inclined portion 28f and the glass substrate w3. Here, since the molten solder M1 flows down the inclined portion 28f and the guide groove 28h is formed in the guide portion 28 along the flowing direction of the molten solder M1, the molten solder M1 is very smoothly formed in the first gap Gu. Introduced into. On the other hand, the molten solder M1 present in the gap s between the upper surface of the inclined portion 28f and the glass substrate w3 has almost no leakage from the inclined portion 28f because the tip portion 28d exists. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 51 (e), the joint n where the molten solder M1 does not leak can be formed in the protruding portion of the lower glass substrate w4.
 上記供給筒27を用いると、供給された清浄な溶融半田M1は、排出面27lとガラス基板w3の端面との隙間s及び間隙Gu及びGdでわずかに外部雰囲気と触れるだけでガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kに充填される。従って、供給された清浄な溶融半田M1は、大気雰囲気であっても酸化が抑制された状態でガラス基板w3とw4の主面と接触する。したがって、本例の供給装置は、適切な量の酸素を介しガラスと優れた接合性を有するSnAgAl系合金ハンダを使用するのに好適である。なお、溶融半田M1の充填性を向上するためには、案内部27の表面の少なくとも溶融半田M1が接触する面に溶融半田M1との濡れ性を高める処理、例えばAg、Cr、Al、Mo、W、V、Nb、Taなどを被覆することが好ましく、また、溶融半田M1で案内部27の表面が溶食され溶融半田M1に不純物が混入しないように溶食防止処理としての窒化処理を施すことが好ましい。なお、これらの処理は流路27iの表面に対しても行うことが好ましい。 When the supply cylinder 27 is used, the supplied clean molten solder M1 is slightly exposed to the external atmosphere at the gaps s and the gaps Gu and Gd between the discharge surface 27l and the end surface of the glass substrate w3. The outer peripheral gap k is filled. Accordingly, the supplied clean molten solder M1 comes into contact with the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 in a state in which oxidation is suppressed even in an air atmosphere. Therefore, the supply device of this example is suitable for using SnAgAl alloy solder having excellent bonding properties with glass through an appropriate amount of oxygen. In order to improve the filling property of the molten solder M1, a process for increasing the wettability with the molten solder M1, for example, Ag, Cr, Al, Mo, It is preferable to coat W, V, Nb, Ta, etc., and a nitriding treatment is performed as a corrosion preventing treatment so that the surface of the guide portion 27 is eroded by molten solder M1 and impurities are not mixed into the molten solder M1. It is preferable. In addition, it is preferable to perform these processes also on the surface of the flow path 27i.
 次に、本例の供給装置による外周間隙kへの溶融半田M1の供給動作を説明する。発熱体が内蔵されたXY2軸方向に移動可能なテーブルに、所定寸法の間隙保持部材Pを介して上下にセットされたガラス基板w3とw4を位置決めし、ガラス基板w3とw4を溶融半田M1の溶融温度程度に加熱する。供給筒27は、その案内部28のコテ部28gがガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kにおいて一辺端部の所定位置に挿入され、ガラス基板w3の端面と排出面27lとに所定の隙間sが形成されるよう移動される。この時、コテ部28gは外周間隙kの上下方向において中心近傍にくるように予め取り付け位置が調節されているが、厳密に外周間隙kの中央に調整するのは難しい。しかしながら、この調節が良好に行われていないと、コテ部28gは外周間隙kに挿入されるにしても、接触部28bが上下いずれかのガラス基板w3またはw4の端面に当たってしまう可能性がある。ここで、供給筒27は上下方向にフローティング機構で支持されており、また接触部28bには面取りが施されているので、接触部28bは容易に外周間隙kに嵌入される。これにより、コテ部28gは外周間隙kの上下方向においてほぼ中央に位置決めされ、コテ部28gとガラス基板w3及びw4の間隙GuとGdは上下ともほぼ同じとなる。 Next, the supply operation of the molten solder M1 to the outer peripheral gap k by the supply device of this example will be described. The glass substrates w3 and w4 set up and down via a gap holding member P of a predetermined size are positioned on a table that can move in the XY2 axis direction with a built-in heating element, and the glass substrates w3 and w4 are made of the molten solder M1. Heat to about melting temperature. In the supply cylinder 27, the iron part 28g of the guide part 28 is inserted into a predetermined position at one end of the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and a predetermined gap s is formed between the end surface of the glass substrate w3 and the discharge surface 27l. Moved to form. At this time, the mounting position of the iron part 28g is adjusted in advance so as to be near the center in the vertical direction of the outer peripheral gap k, but it is difficult to adjust precisely to the center of the outer peripheral gap k. However, if this adjustment is not performed satisfactorily, even if the iron part 28g is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k, there is a possibility that the contact part 28b hits the end surface of either the upper or lower glass substrate w3 or w4. Here, since the supply cylinder 27 is supported by a floating mechanism in the vertical direction, and the contact portion 28b is chamfered, the contact portion 28b is easily fitted into the outer peripheral gap k. Thereby, the iron part 28g is positioned substantially in the center in the vertical direction of the outer peripheral gap k, and the gaps Gu and Gd between the iron part 28g and the glass substrates w3 and w4 are substantially the same both in the vertical direction.
 溶融半田M1は制御された所定流量が流路27iに供給されるので、短時間で定常状態に達し、外周間隙kの一辺に溶融半田M1を供給するためガラス基板w3とw4を直ぐに一方向(X方向)に所定速度で移動させることができる。この間、溶融半田M1は間隙GuとGdに導入され、ガラス基板w3とw4との外周間隙kに供給されていくが、案内部28の下面からは溶融半田M1は供給されないので、下側のガラス基板w4の突出部分に溶融半田M1が漏れることはない。また、接触部28bは、外周間隙kに嵌入しかつフローティング状態にあるので、ガラス基板w4の厚さのバラツキやX方向へのテーブルの上下方向のうねりなどガラス基板w3とw4の移動に際して生じる外周間隙kの上下方向における位置変動に対しても追従し、間隙GuとGdはそれぞれの寸法が維持される。これにより、溶融半田M1はコテ部28gの上下面に沿ってほぼ同量導入されるので、コテ部28gの移動に伴って移動する溶融半田M1の流動状態は間隙GuとGdでほぼ同一となり、溶融半田M1はガラス基板w3の主面に対してもガラス基板w4の主面に対しても同じように供給される。 Since the controlled flow rate of the molten solder M1 is supplied to the flow path 27i, the steady state is reached in a short time, and the glass substrates w3 and w4 are immediately unidirectionally supplied to supply the molten solder M1 to one side of the outer peripheral gap k ( X direction) can be moved at a predetermined speed. During this time, the molten solder M1 is introduced into the gaps Gu and Gd and supplied to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4. However, since the molten solder M1 is not supplied from the lower surface of the guide portion 28, the lower glass The molten solder M1 does not leak into the protruding portion of the substrate w4. Further, since the contact portion 28b is fitted in the outer peripheral gap k and is in a floating state, the outer periphery generated when the glass substrates w3 and w4 are moved, such as the thickness variation of the glass substrate w4 and the vertical swell of the table in the X direction. The position changes in the vertical direction of the gap k, and the dimensions of the gaps Gu and Gd are maintained. As a result, the molten solder M1 is introduced in substantially the same amount along the upper and lower surfaces of the iron portion 28g, so that the flow state of the molten solder M1 that moves with the movement of the iron portion 28g is substantially the same in the gaps Gu and Gd. The molten solder M1 is supplied in the same manner to the main surface of the glass substrate w3 and to the main surface of the glass substrate w4.
 また、充填中に超音波振動を作動させ案内部28に超音波振動を印加すると、溶融半田M1と案内部28、および溶融半田M1とガラス基板w3及びw4の濡れ性が向上し、間隙GuとGdが狭い場合でも溶融半田M1は円滑に供給される。この超音波振動は溶融半田M1を介してガラス基板w3とw4の主面にも作用し、溶融半田M1とガラス基板w3及びw4の接触界面に存在する気泡や酸化膜等の異物を除去する。したがって、ガラス基板w3とw4に対する溶融半田M1の接合性を高めることができ、ガラスパネルWの接合強度の向上のために有効である。 Further, when the ultrasonic vibration is applied during the filling and the ultrasonic vibration is applied to the guide portion 28, the wettability of the molten solder M1 and the guide portion 28, and the molten solder M1 and the glass substrates w3 and w4 is improved, and the gap Gu and Even when Gd is narrow, the molten solder M1 is supplied smoothly. This ultrasonic vibration also acts on the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 via the molten solder M1, and removes foreign matters such as bubbles and oxide films existing at the contact interface between the molten solder M1 and the glass substrates w3 and w4. Therefore, the bondability of the molten solder M1 to the glass substrates w3 and w4 can be enhanced, and it is effective for improving the bonding strength of the glass panel W.
 上記ように外周間隙kの一辺における溶融半田M1の供給が完了すると、供給筒27を装着したケーシング27eは90度水平方向に旋回し、次いで、ガラス基板w3とw4は上記一辺と直交する他辺の沿い水平移動する。そして、その他辺においても上記一辺と同様に、ガラス基板w4の突出部分に溶融半田M1が漏れることなく外周間隙kに溶融金属M1は供給される。この動作を順次各辺に対して行い、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kの全てに溶融半田M1が供給され、ガラス基板w4の突出部分に漏出することなく溶融半田M1は供給される。このガラス基板w3とw4への供給作業が完了すると、ガラス基板w3とw4を載置したテーブルは外部へ移し替えられる。なお、外部に搬出されたテーブルからガラス基板w3とw4は取除かれるが、テーブル上には溶融半田M1が付着していないので、テーブルから半田を除去する作業は必要ない。 When the supply of the molten solder M1 in one side of the outer peripheral gap k is completed as described above, the casing 27e fitted with the supply cylinder 27 turns 90 degrees horizontally, and then the glass substrates w3 and w4 are the other sides orthogonal to the one side. Move horizontally along In the other side, similarly to the one side, the molten metal M1 is supplied to the outer peripheral gap k without the molten solder M1 leaking into the protruding portion of the glass substrate w4. This operation is sequentially performed on each side, and the molten solder M1 is supplied to all the outer peripheral gaps k of the glass substrates w3 and w4, and the molten solder M1 is supplied without leaking to the protruding portion of the glass substrate w4. When the supply operation to the glass substrates w3 and w4 is completed, the table on which the glass substrates w3 and w4 are placed is transferred to the outside. Although the glass substrates w3 and w4 are removed from the table carried out to the outside, the operation of removing the solder from the table is not necessary because the molten solder M1 is not attached on the table.
 引き続いて、別のガラス基板w3とw4を載置して加熱準備していた別のテーブルが新たに載せられ、新たなガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kへ上記した供給動作と同様にして溶融半田M1の供給作業が行われる。ここで、新たなガラス基板w3とw4は、ガラス基板w4の厚さ精度の違いやガラス基板w3とw4のテーブルへの取付状態の違いにより上下方向における外周間隙kの位置が相異している可能性がある。この場合でも、本例の供給装置によれば、供給筒28は上下方向にフローティング機構で支持されており、また接触部28bには面取りが施されているので、上下方向においてコテ部28gを外周間隙kの中心位置に挿入でき、間隙GuとGdの寸法を維持した状態で溶融半田M1を充填できる。 Subsequently, another table on which the other glass substrates w3 and w4 are placed and prepared for heating is newly placed and melted in the same manner as the above-described supply operation to the outer peripheral gap k between the new glass substrates w3 and w4. Supply work of the solder M1 is performed. Here, the position of the outer peripheral gap k in the vertical direction is different between the new glass substrates w3 and w4 due to the difference in thickness accuracy of the glass substrate w4 and the mounting state of the glass substrates w3 and w4 on the table. there is a possibility. Even in this case, according to the supply device of this example, the supply tube 28 is supported by the floating mechanism in the vertical direction, and the contact portion 28b is chamfered. It can be inserted at the center position of the gap k, and the molten solder M1 can be filled while maintaining the dimensions of the gaps Gu and Gd.
 なお、案内部28が外周間隙kに沿って移動する時、接触部28bとガラス基板w3及びw4の主面との間には毛細管現象で溶融半田M1が浸透する。この浸透した溶融半田M1に引かれ、接触部28bが接触しつつ通過したあとの接触領域には溶融半田M1がコテ部28gから回り込んで供給される。しかしながら、接触部28bの長さが長い場合には、接触領域すべての部分には溶融半田M1が供給されないおそれがあるため、接触部28bの長さは短い方が好ましく、接合部nの幅の10~20%程度とするのが好適である。なお、接触部28bの上下面は、図36または37に示すような平坦な平面に限らず溝の形成された平面であってもよく、また曲面であってもよい。 In addition, when the guide part 28 moves along the outer periphery gap k, the molten solder M1 permeates between the contact part 28b and the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 by a capillary phenomenon. The molten solder M1 wraps around from the iron portion 28g and is supplied to the contact area after the contact portion 28b passes through the contact portion 28b while being in contact with the molten solder M1. However, when the length of the contact portion 28b is long, the molten solder M1 may not be supplied to all portions of the contact region. Therefore, it is preferable that the length of the contact portion 28b is short and the width of the joint portion n. It is preferably about 10 to 20%. The upper and lower surfaces of the contact portion 28b are not limited to a flat plane as shown in FIG. 36 or 37, and may be a plane in which a groove is formed, or may be a curved surface.
[第4-2例]
 本発明の第4-2例である溶融金属の供給筒及びその供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置について図40を参照して説明する。
[Example 4-2]
A molten metal supply cylinder and a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder according to the 4-2 example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
 第4-1例では、供給筒27を、先端部28dと基端部28eとこれを連結する傾斜部28fを有した2箇所で屈曲された段差形状を有する板状体28cを案内部28の要素とした例で説明した。一方で、本例における供給筒33は、図40に示すように、所定の角度θだけ開いたL字形状の板状体33cを案内部の要素としている。すなわち、板状体33cは、1箇所で屈曲された形状で、先端部33dと傾斜部33eとを有しており、流路27iに対し平行な姿勢で排出口33bの底部に傾斜部33eは取り付けられている。本例の供給筒33は、上記供給筒27と同様に板状体33cの上面のみを溶融半田M1が流動して外周間隙kへ溶融半田M1を供給することができ、上記供給筒27に比べ板状体33cの形状を簡素化できる。加えて、本例の供給筒33では、外周間隙kに溶融半田M1を供給する時には、外周間隙kに対し流路27iが所定の角度θだけ傾き、流路27iが下方へ傾斜するように供給筒33は配置される。したがって、流路27iの中にある溶融半田M1は下方に流出しやすく、流路27iにおける溶融半田M1の流動性が高い。そのため、外周間隙kに良好に溶融半田M1を供給することができる。 In the fourth example, the supply tube 27 is formed by replacing the plate-like body 28c having a stepped shape bent at two locations having a distal end portion 28d, a proximal end portion 28e, and an inclined portion 28f that connects the distal end portion 28d with the guide portion 28. Described in the example of elements. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40, the supply cylinder 33 in this example uses an L-shaped plate 33c opened by a predetermined angle θ as an element of the guide portion. That is, the plate-like body 33c is bent at one place, has a tip portion 33d and an inclined portion 33e, and the inclined portion 33e is at the bottom of the discharge port 33b in a posture parallel to the flow path 27i. It is attached. The supply cylinder 33 of this example can supply the molten solder M1 to the outer peripheral gap k by flowing the molten solder M1 only on the upper surface of the plate-like body 33c, as in the case of the supply cylinder 27. The shape of the plate-like body 33c can be simplified. In addition, in the supply cylinder 33 of this example, when the molten solder M1 is supplied to the outer circumferential gap k, the flow path 27i is inclined with respect to the outer circumferential gap k by a predetermined angle θ, and the flow path 27i is inclined downward. The cylinder 33 is arranged. Therefore, the molten solder M1 in the flow path 27i tends to flow downward, and the fluidity of the molten solder M1 in the flow path 27i is high. Therefore, the molten solder M1 can be supplied to the outer peripheral gap k satisfactorily.
[第4-3例]
 本発明の第4-3例である溶融金属の供給筒及びその供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置について図41を参照して説明する。
[Example 4-3]
A molten metal supply cylinder and a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder, which is a fourth example of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIG.
 第4-1例、第4-2例の供給筒27、33は、1箇所或いは2箇所で屈曲された板状体を用いたものであったが、本例における供給筒34と35は、先端部と基端部が一直線状に直接連結された真直状の板状体を案内部の要素とした点で相異する。図41(a)に示す供給筒34は、流路27iを含むように供給筒34の下部を排出面27lから所定の長さだけ軸方向に切欠いて切欠き部を形成し、その切欠き部を塞ぐように板状体34cの基端部34dの上面を密着して接合して構成してあり、板状体34cの上面のみ溶融半田M1を流し、外周間隙kに挿入される先端部34eを介して溶融半田M1を供給する。なお、切欠き部の長さは、下側のガラス基板w4の突出部分の長さ以上であり、切欠き部と基端部34dとの接合部に隙間が生じる場合には、この隙間を封止するような封止板32aが設けられる。これにより、溶融半田M1の供給時に供給筒34をガラス基板w4の上方に配置しなくても、ガラス基板w4の突出部分が供給筒34に干渉することを回避することができる。 The supply cylinders 27 and 33 in the examples 4-1 and 4-2 used a plate-like body bent at one or two places, but the supply cylinders 34 and 35 in this example are The difference is that a straight plate-like body in which the distal end portion and the proximal end portion are directly connected in a straight line is used as an element of the guide portion. The supply cylinder 34 shown in FIG. 41 (a) forms a notch by notching the lower part of the supply cylinder 34 in the axial direction by a predetermined length from the discharge surface 27l so as to include the flow path 27i. The upper surface of the base end portion 34d of the plate-like body 34c is in close contact and joined so as to close the surface, and the molten solder M1 is allowed to flow only on the upper surface of the plate-like body 34c and is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k. The molten solder M1 is supplied via Note that the length of the notch is equal to or longer than the length of the protruding portion of the lower glass substrate w4. If a gap occurs at the joint between the notch and the base end 34d, the gap is sealed. A sealing plate 32a that stops is provided. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the protruding portion of the glass substrate w4 from interfering with the supply cylinder 34 without arranging the supply cylinder 34 above the glass substrate w4 when supplying the molten solder M1.
 また、図41(b)に示すように、基端部35dを取り付ける底面が平面である四角形断面の供給筒35を用いてもよい。この場合、排出面27lに開口した排出口27hの全面から溶融半田M1を案内部35dの上面に排出してもよい。しかしながら、溶融半田M1の酸化を防止する観点から、排出口27hの下部のみ開口した排出口35cを有し上部を閉塞する蓋35bを排出面27lに取り付けることが望ましい。なお、この排出面27lを閉塞する蓋35bは、上記第4-1例及び第4-2例の供給筒にも適用することできる。 Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), a supply tube 35 having a square cross section in which the bottom surface to which the base end portion 35d is attached is a plane may be used. In this case, the molten solder M1 may be discharged from the entire surface of the discharge port 27h opened to the discharge surface 27l to the upper surface of the guide portion 35d. However, from the viewpoint of preventing the molten solder M1 from being oxidized, it is desirable to attach to the discharge surface 27l a lid 35b that has a discharge port 35c that opens only at the bottom of the discharge port 27h and closes the top. The lid 35b that closes the discharge surface 27l can also be applied to the supply cylinders of the above-described examples 4-1 and 4-2.
 以上、第4-1例、第4-2例、第4-3例では、コテ部とガラス基板の主面との間隙を一定に維持するための接触部を板状体の後端側に配置した供給筒の例を説明したが、図42(a)に示すように、先端部28dの先端に接触部28bを配置した案内部36とすることもできる。この場合には、より幅の安定した接合部を形成することができる。
 また、図42(b)に示す案内部37のように接触部を有しない構造とすることもできる。これは、例えば一辺が数~十数cm程度の小サイズのガラス基板に対するように、ガラス基板の厚さバラツキやガラス基板移動機構の案内振れなどが極めて小さく、間隙が無視できるほどしか変動しない場合などに適用するとよい。なお、この場合には、供給装置としては必ずしもフローティング機構で供給筒を支持しなくてもよい。
As described above, in Examples 4-1, 4-2, and 4-3, the contact portion for maintaining a constant gap between the iron portion and the main surface of the glass substrate is provided on the rear end side of the plate-like body. Although an example of the arranged supply cylinder has been described, as shown in FIG. 42A, it may be a guide part 36 in which a contact part 28b is arranged at the tip of the tip part 28d. In this case, a joint with a more stable width can be formed.
Moreover, it can also be set as the structure which does not have a contact part like the guide part 37 shown in FIG.42 (b). This is because, for example, a glass substrate of a small size with a side of several to several tens of centimeters has a very small thickness variation of the glass substrate and a guide swing of the glass substrate moving mechanism, and the gap fluctuates only to be negligible. It is good to apply to. In this case, the supply device may not necessarily support the supply cylinder with the floating mechanism.
 また、本例ではガラス基板w3とw4の平面寸法は異なる寸法とし、上側のガラス基板w3に対し下側のガラス基板w4が突出したガラスパネルWを例として説明した。しかしながら、同一寸法のガラス基板w3とw4を用い端面が一致したガラスパネルWに対しても上記例は適用することができる。 In this example, the glass substrates W3 and w4 have different plane dimensions, and the glass panel W in which the lower glass substrate w4 protrudes from the upper glass substrate w3 is described as an example. However, the above example can also be applied to the glass panel W using the glass substrates w3 and w4 having the same dimensions and having matching end faces.
[第5態様]
 上記(38)の溶融金属の供給筒及びその供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置及び溶融金属の供給方法並びにそれらの望ましい態様について、以下その第5例に基づき説明する。
[Fifth aspect]
(38) The molten metal supply cylinder, the molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder, the molten metal supply method, and desirable modes thereof will be described below based on the fifth example.
[第5例]
 本発明の第5例である溶融金属の供給筒及びその供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置について図43~図49を参照して説明する。
[Fifth example]
A molten metal supply cylinder and a molten metal supply apparatus incorporating the supply cylinder according to a fifth example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
 まず、供給装置について説明する。供給装置は、図51(a)、(b)を参照して説明したガラスパネルWを製造するものであり、供給筒38と、供給筒38を取り付けるホルダー38aと、ホルダー38aを主として上下にフローティングさせるフローティング機構38bと、フローティング機構38bを支持するケーシング38eとを備えている。フローティング機構38bは、適度な柔軟性を有したゴムやバネを上下に配設した構造で実現することができ、ガラス基板w3及びw4或いは供給筒38に無理な力を作用させずに供給筒38の姿勢を保つことができる。なお、ホルダー38aに超音波振動体38cを取り付け、軸部材38dを介して供給筒38と接合するようにして供給筒38の長手方向に超音波振動を印加することが好ましい。 First, the supply device will be described. The supply device manufactures the glass panel W described with reference to FIGS. 51A and 51B. The supply tube 38, the holder 38a to which the supply tube 38 is attached, and the holder 38a are mainly floated up and down. A floating mechanism 38b to be moved, and a casing 38e for supporting the floating mechanism 38b. The floating mechanism 38b can be realized by a structure in which rubbers and springs having appropriate flexibility are arranged above and below, and the supply cylinder 38 without exerting an excessive force on the glass substrates w3 and w4 or the supply cylinder 38. Can keep the posture. Note that it is preferable to apply an ultrasonic vibration in the longitudinal direction of the supply cylinder 38 so that the ultrasonic vibration body 38c is attached to the holder 38a and joined to the supply cylinder 38 via the shaft member 38d.
 供給筒24は、図43と44に示すように、一面38kと他面38lに開口した溶融半田M1が流通する円形断面の流路38iを内部に有し、他面38lに直交し第2開口(以下第5例において排出口と言う。)38hを横切って流路38iの中に深さL0だけ挿入して取り付けられた案内部39とを備え、一面38kの開口(以下第5例において第1開口と言う。)38gから供給され第2開口38hから排出される溶融半田M1を外周間隙kに案内部39を介し供給する。 As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the supply cylinder 24 has a circular cross-sectional flow path 38i through which the molten solder M1 opened on one surface 38k and the other surface 38l flows, and is perpendicular to the other surface 38l and has a second opening. (Hereinafter referred to as a discharge port in the fifth example.) A guide part 39 is provided which is inserted by a depth L0 into the flow path 38i across 38h, and is provided with an opening (hereinafter referred to as the fifth example in the fifth example). The molten solder M1 supplied from 38g and discharged from the second opening 38h is supplied to the outer peripheral gap k through the guide portion 39.
 供給装置は、供給筒38を、他面38lがガラス基板w3とw4の端面と所定の隙間sで隔てられた状態で案内部39をガラス基板w3,w4の外周間隙kに挿入するとともに、外周間隙kに沿って所定速度で一周できるように移動させる、なお、この移動動作は供給装置が全て行う必要はなく、ガラス基板w3とw4が載置されるテーブル等が分担して相対的に行ってもよい。このように、供給装置は、移動形態に合わせて種々の構造をとることができる。移動形態に基づく構造がどのようなものであれ、ガラス基板w3とw4の移動機構や供給装置の移動機構は公知の技術、例えば直線移動はモータとボールネジ又はリニアガイド等、旋回移動はモータまたはシリンダとベアリングを組み合わせて実現できる。上記ケーシング24eは、上下方向に位置を調節する治具等を介して移動機構に取り付けるとよい。このように構成することで、ガラス基板w4の厚さや間隙保持部材Qの高さに合わせて、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kに対し案内部25の高さを調節しておくことができる。 The supply device inserts the guide tube 39 into the outer peripheral gap k of the glass substrates w3 and w4 while the other surface 38l is separated from the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 by a predetermined gap s. It is moved so that it can make one round along the gap k at a predetermined speed. Note that this moving operation is not necessarily performed by the supply device, but is performed relatively by a table or the like on which the glass substrates w3 and w4 are placed. May be. Thus, the supply device can take various structures in accordance with the movement form. Whatever the structure based on the movement form, the movement mechanism of the glass substrates w3 and w4 and the movement mechanism of the supply device are known techniques, for example, linear movement is a motor and a ball screw or a linear guide, and swivel movement is a motor or cylinder. This can be realized by combining the bearings. The casing 24e may be attached to the moving mechanism through a jig or the like that adjusts the position in the vertical direction. With this configuration, the height of the guide portion 25 can be adjusted with respect to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 in accordance with the thickness of the glass substrate w4 and the height of the gap holding member Q. .
 案内部39は、図45に示すように、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kの寸法gより小さな厚さ(T2)の板状体39cと、板状体39cの上下面から突出した外周間隙の寸法とほぼ同一厚さ(T1)の突起体39aとを備えている。なお、本例の突起体39aは板状体39cの後端側の左右に配置されており、案内部39は上下方向において排出口38hのほぼ中央部を横切るように供給筒38に挿入した状態で取り付けられている。 As shown in FIG. 45, the guide portion 39 includes a plate-like body 39c having a thickness (T2) smaller than the dimension g of the outer-space gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and an outer peripheral gap protruding from the upper and lower surfaces of the plate-like body 39c. And a protrusion 39a having substantially the same thickness (T1) as the above-mentioned dimension. The protrusions 39a of this example are arranged on the left and right sides of the rear end side of the plate-like body 39c, and the guide portion 39 is inserted into the supply cylinder 38 so as to cross the substantially central portion of the discharge port 38h in the vertical direction. It is attached with.
 案内部39は、図46に示すように、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kに挿入されて、供給筒38の排出口38hから排出される溶融半田M1を外周間隙kに供給するものである。この案内部39は、外周間隙kに沿って移動させる時、溶融半田M1をガラス基板w3とw4の主面に摺動させる、いわゆる塗り込みながらガラス基板w3とw4の外縁間隔kに供給する。ここで、図45に示すように、板状体39cにおいて外周間隙kに挿入されるL2の部分を以下コテ部39dと言う。また、板状体39cの上下面に形成された突起体39aは、排出口38hからL1だけ突き出るように形成されている。突起体39aは、外周間隙kに挿入されてガラス基板w3とw4の主面と摺動可能な接触面を有し、以下この接触面が形成された部分を接触部39bと言う。 As shown in FIG. 46, the guide portion 39 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and supplies the molten solder M1 discharged from the discharge port 38h of the supply cylinder 38 to the outer peripheral gap k. . When the guide portion 39 is moved along the outer peripheral gap k, the molten solder M1 is slid on the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, and is supplied to the outer edge interval k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 while being applied. Here, as shown in FIG. 45, the portion of L2 inserted into the outer peripheral gap k in the plate-like body 39c is hereinafter referred to as a trowel portion 39d. Further, the protrusions 39a formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the plate-like body 39c are formed so as to protrude by L1 from the discharge port 38h. The protrusion 39a has a contact surface that is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k and is slidable with the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4. Hereinafter, a portion where the contact surface is formed is referred to as a contact portion 39b.
 図46に示すように、コテ部39dは、排出口38hから供給された溶融半田M1を、コテ部39dの上面とガラス基板w3との第1の間隙Gu、コテ部39dの下面とガラス基板w4との第2の間隙Gdに導入し、ガラス基板w3とw4の主面に塗り込む。したがって、溶融半田M1がガラス基板w3とw4の主面に良好に塗り込められるためには、溶融半田M1がコテ部39dに追従して一緒に移動するよう間隙GuとGdは狭い方が好ましい。しかし、狭隘な間隙GuとGdに導入された溶融半田M1は、流体抵抗ためにコテ部39dの先端に到達し難くなる。 As shown in FIG. 46, the iron part 39d uses the molten solder M1 supplied from the discharge port 38h, the first gap Gu between the upper surface of the iron part 39d and the glass substrate w3, the lower surface of the iron part 39d, and the glass substrate w4. And is applied to the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4. Therefore, in order for the molten solder M1 to be satisfactorily applied to the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, it is preferable that the gaps Gu and Gd are narrow so that the molten solder M1 moves together following the iron part 39d. However, the molten solder M1 introduced into the narrow gaps Gu and Gd is difficult to reach the tip of the iron part 39d due to fluid resistance.
 以下、図47(a)を参照しつつ、間隙Gu及びGdに導入された溶融半田M1の流動状態について説明する。なお、図47(a)に示すコテ部40cは平面視が矩形形状の板状体の先端部分であり、コテ部40cは矢印F方向に移動するものとする。 Hereinafter, the flow state of the molten solder M1 introduced into the gaps Gu and Gd will be described with reference to FIG. 47A is a tip portion of a plate-like body having a rectangular shape in plan view, and the iron portion 40c moves in the direction of arrow F.
 図において、供給筒38から供給された溶融半田M1は、間隙GuとGd内をコテ部40cの先端40gに向かって流れていく。ここで、溶融半田M1の流動速度は流体抵抗により先端40gに向うほど低下し、さらにコテ部40cは矢印Fの方向に移動しているので、間隙GuとGdを流れる溶融半田M1の流動方向はコテ部40cの先端に行くほど移動方向Fに対し後方にずれる。ここで、間隙GuとGdの中を流動する溶融半田M1の流線は、溶融半田M1の供給量、間隙GuとGdの入り口での流速、ガラス基板とコテ部との摩擦係数、ガラス基板及びコテ部の溶融半田M1との濡れ性、コテ部40cの移動速度などの供給条件によって異なるが、間隙GuとGdの大きさを狭くした場合には、間隙GuとGdを流動する溶融半田M1の外周rはコテ部40cの先端40gまで達しない状態となる。 In the figure, the molten solder M1 supplied from the supply cylinder 38 flows in the gaps Gu and Gd toward the tip 40g of the iron part 40c. Here, the flow rate of the molten solder M1 decreases toward the tip 40g due to fluid resistance, and the iron part 40c moves in the direction of the arrow F, so the flow direction of the molten solder M1 flowing through the gaps Gu and Gd is The closer to the tip of the iron part 40c, the more backward the movement direction F is. Here, the flow lines of the molten solder M1 flowing in the gaps Gu and Gd are the supply amount of the molten solder M1, the flow velocity at the entrance of the gaps Gu and Gd, the friction coefficient between the glass substrate and the iron part, the glass substrate and Although depending on the supply conditions such as the wettability of the iron part with the molten solder M1 and the moving speed of the iron part 40c, when the sizes of the gaps Gu and Gd are narrowed, the molten solder M1 flowing through the gaps Gu and Gd The outer periphery r does not reach the tip 40g of the iron part 40c.
 ここで、最終的に形成される接合部nの幅は、間隙GuとGdを流れた溶融半田M1がコテ部40cの後面40iから離れたのち合流して外周間隙に充填されたときの塗布幅で規定される。この塗布幅は、後面40iにおける溶融金属M1の外周rの位置で規定される。そして、間隙GuとGdを流れた溶融半田M1の外周rがコテ部40cの先端40gに到達しない場合には、間隙GuとGdの中を何ら制限のない不安定な状態で溶融半田M1は流動する。したがって、上記説明した供給条件が変動した時には溶融半田M1の流動状態も変動し、第1の間隙Guと第2の間隙Gdとでは外周rが異なった位置で溶融半田M1は後面40iから離れ、その結果、塗布幅が不均一となる。さらに、コテ部40cの先端側では、コテ部40cの移動にともない移動する溶融半田M1の量が少ないため溶融半田M1とガラス基板との接触界面に空孔等の欠陥が生じ、接合部のガラス基板への接合強度や封止性が低下する。なお、コテ部40cの先端に溶融半田M1が到達する程度に供給圧力を高め溶融半田M1の供給量を増加すれば、溶融半田M1の流動状態は先端40gで規制されるため塗布幅は安定するが、この場合には供給筒38とガラス基板の端面の隙間sから溶融半田M1が漏れ、ガラスパネルの外観品質等が劣化するという問題が招来する。 Here, the width of the joint portion n to be finally formed is the coating width when the molten solder M1 that has flowed through the gaps Gu and Gd is separated from the rear surface 40i of the iron portion 40c and merges to fill the outer peripheral gap. It is prescribed by. The coating width is defined by the position of the outer periphery r of the molten metal M1 on the rear surface 40i. When the outer periphery r of the molten solder M1 that has flowed through the gaps Gu and Gd does not reach the tip 40g of the iron part 40c, the molten solder M1 flows in an unstable state without any restriction in the gaps Gu and Gd. To do. Therefore, when the supply conditions described above change, the flow state of the molten solder M1 also changes, and the molten solder M1 moves away from the rear surface 40i at a position where the outer periphery r is different between the first gap Gu and the second gap Gd. As a result, the coating width becomes non-uniform. Further, on the tip side of the iron part 40c, since the amount of the molten solder M1 that moves as the iron part 40c moves is small, defects such as voids occur in the contact interface between the molten solder M1 and the glass substrate, and the glass of the joint part Bonding strength to the substrate and sealing performance are reduced. If the supply pressure is increased so that the molten solder M1 reaches the tip of the iron part 40c and the supply amount of the molten solder M1 is increased, the flow state of the molten solder M1 is regulated by the tip 40g, so that the coating width is stabilized. However, in this case, the molten solder M1 leaks from the gap s between the supply cylinder 38 and the end face of the glass substrate, which causes a problem that the appearance quality and the like of the glass panel deteriorate.
 第5例の案内部39は上記問題を解決する。案内部39のコテ部39dは、図45に示すように、移動方向Fに向いた側部であって突出方向に向いたその先端部に切欠き部39mを有している。具体的には、コテ部39dは、移動方向Fに対し直交した前面39fと、コテ部39dの突出方向において先端に形成されコテ部39dの移動方向Fに対し平行な先端面39gと、コテ部39dの移動方向Fに対して後方に傾斜し前面39fと先端面39gとを面取り状に結ぶ傾斜面39hと、後面39iとを有した形状であり、前面39fと先端面39gの延長線と傾斜面39hとで画成される領域が切欠き部39mである。
 上記切欠き部39mを有するコテ部39dによれば以下の作用を奏する。すなわち、図47(b)に示すように、第1の間隙Guを流動する溶融半田M1のうち移動方向Fにおいて前部に存在する溶融半田M1は、コテ部39dの傾斜面39hに達し、この傾斜面39hに沿い流動して先端面39gへ導かれる。また、傾斜面39hに達した溶融半田M1の一部は傾斜面39hを乗り越え切欠き部39mへ入り込み、その後第2の間隙Gdを流動している溶融半田M1と合流し、傾斜面39hに沿い流動して先端面39gへ導かれる。その結果、間隙GuとGdとを流動する溶融半田M1の外周rの位置は先端面39gで規制され常に一定となり、後面39iから離れ合流した溶融半田M1の幅が安定する。さらに、コテ部36dの先端部分における溶融半田M1の流量が増加するので、溶融半田M1とガラス基板との接触界面に空孔等の欠陥が発生しがたく、所望の接合品質の接合部を得ることができる。以上のように、本例のコテ部39dは、ガラス基板同士の外周間隙に充填するため溶融半田M1を過剰に供給しなくても、間隙GuとGdを流動する溶融半田M1の外周rを切欠き部39mの傾斜面39hに交差させ先端面39gに導くことで、所望の幅で溶融半田M1を供給することができる。
The guide unit 39 of the fifth example solves the above problem. As shown in FIG. 45, the iron part 39d of the guide part 39 is a side part facing in the moving direction F and has a notch part 39m at its tip part facing in the protruding direction. Specifically, the iron part 39d includes a front surface 39f orthogonal to the movement direction F, a tip surface 39g formed at the tip in the protruding direction of the iron part 39d and parallel to the movement direction F of the iron part 39d, and a iron part. It has a shape having an inclined surface 39h and a rear surface 39i which are inclined backward with respect to the moving direction F of 39d and connect the front surface 39f and the tip surface 39g in a chamfered manner, and are inclined with an extension line of the front surface 39f and the tip surface 39g. A region defined by the surface 39h is a notch 39m.
According to the iron part 39d having the notch part 39m, the following effects are obtained. That is, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), of the molten solder M1 flowing through the first gap Gu, the molten solder M1 existing at the front in the moving direction F reaches the inclined surface 39h of the iron portion 39d. It flows along the inclined surface 39h and is guided to the tip surface 39g. Further, a part of the molten solder M1 reaching the inclined surface 39h gets over the inclined surface 39h and enters the notch 39m, and then joins the molten solder M1 flowing through the second gap Gd, along the inclined surface 39h. It flows and is guided to the tip surface 39g. As a result, the position of the outer circumference r of the molten solder M1 flowing through the gaps Gu and Gd is regulated by the front end surface 39g and is always constant, and the width of the molten solder M1 that has merged away from the rear surface 39i is stabilized. Further, since the flow rate of the molten solder M1 at the tip portion of the iron part 36d is increased, defects such as holes are hardly generated at the contact interface between the molten solder M1 and the glass substrate, and a bonded portion having a desired bonding quality is obtained. be able to. As described above, the iron part 39d of this example cuts the outer periphery r of the molten solder M1 flowing through the gaps Gu and Gd without filling the outer peripheral gap between the glass substrates with excessive supply of the molten solder M1. The molten solder M1 can be supplied in a desired width by crossing the inclined surface 39h of the notch 39m and guiding it to the tip surface 39g.
 上記コテ部39dの変形例について図48を参照して説明する。図48(a)に示す供給筒41に装着されたコテ部41dは、コテ部39dと同様にコテ部41dの先端に形成された傾斜面(第1の傾斜面)39hに加え、コテ部41dの移動方向Fに対して後方に傾斜しコテ部41dの基端側に形成された第2の傾斜面41aを有し、第2の傾斜面41は第1の傾斜面39hと端同士がR面で滑らかに連結され、先端面39gと前面39fの延長線及び第1の傾斜面39h、第2の傾斜面41aとで切欠き部41mが画成されている。
 図48(b)に示す供給筒42に装着されたコテ部42dは、コテ部39dと同様にコテ部42dの先端に形成された傾斜面39hに加え、コテ部42dの移動方向Fに対し平行でコテ部42dの基端側に形成された平行面42aを有し、平行面42aは傾斜面39hと端同士がR面で滑らかに連結され、端面39gと前面39fの延長線及び傾斜面39h、平行面42aとで切欠き部42mが画成されている。
 図48(c)に示す供給筒43に装着されたコテ部43dは、コテ部43dの移動方向Fに対し後方に傾斜しコテ部43dの基端側に形成され傾斜面43bと、移動方向Fに対し直交しコテ部43dの先端に形成された直交面43aと有し、傾斜面43bはは直交面43aと端同士がR面で滑らかに連結され、端面39gと前面39fの延長線及び傾斜面43b、直交面43aとで切欠き部43mが画成されている。
 なお、上記例では、平面視が直線状の面で画成して切欠き部39m、41m~43mを形成したが、これらの面は曲線状であっても、直線と曲線を組み合わせた形状であってもよい。また、コテ部の先端は一定の長さを有する先端面でなくてもよく、例えば先端が尖った形状としてもよい。さらに、傾斜面等の傾斜角度や形状は、溶融半田の供給量、ガラス基板とコテ部との間隙の入り口における溶融半田の流速、ガラス基板とコテ部との摩擦係数、ガラス基板及びコテ部と溶融半田との濡れ性、コテ部の移動速度などの供給条件に基づき適宜決定すればよい。また、図48(d)に示す供給筒44に装着されたコテ部44dのように、後面44aが傾斜面39hとほぼ平行になるように形成してもよい。このコテ部44dは、コテ部44dの移動方向Fに沿うコテ部44dの長さが基端から先端面39gに渡りほぼ一定であり、移動方向Fと直行する方向(幅方向)においてガラス基板の主面への溶融半田M1の塗り込みの効果を均一にすることができる。
A modification of the iron part 39d will be described with reference to FIG. The iron part 41d attached to the supply cylinder 41 shown in FIG. 48A is similar to the iron part 39d in addition to the inclined surface (first inclined surface) 39h formed at the tip of the iron part 41d. The second inclined surface 41a has a second inclined surface 41a which is inclined rearward with respect to the moving direction F and formed on the proximal end side of the iron part 41d. The second inclined surface 41 has a first inclined surface 39h and ends thereof are R-shaped. The notches 41m are defined by the extended lines of the front end surface 39g and the front surface 39f, the first inclined surface 39h, and the second inclined surface 41a.
The iron part 42d attached to the supply cylinder 42 shown in FIG. 48 (b) is parallel to the moving direction F of the iron part 42d in addition to the inclined surface 39h formed at the tip of the iron part 42d, like the iron part 39d. The parallel surface 42a is formed on the base end side of the iron portion 42d, and the parallel surface 42a is smoothly connected to the inclined surface 39h by the R surface, and the extended surface of the end surface 39g and the front surface 39f and the inclined surface 39h. A notch 42m is defined by the parallel surface 42a.
The iron part 43d attached to the supply cylinder 43 shown in FIG. 48 (c) is inclined backward with respect to the movement direction F of the iron part 43d and formed on the base end side of the iron part 43d. The inclined surface 43b is orthogonally connected to the orthogonal surface 43a and the ends thereof are smoothly connected to each other by the R surface, and the extended line and the inclined surface of the end surface 39g and the front surface 39f. A notch 43m is defined by the surface 43b and the orthogonal surface 43a.
In the above example, the cutaway portions 39m and 41m to 43m are formed by defining a straight surface in plan view. However, even if these surfaces are curved, the shape is a combination of a straight line and a curved line. There may be. Further, the tip of the iron portion does not have to be a tip surface having a certain length, and for example, may have a shape with a sharp tip. Further, the inclination angle and shape of the inclined surface, etc. are the supply amount of the molten solder, the flow rate of the molten solder at the entrance of the gap between the glass substrate and the iron part, the friction coefficient between the glass substrate and the iron part, the glass substrate and the iron part What is necessary is just to determine suitably based on supply conditions, such as wettability with a molten solder and the moving speed of a iron part. Further, a rear surface 44a may be formed so as to be substantially parallel to the inclined surface 39h like a soldering portion 44d attached to the supply cylinder 44 shown in FIG. In this iron part 44d, the length of the iron part 44d along the movement direction F of the iron part 44d is substantially constant from the base end to the distal end surface 39g, and in the direction (width direction) perpendicular to the movement direction F, The effect of applying the molten solder M1 to the main surface can be made uniform.
 接触部39bについて説明する。案内部39は、図45と46に示すように、案内部39を外周間隙kに挿入するに際し、接触部39bを外周間隙kに嵌合せることにより、外周間隙kでのコテ部39dの上下方向の位置が規定される。すなわち、コテ部39dの上面とガラス基板w3との間の第1の間隙Gu,コテ部39dの下面とガラス基板w4との間の第2の間隙Gdを一定に維持することができる。なお、接触部39bには、ガラス基板w3とw4の主面との滑り性をよくするための表面処理、例えばNi撥水メッキを施すことが好ましい。なお、コテ部39dを構成する板状体39cと接触部39bを構成する突起体39aは、一体構造で形成してもよいし別部材を接着や積層プロセスなどで固着した組立構造としてもよく、組立構造とすると、板状体39cをガラスとし突起体39aを金属とするなど要求される機能に合わせて適宜な材質を選択して組み合わせることができる。また、接触部39bには、外周間隙kに嵌入し易くするために、その側面又はコテ部39dとの段差面の角に面取りcを施すことが好ましい。この面取りは、角部を直線状或いは曲線状に丸めた部位のことで、切削加工、砥粒加工、エッチング等で形成することができる。 The contact part 39b will be described. As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, when the guide portion 39 is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k, the guide portion 39 is fitted in the outer peripheral gap k so that the iron portion 39d is moved in the vertical direction in the outer peripheral gap k. The position of is defined. That is, the first gap Gu between the upper surface of the iron part 39d and the glass substrate w3 and the second gap Gd between the lower surface of the iron part 39d and the glass substrate w4 can be maintained constant. The contact portion 39b is preferably subjected to a surface treatment for improving the slipperiness between the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4, for example, Ni water repellent plating. The plate-like body 39c constituting the iron part 39d and the protrusion 39a constituting the contact part 39b may be formed in an integrated structure or may be an assembly structure in which another member is fixed by adhesion or a lamination process. With the assembly structure, it is possible to select and combine appropriate materials in accordance with required functions, such as using the plate-like body 39c as glass and the protrusion 39a as metal. Further, it is preferable to chamfer c on the side surface or the corner of the stepped surface with the trowel portion 39d so that the contact portion 39b can be easily fitted into the outer peripheral gap k. This chamfering is a part in which a corner is rounded into a straight line or a curve, and can be formed by cutting, abrasive processing, etching, or the like.
 案内部に形成された案内溝について説明する。図45(a)に示すように、案内部39の上下面の基端には、左右の突起体39aを側壁とした案内溝39eが形成されている。案内溝39eは排出口38hを介し流路38iに通じているので、流路38iを流通し輩出口38hから排出される溶融半田M1は案内溝39eを介してコテ部39dに流入する。この案内溝39eの幅や深さ及び形状は、溶融半田M1の流動性に合わせて適宜決めればよい。例えば、図45(b)に示すように、板状体39cの上下面を掘り込んで傾斜面39hに達するような案内溝を設けてもよい。 The guide groove formed in the guide part will be described. As shown in FIG. 45A, guide grooves 39e having left and right protrusions 39a as side walls are formed at the base ends of the upper and lower surfaces of the guide portion 39. As shown in FIG. Since the guide groove 39e communicates with the flow path 38i via the discharge port 38h, the molten solder M1 flowing through the flow path 38i and discharged from the senior outlet 38h flows into the iron part 39d via the guide groove 39e. The width, depth, and shape of the guide groove 39e may be appropriately determined according to the fluidity of the molten solder M1. For example, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), a guide groove that digs into the upper and lower surfaces of the plate-like body 39c and reaches the inclined surface 39h may be provided.
 供給筒38は、一面38kに形成された第1開口38gから溶融半田M1を供給し、他面38lに形成された排出口38hから排出する。この第1開口38gに供給される溶融半田M1は、例えば糸ハンダMを第1開口38gに所定の速度で送り込みながら供給筒38で溶融し、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kを充分に満たすべき供給量に基づき制御された流量で供給される。 The supply cylinder 38 supplies the molten solder M1 from the first opening 38g formed on the one surface 38k, and discharges it from the discharge port 38h formed on the other surface 38l. For example, the molten solder M1 supplied to the first opening 38g is melted by the supply cylinder 38 while feeding the thread solder M to the first opening 38g at a predetermined speed, and sufficiently fills the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4. It is supplied at a controlled flow rate based on the supply amount.
 供給筒24は、図44に示すように、上記のように糸ハンダMを溶融して形成された溶融半田M1が流通する流路38iと、流路38iの第1開口38gが形成され糸ハンダMを溶融する溶融面38kと、排出口38hが形成された排出面38lとを有し、その外周面には糸ハンダMを溶融するためのヒータ38jが巻回されている。かかる構成の供給筒38によれば、下端面が第1開口38gを閉塞する姿勢で溶融面38kに当接するよう制御された速度で糸ハンダMを送り出し、溶融面38kに押し付けて溶融する。すると、溶融半田M1は流路38iを流通して排出口38hから連続的に排出される。 As shown in FIG. 44, the supply cylinder 24 is formed with a flow path 38i through which the molten solder M1 formed by melting the thread solder M as described above and a first opening 38g of the flow path 38i are formed. It has a melting surface 38k for melting M and a discharge surface 38l in which a discharge port 38h is formed, and a heater 38j for melting the thread solder M is wound around the outer peripheral surface thereof. According to the supply cylinder 38 having such a configuration, the yarn solder M is sent out at a speed controlled so that the lower end surface of the first opening 38g is in contact with the melting surface 38k, and is pressed against the melting surface 38k to be melted. Then, the molten solder M1 flows through the flow path 38i and is continuously discharged from the discharge port 38h.
 第1開口38gが開口する溶融面38kは、例えば供給筒38の表面をザグリ加工して形成した凹状部の底面である。第1開口38gは、その直径ΦBが溶融面38kと当接する糸ハンダMの端面の直径ΦA未満であり、流路38iは少なくとも溶融面38k近傍では直径ΦBの管状に形成される。これにより、糸ハンダMの外周面に酸化物Eが生成していても、酸化物Eの流路38iへの流入は第1開口38gの外周縁部、すなわち溶融面38kにより阻止され、酸化物Eがほとんど混入しない清浄な溶融半田M1のみが流路38iへ流入する。なお、大気中で保管された糸ハンダMの表面に生成している酸化物Eの層の厚さは通常数十μm程度であるので、糸ハンダMと第1開口38gの直径の差、すなわちΦA-ΦBは1mm前後としておけば十分である。 The melting surface 38k through which the first opening 38g opens is, for example, a bottom surface of a concave portion formed by counterboring the surface of the supply cylinder 38. The first opening 38g has a diameter ΦB that is less than the diameter ΦA of the end face of the thread solder M that abuts the melting surface 38k, and the flow path 38i is formed in a tubular shape having a diameter ΦB at least in the vicinity of the melting surface 38k. Thereby, even if the oxide E is generated on the outer peripheral surface of the thread solder M, the inflow of the oxide E into the flow path 38i is blocked by the outer peripheral edge portion of the first opening 38g, that is, the melting surface 38k. Only clean molten solder M1 in which E hardly mixes flows into the flow path 38i. Since the thickness of the oxide E layer generated on the surface of the yarn solder M stored in the atmosphere is usually about several tens of μm, the difference in diameter between the yarn solder M and the first opening 38g, that is, It is sufficient to set ΦA-ΦB to around 1 mm.
 なお、溶融面38kを取り囲むように供給筒38の周廻りに周壁38mを形成することが好ましい。流路38iへの流入が阻止された酸化物Eは、溶融面38kの凹状の底部に貯留されるが、吸引したり或いは周壁38mの一部を切り欠いて流出させ適宜に回収すればよい。また、排出面38lに近い流路38iの末端部は、排出面38lとほぼ直交するように形成することが好ましい。これにより、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周端面に隙間sで隔てて排出面38lが対向するように供給筒38を位置決めすると、排出面38lの近傍の流路38iは外周間隙kに対して平行な状態となる。 Note that it is preferable to form a peripheral wall 38m around the supply cylinder 38 so as to surround the melting surface 38k. The oxide E, which is prevented from flowing into the flow path 38i, is stored in the concave bottom of the melting surface 38k, but may be sucked out or discharged by cutting out a part of the peripheral wall 38m as appropriate. Moreover, it is preferable to form the terminal part of the flow path 38i near the discharge surface 38l so as to be substantially orthogonal to the discharge surface 38l. Accordingly, when the supply cylinder 38 is positioned so that the discharge surface 38l faces the outer peripheral end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 with a gap s, the flow path 38i near the discharge surface 38l is parallel to the outer peripheral gap k. It becomes a state.
 上記供給筒38による溶融半田M1の供給動作について説明する。溶融半田M1の供給に際し、供給装置は、供給筒38おける溶融半田M1の流通状態が定常状態にある時にガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kに沿って移動するよう構成されている。この定常状態とは、排出口38hから案内部39の上面に溶融半田M1が排出され外周間隙kに導入可能な状態をいい、図46に示すように、排出口38hが溶融半田M1でほぼ満たされた状態である。ここで、第1開口38gから溶融半田M1が供給され初めてからこの定常状態に達するまでの時間はできるだけ短い方がよい。このため、非定常状態である溶融半田M1の供給開始時では溶融半田M1で流路38iが迅速に満たされ、定常状態では外周間隙kを充分に満たすことができる充填可能な流量となるように溶融半田M1の供給量は制御されている。 The operation of supplying the molten solder M1 by the supply cylinder 38 will be described. When supplying the molten solder M1, the supply device is configured to move along the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4 when the flow state of the molten solder M1 in the supply cylinder 38 is in a steady state. This steady state means a state in which the molten solder M1 is discharged from the discharge port 38h onto the upper surface of the guide portion 39 and can be introduced into the outer circumferential gap k. As shown in FIG. 46, the discharge port 38h is substantially filled with the molten solder M1. It is the state that was done. Here, the time from when the molten solder M1 is supplied from the first opening 38g until the steady state is reached is preferably as short as possible. For this reason, the flow path 38i is quickly filled with the molten solder M1 when the supply of the molten solder M1 in an unsteady state is started, and in a steady state, the flow rate is such that the outer peripheral gap k can be sufficiently filled. The supply amount of the molten solder M1 is controlled.
 上記供給筒38を用いると、供給された清浄な溶融半田M1は、排出面38lとガラス基板w3及びw4の端面との隙間s及び間隙Gu及びGdでわずかに外部雰囲気と触れるだけでガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kに充填される。従って、供給された清浄な溶融半田M1は、大気雰囲気であっても酸化が抑制された状態でガラス基板w3とw4の主面と接触する。したがって、本例の供給装置は、適切な量の酸素を介しガラスと優れた接合性を有するSnAgAl系合金ハンダを使用するのに好適である。なお、溶融半田M1の充填性を向上するためには、案内部39の表面の少なくとも溶融半田M1が接触する面に溶融半田M1との濡れ性を高める処理、例えばAg、Cr、Al、Mo、W、V、Nb、Taなどを被覆することが好ましく、また、溶融半田M1で案内部39の表面が溶食され溶融半田M1に不純物が混入しないように溶食防止処理としての窒化処理を施すことが好ましい。なお、これらの処理は流路38iの表面に対しても行うことが好ましい。 When the above supply cylinder 38 is used, the supplied clean molten solder M1 is slightly touched with the external atmosphere at the gaps s and gaps Gu and Gd between the discharge surface 38l and the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4. And w4 are filled in the outer circumferential gap k. Accordingly, the supplied clean molten solder M1 comes into contact with the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 in a state in which oxidation is suppressed even in an air atmosphere. Therefore, the supply device of this example is suitable for using SnAgAl alloy solder having excellent bonding properties with glass through an appropriate amount of oxygen. In order to improve the filling property of the molten solder M1, a process for increasing the wettability with the molten solder M1, for example, Ag, Cr, Al, Mo, etc. It is preferable to coat W, V, Nb, Ta, etc., and a nitriding treatment is performed as a corrosion preventing treatment so that the surface of the guide portion 39 is eroded by the molten solder M1 and impurities are not mixed into the molten solder M1. It is preferable. In addition, it is preferable to perform these processes also on the surface of the flow path 38i.
 次に、本例の供給装置による外周間隙kへの溶融半田M1の供給動作を説明する。発熱体が内蔵されたXY2軸方向に移動可能なテーブルに、所定寸法の間隙保持部材Qを介して上下にセットされたガラス基板w3とw4を位置決めし、ガラス基板w3とw4を溶融半田M1の溶融温度程度に加熱する。供給筒38は、その案内部39のコテ部39dがガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kにおいて一辺端部の所定位置に挿入され、ガラス基板w3及びw4の端面と排出面38lとに所定の隙間sが形成されるよう移動される。この時、コテ部39dは外周間隙kの上下方向において中心近傍にくるように予め取り付け位置が調節されているが、厳密に外周間隙kの中央に調整するのは難しい。しかしながら、この調節が良好に行われていないと、コテ部39dは外周間隙kに挿入されるにしても、接触部39bが上下いずれかのガラス基板w3またはw4の端面に当たってしまう可能性がある。ここで、供給筒38は上下方向にフローティング機構で支持されており、また接触部39bには面取りcが施されているので、接触部39bは容易に外周間隙kに嵌入される。これにより、コテ部39dは外周間隙kの上下方向においてほぼ中央に位置決めされ、コテ部39dとガラス基板w3及びw4の間隙GuとGdは上下ともほぼ同じとなる。 Next, the supply operation of the molten solder M1 to the outer peripheral gap k by the supply device of this example will be described. The glass substrates w3 and w4 set up and down via a gap holding member Q having a predetermined dimension are positioned on a table that is movable in the XY2 axis direction with a built-in heating element, and the glass substrates w3 and w4 are made of the molten solder M1. Heat to about melting temperature. In the supply cylinder 38, the iron part 39d of the guide part 39 is inserted at a predetermined position on one side edge in the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4, and a predetermined gap is formed between the end surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 and the discharge surface 38l. It is moved so that s is formed. At this time, the attachment position of the iron part 39d is adjusted in advance so as to be near the center in the vertical direction of the outer circumferential gap k, but it is difficult to adjust precisely to the center of the outer circumferential gap k. However, if this adjustment is not performed satisfactorily, even if the iron part 39d is inserted into the outer peripheral gap k, there is a possibility that the contact part 39b hits the end surface of either the upper or lower glass substrate w3 or w4. Here, since the supply cylinder 38 is supported by a floating mechanism in the vertical direction, and the chamfering c is applied to the contact portion 39b, the contact portion 39b can be easily fitted into the outer peripheral gap k. As a result, the iron part 39d is positioned substantially in the center in the vertical direction of the outer circumferential gap k, and the gaps Gu and Gd between the iron part 39d and the glass substrates w3 and w4 are substantially the same in the vertical direction.
 所定流量の清浄な溶融半田M1が流路38iに供給されて排出口38hから排出され始め、短時間で定常状態に達し、外周間隙kの一辺に溶融半田M1を供給するためガラス基板w3とw4を直ぐに一方向(X方向)に所定速度で移動させることができる。この間、溶融半田M1は間隙GuとGdに導入され、ガラス基板w3とw4との外周間隙kに供給されていくが、接触部39bは、外周間隙kに嵌入しかつフローティング状態にあるので、ガラス基板w4の厚さのバラツキやX方向へのテーブルの上下方向のうねりなどガラス基板w3とw4の移動に際して生じる外周間隙kの上下方向における位置変動に対しても追従し、間隙GuとGdはそれぞれの寸法が維持される。これにより、溶融半田M1はコテ部39dの上下面に沿ってほぼ同量導入されるので、コテ部39dの移動に伴って移動する溶融半田M1の流動状態は間隙GuとGdでほぼ同一となり、溶融半田M1はガラス基板w3の主面に対してもガラス基板w4の主面に対しても同じように供給される。 Glass substrates w3 and w4 are supplied in order to supply clean molten solder M1 having a predetermined flow rate to flow path 38i and begin to be discharged from discharge port 38h, reach a steady state in a short time, and supply molten solder M1 to one side of outer peripheral gap k. Can be immediately moved in one direction (X direction) at a predetermined speed. During this time, the molten solder M1 is introduced into the gaps Gu and Gd and supplied to the outer peripheral gap k between the glass substrates w3 and w4. However, the contact portion 39b is fitted into the outer peripheral gap k and is in a floating state. It follows the vertical position fluctuation of the outer peripheral gap k caused by the movement of the glass substrates w3 and w4, such as the thickness variation of the substrate w4 and the vertical waviness of the table in the X direction, and the gaps Gu and Gd are respectively The dimensions are maintained. As a result, the molten solder M1 is introduced in substantially the same amount along the upper and lower surfaces of the iron portion 39d, so that the flow state of the molten solder M1 that moves with the movement of the iron portion 39d is substantially the same in the gaps Gu and Gd. The molten solder M1 is supplied in the same manner to the main surface of the glass substrate w3 and to the main surface of the glass substrate w4.
 また、充填中に超音波振動を作動させ案内部39に超音波振動を印加すると、溶融半田M1と案内部39、および溶融半田M1とガラス基板w3及びw4の濡れ性が向上し、間隙GuとGdが狭い場合でも溶融半田M1は円滑に供給される。この超音波振動は溶融半田M1を介してガラス基板w3とw4の主面にも作用し、溶融半田M1とガラス基板w3及びw4の接触界面に存在する気泡や酸化膜等の異物を除去する。したがって、ガラス基板w3とw4に対する溶融半田M1の接合性を高めることができ、ガラスパネルWの接合強度の向上のために有効である。 Further, when the ultrasonic vibration is applied during the filling and the ultrasonic vibration is applied to the guide portion 39, the wettability of the molten solder M1 and the guide portion 39, and the molten solder M1 and the glass substrates w3 and w4 is improved, and the gap Gu and Even when Gd is narrow, the molten solder M1 is supplied smoothly. This ultrasonic vibration also acts on the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 via the molten solder M1, and removes foreign matters such as bubbles and oxide films existing at the contact interface between the molten solder M1 and the glass substrates w3 and w4. Therefore, the bondability of the molten solder M1 to the glass substrates w3 and w4 can be enhanced, and it is effective for improving the bonding strength of the glass panel W.
 上記ように外周間隙kの一辺における溶融半田M1の供給が完了すると、供給筒38を装着したケーシング38eは90度水平方向に旋回し、次いで、ガラス基板w3とw4は上記一辺と直交する他辺の沿い水平移動する。そして、その他辺においても上記一辺と同様に外周間隙kに溶融金属M1は供給される。この動作を順次各辺に対して行い、ガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kの全てに溶融半田M1が供給される。このガラス基板w3とw4への供給作業が完了すると、ガラス基板w3とw4を載置したテーブルは外部へ移し替えられる。なお、外部に搬出されたテーブルからガラス基板w3とw4は取除かれるが、テーブル上には溶融半田M1が付着していないので、テーブルから半田を除去する作業は必要ない。 When the supply of the molten solder M1 on one side of the outer peripheral gap k is completed as described above, the casing 38e fitted with the supply cylinder 38 turns 90 degrees horizontally, and then the glass substrates w3 and w4 are on the other side orthogonal to the one side. Move horizontally along In the other side, the molten metal M1 is supplied to the outer peripheral gap k in the same manner as the one side. This operation is sequentially performed on each side, and the molten solder M1 is supplied to all the outer peripheral gaps k of the glass substrates w3 and w4. When the supply operation to the glass substrates w3 and w4 is completed, the table on which the glass substrates w3 and w4 are placed is transferred to the outside. Although the glass substrates w3 and w4 are removed from the table carried out to the outside, the operation of removing the solder from the table is not necessary because the molten solder M1 is not attached on the table.
 引き続いて、別のガラス基板w3とw4を載置して加熱準備していた別のテーブルが新たに載せられ、新たなガラス基板w3とw4の外周間隙kへ上記した供給動作と同様にして溶融半田M1の供給作業が行われる。ここで、新たなガラス基板w3とw4は、ガラス基板w4の厚さ精度の違いやガラス基板w3とw4のテーブルへの取付状態の違いにより上下方向における外周間隙kの位置が相異している可能性がある。この場合でも、本例の供給装置によれば、供給筒38は上下方向にフローティング機構で支持されており、また接触部39bには面取りcが施されているので、上下方向においてコテ部39dを外周間隙kの中心位置に挿入でき、間隙GuとGdの寸法を維持した状態で溶融半田M1を充填できる。 Subsequently, another table on which the other glass substrates w3 and w4 are placed and prepared for heating is newly placed and melted in the same manner as the above-described supply operation to the outer peripheral gap k between the new glass substrates w3 and w4. Supply work of the solder M1 is performed. Here, the position of the outer peripheral gap k in the vertical direction is different between the new glass substrates w3 and w4 due to the difference in thickness accuracy of the glass substrate w4 and the mounting state of the glass substrates w3 and w4 on the table. there is a possibility. Even in this case, according to the supply device of this example, the supply cylinder 38 is supported by the floating mechanism in the vertical direction, and the chamfering c is applied to the contact portion 39b. It can be inserted at the center position of the outer circumferential gap k, and the molten solder M1 can be filled while maintaining the dimensions of the gaps Gu and Gd.
 なお、案内部39が外周間隙kに沿って移動する時、接触部39bとガラス基板w3及びw4の主面との間には毛細管現象で溶融半田M1が浸透する。この浸透した溶融半田M1に引かれ、接触部39bが接触しつつ通過したあとの接触領域には溶融半田M1がコテ部39dから回り込んで供給される。しかしながら、接触部39bの長さが長い場合には、接触領域すべての部分には溶融半田M1が供給されないおそれがあるため、接触部39bの長さは短い方が好ましく、接合部nの幅の10~20%程度とするのが好適である。なお、接触部39bの上下面は、図45に示すような平坦な平面に限らず溝の形成された平面であってもよく、また曲面であってもよい。 In addition, when the guide part 39 moves along the outer periphery gap k, the molten solder M1 permeates between the contact part 39b and the main surfaces of the glass substrates w3 and w4 by a capillary phenomenon. The molten solder M1 is drawn from the iron part 39d and supplied to the contact area after the contact part 39b passes through while being in contact with the molten solder M1. However, when the length of the contact portion 39b is long, the molten solder M1 may not be supplied to all portions of the contact region. Therefore, it is preferable that the length of the contact portion 39b is short and the width of the joint portion n is small. It is preferably about 10 to 20%. Note that the upper and lower surfaces of the contact portion 39b are not limited to a flat plane as shown in FIG. 45, and may be a plane in which a groove is formed, or may be a curved surface.
 以上、第5例の供給装置は、コテ部39dとガラス基板w3及びw4との間隙GuとGdを一定に維持するため案内部39に接触部39bを構成する突起体39aを設け、突起体39aを供給筒38の中に挿入した例の供給装置であった。しかしながら、図49(a)に示す供給筒45のように供給筒45に突起体39aを挿入させず、供給筒45の端面から出て直ぐの部分だけに突起体39aを形成し接触部39bとすることができる。また、図49(b)の供給筒46に示すように、板状体39cの先端部に突起体39aを形成して接触部39bとすることもできる。また、図49(c)に示す供給筒47のように、突起体を有しない厚さが同一な板状体47aのみを用いることもできる。これは、例えば一辺が数~十数cm程度の小サイズのガラス基板に対するように、ガラス基板の厚さバラツキやガラス基板の移動機構の案内振れなどが極めて小さく、間隙が無視できるほどしか変動しない場合などに適用するとよい。この場合には、供給装置としては必ずしもフローティング機構で供給筒を支持しなくてもよい。 As described above, the supply device of the fifth example is provided with the protrusion 39a constituting the contact portion 39b in the guide portion 39 in order to keep the gaps Gu and Gd between the iron portion 39d and the glass substrates w3 and w4 constant, and the protrusion 39a. In the supply cylinder 38. However, unlike the supply cylinder 45 shown in FIG. 49 (a), the protrusion 39a is not inserted into the supply cylinder 45, and the protrusion 39a is formed only on the part immediately coming out from the end surface of the supply cylinder 45, and the contact part 39b. can do. Further, as shown in the supply cylinder 46 of FIG. 49B, a protrusion 39a can be formed at the tip of the plate-like body 39c to form the contact portion 39b. Further, only a plate-like body 47a having the same thickness and having no protrusions can be used as in the supply cylinder 47 shown in FIG. 49 (c). This is because the variation in the thickness of the glass substrate and the guide deflection of the moving mechanism of the glass substrate are extremely small, such as for a small size glass substrate with a side of several to several tens of centimeters, and the gap fluctuates only to be negligible. It is good to apply to cases. In this case, the supply device may not necessarily support the supply cylinder with the floating mechanism.
 また、案内部39は排出口38hを横切って供給筒に取り付けられていればよく、上下方向のほぼ中心部に取り付けられるものに限定されず、上方向或いは下方向に適宜ずらした位置に取り付けられてもよい。例えば、下方向にずらすと、供給筒の排出面とガラス基板との隙間からの重力方向に流れる溶融半田の漏れ量を少なくすることができ、排出口からの溶融半田が案内部の下側からは漏れないような位置に取り付けるようすることもできる。この場合、案内部には上面側から下面側へと溶融半田が流れるように適宜な貫通穴や貫通溝を設けるとよい。 Moreover, the guide part 39 should just be attached to the supply pipe | tube across the discharge port 38h, and is not limited to what is attached to the substantially central part of an up-down direction, It is attached in the position shifted | deviated to the upper direction or the downward direction suitably. May be. For example, if it is shifted downward, the amount of molten solder flowing in the direction of gravity from the gap between the discharge surface of the supply tube and the glass substrate can be reduced, and the molten solder from the discharge port can be reduced from the lower side of the guide portion. It can also be installed in a position that does not leak. In this case, the guide portion may be provided with appropriate through holes and through grooves so that the molten solder flows from the upper surface side to the lower surface side.
2、8、11:溶融半田供給装置
2a、11d:糸半田供給手段
3、9:加熱溶融手段
3a、9a、10、14、17、24、23、26a、26c、26e、27、32、32b、33、34、35、38:供給筒
4、4a、4d、4f、10i:酸化物除去部 
2e、8a:移動手段
8d:保持手段
11a:載置手段
12:溶融半田供給手段
13,22:溶融半田供給部
15:支持部
16、18、19、20、21、22a、22e、22h、22j、25、28、39:案内部
M1,n1,n2:溶融半田
W:ガラスパネル
w1、w2、w3、w4:ガラス基板
S、S1、S2:ガラス基板の主面
k:外周間隙k
n,m:接合部
2, 8, 11: Molten solder supply device 2a, 11d: Yarn solder supply means 3, 9: Heat melting means 3a, 9a, 10, 14, 17, 24, 23, 26a, 26c, 26e, 27, 32, 32b 33, 34, 35, 38: Supply cylinders 4, 4a, 4d, 4f, 10i: Oxide removal section
2e, 8a: Moving means 8d: Holding means 11a: Mounting means 12: Molten solder supply means 13, 22: Molten solder supply part 15: Support parts 16, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22a, 22e, 22h, 22j 25, 28, 39: Guide portions M1, n1, n2: Molten solder W: Glass panels w1, w2, w3, w4: Glass substrate S, S1, S2: Main surface k of glass substrate k: Peripheral gap k
n, m: junction

Claims (55)

  1.  固相の低融点金属素材を溶融して供給する溶融金属の供給筒であって、前記低融点金属素材が直接的または間接的に当接して溶融金属を生成する溶融部と、前記溶融部に形成された第1開口を一端に及び第2開口を他端に有するとともに前記溶融部で生成された溶融金属が流通する略管状の流通通路とを有し、前記低融点金属素材が溶融する時以前に酸化物除去部で表層の酸化物が除去された当該低融点金属素材を前記溶融部で溶融することを特徴とする溶融金属の供給筒。 A molten metal supply tube that melts and supplies a low-melting-point metal material in a solid phase, the molten-metal portion in which the low-melting-point metal material directly or indirectly abuts to generate a molten metal; and The first opening formed at one end and the second opening at the other end, and a substantially tubular flow passage through which the molten metal generated in the melting portion flows, and when the low melting point metal material is melted A molten metal supply tube, wherein the low melting point metal material from which the surface oxide has been previously removed in the oxide removing section is melted in the melting section.
  2.  前記酸化物除去部は前記溶融部と一体的に設けられており、前記低融点金属素材が溶融する時に前記低融点金属素材の表層の酸化物を除去するよう構成されている請求項1に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The said oxide removal part is provided integrally with the said fusion | melting part, and when the said low melting metal material fuse | melts, it is comprised so that the oxide of the surface layer of the said low melting metal material may be removed. Molten metal supply cylinder.
  3.  前記第1開口は前記酸化物除去部に開口し、当該第1開口の面積は前記低融点金属素材が前記溶融部に当接する面積未満である請求項2に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 3. The molten metal supply tube according to claim 2, wherein the first opening is opened to the oxide removing portion, and an area of the first opening is less than an area where the low melting point metal material contacts the melting portion.
  4.  前記第1開口の周囲には酸化物捕捉部が設けられている請求項2又は3のいずれかに記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 4. The molten metal supply cylinder according to claim 2, wherein an oxide trap is provided around the first opening.
  5.  前記第1開口の周囲から酸化物を排出する酸化物排出部を有する請求項2又は3のいずれかに記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The molten metal supply cylinder according to claim 2 or 3, further comprising an oxide discharge portion for discharging oxide from the periphery of the first opening.
  6.  前記酸化物除去部は別体として設けられており、低融点金属素材の溶融前において前記低融点金属素材の表層の酸化物を除去するよう構成されている請求項1に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 2. The molten metal supply according to claim 1, wherein the oxide removing unit is provided as a separate body and configured to remove oxide on a surface layer of the low melting point metal material before melting the low melting point metal material. Tube.
  7.  前記酸化物除去部は前記低融点金属素材の表層を除去する刃部を含む請求項6に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The molten metal supply tube according to claim 6, wherein the oxide removing portion includes a blade portion for removing a surface layer of the low melting point metal material.
  8.  前記酸化物除去部はプラズマ照射手段を含む請求項6に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The molten metal supply tube according to claim 6, wherein the oxide removing unit includes a plasma irradiation means.
  9.  前記酸化物除去部はショットブラスト手段を含む請求項6に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The molten metal supply tube according to claim 6, wherein the oxide removing unit includes shot blasting means.
  10.  前記流通通路の表面には溶融金属との濡れ性を高める処理がなされている請求項1に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The molten metal supply tube according to claim 1, wherein the surface of the flow passage is subjected to a treatment for improving wettability with the molten metal.
  11.  前記流通通路の表面には溶融金属に対する溶食防止処理がなされている請求項1に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The molten metal supply tube according to claim 1, wherein the surface of the flow passage is subjected to an anti-corrosion treatment for the molten metal.
  12.  前記溶融部で生成され前記第2開口から排出される溶融金属を案内する案内部を有する請求項1に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The molten metal supply tube according to claim 1, further comprising a guide portion that guides the molten metal generated in the melting portion and discharged from the second opening.
  13.  前記案内部が略平板状である請求項12に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The molten metal supply tube according to claim 12, wherein the guide portion has a substantially flat plate shape.
  14.  前記案内部が略柱状又は略筒状である請求項12に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The molten metal supply tube according to claim 12, wherein the guide portion has a substantially columnar shape or a substantially cylindrical shape.
  15.  前記案内部は先細り形状をなしている請求項12乃至14のいずれかに記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The molten metal supply tube according to any one of claims 12 to 14, wherein the guide portion has a tapered shape.
  16.  前記案内部には溶融金属の案内溝が形成されている請求項12乃至14のいずれかに記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The molten metal supply tube according to any one of claims 12 to 14, wherein a guide groove for molten metal is formed in the guide portion.
  17.  前記案内部には溶融金属が供給される被供給面に当接する当接面が形成されている請求項12乃至14のいずれかに記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The molten metal supply tube according to any one of claims 12 to 14, wherein the guide portion is formed with an abutting surface that abuts on a surface to be supplied with molten metal.
  18.  互いの主面が間隙を介し配置された一対の板状体の外周間隙に溶融金属を供給する請求項12に記載の溶融金属の供給筒であって、前記案内部は、一方の板状体の主面と第1の間隙を介し対向する第1の平面と他方の板状体の主面と第2の間隙を介し対向する第2の平面とを有するとともに前記一対の板状体の外周間隙に挿入可能に構成されたコテ部と、前記コテ部の第1の平面から突起し一方の板状体の主面に接触可能な第1の接触部及び/又は前記コテ部の第2の平面から突起し他方の板状体の主面に接触可能な第2の接触部とを有する溶融金属の供給筒。 13. The molten metal supply cylinder according to claim 12, wherein the molten metal is supplied to an outer peripheral gap between a pair of plate-like bodies whose main surfaces are arranged with a gap therebetween, wherein the guide portion is one plate-like body. And a second plane opposing the main surface of the other plate-like body via a second gap and an outer periphery of the pair of plate-like bodies. A iron part configured to be insertable into the gap, a first contact part that protrudes from a first flat surface of the iron part and can contact a main surface of one plate-like body and / or a second part of the iron part A molten metal supply cylinder having a second contact portion that protrudes from a flat surface and can contact the main surface of the other plate-like body.
  19.  前記外周間隙に前記案内部を挿入したとき、前記第1の接触部は一方の板状体の主面に接触し、かつ前記第2の接触部は他方の板状体の主面に接触するよう構成されている請求項18に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 When the guide portion is inserted into the outer circumferential gap, the first contact portion contacts the main surface of one plate-like body, and the second contact portion contacts the main surface of the other plate-like body. The molten metal supply cylinder according to claim 18 configured as described above.
  20.  前記接触部の前記板状体の主面との接触面には当該板状体との摺動性を高める処理がなされている請求項18に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 19. The molten metal supply cylinder according to claim 18, wherein the contact surface of the contact portion with the main surface of the plate-like body is subjected to a treatment for improving slidability with the plate-like body.
  21.  前記接触部には、前記案内部の外周間隙への挿入方向に沿い凹部が形成されている請求項18に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 19. The molten metal supply cylinder according to claim 18, wherein a concave portion is formed in the contact portion along an insertion direction into an outer peripheral gap of the guide portion.
  22.  前記接触部は、前記案内部の外周間隙への挿入方向において後端側に配置されている請求項18に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 19. The molten metal supply cylinder according to claim 18, wherein the contact portion is disposed on a rear end side in an insertion direction of the guide portion into an outer peripheral gap.
  23.  前記接触部は、前記案内部の外周間隙への挿入方向において先端側に配置されている請求項18に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 19. The molten metal supply tube according to claim 18, wherein the contact portion is disposed on a distal end side in an insertion direction of the guide portion into an outer circumferential gap.
  24.  前記接触部は、前記外周間隙の厚み方向に撓むことができる弾性を有する請求項18に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 19. The molten metal supply cylinder according to claim 18, wherein the contact portion has elasticity capable of bending in a thickness direction of the outer peripheral gap.
  25.  互いの主面が間隙を介し配置された一対の板状体の外周間隙に溶融金属を供給する請求項12に記載の溶融金属の供給筒であって、前記案内部は前記第2開口を横切るように取り付けられており、当該案内部で上側排出口と下側排出口とに分けられた前記第2開口において、下側排出口から排出される溶融金属の量が上側排出口から排出される溶融金属の量よりも少ないことを特徴とする溶融金属の供給筒。 13. The molten metal supply tube according to claim 12, wherein the molten metal is supplied to an outer peripheral gap between a pair of plate-like bodies whose main surfaces are arranged with a gap therebetween, and the guide portion crosses the second opening. The amount of molten metal discharged from the lower discharge port is discharged from the upper discharge port in the second opening divided into the upper discharge port and the lower discharge port by the guide portion. A molten metal supply tube characterized by being less than the amount of molten metal.
  26.  前記下側排出口の面積の方が前記上側排出口の面積よりも小さい請求項25に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The molten metal supply cylinder according to claim 25, wherein an area of the lower discharge port is smaller than an area of the upper discharge port.
  27.  前記案内部は第2開口から所定深さ流路内に挿入され、当該案内部で上側流路と下側流路に分けられた流路において、下側流路の容積の方が上側流路の容積よりも小さい請求項25に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The guide portion is inserted into the flow channel at a predetermined depth from the second opening, and in the flow channel divided into the upper flow channel and the lower flow channel by the guide portion, the volume of the lower flow channel is the upper flow channel. The molten metal supply cylinder according to claim 25, which is smaller than the volume of the molten metal.
  28.  前記案内部は前記第2開口の中心より下方にオフセットされた状態で前記流通通路に挿入されている請求項25に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 26. The molten metal supply tube according to claim 25, wherein the guide portion is inserted into the flow passage while being offset downward from the center of the second opening.
  29.  前記案内部は前記第2開口の中心付近を横切って前記流通通路に挿入されており、前記流通通路の前記案内部より下側の排出口形成面に、下側排出口の面積を上側排出口の面積より小さくするような堰板が装着されている請求項25に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The guide portion is inserted into the flow passage across the vicinity of the center of the second opening, and the area of the lower discharge port is set to the upper discharge port on the discharge port forming surface below the guide portion of the flow passage. 26. The molten metal supply tube according to claim 25, wherein a dam plate is provided so as to be smaller than the area of the molten metal.
  30.  前記案内部は前記第2開口の中心付近を横切って前記流通通路に挿入されており、下側流路の容積を上側流路の容積より小さくするような堰部材が、前記流通通路の下側流路内に形成されている請求項25に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The guide portion is inserted into the flow passage across the vicinity of the center of the second opening, and a weir member that makes the volume of the lower flow path smaller than the volume of the upper flow path is provided below the flow passage. The molten metal supply tube according to claim 25, wherein the molten metal supply tube is formed in the flow path.
  31.  互いの主面が間隙を介し配置された一対の板状体の外周間隙に溶融金属を供給する請求項12に記載の溶融金属の供給筒であって、前記案内部は前記第2開口の下部或いは前記第2開口より下に取り付けられ、当該第2開口から排出された溶融金属が前記案内部の上面から流出することを特徴とする溶融金属の供給筒。 13. The molten metal supply tube according to claim 12, wherein the molten metal is supplied to an outer peripheral gap of a pair of plate-like bodies whose main surfaces are arranged via a gap, wherein the guide portion is a lower part of the second opening. Alternatively, the molten metal supply tube is attached below the second opening, and the molten metal discharged from the second opening flows out from the upper surface of the guide portion.
  32.  前記案内部の先端部には、溶融金属を上面から下面側に導く貫通部が形成されている請求項31に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 32. The molten metal supply tube according to claim 31, wherein a penetrating portion for guiding the molten metal from the upper surface to the lower surface side is formed at a tip portion of the guide portion.
  33.  前記案内部は先端部に連なる傾斜部を有し、先端部と傾斜部とは鈍角又は直角をなした屈曲形状である請求項31に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 32. The molten metal supply tube according to claim 31, wherein the guide portion has an inclined portion that is continuous with the distal end portion, and the distal end portion and the inclined portion are bent at an obtuse angle or a right angle.
  34.  前記案内部は先端部に連なる傾斜部と傾斜部に連なる基端部を有し、先端部と基端部とは平行又は鈍角をなしており、2箇所が屈曲した段差形状である請求項31に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 32. The guide portion has an inclined portion connected to the distal end portion and a proximal end portion connected to the inclined portion, and the distal end portion and the proximal end portion have a parallel or obtuse angle, and have a stepped shape in which two portions are bent. A molten metal supply cylinder as described in 1.
  35.  前記流通通路を含む下部を前記第2開口の側から所定長さ軸方向に切り欠かれた切り欠き面を有し、前記案内部は上面を前記切り欠き面に当接して取り付けられ、切り欠かれた前記流通通路が前記案内部の下面側に露出する場合は、隙間を封止する部材が取り付けられる請求項31に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The lower portion including the flow passage has a notch surface that is notched in the axial direction by a predetermined length from the second opening side, and the guide portion is attached with the upper surface in contact with the notch surface. 32. The molten metal supply tube according to claim 31, wherein a member for sealing the gap is attached when the flow passage is exposed on the lower surface side of the guide portion.
  36.  前記第2開口の側から軸方向において所定長さの範囲の下部に前記流通通路が露出しない平面部を有し、前記案内部は上面を前記平面部に当接して取り付けられている請求項31に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 32. A flat surface portion where the flow passage is not exposed in a lower portion within a predetermined length in the axial direction from the second opening side, and the guide portion is attached with an upper surface in contact with the flat surface portion. A molten metal supply cylinder as described in 1.
  37.  前記一対の板状体は、下側の板状材の端縁が上状側の板材の端縁を越えて突出して上下に配置されている請求項31に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 32. The molten metal supply tube according to claim 31, wherein the pair of plate-like bodies are arranged up and down such that an edge of a lower plate member protrudes beyond an edge of an upper plate member.
  38.  互いの主面が間隙を介し配置された一対の板状体の外周間隙に溶融金属を供給する請求項12に記載の溶融金属の供給筒であって、前記案内部には、当該案内部の移動方向に向いた側部の先端部には切欠き部が形成されていることを特徴とする溶融金属の供給筒。 13. The molten metal supply cylinder according to claim 12, wherein the molten metal is supplied to an outer peripheral gap of a pair of plate-like bodies whose main surfaces are arranged with a gap therebetween, wherein the guide portion includes the guide portion. A molten metal supply tube, wherein a cutout portion is formed at a distal end portion of a side portion facing the moving direction.
  39.  前記切欠き部は、前記案内部の移動方向に対して後方に向いた傾斜面を有している請求項38に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 39. The molten metal supply tube according to claim 38, wherein the notch has an inclined surface directed rearward with respect to the moving direction of the guide.
  40.  前記切欠き部は、前記案内部の移動方向に対して後方に向いた傾斜面と、該傾斜面と滑らかに連結された前記案内部の移動方向に略平行な面とを有している請求項38に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The notch has an inclined surface facing backward with respect to the moving direction of the guide portion, and a surface substantially parallel to the moving direction of the guide portion smoothly connected to the inclined surface. Item 39. A molten metal supply tube according to Item 38.
  41.  前記切欠き部は、前記案内部の移動方向に対して後方に向いた傾斜面と、該傾斜面と滑らかに連結された前記案内部の移動方向に略直交する面とを有している請求項38に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The notch has an inclined surface facing rearward with respect to the moving direction of the guide portion, and a surface substantially orthogonal to the moving direction of the guide portion smoothly connected to the inclined surface. Item 39. A molten metal supply tube according to Item 38.
  42.  前記切欠き部は、直線若しくは曲線又はこれらの組み合わせで形成されている請求項38に記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The molten metal supply cylinder according to claim 38, wherein the notch is formed by a straight line, a curved line, or a combination thereof.
  43.  前記案内部の溶融金属との接触面には溶融金属との濡れ性を高める処理がなされている請求項12乃至42のいずれかに記載の溶融金属の供給筒。 The molten metal supply tube according to any one of claims 12 to 42, wherein a surface of the guide portion in contact with the molten metal is subjected to a treatment for increasing wettability with the molten metal.
  44.  請求項1乃至43のいずれかに記載の溶融金属の供給筒を有する溶融金属の供給装置。 A molten metal supply apparatus comprising the molten metal supply tube according to any one of claims 1 to 43.
  45.  前記供給筒は、フローティング機構により間接的または直接的に支持されている請求項44に記載の溶融金属の供給装置。 45. The molten metal supply apparatus according to claim 44, wherein the supply cylinder is supported indirectly or directly by a floating mechanism.
  46.  請求項1乃至11のいずれかに記載の溶融金属の供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置であって、所定の間隙が形成される状態に一対の板状体を配置する板状体配置手段と、前記第2開口が前記間隙とほぼ連接する状態に供給筒を位置決めする供給筒位置決め手段とを有することを特徴とする溶融金属の供給装置。 A molten metal supply apparatus in which the molten metal supply cylinder according to any one of claims 1 to 11 is incorporated, wherein a pair of plate-like bodies are arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed. And a supply cylinder positioning means for positioning the supply cylinder in a state where the second opening is substantially connected to the gap.
  47.  請求項12乃至43のいずれかに記載の溶融金属の供給筒が組み込まれた溶融金属の供給装置であって、所定の間隙が形成される状態に一対の板状体を配置する板状体配置手段と、前記案内部を前記一対の板状体間に形成された間隙に挿入する供給筒位置決め手段とを有することを特徴とする溶融金属の供給装置。 44. A molten metal supply apparatus in which the molten metal supply cylinder according to any one of claims 12 to 43 is incorporated, wherein a pair of plate-like bodies are arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed. And a supply cylinder positioning means for inserting the guide portion into a gap formed between the pair of plate-like bodies.
  48.  前記第2開口は、前記外周間隙の厚みを越える口径を有する請求項46又は47のいずれかに記載の溶融金属の供給装置。 48. The molten metal supply device according to claim 46, wherein the second opening has a diameter exceeding a thickness of the outer peripheral gap.
  49.  前記第2開口は、前記外周間隙の厚み以下の口径を有する請求項46又は47のいずれかに記載の溶融金属の供給装置。 48. The molten metal supply apparatus according to claim 46, wherein the second opening has a diameter equal to or less than a thickness of the outer peripheral gap.
  50.  前記案内部は、フローティング機構により間接的または直接的に支持されている請求項46又は47のいずれかに記載の溶融金属の供給装置。 48. The molten metal supply apparatus according to claim 46, wherein the guide portion is indirectly or directly supported by a floating mechanism.
  51.  前記フローティング機構は、前記一対の板状体で形成された間隙と平行な面内における前記案内部の移動を拘束する請求項50に記載の溶融金属の供給装置。 51. The molten metal supply device according to claim 50, wherein the floating mechanism restrains the movement of the guide portion in a plane parallel to the gap formed by the pair of plate-like bodies.
  52.  前記溶融金属と前記板状体との界面に超音波を印加する超音波印加手段を有する請求項46又は47のいずれかに記載の溶融金属の供給装置。 48. The molten metal supply device according to claim 46, further comprising an ultrasonic wave application unit that applies ultrasonic waves to an interface between the molten metal and the plate-like body.
  53.  請求項1乃至11のいずれかに記載の溶融金属の供給筒により溶融金属を供給する方法であって、所定の間隙が形成される状態に一対の板状体を配置する板状体配置工程と、前記第2開口が間隙とほぼ連接する状態に供給筒を位置決めする供給筒位置決め工程と、前記第2開口を通じて間隙に溶融金属を供給する溶融金属供給工程とを含むことを特徴とする溶融金属の供給方法。 A method for supplying molten metal by a molten metal supply cylinder according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein a pair of plate-like bodies are arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed, And a molten metal supply step of positioning the supply tube in a state in which the second opening is substantially connected to the gap, and a molten metal supply step of supplying molten metal to the gap through the second opening. Supply method.
  54.  請求項12乃至43のいずれかに記載の溶融金属の供給筒により溶融金属を供給する方法であって、所定の間隙が形成される状態に一対の板状体を配置する板状体配置工程と、前記案内部を前記一対の板状体間に形成された間隙に挿入する供給筒位置決め工程と、前記第2開口を通じて間隙に溶融金属を供給する溶融金属供給工程とを含むことを特徴とする溶融金属の供給方法。 A method for supplying molten metal by a molten metal supply cylinder according to any one of claims 12 to 43, wherein a pair of plate-like bodies are arranged in a state in which a predetermined gap is formed; And a supply cylinder positioning step for inserting the guide portion into a gap formed between the pair of plate-like bodies, and a molten metal supply step for supplying molten metal to the gap through the second opening. Method for supplying molten metal.
  55.  前記溶融金属供給工程において、溶融金属と板状体の界面に超音波を印加する請求項53又は54のいずれかに記載の溶融金属の供給方法。 55. The molten metal supply method according to claim 53 or 54, wherein in the molten metal supply step, an ultrasonic wave is applied to an interface between the molten metal and the plate-like body.
PCT/JP2009/003797 2008-08-14 2009-08-07 Molten metal supply pipe, molten metal supply apparatus in which the supply pipe is incorporated, and molten metal supply method WO2010018674A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US12/737,727 US8622261B2 (en) 2008-08-14 2009-08-07 Molten metal supply cylinder, molten metal supply apparatus incorporating such a supply cylinder and molten metal supply method
CN2009801314709A CN102123811A (en) 2008-08-14 2009-08-07 Molten metal supply pipe, molten metal supply apparatus in which the supply pipe is incorporated, and molten metal supply method

Applications Claiming Priority (12)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2008-208912 2008-08-14
JP2008208912 2008-08-14
JP2009-009414 2009-01-20
JP2009009415A JP5376299B2 (en) 2009-01-20 2009-01-20 Molten metal filling tool and molten metal filling apparatus provided with the same
JP2009009414A JP5376298B2 (en) 2009-01-20 2009-01-20 Molten metal filler and glass substrate bonding apparatus provided with the same
JP2009-009415 2009-01-20
JP2009-044076 2009-02-26
JP2009044076A JP5327607B2 (en) 2009-02-26 2009-02-26 Molten metal filler and joining apparatus provided therewith
JP2009-086725 2009-03-31
JP2009086725A JP5376303B2 (en) 2008-08-14 2009-03-31 Molten metal supply member, molten metal coating apparatus using the same, joining apparatus for joining materials, and joining method for joining materials
JP2009-100446 2009-04-17
JP2009100446A JP5477688B2 (en) 2009-04-17 2009-04-17 Molten metal filler and joining apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2010018674A1 true WO2010018674A1 (en) 2010-02-18

Family

ID=41668822

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2009/003797 WO2010018674A1 (en) 2008-08-14 2009-08-07 Molten metal supply pipe, molten metal supply apparatus in which the supply pipe is incorporated, and molten metal supply method

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2010018674A1 (en)

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2010168223A (en) * 2009-01-20 2010-08-05 Hitachi Metals Ltd Molten metal filling tool and molten metal filling apparatus provided therewith
JP2010168222A (en) * 2009-01-20 2010-08-05 Hitachi Metals Ltd Molten metal filling tool and joining apparatus for glass substrate provided therewith
CN104762585A (en) * 2015-03-25 2015-07-08 西安交通大学 Forming device and method for guiding molten metal coating by using metal wire
WO2019093324A1 (en) * 2017-11-10 2019-05-16 日本板硝子株式会社 Method for manufacturing glass panel, and glass panel
TWI750304B (en) * 2017-01-26 2021-12-21 以色列商維綏以色列有限公司 Electronic component with flexible terminal
CN115922081A (en) * 2023-02-16 2023-04-07 成都金典牙科技术开发有限公司 Welding device with ring

Citations (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5944670U (en) * 1982-09-10 1984-03-24 千住金属工業株式会社 soldering equipment
JPS63185230U (en) * 1987-05-19 1988-11-29
JPH11170038A (en) * 1997-12-12 1999-06-29 Sony Corp Metallic wire cleaning device
JP2001001136A (en) * 1999-06-17 2001-01-09 Furukawa Electric Co Ltd:The Aluminum alloy brazing filler metal with flux applied thereto, and its manufacture
JP2002167244A (en) * 2000-11-30 2002-06-11 Nippon Sheet Glass Co Ltd Method of fabricating glass panel
JP2002167243A (en) * 2000-11-30 2002-06-11 Nippon Sheet Glass Co Ltd Method of fabricating glass panel
JP2002167246A (en) * 2000-11-30 2002-06-11 Nippon Sheet Glass Co Ltd Method of fabricating glass panel
JP2004111607A (en) * 2002-09-18 2004-04-08 Toyota Motor Corp Method of manufacturing electronic component and soldering apparatus used for the same method
JP2004322109A (en) * 2003-04-22 2004-11-18 Canon Inc Brazing filler metal coating method
JP2006136946A (en) * 2004-09-21 2006-06-01 Mitsuo Ebisawa Soldering apparatus, manufacturing method thereof and soldering method using the apparatus
JP2006305622A (en) * 2005-04-27 2006-11-09 Hiroatsu Kondo Soldering iron with dispensing function of cream solder
JP2008098364A (en) * 2006-10-11 2008-04-24 Canon Machinery Inc Solder oxide removal device

Patent Citations (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5944670U (en) * 1982-09-10 1984-03-24 千住金属工業株式会社 soldering equipment
JPS63185230U (en) * 1987-05-19 1988-11-29
JPH11170038A (en) * 1997-12-12 1999-06-29 Sony Corp Metallic wire cleaning device
JP2001001136A (en) * 1999-06-17 2001-01-09 Furukawa Electric Co Ltd:The Aluminum alloy brazing filler metal with flux applied thereto, and its manufacture
JP2002167244A (en) * 2000-11-30 2002-06-11 Nippon Sheet Glass Co Ltd Method of fabricating glass panel
JP2002167243A (en) * 2000-11-30 2002-06-11 Nippon Sheet Glass Co Ltd Method of fabricating glass panel
JP2002167246A (en) * 2000-11-30 2002-06-11 Nippon Sheet Glass Co Ltd Method of fabricating glass panel
JP2004111607A (en) * 2002-09-18 2004-04-08 Toyota Motor Corp Method of manufacturing electronic component and soldering apparatus used for the same method
JP2004322109A (en) * 2003-04-22 2004-11-18 Canon Inc Brazing filler metal coating method
JP2006136946A (en) * 2004-09-21 2006-06-01 Mitsuo Ebisawa Soldering apparatus, manufacturing method thereof and soldering method using the apparatus
JP2006305622A (en) * 2005-04-27 2006-11-09 Hiroatsu Kondo Soldering iron with dispensing function of cream solder
JP2008098364A (en) * 2006-10-11 2008-04-24 Canon Machinery Inc Solder oxide removal device

Cited By (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2010168223A (en) * 2009-01-20 2010-08-05 Hitachi Metals Ltd Molten metal filling tool and molten metal filling apparatus provided therewith
JP2010168222A (en) * 2009-01-20 2010-08-05 Hitachi Metals Ltd Molten metal filling tool and joining apparatus for glass substrate provided therewith
CN104762585A (en) * 2015-03-25 2015-07-08 西安交通大学 Forming device and method for guiding molten metal coating by using metal wire
TWI750304B (en) * 2017-01-26 2021-12-21 以色列商維綏以色列有限公司 Electronic component with flexible terminal
US11297721B2 (en) 2017-01-26 2022-04-05 Vishay Israel Ltd. Electronic component with flexible terminal
WO2019093324A1 (en) * 2017-11-10 2019-05-16 日本板硝子株式会社 Method for manufacturing glass panel, and glass panel
JPWO2019093324A1 (en) * 2017-11-10 2020-12-17 日本板硝子株式会社 Glass panel manufacturing method and glass panel
JP7075413B2 (en) 2017-11-10 2022-05-25 日本板硝子株式会社 Glass panel manufacturing method
CN115922081A (en) * 2023-02-16 2023-04-07 成都金典牙科技术开发有限公司 Welding device with ring

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2010018674A1 (en) Molten metal supply pipe, molten metal supply apparatus in which the supply pipe is incorporated, and molten metal supply method
US8622261B2 (en) Molten metal supply cylinder, molten metal supply apparatus incorporating such a supply cylinder and molten metal supply method
KR100682561B1 (en) Glass panel and production method therefor
JP4700633B2 (en) Wire cleaning guide
CN1406156A (en) Mouthpiece and device and method for applying coating fluid
JP5257749B2 (en) Low melting point metal supply equipment
JP5376298B2 (en) Molten metal filler and glass substrate bonding apparatus provided with the same
JP5376299B2 (en) Molten metal filling tool and molten metal filling apparatus provided with the same
JP2011068532A (en) Device for filling molten metal
JP6150205B2 (en) Method and apparatus for supplying flux-free solder to a substrate
US9889516B2 (en) Device for dispensing and distributing flux-free solder on a substrate
JP2009136920A (en) Soldering iron tip member of heating iron, and heating iron using the same
JP5376303B2 (en) Molten metal supply member, molten metal coating apparatus using the same, joining apparatus for joining materials, and joining method for joining materials
JP5327607B2 (en) Molten metal filler and joining apparatus provided therewith
JP5477688B2 (en) Molten metal filler and joining apparatus
JP2013207246A (en) Die bonder and die bonding method
JP2004351480A (en) Method and apparatus for brazing
JP2009090332A (en) Apparatus and method for manufacturing joined body
JP5329063B2 (en) Flux film forming apparatus and flux transfer apparatus
JP7075413B2 (en) Glass panel manufacturing method
KR20130060925A (en) Applying apparatus
JP3108224B2 (en) Solder coating equipment
JP4549177B2 (en) Thin plate manufacturing apparatus and thin plate manufacturing method
JP2005319382A (en) Viscous fluid coating device
JP2008280232A (en) Joining part forming device of article to be joined and device for joining glass substrate using the same, and joining part forming method of article to be joined and method for joining glass substrate using the same

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200980131470.9

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 09806570

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20117003207

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 12737727

Country of ref document: US

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 09806570

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1